Home

Fujitsu C122-E177-01EN User's Manual

Contents

1. 00486 Select a file W_00258 Unable to restore the BIOS configuration because a BIOS configuration information file is being restored by another user in the same partition now W_00485 Home SB not defined E 00024 Installing failed E_00027 Installing failed Size of uploaded file is zero E 00039 Uploading failed E 00057 Specified file can not restore E 00058 File format error E 00065 Failed to restore the BIOS Configuration E 00067 Can t restore the BIOS Configuration Please power off the partition s For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Backup Restore BIOS Configuration window for PRIMEQUEST 2800B This window is displayed only in PRIMEQUEST 2800B You can back up and restore the BIOS configuration information from the Backup Restore BIOS Configuration window FIGURE 1 95 Backup Restore BIOS Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FU ITSU Serial Number Status Normal System User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Backup Restore Configuration gt Backup Restore BIOS Configuration Backup BIOS Configuration Oem id tore BIOS Conti To backup the BIOS Configuration click Backup button Restore BIOS Configuration To restore the BIOS Configuration select a file and click Restore button ES lt gt 1 Menu Operation Mainte
2. 2 2 8 2 2 9 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations sadump Specify sadump to specified partition When the partition which is specified by the parameter is not configured the partition is ignored When the specified partition is not in Power On state any kind of processing for such partition is not done Partition Operator can operate only the partition to be managed When the parameter which contains the partitions other than those to be managed is specified an error message is displayed and the specified partition cannot be operated Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only the partition to be managed 1 Input format sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet 2 Option partition This option specifies a sadump of the partition identified by the specified partition number This partition can be omitted partition Partition number Even if the partition parameter is omitted processing assumes that the partition parameter is specified Therefore a partition number must be specified Partition is number specified as follows Partition numbers are separated by comma Specifies with the range of partition number quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example Example When sadump is specified to Partition 1 by Administrator Authority Administrator gt sadump partition 1 Are you
3. Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks System System Status RO Displays the overall system status System Event RO Displays system event Log logs Operation Log RO Displays the operations on the Web UI and CLI Partition Event RO Displays the REMCS Log notification messages of a PRIMEQUEST partition System RO Displays system Information information such as the system name or product name Firmware RO Displays firmware Information version information System Setup RO Sets the system configuration System Power RO Controls the power Control LEDs RW Displays the LED status Power Supply RO Displays the power supply status Fans RO Displays the fan status Temperature RO Displays the temperatures detected by the temperature sensors of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system SB SB 0 RO Displays the SB status SB 1 RO The menu is not SB 2 RO displayed for an SB 3 RO unmounted SB IOU IOU 0 RO Displays the IOU status IOU 1 RO The menu is not IOU 2 RO displayed for an IOU 3 RO unmounted IOU DU DU 0 RO Displays the DU status DU 1 RO The menu is not displayed for an unmounted DU PCI_Box If no PCI_Box is MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation ba
4. 1 1 12 Web Ul menus in maintenance mode maintenance personnel This section outlines the Web UI menus that are available to maintenance personnel Administrator or CE privileges in maintenance mode The maintenance mode column has the following items For details on the maintenance mode see 1 1 6 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Hot System Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Warm System Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Cold System Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker on and Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker off The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information in the window RO The account user can only refer to information in the window N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenu 1 The account user can operate partitions not in maintenance mode in this window 2 The account user can operate only partitions in maintenance mode in this window 3 The SB is neither a Home SB nor Reserved SB Alternatively the SB is the Home SB in the Power Off status in a partition in the Standby status 4 The partition is in the Standby status MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 13 Web UI menus in maintenance mode maint
5. Message Number Message 100013 Setting completed E 00100 Failed to set the System Setup W_00426 Invalid values specified For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Power Control Window Power Control window displays the power control of the system Remarks When the operating system supports ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface the power can be turned Off after the operating system is Shutdown by Power Off operation If ACPI is not supported power can be Off without the Shutdown of the operating system Moreover even if the operating system supports ACPI and applications running on the operating system are not supported sometimes power Off is not possible Since these depend on the specifications of the operating system and applications for details refer to the operating system and application specifications FIGURE 1 103 Power Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number RAS Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Power Control Power Control Refresh Help Select a Power Control option then click the Apply button to take effect Force Power Off Delay Soe ooo Be ooo sie eee eae ofele os siege i AS 1 Select the process executed for the system from Pull down menu of
6. UEFI Menu Operations CHAPTER 3 UEFI Menu Operations This chapter describes about the UEFI menu operations The UEFI has a menu that offers operations including selective booting of the operating system starting the UEFI shell and changing the settings of boot options To execute each function move to the relevant menu from the front page of Boot Manager For details on sadump Configuration see Chapter 6 Setting up the sadump Environment 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager The Front page of Boot Manager is the top page of UEFI In this window you can move to Boot processing or can move to Boot Manager Device Manager and Boot Maintenance Manager by using a relevant menu FIGURE 3 1 Display Example of Front page of Boot Manager 3 1 1 Window area The Front page of Boot Manager is divided into 4 parts as shown in FIGURE 3 2 Window area of Boot Manager Front Page UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 2 Window area of Boot Manager Front Page 1 System Information display Nothing is displayed 2 Menu selection Displays selection menu shown in TABLE 3 1 Display item of menu selection TABLE 3 1 Display item of menu selection Item Explanation Continue If you select Continue boot is executed in the sequence that has presently been set Boot Manager Displays 3 3 Boot Manager Menu Device Manager Displays 3 4 Device Manager Menu Boot Maintenance Ma
7. Buttons Description Auto When you Click Auto button IP address and prefix length is automatically displayed Apply When you click the Apply button video direction of the specified partition virtual media setting is applied Cancel When you click the Cancel button virtual media setting video redirection is not applied and it returns to the original state 1 Menu Operation Partition Console Redirection Setup IPv6 Console Redirection Setup 2 Window Operations 1 Input the IP address prefix length and sets whether video redirection and virtual media should be used 2 Click the Apply button Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00432 Invalid IP Address specified W_00433 The duplicate IP address was found _00539 The settings for the Console Redirection IP are changed All existing network connections about this settings will be lost You will need to login again If you want to continue please click OK button If not click Cancel button Are you sure Partition Configuration Menu The SB and IOU which configure the partition can be set on Partition Configuration window In case of PRIMEQUEST 2400E model only 0 and 1 are displayed for partition MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 46 Partition Configuration Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MDMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXX
8. Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager Boot Options menu Addition or removal of boot option and changes in the boot priority level can be carried out in the Boot Options menu Each menu can be displayed by placing the cursor on the menus for operation and by pressing the Enter key Following window is the window at the time of activation of the Boot Options menu FIGURE 3 33 Boot options menu ee mp mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mr mm mm mm mm mm mm mr mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm rm em Dag Fi i w mmmn na n mm m m m m m m me w CC 1 Display of Page information Boot Options are displayed 2 Menu Selection Menu shown in TABLE 3 49 Display contents of Menu selection is displayed UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 49 Display contents of Menu selection Item Description Go Back To Main Page 3 5 Boot maintenance Manager Menu is displayed Add Boot Option M Add Boot Option Menu is displayed Delete Boot Option Delete Boot Option Menu is displayed Change Boot Order Change Boot Order Menu is displayed Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order Wier Legacy Floppy Drive Order Menu is displayed Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order Wei Legacy HardDisk Drive Order Menu is displayed Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order l Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Menu is displayed
9. REMCS 1 1 5 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks REMCS N A Detailed Setup N A Web UI menus CE This section lists the Web UI menus that are available with the CE privileges The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information and control operation from the menu RO The account user can only refer to information from the menu N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenus TABLE 1 6 Web UI menus CE Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks System System Status RO Displays the overall system status System Event RO Displays system event Log logs Operation Log RO Displays the operations on the Web UI and CLI Partition Event RO Displays the REMCS Log notification messages of a PRIMEQUEST partition System RO Displays system Information information such as the system name or product name Firmware RO Displays firmware Information version information System Setup RW Sets the system configuration System Power RO Controls the power Control LEDs RW Displays the LED status Power Supply RW Displays the power supply status Fans RW Displays the fan status Temperature RO Displays the temperatures detected b
10. sesesesseseceseceseeseeesesesseseeceecssseseeeeesseseseeeesensseseeeecessseseeeeseneseseeeeeenesesnesseeneneseeteses 48 1 1 7 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Administrator EEN 48 1 1 8 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Operator EEN 50 1 1 9 Web UI menus in maintenance Mode Partition Operator EEN 52 1 1 10 Web UI menus in maintenance mode User 1 1 11 Web UI menus in maintenance mode CEA 1 1 12 Web UI menus in maintenance mode maintenance Gersonpelh EEN 57 1 1 13 Web UI menus PRIMEQUEST 2800B model een 60 1 2 System Menu for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E NENNEN 63 1 2 1 ISYSIGM Status e EE 63 1 2 2 System Event e a RU ee EE 64 1 2 3 Operation bog WiNdOW EE 1 2 4 Parttion Event Log Windows EE 1 2 5 System Information Window 1 2 6 Firmware Information Ven AAA anii i E ERTER TEE EREE 77 1 2 7 System Setup VIDE geet 79 1 2 8 System Power Control Winow ssccsscsssessssessssesssnesssnesseeaseneassneaseneaseneeseneaseneaseneaseneaceneesenecceneeceneeceaeeceeeteaeeteaeeteaeeteaees 82 1 2 9 LEDS Nee EE 1 2 10 Power Supply window 1 2 11 Fans WINDOW ee EE ee 1 2 12 ME we EIER e e 1 2 13 SB Merits caste hie eS ee EA aN 91 1 2 14 Uer HI EE 1 2 15 RUE Rn EE 1 2 16 PCL EE UE 1 2 17 le SEA ie 1 2 18 INKMBLMEDUS eegen EE 1 2 19 Disk Enclosure Menu 1 3 Partition Menu for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E ENEE 123 1 3 1 Power Contro AW lndOw siceraria nina nner VE EEEE Stere EVEEN EEE Ean 123 1 3 2 Schedule
11. 5 Process MMB checks whether the firmware update of online is executable When it is not possible to execute it the error message is output and the update processing is interrupted The condition that firmware update of online becomes improper MMB is an unredundant configuration There is no combination in the interchangeability table between the farm version numbers that can be updated firmware online Without the force option specified The general firmware version to be applied is compared with that in use If the version to be applied is the same or older than that in use the command does not update the firmware Also the versions of the individual firmware instances are checked If the version to be applied is the same as that of a firmware instance the command does not update the firmware instance In other words the command updates the firmware instance only if the versions are different With the force option specified The general firmware version to be applied is not compared with that in use The command forcibly updates the current firmware with the applicable firmware version The online firmware update cannot specify force for an option show update_status The show update_status command displays the version of the firmware being batch updated as well as the update progress The possible status is as follows completed Normal end failed Abnormal end updating Firmware update in progress percentag
12. Command Administrator Outline Power control power off Permitted Turns the power off power on Permitted Turns the power on Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show partition configuration Displays the partition configuration set reserved_sb Sets the Reserved SB show reserved_sb Displays the Reserved SB set partition home Sets the Home SB show partition home Displays the Home SB set partition dynamic_partitioning Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Displays DR state of partition set memory_operation_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation mode show memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set pci_address_mode Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show pci_address_mode Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set lan_device_mode Permitted Sets LAN device mode show lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode set pci_express_mode Sets PCl express mode show pci_express_mode Displays PCl express mode set partition name gt Sets the partition name show partition name gt Displays the partition name hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove Partition control sadump s
13. Save stand by time Continue Continues operation for the system under operation Power Off Power Off is done for the system under operation Force Power Off Force Power Off is done for the system under operation Displays a valid item when Power Save Control of system is Enable and displays gray color in case of Disable Default is Power Off TABLE 1 154 Power Management Setup Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply The setting of the Power Management Setup is changed Cancel Returns to the original state without changing the setting of the Power Management Setup 1 Menu Operation System Power Management Setup 2 Window Operations 1 Set the items for changing the settings of the Power Management Setup and click the Apply button Set the connection 1 7 11 ASR Control Window The conditions for executing automatic restart of the system on the ASR Automatic Server Restart Control can be set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 110 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUSITSU Serial Number Tees Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt ASR Control CJ m ASR Automatic Server Restart Control C H Click the Apply Button to apply all changes a L ASR a ie S Stop rebooting and Power Off e 5 Ip LI o A Boot Watch
14. Step None None None Step Slew In case of IPv4 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 In case of IPv6 O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF In case of IPv4 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 In case of IPv6 O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF In case of IPv4 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 In case of IPv6 O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF It can be set only when NTP is Enabled It can be set only when NTP is Enabled It can be set only when NTP is Enabled A 1 18 Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Items of IPv4 Interface Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of IPv4 Interface Window TABLE A 18 Setting Items of IPv4 Interface Window Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Virtual IP Hostname PRIMEQUEST Sets hostname in FQDN The first character should Address Product Serial format be alphabetic character Number a z A Z 0 9 Hyphen Dot Hyphen Dot cannot be used as the first character and the last character IP Address None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet mask None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Gateway None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 address 255 MMB 0 IP Interface Disable Enable Address Disable Hostname None S
15. show user let Displays Users TABLE 2 11 MMB CLI commands User Command Power control Administrator Outline power off Turns the power off power on Turns the power on Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show partition configuration set reserved_sb Displays the partition configuration Sets the Reserved SB show reserved_sb Displays the Reserved SB set partition home Sets the Home SB show partition home Displays the Home SB set partition dynamic_partitioning Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Displays DR state of partition set memory_operation_mode Sets Memory operation mode show memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set memory_mirror_ras_mode Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set pci_address_mode Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show pci_address_mode Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set lan_device_mode Sets LAN device mode show lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode set pci_express_mode Sets PCl express mode show pci_express_mode Displays PCl express mode set partition name Sets the partition name show partition name Dis
16. set mmbcontrol reset Specify the MMB reset This command execution is controlled at the time of the maintenance mode Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set mmbcontrol reset quiet 2 Option quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example set mmbcontrol reset 4 Message MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command under maintenance 2 6 13 add user The user account is newly registered Privilege Administrator 1 Input format add user lt user name gt lt password gt lt confirm password gt admin operator user ce quiet 2 Option user name Sets the user name You can enter a total of 8 to 32 characters You can enter the following characters in a user name 0 9 a z A Z hyphen _ underscore However the first character of the user name must be a letter from a to z or A to Z password Sets the password You can enter a total of 8 to 32 characters You can specify the following characters in a password 0 9 a z A Z and special characters 8 amp lt gt _ confirm password Used to reenter a password
17. 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting Memory Operation Mode of the system to performance set memory_operation_mode performance The setting will become effective the next time the system power off on is performed 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The setting will become effective the next time the system power off on is performed The specified parameter is invalid Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because the CPU mismatch between SBs Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because the DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because the unsupported CPU configuration Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal CPU composition Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal DIMM composition Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal SB composition Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal VRM composition Failed to execute s command Failed to execute set memory_operation_mode command Unable to change the mode while the system is running Please try to change the mode after the system is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you
18. MMB 0 IP Address Sets the physical IP address assigned to the MMB O interface This item is available only if the system has MMB 0 You cannot access the Web UI from this interface Unless MMB 0 is mounted the window does not display the MMB 0 IP Address table Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the MMB 1 physical IP address The default is Disable Hostname optional Sets the host name in FQDN format Automatic Acquisition Automatically acquires data with a click of the Auto button The global address prefix length and gateway IP address are automatically acquired to overwrite existing data IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address MMB 1 IP Address Sets the physical IP address assigned to the MMB 1 interface This item is available only if the system has MMB 1 You cannot access the Web UI from this interface Unless MMB 0 is mounted the window does not display the MMB 1 IP Address table Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the MMB 1 physical IP address The default is Disable Hostname optional Sets the host name in FQDN format Automatic Acquisition Automatically acquires data with a click of the Auto button The global address prefix length and gateway IP address are automatically acquired to overwrite MMB Web UI Web User Interface Op
19. UEFI Menu Operations MBR Abbreviation of Master Boot Record Signature consists of the meaning of Partition Type as shown below GPT Shows GUID MBR Numeric value Start shows the starting position of partition It shows with numeric of 64 bit Size shows the Partition Size It shows with numeric of 64 bit CDROM Entry Start CD DVD Media Size Entry shows the boot entry number Can be omitted It is usually shown with 0 Start shows the starting sector of boot entry It shows with numeric of 64 bit Size shows Partition Size It shows with numbers of 64 bit USB Port Interface USB Port shows the port number of USB 0 255 is shown with hexadecimal Interface shows interface number 0 255 is shown with hexadecimal Ctrl Controller Controller Controller consists of the integers 3 6 2 Identification of Device Path Description regarding the identification method of SAS disk built in SB SAS disk built in DU disk from Fibre card and device path of GigaLAN is shown below SAS Disk built in SB Specific method of SAS disk built in SB is described as an example Relation of connection from CPU to SAS disk built in SB is shown in FIGURE 3 74 Specification of SAS disk built in SB shows the device Node FIGURE 3 74 Specification of SAS disk built in SB SES controller TWN HD SAS Disc OPT 904 FER 4550 274 REAM SP O00 IK Od DR Peicroat mj Ox
20. t i13 lt gt _ ts A 2 10 Setting Items on Memory Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Memory Configuration window TABLE A 41 Setting Items of Memory Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks DIMM Speed Normal Mode e Performance Mode e Normal Mode Patrol scrub Disabled Disabled e Enabled Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Refresh Rate Auto e Auto e 1x A 2 11 Setting Items on USB Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on USB Configuration window TABLE A 42 Setting Items of USB Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting value Remarks Legacy USB Enabled Disabled Support Enabled Auto Mass Storage Auto Auto Devices Floppy e Forced FDD Hard Disk CD ROM USB Port disable Enabled Enable Disable A 2 12 Setting Items on Security Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Security Configuration window TABLE A 43 Setting Items of Security Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks TPM Support Disabled
21. 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified port number is invalid The specified port number is duplicated Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set https Sets enable disable the HTTP server Default value set is disable http disabled Privilege Administrator 1 Input format Set https enable disable 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI 2 2 21 2 2 22 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set https_port Sets a port accepting HTTPS messages 432 is the default 432 1024 65535 are specifiable port numbers by lt port gt 443 is the standard port Privilege Administrator 1 Input format Set https_port lt port gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified port number is invalid The specified port number is duplicat
22. Legacy PXE or Legacy iSCSI is selected are deleted 1 Settings which Enable PXE iSCSI boot of UEFI Aware Operating System 2 Settings which Enable PXE boot of Legacy Operating System 3 Settings which Enable iSCSI boot of Legacy Operating System Following is the display of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 10 Display of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu wech EN U U U U 1 U U U U I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U I U U i 1 U U U U U U U U U 1 U U U U U U U U U nem em mme em N PEE EE rk 3 1 Display of page information LAN Remote Boot Configuration is displayed 2 Menu Selection Items shown in TABLE 3 17 Display contents of Menu Selection are displayed in Menu TABLE 3 17 Display contents of Menu Selection Item Display contents Network Port Information Each network port information in the following system and PXE iSCSI boot setting information is displayed Network port information is displayed in MAC address format Commit Changes and Exit After saving the contents the setting of which are changed exit from this menu Discard Changes and Exit After cancelling the contents the setting of which are changed exit from this menu 3 Display of Operation help Description of operation key shown in TABLE 3 18 Display contents of Disp
23. a Set Legacy Hard Disk Order Menu Set Legacy Hard Disk Order menu sets the HDD to be activated in the legacy operating system The window at the time of activation of Set Legacy Hard Disk Order menu is as shown below HDD information is displayed in this window The HardDisk Drive is activated from 00 Moreover when Disable is displayed in N of the HardDisk Drive the boot function of HardDisk Drive N is shown to be Disabled UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 53 Display Example of Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order Menu 1 Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order Pi xo ee 3 1 Page Information Display Displays as Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 2 Menu Selection Displays the items shown in the TABLE 3 60 Display Contents of Menu Selection TABLE 3 60 Display Contents of Menu Selection Item Explanation HardDisk Drive N Following is displayed N 0 1 HDD information confirmed at the time of initialization after the power on Disable Displayed when Disable is selected Device for which the configuration is changed after initialization is not displayed Hence the system should be reset after the device configuration changes Further the configuration change of the device indicates the case where the following operations are executed Swapping of USB devices Activation of configuration display and update menu of Fibre channel and SAS RAID The change method is explained n
24. amp character T 5 42 lt gt _ Half width space cannot be used as the last character Community Community None 0 9 a z A Z cannot be used as the User Special characters first character amp J lt gt _ IP Address Ma None In case of IPv4 sk 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 In case of IPv6 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF SNMP Version 1 WW 2 We Access Read Only Read Only Read Write Auth None noauth auth priv Setting Items of SNMP Trap Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of SNMP Trap Window TABLE A 24 Setting Items of SNMP Trap Window Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Community User None In case of SNMP v1 v2 sets the SNMP Community string In case of SNMPv3 specifies the user name IP Address None In case of IPv4 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 In case of IPv6 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF SNMP Version W 2 3 Auth None noauth auth priv Auth Type None MD5 gt SHA Auth passphrase None 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp OQ T
25. lt partition gt set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt disable enable quiet MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet set partition pci_express_mode lt partition gt flexible fixed set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet show active_mmb date timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb exit_code show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt nmi partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet reset partition lt partition gt lt partit
26. 3 Usage example show telnet Telnet disabled 4 Message None 2 3 27 show telnet_port Displays the port to which the Telnet session is currently connected Privilege All 1 Input format show telnet_port 2 Option None 3 Usage example show telnet_port Telnet Port Number 23 4 Message None MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 3 28 show network Displays the network configuration configured in management LAN interface Also displays IPv6 information when IPv6 is configured Displays the following information Hostname IP Address Netmask Gateway Address IPv6 IP Address Prefix length IPv6 Gateway Address MAC Address HTTP status HTTP Port Number HTTPS status HTTPS Port Number Telnet status Telnet Port Number SSH status SSH Port Number Privilege All 1 Input format show telnet_port 2 Option None 3 Usage example show network Hostname hogehoge fujitsu com IP Address 10 1 2 124 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 10 1 2 1 IPv6 IP Address Prefix 2000 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 64 IPv6 Gateway Address fe80 1234 f3ff fe03 5555 MAC Address 00 AA 00 12 34 55 HTTP disabled HTTP Port Number 8081 HTTPS disabled HTTPS Port Number 432 Telnet disabled Telnet Port Number 23 SSH enabled SSH Port Number 22 4 Message None 2 3 29 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations show ntpq Displays
27. 5 1 2 1 Synopsis opt FJSVdp util sbin dp help lt add rm gt Device 5 1 2 2 Description This is the subcommand for hot add hot remove IOU or PCI Express card 5 1 2 3 Options Arguments Meaning Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation Device Target device e g IOUx PClex x represents the slot number Only one target can be specified at a time help Print the synopsis of add rm subcommand 5 1 2 4 Example e g when you hot add OU opt FUSVdp util sbin dp add IOU3 5 1 3 Show slot status slot subcommand 5 1 3 1 Synopsis opt FJSVdp util sbin dp stat DeviceType 5 1 3 2 Description This is the subcommand for displaying hot plug slot status of IOU or PCI Express card The number displayed after the output device represents the slot number The meaning of the state of IOU type is as follows empty IOU is not assigned to the partition OS offline IOU is assigned to the partition but the slot power is OFF IOU is disabled online IOU is assigned to the partition and the slot power is ON IOU is enabled The meaning of the state of pcie type is as follows empty There s no PCI Express card on the slot offline PCI Express card is on the slot but the slot power is OFF PCle is disabled online PCI Express card is on the slot and the slot power is ON PCle is enabled 5 1 3 3 Options Arguments Meaning Device Type Target device type e g IOU pcie Only one target can be speci
28. BMC MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations BMC Displays the status of the BMC S OK KR Warning S Failed FBU FBU Displays the status of the FBU Flash Backup Unit j OK 7 Failed Clock Clock Displays the status of the System Clock OK KR Failed Voltage MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type P5VL P1 4VL P1 8VL P1 5VL P1 0VL P1 8V_CPU VDDQ_DIMM 1A P1 0V_JC 0A P1 5V_PCH P1 1V PO 9V_PCIEX 0 P1 8V_PCIEX 0 PO 9V_PCIEX 1 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 P12V 0 P5V P3 3V P1 35V_CPU 0 P1 35V_CPU 1 VCC_CPU 0 VSA_CPU 0 VTT_CPU 0 VDDQ_DIMM 0A VDDQ_DIMM 0B P1 0V_JC 0B P1 5V_JC 0AB P1 35V_JC 0AB VCC_CPU 1 VSA_CPU 1 VTT_CPU 1 VDDQ_DIMM 1B P1 0V_JC IA P1 0V_JC 1B P1 5V_JC 1AB P1 35V_JC 1AB VDDQ_DIMM 0C VDDQ_DIMM 0D P1 0V_JC 0C P1 0V_JC 0D P1 5V_JC 0CD P1 35V_JC 0CD VDDQ_DIMM 1C VDDQ_DIMM 1D P1 0V_JC 1C P1 0V_JC 1D P1 5V_JC 1CD P1 35V_JC 1CD Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Low High Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Low High Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places TABLE 1 160 SB x Window Button Buttons Description Sta
29. Disabled Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 1 of PCIl_Box 2 By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 2 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 100 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 3 of PCl_Box 2 Slot 101 OPROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 4 of PCIl_Box 2 Slot 102 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 5 of PCl_Box 2 Slot 103 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 6 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 104 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 7 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 105 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 8 of PCl_Box 2 Slot 106 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card whic
30. Items Description 1 Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving the setting changes of this menu 3 5 UEFI Menu Operations Boot maintenance Manager Menu Setting of boot mode addition or removal of boot option changes in the boot priority level and changes in the driver option are carried out in the Boot maintenance manager menu Each menu can be displayed by placing the cursor on the menus for operation and by pressing the Enter key Following window is the window immediately after the activation of Boot maintenance Manager menu FIGURE 3 31 Boot Maintenance manager Menu ay b i EE 3 mm pm mm mm mm 1 Page Information Display Displays as Boot maintenance Manager 2 Menu selection Displays the menu as shown in TABLE 3 45 Display Contents of Menu Selection TABLE 3 45 Display Contents of Menu Selection Items Description Boot Mode Displays 3 5 1 Boot Mode Menu Boot Options Displays 3 5 2 Boot Options menu Boot From File Displays 3 5 3 Boot From File Menu Set Boot Delay Time Displays 3 5 4 Set Time out Value Menu Reset System Resets the setting 3 Operation Help Display The help for the operations mentioned on this page is shown in TABLE 3 46 Display Contents of Operation Help Display UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 46
31. Items Display contents I O Device information Slot Displays OnBoard in case of ob board device Displays PCI Slot number Hexadecimal number in case of Slot Device Displays a type of device Status Displays information about current I O space assignment Assigned UO space is assigned N a I O space is not assigned Setting Displays the setting value Following are the setting items Force I O space is assigned I O space is assigned to the device for which Force is set in preference to the device for which Auto is set However an error message is displayed if no of slots which can be assigned exceeds and is set to Force Auto I O space is assigned to the extent that there is no shortage of I O space Disabled I O space is not assigned Default setting is Auto UEFI Menu Operations Commit Changes and Exit After saving the contents the setting of which are changed exit from this menu Discard Changes and Exit After cancelling the contents the setting of which are changed exit from this menu 3 Display of Operation help Description of operation key shown in TABLE 3 15 Display contents of Display of Operation help is displayed TABLE 3 15 Display contents of Display of Operation help Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving th
32. MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 102 System Setup Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number auee Status Normal System Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes 200V Single Dual Always ON chassis always powers up after AC is restored Always OFF chassis remains powered off after AC is restored Power Feed Mode Power Restoration Policy Restore power is retumed to the state that was in effect before AC was removed or lost Schedule Sync Synchronize with the schedule Restore x System Power on Delay o Leer Altitude Altitude lt 1000m x PSU Redundant Mode Redundant O Non Redundant System Power Save Control O Enable Disable System Power Saving Thr W 3200W 8640W TABLE 1 139 Display Items and Setting Items in System Setup Window Items Description Input Voltage Displays input voltage 7 100V e 200V When information cannot be acquired it is displayed as 200V Power Feed Mode Whether power supply of PRIMEQUEST 2000 system is configured in primary power feed mode or dual power feed mode is set Single primary power feed mode Dual dual power feed mode Default setting is Single Power Restoration Sets the display of the restoration action after power failure Policy Always off Maintains the power off status after the power restoration A
33. QEror 2014 01 1 086F0602 Configuration error in excess unit Detai 11 34 53 26113 E531 V32 2014 01 17 Syst PSU Redundancy Orno F C ESE Redmda 090B0SFF Non redundant Insufficient Resource Detai 2014 01 17 Syst PSU Redundancy EE Eror eae 1 e 090B05FF Non redundant Insufficient Resource Detai 2014 01 17 Sy PSU Redundancy OEror Ge es SE 090B05FF Non redundant Insufficient Resource Detai 11 33 36 2014 01 17 PSU 5 OEror BS O86F0601 Configuration error Detai 2014 01 17 PSU 2 PSU 2 zen 014 01 1 O86F0601 Configuration error Detai 2014 01 17 System PSU Redundancy 090B03FF Non redundant Sufficient Resource Detai 11 29 41 a v Clear All Events Download Filter 2 Info lt gt In the System Event Log Window only the contents and not the title in the table can be scrolled When there are no events to be displayed a message showing There is no Event Logs is displayed instead of the table TABLE 1 132 Items displayed in System Event Log Window Items Description Severity Displays the severity of the event and error Error Severe errors like hardware error Warning Not a severe error but an error is likely in future Info_ Shows the information like Partition power ON Date Time Displays the local time when an event or error occurred F
34. Sets whether to automatically refresh the Web UI windows that display dynamic content With Enable specified you can set the time interval of the automatic refresh in units of seconds The specifiable time interval for Refresh Rate is in a range of 5 to 999 seconds The default is Disable for automatic refresh TABLE 1 101 Buttons in the Refresh Rate window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information on refresh Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified refresh information 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Refresh Rate 2 Window Operations 1 Specify Enable or Disable in Refresh Rate If you select Enable enter the time interval 2 Click the Apply button This sets the information for automatic refresh Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number _ 00013 Message Setting completed W_00441 Range over error For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration window The SNMP Configuration menu has the following windows SNMP Community window SNMP Trap window SNMP v3 Configuration window O SNMP Community window You can configure SNMP in the SNMP Community window You can specify up to 16 items for Community User from the MMB
35. Setting for PCI Express slot 0 of IOU 1 Slot 19 Op ROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 1 of IOU 1 Slot 20 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 2 of IOU 1 Slot 21 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 3 of IOU 1 Slot 33 OpROM DU Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for DU 1 Slot 0 Slot 34 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 0 of IOU 2 Slot 35 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 1 of IOU 2 Slot 36 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 2 of IOU 2 Slot 37 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Setting for PCI Express slot 3 of IOU 2 UEFI Menu Oper
36. TABLE 1 55 Display and Setting items of Disk Enclosure x Window Items Description Disk Enclosure Information Status Displays the status of the Disk Enclosure OK Warning Failed Location Displays the location where Disk Enclosure is connected Location LED Displays the status of the Location LED Following are the various display status TT On Lighting TT Off Light out On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking the On Off buttons Status Displays the status of each temperature sensor OK Not present Warning S Critical Temperature Displays the temperature of each temperature sensor Threshold Displays the threshold which maintained the by each temperature sensor Warning Low High S Critical Low High RAID Card BBU Status The state of RAID BBU is displayed Online MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description On Battery y Charging is Discharging Battery Low Relearn Required f Failed Not present Vendor ID Vender ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Device ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Physical Drives count The
37. There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Rank Displays number of DIMM Ranks 1 or 2 or 4 There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Data Rate Displays Data Rate of DIMM a DDR3 1066 1333 1600 There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Part Number Displays the part number of DIMM There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Serial Number Displays the serial number of DIMM There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Mezzanine Mezzanine 0 Status Displays the status of the Mezzanine board Mezzanine 1 e e OK s Not present Failed RAID Slot Power Status Displays the power status of the RAID slot S On E Standb Slot Status Displays the status of the RAID slot RS OK S Warning Not present KR Failed E Disabled Link Width Displays Link Width of the RAID slot format x1 E x2 s x4 gt x8 Seg Bus Dev Displays Segment Bus Device of the RAID device RAID Card BBU Status The state of RAID BBU Battery Backup Unit is displayed Online S On Battery Charging Discharging Battery Low Relearn Required S Failed Not present Physical Drives Count Vendor ID Vendor ID of RAID Card is
38. or to Auto USB Port Disable Sets the usage method of USB port Disabled USB port cannot be used during POST and also by the operating system Enabled Disabled Default setting is Enabled Mass Storage Devices Connection device name n Sets the emulation pattern of device Auto Floppy Forced FDD Hard Disk CD ROM Default setting is Auto Remarks When Auto is selected it is emulated according to the media format of device Optical disk drive is emulated as CD ROM drive without media is emulated according to the drive type Commit Changes and Exit Saves the changed contents and exits from this menu Discard Changes and Exit 3 Operation help display Cancels the changed contents and exits from this menu Describes the operation key shown in TABLE 3 42 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 42 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description Te Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving changes of this menu 3 4 12 UEFI Menu Operations Security Configuration menu In Security Configuration menu settings related to TPM are performed Remarks The TPM chip is not mounted Security Configuration menu is not displayed The following figure shows the
39. 2 Menu Selection Displayed selection menu is shown in TABLE 3 70 Display Content of Menu Selection Help Display TABLE 3 70 Display Content of Menu Selection Help Display Items Description Auto Boot Time out Sets the time out time of Logo Window Unit is seconds e 0 65535 Default time is 10 Seconds Commit Changes and Exit Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration are saved Discard Changes and Exit Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration are cancelled 3 Operation Help Display Describe of operation key is shown in TABLE 3 71 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 71 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description tL Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager 3 6 3 6 1 UEFI Menu Operations The contents displayed when the Pop up Window appears are shown in TABLE 3 72 Content of Operation Helps Display when Pop up Window appears TABLE 3 72 Content of Operation Helps Display when Pop up Window appears Item 0123456789 are valid inputs lt Enter gt Select Entry Description Timeout settings are valid only for numerical keys Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager Device Path Device path shows the physical connection of d
40. 4 1 4 UEFI Command Operations 1 gt gt a Appends the standard output to an ASCII file Remarks You can redirect the standard output or standard error output to the same file Note that the standard output or standard error output cannot be redirected to multiple files at the same time UEFI shell command list TABLE 4 3 UEFI shell commands lists the UEFI shell commands supported by the UEFI of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series TABLE 4 3 UEFI shell commands No Command name Description 1 cd Displays and changes the current directory 2 connect Binds the UEFI driver to a device and starts the driver 3 cp Copies one or more files or directories to another location 4 date Displays and sets the current system date 5 disconnect Disconnects one or more drivers from a device 6 drvcfg Executes the driver configuration protocol 1 T echo Displays messages and enables or disables command echo 8 edit Used to edit an ASCII or Unicode file in full screen mode 9 exit Exits the UEFI shell 10 help Displays the command list or command help 11 Is Displays the files and subdirectories in a directory 12 map Displays and defines a mapping 13 mkdir Creates one or more directories 14 mount Mounts a file system on a block device 15 mv Moves one or more files 16 pci Displays a PCI device or a PCI configuration space 17 reconnect Reconnects one or more drivers 18 reset
41. Confirm Password Used to reenter a password for confirmation Privilege capability of remote access Specifies the privileges of the user account Admin Operator User CE No Access Users for which No Access is selected will no longer have the Status Specifies the current status of the account Enabled Disabled TABLE 1 118 Buttons in the Edit User Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified management information MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as a user name and password 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Remote Server Management Edit button 2 Window Operations 1 Specify the user management information such as a user name and password Then click the Apply button This sets the user management information Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed W_00401 Username is too short W_00402 Password is too short W_00454 aa is duplicated W_00406 Invalid character is included in User Name W_00403 Invalid character is included in Password W_00455 Both passwords are mismatched Please try again For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 5 1
42. Failure by which processing cannot be moved to the following boot option Failure by which processing cannot be moved to the following boot option is a case in which the boot processing fails after transferring the control to operating system For example the case is considered in which operating system program stored in the device which is targeted for booting fails Example of displayed menu of FIGURE 3 6 Example of displayed Boot Manager menu is an example of window immediately after the startup of the Boot Manager menu FIGURE 3 6 Example of displayed Boot Manager menu H H H H H U H H U i U d i H i H 1 Page information display Displayed as Boot Manager 2 Menu selection The boot device list is displayed by the priority of the startup The cursor is set to operating system which is booted with t key or with key or the cursor is set to UEFI Shell and the selection is done If Enter key is pressed the selected UEFI Aware operating system or legacy operating system tries a boot and UEFI shell tries a startup If booting fails returns to the Boot Manager front page 3 Operation help display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 9 Displayed contents of operation help display TABLE 3 9 Displayed contents of operation help display Items Description T lc Move Highlight Moves the cursor to up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry
43. MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode Cold System RO Partition Hot System RO Add is Configuration suppressed since the Free unit may be a replacement unit Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Add SB IOU Same as for to Partition Partition Configuration Remove SB Same as for IOU from Partition Partition Configuration Partition Home Same as for Partition Configuration Reserved SB Hot System RO Configuration Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Console Hot System N A Redirection Hot Partition N A Warm System N A Cold System N A Network Configuration Network IPv4 Interface Hot System RO Interface Hot Partition RO IPv6 Interface Warm System RO Cold System RO Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Hot System N A Firmware Hot Partition N A Update Warm System N A Cold System N A Backup Restore Configuration Backup N A Backup Restore MMB MMB is not Configuration affected by maintenance mode Restore MMB can be operated only by maintenance personnel Maintenance Hot System N A Wizard Hot Partition N A Warm System N A Cold System N A MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 1 11 Web Ul menus in maintenance mode CE This section outlines the Web UI menus that are avail
44. Message Number Message W_00432 Invalid IP Address specified W_00433 The duplicate IP address was found 1 00417 Are you sure O IPv6 Console Redirection Setup window The IP address settings for accessing Console Redirection LAN of IPv6 prefix length settings video redirection and enable disable settings of virtual media can be done in the IPv6 Console Redirection Setup window In case of automatic settings when Auto button is clicked IP address prefix length are automatically acquired MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FUJITSU FIGURE 1 108 IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 Serial Number Rae Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Console Redirection Setup gt IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Si IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes TABLE 1 151 Display Items and Set Items of IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window Items Description IP Address Enters the global address for IPv6 which can be connected In case of automatic acquisition the acquired IP Address is displayed Prefix Length Enters the prefix length for IPv6 In case of automatic acquisition the acquired prefix length is displayed Video Redirection Sets whether video redirection can be used Enable Video redirection can be used
45. PSU FANU Slot Displays the slot location of the PSU or FANU to which the FANM belongs Status Displays the status of each fan S OK Not present gt Failed Part Number Displays the part number of the fan Fan Speed rpm Displays the rotational frequency rom of each fan Threshold rpm Warning Low High Displays the lower limit and upper limit of the warning level rotational frequency of each fan If the rotational frequency is lower or upper than this limit it is considered to be abnormal Critical Low High Displays the lower limit and upper limit of the critical level rotational frequency of each fan If the rotational frequency is lower or upper than this limit it is considered to be abnormal Airflow Volume Displays the airflow TABLE 1 41 Fans Window Button Button Description Status Clear Clears the status of fan 1 Menu Operation System Fans 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Dialog box for confirmation appears 2 Click the OK button to clear the Status of the fan and click the Cancel button when you do not want to clear the fan status Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00029 Status Clear completed E 00123 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Referenc
46. Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Partition Outline Operator Other partition partition Turns the power off Turns the power on sadump instruction Hard Reset instruction NMI interrupt instruction Text Console connection to partition Adds a partition component Removes a partition component Permitted Displays the partition configuration Sets the Home SB Permitted Displays the Home SB Sets Memory operation mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode Sets Memory operation at mirror mod MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Partition Partition Outline Operator Operator Same Other partition partition e show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set partition pci_address_mode Permitted Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show partition pci_address_mode Permitted Permitted Displays PCI bus number allocation m od set partition lan_device_mode Permitted Sets LAN device mode show partition lan_device_mode Permitted Permitted Displays LAN device mode show partition mirror_mode Permitted Permitted Displays the Mirror mode setting set partition name Sets the partition name show partition name
47. Regarding to ACPI name which is used for disk or disk partition refer 5 7 Device Path TABLE 6 18 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tL Move Highlight Move the cursor up or down lt spacebar gt Toggle SE E e checkbox Selected disk is marked with X Operating Space key once more the selection is canceled Note Esc key is displayed on screen but dont operate it Confirmation Menu This is displayed when the Go to create dump device is selected in the Select multiple devices menu Confirm multiple disks selected for dump devices Confirmation Selected devices FIGURE 6 14 Confirmation Menu Setting of sadump environm ent TABLE 6 19 Displayed contents of menu selection area Item Description Create dump device and Saves the dump device configuration and exits this Exit menu Exit Exits this menu without saving any dump device configuration Display area ACPI name of the disks selected in the Select multiple devices menu TABLE 6 20 Displayed contents of the help display area for opera Item Description tl Move Highlight Move the cursor up or down lt Enter gt Select Entry Select an entry and perform the corresponding processing Note Esc key is displayed on screen but don t operate it tion Appendix A List of Setting Items Appendix A List of Setting Items The initial values of setting
48. date timezone gateway gateway ipv6 http http_port https https port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb user _list update_status firmware_version exit_code snmp sys_location snmp sys_contact snmp community snmp trap show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt add user lt user name gt lt password gt lt confirm password gt admin operator user ce partition_operator all lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt console lt partition gt lt timeout gt quiet update ALL lt url gt force quiet nmi partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet reset partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 2 For CE privilege help factory_defa
49. i Confirmation Menu FIGURE 6 2 Structure of menu for sadump configuration 2 Setting of sadump environment From Dump device Manager Setting dump device Menu Select device Menu Select discard dump device Menu FIGURE 6 3 Structure of menu for sadump configuration 3 Setting of sadump environment 6 1 1 Screen areas The sadump configuration screen consists of four screen areas as shown below Menu selection area Help display area for menu selection XXXXXXX YYYYYYY ZZZZZZZ Help display area for operations No Item Description 1 Title Displays title of menu 2 Menu selection area Displays menu to operate They can be operated by Enter key etc Selected item is highlighted 3 Help display area for menu selection Displays the detailed explanation about menu selected in menu selection area 4 Help display area for operations Displays help information to operate screen FIGURE 6 4 Screen areas of sadump configuration 6 2 Main menu In the Device Manager menu select Sadump Configuration and then a main menu is displayed You can set up sadump or dump device in this menu Setting of sadump environment sadump setup tool ver 1 0 FIGURE 6 5 Main menu TABLE 6 1 Displayed contents of the menu selection area Item Description Set up Manager Go to sadump setup menu Dump device Manager Go to dump device maintenan
50. lt gt _ Priv passphrase A 1 25 None 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp Q T lt gt _ Setting Items of SNMP v3 Configuration Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of SNMP v3 Configuration Window TABLE A 25 Setting Items of SNMP v3 Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Engine ID None 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp T s42 lt gt _ 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp 34 2 lt gt _ User Name None Auth type MD5 MD5 SHA Auth None passphrase 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp I 742 lt gt _ Priv passphrase None 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp Tb 5 lt gt _ A 1 26 Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Items of Create CSR Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Create CSR Window TABLE A 26 Setting Items of Create CSR Window Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Key length 1024 1024 2048 Country Name None ISO Country Code 2 Example Japan JP USA alphabetic characters US State or None
51. power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force 2 Option Partition Shutdown the operating system of partition by which partition number is specified and turns off the power of partition This parameter is optional The default parameter is processed as the specified partition parameter Therefore it is necessary to specify the partition Partitions are specified as follows all All defined partitions specified Specifies Partition numbers by delimiting with comma Specifies with the range of partition number force Shows that the power of the partition turns off forcefully without shutting down the operating system of partition 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid The specified partition number is invalid Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to power off the partition d Unable to force power off on the partition d Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to power off the Partition fn because you have not authority to operate this partition Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Unable to power off the partition s because the partition which does not ha
52. quiet 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting Memory Mirror RAS Mode of the Partition3 to Mirror Keep Mode set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode 3 mirror_keep The setting will become effective the next time the partition power off on is performed 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The setting will become effective the next time the partition power off on is performed The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute S command Failed to execute set partition command Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this partition set partition memory_opration_mode It sets the Memory Operation Mode of the specified partition By default normal Mirror Mode invalid is set performance sets the Performance Mode normal sets the Normal Mode partial_mirror sets the Partial Mirror Mode full_mirror sets the Full Mirror Mode spare sets the Spare Mode For the partition which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command fol
53. set timezone Set the Timezone Remarks It is necessary to reset the time by using set date command after the time zone is set Privilege Administrator 1 Input format MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations set timezone lt timezone gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified port number is invalid Time synchronization was requested to Standby MMB Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB 2 2 36 hotadd partition The specified SB or IOU is dynamically added for the specified partition A few minutes are required for the execution of this command The SB parameter specifies physical SB number It is not logical SB number The execution of this command cannot be interrupted When the partition will be started next time the configuration change is reflected even if the command fails In the case of any of the following the error is displayed and processing is interrupted When the DP function of the specified partition is invalid When the specified partition is operated DR When the specified partition is starting When OS of the specified partition is DR off the subject When the specified SB is not a free SB or it is not Reserved SB At the SB specification When the specified IOU is not a
54. 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified port number is invalid The specified port number is duplicated Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set telnet Sets enable disable of Telnet Default setting is disable Telnet Disable Privilege Administrator MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 1 Input format set telnet enable disable 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB 2 2 34 set telnet_port 2 2 35 Sets the port which receives the telnet connection Default setting is 23 Port numbers which can be set are 23 1024 65535 Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set telnet_port lt port gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified port number is invalid The specified port number is duplicated Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB
55. Administrator gt reset 2 6 5 2 6 6 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Are you sure you want to Reset Y N Y Administrator gt 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to Reset to system Y N The specified parameter is invalid Unable to Reset the system Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to Reset the System because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed nmi Specify NMI interruption to the system When the entire system is not in Power On state any kind of processing for such system is not done Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only the partition to be managed 1 Input format nmi quiet 2 Option quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example Example When NMI is directed by the Administrator authority Administrator gt nmi Are you sure you want to NMI Y N Y Administrator gt 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to NMI to System Y N The specifie
56. Every item is set 2 Apply button is clicked Specified information is set Also if the Cancel Boot Watchdog check box is selected as On Boot Watchdog is cancelled 1 7 12 Console Redirection Window If the Console Redirection screen is selected when it enabled the Video Redirection screen on the BMC is displayed in another window If the settings in Console Redirection setup Window are Disabled check box cannot be Checked MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 111 Console Redirection Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number BEUN Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Console Redirection Console Redirection Help Check the operation and click the Apply button Operation Video Redirection TABLE 1 157 Display Items of Console Redirection Window Items Description Video Redirection Displays the Video Redirection on the BMC side On the Console Redirection Setup window selection is possible only when Enabled when Disabled the check box cannot be checked 1 Menu Operation System Console Redirection 2 Window Operations None Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00413 Nothing is selected W_00472 Unable to get the reserved WEB Session information due to WEB Sessi
57. FUJITSU Serial Number Status Normal gt System gt System Information ZE System Information Feb a Click the Apply Button to apply all changes PRIMEQUEST 1541346003 PRIMEQUEST 2800B8 MCF3AC111 TABLE 1 136 Display and Set Items of System Information window Items Description System Name System name of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed User with Administrator privilege can change system name Maximum 64 characters can be entered Remarks Characters which can be entered Alphanumeric characters half width space The following characters can also be entered I amp i5 4 2 lt gt _ However there is a limitation and half width space cannot be used as first character Half width space cannot be used as last character Default is lt PRIMEQUEST Product serial number gt When system Name is blank it becomes system name of default Product Name Product name of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed Part Number Model name of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed Serial Number Serial number of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed Asset Tag Property administration information Asset Tag is displayed User with the administrator privilege can change Asset Tag information Maximum 32 characters can be entered No default value Core Max Core Display the CPU core number and Max Core number included in the system The Max
58. Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00029 Status Clear completed E 00048 The specified unit is not installed E 00123 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN L SB x Status Clear Window When the Status Clear button on the SB x window is clicked whether to clear the error status of the component can be specified The error status of the component in which an abnormality is detected on the SB is canceled the relevant component can be specified so that it can be used again at the time of next reboot If error is detected again at the time of re boot then the error status of that such component is registered again FIGURE 1 24 SB x Status Clear Window Message Display Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt SB gt SB 0 SB 0 Status Clear Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Clear All Status Clear Specified Status Select the appropriate Status Clear box Clear Status of common parts DA Not present W DAT Not present W R WEE Not present W WER Not present W OBO Not present W lt ae SI 1 Menu Operation System SB SB
59. Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute show partition configuration command show partition dynamic_partitioning Displays the status of Dynamic Reconfiguration of the specified partition Privilege All 2 3 7 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 1 Input format show partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When the status of Dynamic Reconfiguration of Partition 3 is displayed show partition dynamic_partitioning 3 current disabled setting enabled 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute show partition dynamic_partitioning command DP can t be enabled because of no DP license show partition home Displays Home SB of the specified partition Privilege All 1 Input format show partition home lt partition gt 2 Option
60. None 3 Usage example When Home SB of partition 3 is displayed show partition home 3 SB 2 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Home SB is not set in Partition x Failed to execute show partition home command Partition x is not defined 2 3 8 2 3 9 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations show partition lan_device_mode Displays the setting enable disable of LAN Device WOL in IOU unit of the specified partition Privilege All 1 Input format show partition lan_devoce_mode lt partition gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When LAN Device Mode of IOU In example it is OU 2 or IOU 3 from Partition 3 is displayed show partition lan_device_mode 3 iou 2 LAN Device enable WOL enable iou 3 LAN Device disable WOL disable 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute show partition
61. Operations FIGURE 1 33 IPC Bol Window 4 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt PCI_Box gt PCI_Box 0 B a PCI_Box 0 CJ DEE a a be a Chipset n Chip Stats J 0 PCIeSW J 1 PCIeSW OK C a Voltage ren eee Sensor Voltage s GE z WamingLowHigh mc High CriticalLow High P3 3V 0 3 30V 3 06 3 54 V 2 14 3 98 V P1 8V_PCIEX 0 1 80 V 1 67 1 93 V 1 16 2 17 V S P0 9V_PCIEX 0 0 90 V 0 83 0 97 V 0 58 1 09 V PO 9VA_PCIEX 0 0 90 V 0 83 0 97 V 0 58 1 09 V P3 3V 1 3 30 V 3 06 3 54 V 2 14 3 98 V P1 8V_PCIEX 1 1 80 V 1 67 1 93 V 1 16 2 17 V P0 9V_PCIEX 1 0 90 V 0 83 0 97 V 0 58 1 09 V P0 9VA_PCIEX 1 0 90 V 0 83 0 97 V 0 58 1 09 V P12V 12 41 V 11 15 12 87 V 7 79 1445 V 3 lt gt TABLE 1 49 Display Items of PCI_Box x Window Items Description PCI Box Information Status Displays the status of the PCI_Box OK Not present Warning Degraded Failed Power Status Displays the power status of the PCl_Box On Standby Power Supply Redundancy Fan Speed Mode IO_PSU Fan Speed Mode Fan Redundancy Displays the redundancy status of the IO_PSU Redundant ___Non redundant Sufficient Resources Displays the rpm status of the fan Low Normal High e Full D
62. Partition Power Control RW Controls the partition power Schedule Schedule RW Sets scheduled Control operations Schedule List RW Sets the power on off schedule Console RO Sets Video Redirection Redirection Setup Remote Storage and Text Console Redirection IPv4 Console RO Setting for IPv4 Console Redirection Redirection Setup IPv6 Console RO Setting for IPv6 Console Redirection Redirection Setup Partition RO Changes the partition Configuration configuration SB RO IOU n RO PCI_Box n RO Reserved SB RO Defines a Reserved SB Configuration Power RO Management Setup Partition 0 If no board belongs to the partition this submenu is not displayed Information RO Displays the partition status and partition related information ASR Control RO Sets the conditions for automatically restarting the partition Console RW Displays the console Redirection output of the partition Mode RW Sets the mode for the partition MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks Partition 1 Same as for Partition 0 Partition 2 Partition 3 User Administration User List N A Lists edits and deletes registered user accounts Change RW Changes the password Password of the user s own account Who RO Displays all users who are logged in to the MMB Networ
63. TABLE 3 19 Display Contents of Menu Selection Items Display Contents Hyper threading Sets the Hyper Threading function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Active Processor Cores Set the core number to be enabled to each CPU socket e All KN e2 e 3 e A 05 ep e 8 e O e 10 e 11 e 12 e 13 e 14 Default setting is All Remarks Maximum number displayed in setting items is a core number 1 for each CPU socket Hardware Prefetcher Sets the Hardware Prefetcher function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Adjacent Cache Line Sets the Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch function to enable or Prefetch disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled DCU Streamer Sets the DCU Streamer Prefetcher function to enable or disable Prefetcher e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled DCU Ip Prefetcher Sets the DCU Ip Prefetcher function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Execute Disable Bit Sets the Execute Disable Bit function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Intel Virtualization Sets the Intel Virtualization Technology function to enable or Technology disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Intel R VT d Sets the Intel R VT d function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Disabled Pow
64. When the partition event log is to be cleared 1 Click the Clear button A dialog box for confirmation appears 2 Click the OK button if the partition log event is to be cleared Else click the Cancel button O Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Window When Filter button on the Partition Event Log is clicked Partition Event Log Condition window for entering the filter condition appears Filtering conditions of events to be displayed on Partition Event Log window can be set on Partition Event Log Filtering Condition window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 8 Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Normal Partition User Admmistration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Partition Event Log Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Select the filtering conditions and click the Apply button to take effect Note The followings are AND conditions 1 Partition All Specified 10 01 O2 03 2 Number of events to display Max 1000 100 1000 GR sl lb si lb Gi sl L TABLE 1 27 Display and Set Items of Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Window Items Description Partition Selects the partition to be displayed Select All or Specified by using radio button All Filtering is not done for Partition Specified Filtering of pa
65. and lt SMTP address gt are set to 0 0 0 0 When settings in this command are invalid lt ip address gt is set to 0 0 0 0 Though the parameters other than lt ip address gt parameters are optional they are recommended to be 0 0 0 0 Privilege Administrator CE 1 Input format set maintenance_ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt lt gateway address gt lt smtp address gt Indicates that there is no new line 2 Option None 3 Usage example Examples Setting the IP address of the Maintenance port by the following contents IP address 192 168 1 10 Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Mail server for REMCS acknowledgement 172 128 1 2 set maintenance_ip 192 168 1 10 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 172 128 1 2 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified IP address is invalid The specified netmask is invalid The specified gateway address is invalid The specified smtp address is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set partition home It sets the Home SB of the specified partition It specifies the number of SB to be set in Home If the specified SB does not exist the process is not executed 2 2 26 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set
66. window Buttons Description Auto A global address and the prefix length etc are automatically acquired Apply Sets the entered information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as the IP address 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Network Interface IPv6 Interface 2 Window Operations 1 Select or enter the IP address or other items of network interface information Then click the Apply button This sets the specified information such as the IP address 1 5 3 Management LAN Port Configuration window You can make the Speed Duplex setting for each port on the MMB in the Management LAN Port Configuration window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 70 Management LAN Port Configuration window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 1 Part Number ioe FUjiTSU Serial Number Status Normal System Partition User Administration Maintenance gt Network Configuration gt Management LAN Port Configuration Management LAN Port Configuration Click the Apply button for all changes to take effect Speed Duplex for MMB 0 FIGURE 1 71 Management LAN Port Configuration window PRIMEQUEST 2800B Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number e Status Normal System User Administration Maintenance gt Network Configuratio
67. 00098 Failed to get the screen information For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Restore BIOS Configuration window for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E This window is displayed only in PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E You can restore BIOS configuration information in the Restore BIOS Configuration window FIGURE 1 93 Restore BIOS Configuration window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2S00 Active MMB 0 Part Number MCNNNXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number SORTS Status Normal Restore BIOS Configuration Help Select a BIOS Configuration file E Upload Cancel MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 94 Restore BIOS Configuration window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCD3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number 1480935001 Status Normal System Partition User Administration Network Configuration Mamtenance gt Backup Restore Configuration gt Restore BIOS Configuration Restore BIOS Configuration Help Select partition s then click the Restore button Configuration File Information Peppeng Partion Name WOS_HS_13 Restore BIOS Saved Done 2009 11 02 BIOS Version 63 C Select Al defined partions PartionName BIOS Vasse oO f WOS HS 138 063 b A A 4 ei 1 WS03_101 064 4 4 gt 4 2 2 RedHat 104 3 ws08_107 Restore Cancel TABLE 1 128 Setting and display items in the Restore BIOS Configu
68. 1 Menu Operation System Schedule Schedule Control 2 Window Operations 1 Specifies whether schedule operation has to be carried out by Radio button for system 2 Click the Apply button O Schedule list Window Up to 1000 instances of system power On Off schedule can be recorded in the Schedule list Window FIGURE 1 105 Schedule List Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Schedule gt Schedule List Schedule List Help Select a schedule then click the Edit Remove button to edit or remove the schedule Click Add button to add a new schedule ed em em On Time Off Time Ada Edit Remove I Cancel lt l gt Schedule will appear in chronological order of the start date of the period If the start date are the same the schedule appears in the sequence in which it is listed Remarks If the Type is Weekly the start date is considered to be Oneday MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 145 Display Items and Set Items of Schedule List Window Items Description Select the schedule to be edited or removed Type Displays the type of schedule set in the system Daily Select when you want to execute every day Weekly Select when you want to execute every week Monthly Select when you want to execute every month Special Se
69. 1 52 Information a Wirth EE FIGURE 1 53 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window FIGURE 1 54 Console Redirection Window ENEE FIGURE 155 EE ee FIGURE 1 56 User List Wiewen AAA eer FIGURE t57 ee Halle FIGURE 1 58 Edit List po iinan a E AAN SEeEe FIGURE 1 59 Change Password Window ENEE FIGURE 1 60 Change Password Window ENEE FIGURE 1 61 Date Time window ic acccecidas sete cienetaieddanceas snnteacencearnnciaieresdancer cana EE EEE EEKE TEAK KEE aia FIGURE 1 62 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 1 FIGURE 1 63 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 1 NENNEN FIGURE 1 64 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B OO ENEE FIGURE 1 65 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B ONE FIGURE 1 66 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E D NENNEN FIGURE 1 67 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 1 NENNEN FIGURE 1 68 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B OO NENNEN FIGURE 1 69 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B 1 ENNEN FIGURE 1 70 Management LAN Port Configuration window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E ue 181 FIGURE 1 71 Management LAN Port Configuration window PRIMEQUEST 2900 ee 181 FIGURE 1 72 Network Protocols window ANEN FIGURE 1 73 Retresh Rate window ege eet eg cs ee et ee FIGURE 1 74 SNMP Community ele EE FIGURE 1 75 SNMP Trap WinGOw isccccereccicccteckecetechiccdarcadecaiageiccdtectaccadecalaeeeectieecarentacuhaecdteccascetechoeet
70. 11 bn oa 7a le Won ons bel ju TABLE 1 64 Display Items and Set Items of IPv4 Console redirection Setup Window Items Description Displays the number for identifying the Partition 0 11 Partitions exist Partition Name Displays name given to the Partition IP Address Enters the IP address of the partition permitted to connect Specify an IP address of the same segment as the virtual IP address used to access the MMB Web UI see 1 5 2 Network Interface Menu Note that this IP address must be different from that virtual IP address Default is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Enters the subnet mask of IP address which is allowed for connection Default is 255 255 255 255 Video Redirection Sets whether video redirection can be used Enable Video redirection can be used Disable Video redirection cannot be used Default is Disable Virtual Media Sets whether virtual media can be used Enable Virtual media can be used Disable Virtual media cannot be used Default is Disable MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 65 IPv4 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply When Apply button is clicked video redirection virtual media settings of the specified Partition are applied Cancel When Cancel button is clicked video redirection virtual media settings are not applied and it returns to the original state 1
71. 3 18 2 3 19 2 3 20 2 3 21 2 3 22 2 3 23 2 3 24 2 3 25 2 3 26 2 3 27 2 3 28 2 3 29 2 3 30 2 3 31 2 3 32 2 3 33 2 3 34 2 3 35 2 3 36 2 3 37 24 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 5 3 2 6 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 6 4 Update Command Wrodate AL DEE show EE EE Show partion Tue Ce SNOW partition DYNAMIC _PAtitiONING EEN SHOW pariton MOM fi8 ins RIA a GAA SS Pde show partition lani device Mode siia aee ereen aeaaea ieee AEE EEE SHOW parition MAM ssi a edad dade ete a a a a show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Show partition MeMory_OPEration_MOE EE SHOW partition PCI_ACGArESS_MOE EE e UE nee DEE show gateway_ipv6 Sweet ENEE AAR EE AANEREN aan dander SMOW MUO eo a EEEE EEEIEE EET AT T TETT SHOW te EE SHOW te E ln GE STOW ID eet SNOW e Show hosinaine EE Show Maintenance E show ssh SOEN TEPER CIE Show telnet sed NEEAEEE Show telnet o0 EPE EE ATTE TETA EET US EE SIE e EEN SIE lt le BEE WIELT DEER Elle EE SHOW AynaMic_PartitioninG CIE Other Commande Preface 2 6 5 2 6 6 2 6 7 2 6 8 2 6 9 2 6 10 2 6 11 2 6 12 2 6 13 2 6 14 2 6 15 CHAPTER 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 4 8 3 4 9 3 4 10 3 4 11 3 4 12 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 CHAPTER 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 GU ETC lu Bue EEN Set ue le e EE Set lan EIDEN edd EE Sh w memory p ration MOJE E show
72. 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to add s to partition d Y N Adding s to Partition d has been completed successfully The specified partition number is invalid Parameter missing The specified parameter is invalid The parameter IOU is not supported Unable to add the specified SB x to the partition due to CPU mismatch between SBs Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute add partition command Failed to execute s command Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to CPU composition abnormal Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to DIMM composition abnormal Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to SB composition abnormal Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to VRM composition abnormal Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode The specified command is not supported error s Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to set configuration because the power on off is processing Please execute it after a while again 2 2 2 clear access_control It clears th
73. 5 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 87 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 6 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 88 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 7 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 89 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 8 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 90 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 9 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 91 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 10 of PCI_Box 1 which is mounted Enabled e Disabled Slot 92 ODROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 11 of PCL_Box 1 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 97 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express slot 0 of PCl_Box 2 By default it is Disabled UEFI Menu Operations Slot 98 OpROM Slot 99 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled
74. 54 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 421 TABLE 3 55 Display Contents of Operation Help Display 422 TABLE 3 56 Display Contents of Operation Help Display when Pop Up Window appes ENEE 422 TABLE 3 57 Display contents Of MENU selection EEN 424 TABLE 3 58 Display contents of operation help denn EEN 425 TABLE 3 59 Display Contents of operation help display when pop up window appears ENEE 425 TABLE 3 60 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 428 TABLE 3 61 Display Contents of the Operation Help Display S 429 TABLE 3 62 Display Contents of the Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears ENEE 429 TABLE 3 63 Displayed Contents of Menu Selection ENEE 432 TABLE 3 64 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 432 TABLE 3 65 Display Contents of Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appes EEN 433 TABLE 3 66 Display contents Of MENU selection EEN 437 TABLE 3 67 Display content of Operation Help Display ENEE 437 TABLE 3 68 Display Content of Operation Help Display When Pop up Window Appears ENEE 437 TABLE 3 69 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 441 TABLE 3 70 Display Content of Menu Selection Help Diet ENEE 445 TABLE 3 71 Display Contents of Operation Help Display ENEE 445 TABLE 3 72 Content of Operation Helps Display when Pop up Window appears ENEE 446 TABLE 3 73 Parameter of Device Path ccesccccsscsssecesscessesecesseeseeseseesenseseeeesseseseeseeusseseeseessaeseseesensaesesseceseaeseessecesaeseesnesesnse
75. 8 8 a Cp 8 8 8 G 8 8 8 8 8 a FIGURE 1 118 SB x Window 6 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout SB 0 von AE tee x VUJ Aen y vets as y VTT_CPU 1 V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V VDDQ_DIMM 1B V 1 25 1 61 V 0 87 1 81 V P1 0V_JC 1A V 0 64 1 21 V P1 0V_JC 1B V 0 64 1 21 V P1 5V_JC 1AB V 0 97 1 81 V P1 35V_JC 1AB V 0 87 1 63 V VDDQ_DIMM 0C V 0 87 1 81 V VDDQ_DIMM 0D V 0 87 1 81 V P1 0V_JC 0C V 0 64 1 21 V P1 0V_JC 0D V 0 64 1 21 V P1 5V_JC 0CD V 0 97 1 81 V P1 35V_JC 0CD V 0 87 1 63 V VDDQ_DIMM 1C V 0 87 1 81 V VDDQ _DIMM 1D V 0 87 1 81 V P1 0V_JC 1C V 0 64 1 21 V P1 0V_JC 1D V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V P1 5V_JC 1CD V 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 81 V P1 35V_JC 1CD V 1 25 1 45 V 0 87 1 63 V 4 2 The CPU and DIMM row that is not mounted is displayed in gray background The Status clear button and a message Click the Status Clear Button to clear the status are not displayed for a user who does not have setting privileges TABLE 1 159 Display and Setting items on SB x Window A Items Description Board Information Status Displays the status of SB S OK No fault on the SB g Not present The SB is not mounted Warning Warning is detected by the voltage sensor on the SB id Degraded Error has
76. Activated In other situations gray out is displayed and selection is not possible Current Status Information Current status of TPM chip is displayed When TPM Support is set to Disabled SUPPORT TURNED OFF is displayed Warning Following is the TPM Chip status displayed as TPM Enabled Status TPM Activate Status and TPM Owner Status No item is set However as the TPM Chip status cannot be read immediately after changing the settings of TPM SUPPORT from Disabled to Enabled the default value is set to Disabled Deactivated Unowned TPM Enabled Status Values which can be set as TPM State are displayed as follows Enabled When Enabled is set as TPM State Disabled When Disabled is set as TPM State TPM Active Status Values which can be set in TPM State are displayed as follows Activated When Enabled is selected as TPM State Deactivated When Disabled is selected as TPM State TPM Owner Status Shows whether the TPM chip is authorized Owned Unowned Commit Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after saving the changes in the settings Discard Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after cancelling the changes in the settings 3 Operation Help Display The help for the operations mentioned on this page is shown in TABLE 3 44 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 44 Display contents of operation help display
77. Add Filter button or Edit Filter button in the Access Control window to display the Add Filter window or Edit Filter window respectively Although the Add Filter window and Edit Filter window have different window titles their setting items are the same This section describes these items in the Add Filter window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 86 Add Filter window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active MIMB20 Part Nusabor MCNXNNXXXX FUJITSU Serial Nuwsber GEES Status Dot d sex Achse gt Netwoek Coefigwation gt Access Control Add Filter Click the Apply Buttos to apply all changes TABLE 1 121 Setting and display items in the Add Filter window Items Description Protocol Sets the protocol for the IP filtering You can select one of the following items from the pull down menu HTTP HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP Access Control Sets whether to execute access control Disable Permits access by all IP addresses via the protocol selected in Protocol Selecting this disables input to IP Address and Subnet Mask Enable Specifies IP Address and Subnet Mask to permit access via the protocol selected in Protocol IP Address Sets the IP address for IPv4 or IPv6 that will have permission to connect Remarks For IPv4 to permit connection by only a specific IP address in a subnet specify the IP address and then 255 255 255 255 in Subnet Mask For IPv6 th
78. Communication time Unit milliseconds pertaining to the network round trip for remote communication offset Time deviation between a remote clock and an internal clock Unit milliseconds jitter The error is generated due to the time which is an addition of previously acquired time and interval of poll and error value of latest time which is actually acquired Unit milliseconds accuracy of respective clocks and the network condition 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to ntpq command who Displays the following information regarding the user logged in the current MMB Login name Login time Remote host name or IP address of remote host Displays remote host name when the remote host name is recognized by DNS configured in MMB at the time of login Displays IP address when remote host name is not recognized Moreover Hyphen is displayed when the user logs in from the serial port Displays whether the user is connected to the Telnet SSH or to the Web UI or whether connected to the serial port Remarks Support of IPv4 IPv6 Privilege All 1 Input format who 2 Option None 3 Usage example who Suzuki 2012 11 08 10 35 51 Te
79. Core number contains the number of Disable core Remarks Degenerated CPU is not included in the number Physical Displays the physical memory volume that is included in the system Memory Size Remarks The memory size does not include degraded DIMMs 1 7 5 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 137 Buttons on the System Information Window Buttons Description Apply When the characters are entered in the System Name or Asset Tag fields and click the Apply button is clicked the entered information is set Cancel When the Cancel button is clicked the system is restored to the original condition without setting the information entered in the System Name or Asset Tag 1 Menu Operation System System Information 2 Window Operations 1 Change the items of System Name or Asset Tag and click the Apply button Information in each field is set Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed W_00431 Invalid character included W_00407 Input characters are too long For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN In the Operation Log window only the table contents can be scrolled without scrolling the title of the table When there is no event to be displayed a message There is no
80. DR state of partition TABLE 2 6 MMB CLI commands CE Command CE Outline Power control power off Turns the power off power on Turns the power on Partition control sadump sadump instruction reset Hard Reset instruction nmi NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection console Text Console connection to partition Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show partition configuration Permitted Displays the partition configuration set partition home Sets the Home SB show partition home Permitted Displays the Home SB set partition memory_operation_mode Sets Memory operation mode show partition memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set partition pci_address_mode Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show partition pci_address_mode Permitted Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set partition lan_device_mode Sets LAN device mode show partition lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode show partition mirror_mode Permitted Displays the Mirror mode setting set partition name Sets the partition name show partition name Permitted Displays the partition name Tim
81. Disabled Enabled TPM State Disabled Disabled Enabled Pending TPM None None operation Enable Take Ownership Disable Take Ownership TPM Clear A 3 Setting Items on Video redirection Following is the list of initial values and the values that can be set for Setting Items on BMC Setting item on A 3 1 Video Setting item on A 3 2 Keyboard Setting item on A 3 3 Mouse Setting item on A 3 4 Options Appendix A List of Setting Items A 3 1 Setting Items on Video Window Following table lists the initial values and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Video window TABLE A 44 Setting Items of Video Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Low Bandwidth Normal Normal Mode 8bpp 8bpp B amp W 16bpp A 3 2 Setting Items on Keyboard Window Following table lists the initial values and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Keyboard window TABLE A 45 Setting Items of Keyboard Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Host Physical Auto Detect Auto Detect Keyboard English United States French German Germany Spanish Soft Keyboard English United States English United Kingdom Spanish French German Germany Italian Danish Finnish German Switzerland Norwegian Portuguese Swedish Hebrew French Belgium Dutch Belgium Russian Russia Japanese Turkish
82. Display Contents of Operation Help Display Items Description Il Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager 3 5 1 Boot Mode Menu Boot mode settings are done in the Boot Mode menu FIGURE 3 32 Example Display of Boot Mode Menu Iw mengen menge menge geen 1 Page Information Display Displays as Boot Mode 2 Menu Selection Displays the screen as shown in Display Contents of the TABLE 3 47 Display Contents of Menu Selection Section TABLE 3 47 Display Contents of Menu Selection Section Item Display Contents Boot Mode Select the Boot Mode UEFI and Legacy Both the boot options UEFI and Legacy are enabled Only UEFI Only the boot option UEFI is enabled Only Legacy Only the boot option Legacy is enabled Default is UEFI and Legacy Commit Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after saving the changes Discard Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after cancelling the changes 3 5 2 UEFI Menu Operations 3 Operation Help Display The help for the operations mentioned on this page is shown in TABLE 3 48 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 48 Display contents of operation help display ltems Description Il Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items
83. E 00517 Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal SB composition E 00522 Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal VRM composition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 3 2 Schedule Menu The Schedule menu has the Schedule Control and Schedule List windows This section describes the windows and the operation Note As mentioned below there may be a delay in the time recorded in SEL compared to the time reserved for scheduled operations After checking the configuration and after performing the start up preparation process it takes some time until the power is ON In this case the SEL display is delayed about from six seconds up to 8 seconds than the time reserved for the scheduled operations The shutdown instructions from MMB to OPERATING SYSTEM take certain time from the set time However the following interval times may be changed under the various conditions like setting and the configuration Interval time until shutdown instructions reaches OS from MMB Interval time until MMB notifies SEL begin shutdown after OS begins shutdown Even if the Power on Delay is 0 seconds it takes about 30 seconds 70 seconds from starting the power on up to the reset O Schedule Control window In the Schedule Control window the setting related to the schedule can be set for each partition MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operatio
84. F e Turkish Q A 3 3 Setting Items on Mouse Window Following table lists the initial values and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Mouse window TABLE A 46 Setting Items of Mouse Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Mouse Mode Absolute mouse mode Absolute mouse mode Relative mouse mode Hide mouse mode Appendix A List of Setting Items A 3 4 Setting Items on Options Window Following table lists the initial values and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Options window TABLE A 47 Setting Items of Options Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks GUI language EN English DE Deutsch EN English JA Japanese cO FUJITSU
85. ISDI 6 digits of ISID ID used when initiator establishes session with target are required for input Default setting is generated by MAC address Remarks e When the characters entered are insufficient a pop up window showing the message Please enter enough characters Press ENTER to continue appears e If more than 7 digits are entered in ISDI a pop up window showing the message Error Input is incorrect please input 6 hex numbers appears If 6 digits contain the value other than the hexadecimal number that number should be entered as 0 Example ABCXYZ ABCO000 Enable DHCP Enables disables DHCP with space key When Internet Protocol is set to Autoconfigure this item is not displayed IT Disabled X Enabled By default it is Disabled Initiation IP Address 1 Sets IP Address of iSCSI Initiator side This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and enabled DHCP Initiator Subnet Mask 1 Sets subnet mask of iSCSI Initiator side This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and enabled DHCP Gateway 1 Sets IP address of gateway This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and enabled DHCP Get Target info via DHCP 1 Sets the function to get the IP address port of iSCSI Target from DHCP server with space key This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to I
86. Interface gt IPv6 Interface Maintenance CCC CE C M gt Active IMB 0 rm MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 92 Setting and display items in the IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Items Description MMB Virtual Physical IP Address Virtual IP Address Sets the virtual IPv6 IP address for Web UI access If the MMB has a redundant configuration the switched MMB will take over this virtual IP address Hostname Sets the host name in FQDN format You can enter the following characters a z A Z 0 9 hyphen period Only the above characters can be specified Also the following restrictions apply The character string must begin with an alphabetic character The character string cannot begin or end with the following character specified hyphen or period The default is PRIMEQUEST Product Serial Number For example if the serial number is 1020516004 the character string is PRIMEQUEST1020516004 Remarks The setting in FQDN format is not required if you are not operating on the domain Automatic Acquisition Automatically acquires data with a click of the Auto button The global address prefix length and gateway IP address are automatically acquired to overwrite existing data IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address
87. Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 2 FIGURE 3 66 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order DI ENEE FIGURE 3 67 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order i ENEE FIGURE 3 68 Display Example of Boot From File Mem FIGURE E Specifications of Boot File 1 siz sccie ssip tgi aaiae aaaea akai nagar audau dca FIGURE 3 70 Specifications of Boot File Ch 000 FIGURE 3 71 Specifications Of Boot e CHE BIGURE 3 72 LOGO Ee eege Ee seeataaneecueien pentane FIGURE 3 73 Display Example of Set Time out Value Men EEN FIGURE 3 74 Specification of SAS disk built in SB FIGURE 3 75 Specification of SAS Disk built in DU ENEE FIGURE 3 76 Specification of Disk from Fibre Can ENEE FIGURE 3 77 Specification ot e ERT iiaiai Shasicesagaasdtens acagpatnas casa taacatncaasscnesnantsne id Sr Saanaa dees saacugsnivasscar nant aoi E r ahis FIGURE 4 1 Sample screenshot of the UEFI shell immediately after it starts FIGURE 6 1 Structure of menu for sadump configuration 1 FIGURE 6 2 Structure of menu for sadump configuration 7 ENEE FIGURE 6 3 Structure of menu for sadump configuration D ENEE FIGURE 6 4 Screen areas Of sadum p Gonfouration ENEE FIGURE 6 5 Malin un EE FIGURE 6 6 sadump Setup Meny E FIGURE 6 7 Dump device maintenance men FIGURE 6 8 Dump device create MONU essecessecessecessesesecesesessesesseseesesteseseeseseesesteneseesesteseseeseseeaeateseateaeateseateaeateaeateaesteneateneatenes FIGU
88. Log Filtering Condition window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 4 System Event Log Filtering Condition Window a D oa LU a LU LU 8 L L o D Li D Model PRIMEQUESTIS00E Active MMB 0 Part Nember MCXXXXXXX Serial Nember Seats 3S Status 3 Unit 4 Source 5 Sort by 6 Start Date Time First event O Specified Time EXER DE End DateTime Last evert Specified Time ao H IECH TECH lo Select the fitering conditions and click the Apply button to take effect Note The follonings are AND conditions L Severityv Lo Ener Li Wans M Info 2 Partition All OSpecified 0 11112 OAI O Specified PSUs Fans SBe0 EK SB 2 Ss JO en OU2i IOU 2 IOU 3 DU ap DU si OPL MMB 0 MMB 1 BCL Bos PC Bess IPCI Bos BCL Base GAN O Specified CPU DIMM Chipset Vokaze Temperature Other Date Time New evem first O Old evem first TECH TE DR DR SiNumber of events to display Max 3000 100 6040 Apply Cancel Defauk Setting TABLE 1 19 Display and Setting Items on System Event Log Filtering Condition Window Items Description Severity Partition Check the Severity check box Multiple selections are possible Error Warning Info Monitor All are ON by default Note Selects the partition to be displayed Select All or Specified by radio button All Filtering is not done by the Partition Specified Filtering of partit
89. MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 74 SNMP Community window Model PRIMEQUESTIS00E Active MMB O Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Namber Ge S Status Nateaal gt ser tion hr gt Network Configuration gt SNMP Coefiguration gt Coenmunty SNMP Community Click the Apply Button to apply all changes System Information PRIMEQUEST iv Read Only 1 Read Only iv Read Only iv Read Only Read Only 1 iv Read Only iv Read Only i Read Only iv Read Only 1 Read Only Seet Cance TABLE 1 102 Setting and display items in the SNMP Community window Items Description System Name Displays the SNMP system name System Location Sets the System Location of SNMP You can use alphanumeric characters spaces and the following characters I RS H is 4 2 lt gt _ However the following restrictions apply The character string cannot begin with a space or The character string cannot end with a space System Contact Sets the System Contact for SNMP The characters that can be specified for System Contact are the same as those for System Location Community User Sets the SNMP Community string for SNMP v1 and v2 Alternatively it sets the user name for SNMP v3 You can use alphanumeric characters and the following characters I 8 amp AR However the character string cannot begi
90. Menu Selection are displayed in the menu TABLE 3 29 Display contents of Menu Selection Items Display contents iSCSI Initiator Name Sets iSCSI Initiator Name Add an Attempt Opens MAC Selection menu Attempt xxxx As for xxxx the name set in iSCSI Attempt Name of the Attempt Configuration menu is displayed Opens Attempt Configuration menu Remarks Only number of LAN ports for which iSCSI is valid is displayed Delete Attempt Opens Delete Attempt menu Change Attempt Order Opens Change Attempt Order menu 3 Operation help display Description of operation key shown in TABLE 3 30 Display contents of Operation Help Display is displayed TABLE 3 30 Display contents of Operation Help Display Items Description tl Move Highlight Moves the cursor in up and down direction lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the item Esc Exit Return to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving the change setting of this menu iSCSI Environment Setting Setting of iSCSI environment is executed according to the following procedures 1 To set Initiator Name iSCSI Initiator Name is set Number of characters which can be entered are within 4 223 characters UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 21 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 1 iSCSI Configuration Remarks eWhen the character string not related with IQN name is entered Pop Up window of Invalid iSCSI Name is d
91. Not selected e Weekly Sun Mon Tue Monthly From 1 to 1 Wed Thu Fri Sat Special Jan 1 e Monthly Jan Dec e Special Jan 1 Dec 31 Term e Daily From Jan 1 e Daily Jan 1 Dec 31 To Jan 1 e Weekly Jan Dec e Weekly From Jan e Monthly Jan Dec To Jan e Monthly From Jan To Jan On Time Hour 0 Hour Specified as 24 Min 0 hours Time Specified in units of 10 minutes Off Time Hour 0 Hour Specified as 24 Min 0 hours Time Specified in units of 10 minutes A 1 9 Setting Items of Partition Configuration Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Partition Configuration Window TABLE A 9 Setting Items of Partition Configuration Window Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Partition None Maximum 16 characters Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Name can be entered Alphanumeric characters single byte space _ A 1 10 Setting Items of IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window TABLE A 10 Setting Items of IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window Seiting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 IP Address must be in the
92. Partition Event Log window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB20 E Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt Partition Event Log Partition Event Log Description 2013 11 15 e Se SS PXMD9 0000 0X 00000PX0 o 05 57 25 PRS JEE Saa time 20131122085700 956 2013 11 15 g z PXMD9 IGR TX 00000PX0 G A 305 05 56 18 Das ee 3000 time 20131122085554 000 2013 11 15 S i PXMD9 3333 3X 00000PX0 G D o ans S 05 55 39 Pepe ees 20500 time 20131122085514 961 e 2013 11 15 pes mg PXME00 0000 00 00000000 E wait time 20131122085450 954 2013 11 14 x Ss PXMD9 0000 OX 00000PXO 17 30 53 time 20131121203029 536 2013 11 21 a sn Bees PXME10 1001 A9 007B0P00 18 57 56 sii time 20131121185755 873 S 2013 11 21 oe Wee Sen POSS NH33 01 05XX0P00 18 16 05 e 2 time 20131121181605 444 2013 gt DESS 33 geck SIE Lat Jess w n PXM 5X NH33 01 04XX0P00 1O0 14 NE Senn WNIIDIITIOIENE 901 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Partition Event Log allows scroll up down window while keeping table titles on the top When there is no event to be displayed a message There is no Event Logs is displayed instead of table TABLE 1 25 Display items of Partition Event Log window Items Description Severity Displays the severity of event Error Severe problems like hardware dam
93. Path may not be set To Sets the e mail address of the recipient To specify multiple e mail addresses delimit them with a comma SMTP Server Sets the IP address or FQDN of the SMTP server You can set the FQDN only if a DNS is set After selecting Network Configuration Network Interface you can specify a DNS server Subject Sets an e mail title The e mail address consists of user name domain name The specifiable characters in user name and domain name conform to RFC 2822 and RFC 1034 Examples user name can contain alphanumeric characters and the following symbols amp y MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations However cannot be used for the heading character period cannot be used for the heading character and the last character Moreover cannot be used 2 pieces continuously For details see RFC 2822 The domain name can contain alphanumeric characters and hyphen only However it must begin with an alphabetic character and end with an alphanumeric character For details see RFC 1034 The Subject can contain alphanumeric characters blank spaces and the following symbols l amp 4 _ TABLE 1 124 Buttons in the Alarm E Mail window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as the Enable or
94. RW RW RO RW displayed for an SB 3 RW RW RO RW_ unmounted SB IOU IOU 0 RW RW RO DW Displays the IOU IOU 1 RW RW RO RW status IOU 2 RW RW RO RW The menu is not IOU 3 RW RW RO RW displayed for an unmounted IOU DU DU 0 RW RW RO RW Displays the DU status DU 1 RW RW RO RW The menu is not displayed for an unmounted DU OPL RW RW RO RW MMB RW RW RO RW User Administration User List RW N A N A N A Lists edits and deletes registered user accounts Change RW RW RW RW Changes the password Password of the user s own account Who RO RO RO RO Displays all users who are logged in to the MMB Network Configuration Date Time RW RO RO RO Network RW RO RO RO Interface IPv4 RW RO RO RO Sets the IPv4 IP Interface address etc IPv6 RW RO RO RO Sets the IPv6 IP Interface address etc Management RW N A N A N A Configures the Port LAN Port LAN of the MMB HUB Configuration Network RW RO RO RO Protocols Refresh Rate RW RW RW RW Sets the refresh rate of the Web UI window SNMP RW N A N A N A Configuration Community RW N A N A N A Trap RW N A N A N A SNMPv3 RW N A N A N A Configuratio n SSL Create CSR RW N A N A N A Creates a secret key and CSR Export RW N A N A N A Exports a secret key Key CSR and CSR Import RW N A N A N A Installs a certificate MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1
95. RW The menu is not SB 2 RW displayed for an SB 3 RW unmounted SB IOU IOU 0 RW Displays the IOU status IOU 1 RW The menu is not IOU 2 RW displayed for an IOU 3 RW unmounted IOU DU DU 0 RW Displays the DU status DU 1 RW The menu is not displayed for an unmounted DU PCI_Box If no PCI_Box is MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Partition 3 Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks connected this menu is not displayed PCI_Box 0 RW Displays the PCI_Box PCI_Box 1 RW status PCI_Box 2 RW The menu is not PCI_Box 3 RW displayed for an unmounted PCI_Box OPL RW MMB MMB 0 RW Displays the MMB MMB 1 RW status and information Disk Enclosure Disk RW Enclosure x Partition Power Control RW Controls the partition power Schedule Schedule RW Sets scheduled Control operations Schedule List RW Sets the power on off schedule Console RW Sets Video Redirection Redirection Setup Remote Storage and Text Console Redirection IPv4 Console RW Setting for IPv4 Console Redirection Redirection Setup IPv6 Console RW Setting for IPv6 Console Redirection Redirection Setup Partition RW Changes the partition Configuration configuration Partition xPAR Changes the xPAR Configuration partition configuration SB RW IOU n RW PCI_Box n RW Reserved SB
96. Reserved SB If you register this partition as a Mirror Mode Mirror Mode will be disabled when switching to Reserved SB Are you sure to continue W_00507 Unable to set the OS Installation Mode because Mirror Mode or POST setting is modified W_00508 Unable to set the OS Installation Mode E 00521 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal SB composition E 00526 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal VRM composition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 4 User Administration Menu You can manage user accounts from the User Administration menu 1 4 1 User List window The User List window displays information on the registered user accounts Only users with Administrator privileges can view this window FIGURE 1 56 User List Window Modol PRIMEQUEST2500E Active ADMB 0 Part Numbor MCXNNXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number doesent Status Normal Network Coafiparation Mainicaance User List BER Chek the Add User button to add a new user Select a user than click the Edit Remove User button to edit or remove the user O Adminstrator Defaut Administrator Aad User Edt User Jl Remove User Cancel The users set to Disabled are grayed out TABLE 1 81 Display items in the
97. Resets the system 19 rm Deletes one or more files or directories 20 set Displays creates changes or deletes a UEFI environment variable 21 time Displays the current time Also it sets the system time 22 type Displays the contents of a file 23 ver Displays the volume information for a file system 24 vol Displays the volume information for a file system 1 Execute Connect r command before executing drvcfg command Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation CHAPTER 5 Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation This chapter describes the DR command and the Hot plug collaboration function 5 1 DR Command This chapter describes the CLI command line interface provided by the DR command The root permission is necessary for executing 5 1 1 dr command common part 5 1 1 1 Synopsis opt FUSVdp util sbin dp version help COMMAND ARGS 5 1 1 2 Description This is basic command to DR operation The subcommand is taken in the argument 5 1 1 3 Options Options Meaning version Print the version number of DR command help Print the synopsis and a list of subcommands COMMAND Specify subcommand ARGS Specify arguments of subcommand 5 1 1 4 Exit status Exit status Meaning 0 Successful program completion 1 Unsuccessful program completion 128 signul number lt s gt Terminated abnormally because the signal of signal number lt s gt was received 5 1 2 Device hot add hot remove operation add rm subcommand
98. Setting completed For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 5 7 SSL menu The SSL menu has the following windows Create CSR window Export Key CSR window Import Certificate window Create Selfsigned Certificate window L Create CSR window You can create a secret key and the corresponding CSR certificate signing request in the Create CSR window The following input items follow the guidelines issued by each certificate authority independently Therefore enter these items in accordance with the guidelines of the certificate authority selected as the destination MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 77 Create CSR window Model PRIMEQUEST2900 Active MIMIB20 Part Number MCNNNXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number GEGENECnG Status Normal System Partitice sex Achse Maantemance Logout gt Netwoek Coefiguration gt SSL gt Create CSR Create CSR Help J Click the Create CSR Button for creating a new Key and a CSR Certiicate Signing Request SSL certiicate stam No certificate is inzalled Ceste CSR Cancel TABLE 1 108 Setting and display items in the Create CSR window Items Description SSL certificate status Displays the current installation status of a SSL certificate No certificate is installed CSR has been generated A signed certificate is installed Key len
99. Specified Time is selected enter the date and time of end time By default it is Last event Number of events to display Specifies the number of log to be displayed For the denominator part the total number of logged in events is displayed 1 2 4 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description It is specified that maximum value is 1000 By default it is 100 TABLE 1 24 Buttons on Operation Log Filtering Condition window Buttons Description Apply When Apply button is clicked the log corresponding to the conditions specified is displayed in the list format on Operation Log window Cancel Returns to the Operation Log window by clicking the Cancel button Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00413 Nothing is selected W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00426 Invalid Values Specified W_00434 Invalid Time Format W_00441 Range over error _ 00417 Are you sure For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Partition Event Log Window Partition Event Log Window displays the hardware error information REMCS message target message Maximum 1000 events can be stored When the log is full with the entries the oldest event log is deleted and newly generated event log is stored FIGURE 1 7
100. Specified time and maintain A 1 3 A 1 4 Appendix A List of Setting Items Time Data of Specified Time End Last event e Last event When Specified Time is Date Time e Specified Time selected End Time can be entered Switch Last event and Specified time and maintain Time Data of Specified Time side Number of 100 events 0 or more integer less than The denominator of fraction events to or equal to the denominator which is displayed is a total display in the fraction displayed number of registered Maximum 1000 events events Setting Items of System Information Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for setting items of System Information Window TABLE A 3 Setting Items of System Information Window Seiting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items System PRIMEQUEST Maximum 64 characters It is also used as System Name Product Serial Number can be entered 0 9 a z Name of SNMP A Z amp lt gt _ Asset Tag None Maximum 32 characters can be entered Only administrator privilege Setting items of System Setup Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set of setting items of System Setup Window TABLE A 4 Setting items of System Setup Window Setting Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Items Power Feed
101. TABLE 1 104 Setting and display items in the SNMP Trap wndon ENEE TABLE 1 105 Buttons in the SNMP Trap window EEN TABLE 1 106 Setting and display items in the SNMP v3 Configuration window ENEE TABLE 1 107 Buttons in the SNMP v3 Configuration wird un TABLE 1 108 Setting and display items in the Create CSR WiNdoOW ENEE TABLE 1 109 Buttons in the Create CSR Window ENEE TABLE 1 110 Buttons in the Export Key CSR window ENEE TABLE 1 111 Buttons in the Import Certificate window EEN TABLE 1 112 Display items in the Create Selfsigned Certificate window ENEE TABLE 1 113 Buttons in the Create Selfsigned Certificate WINdOW ENEE TABLE 1 114 Buttons in the Create SSH Server Key window EEN TABLE 1 115 Display and setting items in the Remote Server Management window TABLE 1 116 Buttons in the Remote Server Management window ENEE TABLE 1 117 Display and setting items in the Edit User wimdow een TABLE 1 118 Buttons in the Edit User 3 003 0cceticd austen eu a ee el TABLE 1 119 Setting and display items in the Access Control window ENEE TABLE 1 120 Buttons in the Access Control wmd ENEE TABLE 1 121 Setting and display items in the Add Filter window TABLE 1 122 Buttons in the Add Filter window EEN TABLE 1 123 Setting and display items in the Alarm E Mail WINGOW ENEE TABLE 1 124 Buttons in the Alarm E Mail Window ue TABLE 1 125 Setting and display items in the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition windo
102. User List window Items Description User Name Displays the user name The user name must consist of a total of 8 to 32 characters Full Name Used to enter the user s real name or other related information You can enter up to 32 characters Privilege Displays the privileges of the user account Status Displays the current status of this account Enabled Disabled Operable Partition Displays the partitions that the user is permitted to operate The window displays them only if the user account has Partition Operator privileges MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 82 Buttons in the User List window Buttons Description Add User Displays the Add User window Edit User Displays the Edit User window Remove User Deletes the user Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message E_00031 Same name already exists User addition failed E_00032 No more User addition E 00034 Unable to change the status to Disable because the specified user is last Administrator E 00035 The user is logining User deletion failed 1 00041 User addition was completed _ 00042 User information editing was completed 1 00043 User deletion was completed W_00463 Select a User Name _ 00464 aa will be re
103. V 0 87 1 63 V a VCC_CPU 0 V 0 55 1 45 V 0 38 1 63 V 5 VSA_CPU 0 V 0 65 1 29 V DAS 1 45 V G VIT_CPU 0 V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V VDDQ_DIMM 0A V 1 25 1 61 V 0 87 1 81 V VDDQ_DIMM 0B V 1 25 1 61 V 0 87 1 81 V P1 0V_JC 0B V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V P1 5V_JC 0AB V 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 81 V P1 35V_JC 0AB V 1 25 1 45 V 0 87 1 63 V VDDQ_DIMM 0C V 1 25 1 61V 0 87 1 81 V VDDQ_DIMM 0D V 1 25 1 61 V 0 87 1 81 V P1 0V_JC 0C V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V P1 0V_JC 0D V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V P1 5V_JC 0CD V 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 81 V P1 35V_JC 0CD V 1 25 145 V 0 87 1 63 V z lt I gt The CPU and DIMM row that is not mounted is displayed in gray background The Status clear button and a message Click the Status Clear Button to clear the status are not displayed for a user who does not have setting privileges TABLE 1 43 Display and Setting items on SB x Window Items Description Board Information Status Displays the status of SB g OK No fault on the SB Not present The SB is not mounted Warning Warning is detected by the voltage sensor on the SB Degraded Error has occurred in a component on the SB However the SB can be operated by disconnecting the faulty components Failed A fault has occurred in the SB and the SB must be disconnected or the SB has been disconnected Unsupported In case there is an SB which is not supported by the MMB Power Status Displays the power
104. Web UI Web User Interface Operations Maintenance Wizard N A Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks accounts Change RW Changes the password Password of the user s own account Who RO Displays all users who are logged in to the MMB Network Configuration Date Time RO Network Interface IPv4 Interface RO Sets the IPv4 IP address etc IPv6 Interface RO Sets the IPv6 IP address etc Management N A Configures the Port LAN LAN Port of the MMB HUB Configuration Network RO Protocols Refresh Rate RW Sets the refresh rate of the Web UI window SNMP N A Configuration Community N A Trap N A SNMPv3 N A Configuration SSL Create CSR N A Creates a secret key and CSR Export N A Exports a secret key Key CSR and CSR Import Security N A Installs a certificate Certificate Create N A Creates a selfsigned Selfsigned certificate Certificate SSH SSH Server N A Creates a private key Key for the SSH server Remote Server N A Management Access Control N A Sets the IP filtering that permits connections Alarm E mail N A Maintenance Firmware Update Unified N A Performs a batch Firmware update Update Backup Restore Backs up and restores Configuration setting information Backup Restore N A MMB Configuration Backup EFI N A Configuration Restore EFI N A eas E E a a ES Performs maintenance through a wizard
105. allocation mod set partition lan_device_mode Permitted Sets LAN device mode show partition lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode show partition mirror_mode Permitted Displays the Mirror mode setting set partition name Sets the partition name MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Operator Outline show partition name Permitted Displays the partition name Time related set date Sets the date and time show date Permitted Displays the date and time set timezone Sets the time zone show timezone Permitted Displays the time zone Network related set ip Sets the management LAN address set ipv6 Sets the IPv6 management LAN address show ip Permitted Displays the management LAN address show ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 management LAN address set hostname Sets the MMB host name show hostname Permitted Displays the MMB host name set gateway Sets the gateway address set gateway_ipv6 Sets the IPv6 gateway address show gateway Permitted Displays the gateway address show network Permitted Displays the management LAN interface show gateway_ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 gateway address set http Sets whether to enable http service set https Sets whether to enable https service set ssh Sets whether to enable ssh service set telnet Sets whether to enable te
106. and press Enter key 6 When UEFI PXE iSCSI is selected to confirm Enable Boot Manager Menu is activated after reset Boot options are added is confirmed as in FIGURE 3 12 Display of Boot Manager Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 12 Display of Boot Manager Menu Boot Manager Check to be added this item in the last line Remark If MAC Selection Menu is activated from Add An ear of iSCSI Ge Menu in Device Manager Menu network ports are added as in FIGURE 3 13 Display of MAC Selection MAC Selection Check to be added one network port 7 When Legacy PXE is set to Enable if Set Legacy NET Drive ran Menu of Boot EES Manager Menu i is activated after reset network ports are added as in See Mi Set Legacy Net Drive Order Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 14 Display of Set Legacy Net Drive Order Menu Check to be added one network port 3 4 4 CPU Configuration Menu Enable Disable of Power saving function and hyper threading function of CPU can be set in CPU Configuration Menu Following is the display of window immediately after start up of CPU Configuration Menu FIGURE 3 15 Display Example of CPU Configuration Menu Mo 1 Page Information Display CPU Configuration is displayed 2 Menu Selection The items shown in the TABLE 3 19 Display Contents of Menu Selection are displayed on the Menu UEFI Menu Operations
107. appears 2 Add the schedule to the Add Edit Schedule window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations If the schedule is to be changed 1 Select an existing schedule with Radio button 2 Click Edit button Add Edit Schedule window appears 3 Changes an existing schedule in Add Edit Schedule window If the schedule is to be deleted 1 Select the schedule with Radio button 2 Click Remove button The confirmation dialog box appears 3 Click OK button Deletes the schedule Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed E 00412 You need an empty entry W_00413 Nothing is selected For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN LI Add Schedule window Edit Schedule window In Add Schedule window the schedule of Power On Off for each partition can be added newly In Edit Schedule window an existing schedule can be changed The window items of Add Schedule window and Edit Schedule window are common In this section an explanation is given by using the Add Schedule window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 43 Schedule List Window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active MMIB 0 Part Nusaber MCNNNXXXX FUjiTsU Serial Number we Status Zeg d System er Administra oa Netw gt Ptition gt Sche
108. booting is failed the following boot option is booted In the example of FIGURE 3 4 Boot Option of Boot Manager EFI Internal Shell is booted The priority level of the boot of UEFI Aware operating system can be changed by the Change Boot Order window of the Boot Options menu See ll Change Boot Order Menu When the boot option is added and deleted the Add Boot Option menu See W Add Boot Option menu of the Boot Options menu and the Delete Boot Option menu See W Delete Boot Option menu are used 3 3 3 UEFI Menu Operations About boot specification of legacy BIOS Boot of legacy operating system is executed by specifying the legacy boot option Boot option which displays device name without displaying EFI from the Boot Manager menu In FIGURE 3 5 Execution of Legacy Boot Option Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO 1 00 which is under the control of Legacy CD ROM is a legacy boot option FIGURE 3 5 Execution of Legacy Boot Option Hoot Manager The priority level of starting the legacy operating system is changed from the Change Boot Order menu When the boot processing of legacy operating system is executed once only the boot option of legacy operating system is executed The boot option of the UEFI boot whose priority level is lower than the boot option of legacy operating system is not booted automatically For example boot of legacy operating system is executed when Legacy CD ROM
109. can be specified Also the following restrictions apply The character string must begin with an alphabetic character The character string cannot begin or end with the following character specified hyphen or period The default is PRIMEQUEST Product Serial Number For example if the serial number is 1020516004 the character string is PRIMEQUEST1020516004 Remarks The setting in FQDN format is not required if you are not operating on the domain IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address DNS optional DNS Sets whether to use the DNS server To use the DNS select Enable The default is Disable DNS Server 1 Sets the IP address of the Primary DNS server DNS Server 2 Sets the IP address of the Secondary DNS server DNS Server 3 Sets the IP address of the Third DNS server Management LAN Dualization Duplicates the management LAN The default is Disable Maintenance IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the CE REMCS LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address SMTP address Sets the SMTP IP address Internal IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the Internal LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Set
110. command show partition name Displays the name of the specified partition Privilege All 1 Input format show partition name lt partition gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example When name of the partition 3 is displayed show partition name 3 hogehoge 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to show partition name command 2 3 10 show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Displays Memory Mirror RAS Mode of the specified partition mirror_keep Sets the Mirror Keep Mode capacity_keep Sets the Capacity Keep mode Privilege All 1 Input format show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When Memory Mirror RAS Mode of partition 3 is displayed show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode3 current mirror_keep setting capacity_keep 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is inv
111. device In the FIGURE 3 54 Change of the Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 1 HardDisk Drive 00 is selected FIGURE 3 54 Change of the Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 1 Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 1 Press Enter key A pop up window shown in FIGURE 3 55 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 2 appears UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 55 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 2 3 The cursor is placed on the boot option which is to be set in HardDisk Drive N In the FIGURE 3 55 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 2 the boot option is set for HardDisk Drive 00 4 Enter key is pressed In FIGURE 3 55 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 2 the boot option of HardDisk Drive 00is changed from Bus 08 Dev 00 PCI RAID Adapter to Fujitsu HandyDrive100 FIGURE 3 56 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 3 is an example of window when the priority level of HDD is substituted When the boot option set in HardDisk Drive Order N is set in another HardDisk Drive Order M before setting the boot option which had been set in HardDisk Drive Order N before making changes is set in HardDisk Drive Order M In FIGURE 3 56 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 3 Bus 08 Dev 00 PCIRAID Adapter is set to HardDisk Drive Order 01 in wh
112. displayed in System Event Log window can be set in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 99 System Event Log Filtering Condition Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenanc Logout System Event Log Filtering Condition 1 Severity 2 Unit 3 Source Select the filtering conditions and click the Apply button to take effect Note The followings are AND conditions V Error l Warning F Info AN O Specified _ PSUs Fans SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 SB 3 IOU 0 IOU 1 IOU 2 IO DU 0 DU 1 OPL MMB AU O Specified CDU DIMM Chipset Voltage Temperature Other 4 Sort by Date Time New event first Old event first 5 Start Date Time First event O Specified Time 203 Ea Ca Iesch 6 End Date Time Lastevent Specified Time BZ FE DR PR 7 Number of events to display Max 3000 100 99 I lt Apply Cancel Default Setting TABLE 1 134 Display and Setting Items on System Event Log Filtering Condition Window Items Description Severity Check the Severity check box Multiple selections are possible Error Warning Info Monitor All are ON by default Note Monitor check box is displayed only when login is done with CE privilege Source Unit Sort by Date Time Select target source
113. for PCI Express which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled slot 2 of PCl_Box 0 UEFI Menu Operations Slot 68 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 3 of PCl_Box 0 By default it is Disabled which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 69 ODROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 4 of PCl_Box 0 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 70 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express slot 5 of PCl_Box 0 Slot 71 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 6 of PCl_Box 0 Slot 72 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 7 of PCl_Box 0 Slot 73 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 8 of PCl_Box 0 which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 74 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 9 of PCl_Box 0 Enable
114. for confirmation privilege Sets the privileges of the user account You can specify either admin operator user or ce Quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example Example In case of admin authority add user Aaaaaaaa Bbbbbbbb Bbbbbbbb admin Example In case of operator authority add user Aaaaaaaa Bbbbbbbb Bbbbbbbb operator 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid No more User addition Same name already exists User addition failed 2 6 14 show user list User account information registered in the system is displayed 2 6 15 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Privilege Administrator 1 Input format show user _list 2 Option None 3 Usage example show user Jet user_name privilege Aaaaaaaa Admin Cccccccccc Operator Dddddddd CE 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid console Login to the system by telnet Execute the Text Console connection of BMC The Text Console connection to BMC can be connected only by one command per BMC However the foll
115. hh Time 00 23 mm Minutes 00 59 CC First two digits of the year option YY Last two digits of the year option SS Seconds option Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set date MMDDhhmm CC YYH SS 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified date is invalid Unable to set date because NTP is enabled Time synchronization was requested to Standby MMB Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 2 14 set partition dynamic_partitioning 2 2 15 Sets the enable disable of Dynamic Reconfiguration of the specified partition When executing the settings by this command for the partition whose power is already on message shown below is displayed and settings cannot be done Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown When settings of the partition for which power supply is already switched off are to be changed it is not necessary to turn On Off the power supply The value set at that instant is reflected without displaying the above mentioned message Moreover when existing value and set value are same it is not necessary to turn On Off the power sup
116. in the Standby status MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 8 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Administrator Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode System System Power Hot System RW Control Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB MMB 0 Hot System RO Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB 1 Same as for MMB 0 Partition Power Control Hot System RW Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Partition Hot System RW Add is Configuration suppressed since the Free unit may be a replacement unit Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Add SB IOU Same as for to Partition Partition Configuration Remove SB Same as for IOU from Partition Partition Configuration Partition Home Same as for Partition Configuration Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Reserved SB Hot System RW Configuration Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Console Hot System RW Redirection Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Network Configuration Network IPv4 Interface Hot System RO Interface Hot Partition RO IPv6 Interface Warm System RO Cold System RO Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Hot System RO Firmware Hot Partition RO Update Warm Syst
117. is displayed when the Select a dump device menu is selected in the Dump device Manager menu Select dump device for use from created dump device Setting dump device Select the dump device used FIGURE 6 10 Setting dump device Menu TABLE 6 11 Displayed contents of the menu selection area Item Description The 1st dump device Select the 1st dump device If not selected yet only 1 is displayed The 2nd dump device Select the 2nd dump device If not selected yet only 2 is displayed The 3rd dump device Select the 3rd dump device If not selected yet only 3 is displayed Clear setting Clears all the current setting Commit Changes and Exit Saves the changes and exits this menu Discard Changes and Exit Cancels the changes and exits this menu 6 8 Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 12 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tl Move Highlight Move the cursor up or down If 1 2 or 3 is selected move to Select device lt Enter gt Select Entry Otherwise perform processing corresponding to the selected item Note Don t operate F2 key Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it If Commit Changes and Exit is performed all the selected devices including the devices that has already been selected previously is being checked If there s a selected device that is actually not pres
118. is moved above Windows Boot Manager and the boot of Windows is not executed automatically Specifically set according to the following procedures 1 Decide the boot priority level by the Change Boot Order window of the Boot Options menu See W Change Boot Order menu 2 Set startup priority level of multiple Floppy in the Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order menu of the Boot Options menu See W Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order menu 3 Set startup priority level of multiple HDD in the Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order menu of the Boot Options menu See ll Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order menu 3 3 4 UEFI Menu Operations 4 Decide priority level between multiple DVD CD according to the Set Legacy DVD CD ROM Drive Order menu of the Boot Options menu See W Set Legacy DVD CD ROM Drive Order menu In the boot specification of legacy BIOS the priority level between multiple DVD CD can be set in the DVD CD type 5 Decide priority level between multiple network ports according to the Set Legacy NET Drive Order menu of the Boot Options menu See W Set Legacy NET Drive Order menu In the boot specification of legacy BIOS the priority level between multiple network ports can be set in the network port type Boot processing 1 Flow of startup of boot processing The flow of the startup by the boot specification of the boot specification of UEFI and legacy BIOS is shown in TABLE 3 4 Flow of startup by boot
119. it is mandatory to mount two CPUs for each SB in the partition If the maintenance mode Hot Partition Maintenance Warm System Maintenance or Cold system Maintenance is set only the user Maintenance person Administrator privilege who sets the maintenance mode can operate this mode In case of the partition other than the maintenance target a message is displayed and operation is not possible TABLE 1 70 Display Items and Set Items of Add SB IOU to Partition Window Items Description Free SB Displays the SB in the free status Status which does not belong to any partition Status Displays the status of the SB Number of CPUs Displays the number of CPU mounted on the SB Memory Displays the amount of memory mounted on the SB Free IOU Displays the IOU in the free status Status which does not belong to any partition Status Displays the status of the IOU Number of PCI Express slots Displays the number of PCI Express slot of the IOU DR MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations When Add is instructed for a Partition in which operating system has already operated and when the operating system supports Hot add SB IOU added during operating system operation executed by Hot add can be used 1 Menu Operation Partition Partition Configuration Add Unit button 2 Window Operations 1 Select the SB or IOU to be incorporated in the partition and then click the Apply bu
120. items and values that can be set are listed A 1 Setting Items of MMB Web UI Initial value and value that can be set of setting items of MMB Web UI are listed on each window A 1 1 Setting items of System Event Log Filtering Condition Window A 1 2 Setting items of Operation Log Filtering Condition Window A 1 3 Setting items of System Information Window A 1 4 Setting items of System Setup Window A 1 5 Setting items of System Power Control Window A 1 6 Setting items of Power Control Window A 1 7 Setting items of Schedule Control Window A 1 8 Setting items of Add Schedule Edit Schedule Window A 1 9 Setting items of Partition Configuration Window A 1 10 Setting items of IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window A 1 11 Setting items of IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window A 1 12 Setting items of Power Management Setup Window A 1 13 Setting items of ASR Control Window A 1 14 Setting items of Console Reduction Window A 1 15 Setting items of Mode Window A 1 16 Setting items of Add User Edit User Window A 1 17 Setting items of Date Time Window A 1 18 Setting items of IPv4 Interface Window A 1 19 Setting items of IPv4 Interface Window A 1 20 Setting items of Management LAN Port Configuration Window A 1 21 Setting items of Network Protocols Window A 1 22 Setting items of Refresh Rate Window A 1 23 Setting items of SNMP Community Window A 1 24 Setting items of SNMP Trap Window A 1 25 Setti
121. not be resolved contact your sales representative or repairs assistance service Confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed on the main unit and report it 1 2 1 System Status window System Status window shows the status of entire PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system The contents displayed may differ depending on the configuration of the unit You can also display details of each unit by clicking the link displayed in the frame FIGURE 1 1 System Status window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Namber MCXXXXXXX FUjiTsU Serial Numbor SERIES Status Normal Pate Net gt S System Status Rekesh Help Click a bk below to view detailed information abou cach unit H 3 The contents which are displayed as the status of unit are as follows OK It is shown for the unit which operates normally without any trouble Not present It is shown for the unit which is not mounted It is shown in gray colored background Warning Though it is not serious it shows the unit where a problem may occur It is shown by amp icon Failed It shows the unit where failure has occurred and it must be disconnected It is shown by icon 1 2 2 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Degraded It shows that a failure has occurred in the component of a certain unit and the unit is operated without disconnecting the failed component It is shown by icon TABLE 1 15 Status of
122. number of physical drives connected with RAID Card is displayed Logical Drives count The number of logical drives composed under the control of RAID Card is displayed Serial Number The serial number of RAID Card is displayed Firmware Version The firmware version of RAID Card is displayed Physical Drives Slot The slot number equipped with a physical drive is displayed Status The state of a physical drive is displayed Operational S Available Failed 7 Hot Spare 5 Rebuilding SMART err s Shielded Bad Block Not present Vendor The vender of a physical drive is displayed Model The model name of a physical drive is displayed Capacity The capacity of a physical drive is displayed Temperature The temperature of a physical drive is displayed Logical Drives Sensor The sensor number of a logical drive is displayed Status The state of a logical drive is displayed Raid Level The RAID level of a logical drive is displayed Physical Drives The slot number of a physical drive that composes a logical drive is displayed assignment Missing drives count The number of physical drives missed to compose a logical drive at the RAID level is displayed RAID Action Progress Drive Type The drive type that the RAID action is executed is displayed Physical Hardware RAID Logical Software RAID MMB Web UI Web User Interface Op
123. of PCI_Box 2 Slot 104 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 7 of PC Box 2 Slot 105 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 8 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 106 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 9 of PCI_ Box 2 Slot 107 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 10 of PCL_Box 2 Slot 108 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 11 of PCl_Box 2 Slot 113 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 114 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 1 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 115 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 2 of PCI Box Slot 116 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 3 of PC Box 3 Slot 117 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 4 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 118 OPROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Disabled slot 5 of PCI_ Box 3 Slot 119 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 6 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 120 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 7 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 121 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 8 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 122 OpROM
124. of storage devices recognized by UEFI is displayed 3 Display of Operation help Description of operation key shown in TABLE 3 51 Display contents of Display of Operation help is displayed TABLE 3 51 Display contents of Display of Operation help Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager Addition of Boot Option The addition of Boot Option is implemented by the following procedure 1 Place the cursor on the storage device in which the start up files that are to be added are stored from the list of devices shown in FIGURE 3 36 A list of Devices UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 36 A list of Devices File Explorer 2 Press Enter key As shown in Fl a list of files in the selected storage device is displayed The matter enclosed in lt gt is a directory Following is the display example when the disk installed by Windows Server 2012 is selected In case of Windows Server 2012 EFI Microsoft Boot bootx64 efi file is an Operative system loader FIGURE 3 37 Display example of File Selection Window File Explorer UEFI Menu Operations Following is the description of the example of creation of boot option specifying this file Remark Directory structure of the disk installed for Windows Server 2012 The disk installed for Windows Server 2012 has
125. partition cannot be operated Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only the partition to be managed 1 Input format reset partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet 2 Option partition This option specifies a Hard Reset of the partition identified by the specified partition number This partition can be omitted partition Partition number Even if the partition parameter is omitted processing assumes that the partition parameter is specified Therefore a partition number must be specified Partition is number specified as follows Partition numbers are separated by comma Specifies with the range of partition number quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example Example When reset is specified to Partition 1 by Administrator Authority Administrator gt reset partition 1 Are you sure you want to Reset to Partition 1 Y N Y Administrator gt 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to Reset to Partition d Y N The specified parameter is invalid The specified partition number is invalid Unable to Reset the partition d Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Unable to execute this command because the system is und
126. partition configuration Permitted Displays the partition configuration set partition home Sets the Home SB show partition home Permitted Displays the Home SB set partition memory_operation_mode Sets Memory operation mode show partition memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set partition pci_address_mode Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show partition pci_address_mode Permitted Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set partition lan_device_mode Sets LAN device mode show partition lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode show partition mirror_mode Permitted Displays the Mirror mode setting set partition name Sets the partition name show partition name Permitted Displays the partition name Time related set date Sets the date and time show date Permitted Displays the date and time set timezone Sets the time zone show timezone Permitted Displays the time zone Network related set ip Sets the management LAN address set ipv6 Sets the IPv6 management LAN address show ip Permitted Displays the management LAN address show ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 management LAN address set hostname Sets the MMB host name show hostname Permitted Displays the MMB host name set gateway Sets the gateway address set gateway_ipv6 Sets the IPv6
127. set ipv6 auto 2001 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 1234 5678 9abc def0 64 Are you sure to continue Y N 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB The specified IP address is invalid The specified netmask is invalid The specified IP address is duplicate The specified IP address is loopback address 2 2 24 set maintenance_ip Remarks Only IPv4 is supported Set IP address in Maintenance port 2 2 25 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Set point of default is 0 0 0 0 common in ip address netmask gateway address smtp address Sets virtual IP address of MMB connected in Serial Sets point of default is 0 0 0 0 lt ip address gt IP address set in Maintenance port when 0 0 0 0 is specified settings are cleared lt subnet mask gt Subnet mask of IP address lt gateway address gt Gateway lt smtp address gt Mail server for REMCS notification Remarks When you change SMTP Address by this command it is necessary to change the settings of SMTP server in REMCS environment setting window Moreover before initializing REMCS Routing should be set by this command When REMCS is to be connected in P P lt gateway address gt and lt SMTP address gt are not required In such case lt gateway address gt
128. specified amount of memory is shown below 8388608 Specifies the hot added removed NUMA node number list from now When hot plugged device is SBx and hot plug event timing is ADD_PRE or RM_PRE this option is specified Example of specified NUMA node number list is shown below The NUMA node number list is a list delimited by the comma When this list is delimited by the hyphen it means all ranges of the first and last number are included None means there is no NUMA node 2 3 4 5 7 None Specifies the bus number device number function number PCI address of hot removed PCI device except for PCI bridge from now When hot plugged device is IOUx and hot plug event timing is RM_PRE this option is specified Example of specified PCI address is shown below 01 23 4 01 23 4 56 78 9 ab cd e Refer to the output of the Ispci command for the example of the PCI address Example of specified options by the hot plug collaboration function is shown below path to program1 p SB1 e ADD_PRE c 10 19 m 12345678 n 2 3 path to program2 e ADD_POST r SUCCESS p SB2 5 2 9 5 2 10 5 2 11 Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation path to program3 v p IOU1 e RM_PRE d 00 01 2 03 04 5 path to program4 e RM_POST v p IOU2 r FAILURE Exit status of collaboration program When collaboration program terminates normally and DR function can be continued the collaboration program must return 0 When collaboration prog
129. status of the System Clock OK e Failed Voltage MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type P5VL P1 4VL P1 8VL P1 5VL P1 0VL P1 8V_CPU VDDQ_DIMM 1A P1 0V_JC 0A P1 5V_PCH P1 1V PO 9V_PCIEX 0 P1 8V_PCIEX 0 PO 9V_PCIEX 1 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 P12V 0 P5V P3 3V P1 35V_CPU 0 P1 35V_CPU 1 VCC_CPU 0 VSA_CPU 0 VTT_CPU 0 VDDQ_DIMM 0A VDDQ_DIMM 0B P1 0V_JC 0B P1 5V_JC 0AB P1 35V_JC 0AB VCC_CPU 1 VSA_CPU 1 VTT_CPU 1 VDDQ_DIMM 1B P1 0V_JC IA P1 0V_JC 1B P1 5V_JC 1AB P1 35V_JC 1AB VDDQ_DIMM 0C VDDQ_DIMM 0D P1 0V_JC 0C P1 0V_JC 0D P1 5V_JC 0CD P1 35V_JC 0CD VDDQ_DIMM 1C VDDQ_DIMM 1D P1 0V_JC 1C P1 0V_JC 1D P1 5V_JC 1CD P1 35V_JC 1CD Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Low High Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Low High Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places TABLE 1 44 SB x Window Button Buttons Description On When the On button is clicked the Location LED is ON Off When the Off button is clicked the Location LED is OFF Status Clear Clears the status of the SB MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations
130. string Meaning X Matches 0 or more characters in the file name Matches exactly 1 character in the file name Character string Matches any of the characters between the brackets An example is azA Z Output redirection UEFI shell command output can be redirected to a file The syntax to do so is as follows Command gt unicode_output_file_pathname Command gt a ascii_output_file_pathname Command 1 gt unicode_output_file_pathname Command 1 gt a ascii_output_file_pathname Command 2 gt unicode_output_file_pathname Command 2 gt a ascii_output_file_pathname Command gt gt unicode_output_file_pathname Command gt gt a ascii_output_file_pathname Command 1 gt gt unicode_output_file_pathname Command 1 gt gt a ascii_output_file_ pathname TABLE 4 2 Output redirection lists the types of output redirection and append TABLE 4 2 Output redirection Character string Meaning gt Redirects the standard output to a Unicode file gt a Redirects the standard output to an ASCII file 1 gt Redirects the standard output to a Unicode file 1 gt a Redirects the standard output to an ASCII file 2 gt Redirects the standard error output to a Unicode file 2 gt a Redirects the standard error output to an ASCII file gt gt Appends the standard output to a Unicode file gt gt a Appends the standard output to an ASCII file 1 gt gt Appends the standard output to a Unicode file
131. sure you want to sadump to Partition 1 Y N Y Administrator gt 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to sadump to Partition d Y N The specified parameter is invalid The specified partition number is invalid Unable to sadump the partition d Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to sadump the Partition n because you have not authority to operate this partition Unable to sadump the partition s because the partition which does not have authority to you is included in the specified parameter reset Specify the Hard Reset to the specified partition 2 2 10 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations When the partition specified by the parameter is not configured the partition which is not configured is ignored When the specified partition is not in Power On state any kind of processing for such partition is not done Partition Operator can operate only the partition to be managed When the parameter which contains the partitions other than those to be managed is specified then error message is displayed and the specified
132. synchronized Displays the latest synchronous time together with the IP address as follows XXX XXX XXX XXX yyyy mm dd dd mm ss When not synchronized Displays No Sync TABLE 1 88 Buttons in the Date Time window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as the date and time zone 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Date Time 2 Window Operations 1 Specify information such as the date and time zone Then click the Apply button This sets the information such as the date and time zone Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed E_00020 The IP address overlaps E 00100 Failed to set Date Time information W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00434 Invalid Time Format W_00433 The duplicate IP address was found W_00432 Invalid IP Address specified For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Time synchronization with NTP This section describes the operational specifications for the NTP client When starting time synchronization The NTP client on the MMB synchronizes the time at the start of operation irrespective of the time di
133. the Apply button is clicked For example if you change the date to August 1 during daylight savings time at 13 00 on January 1 outside daylight savings time processing assumes that the specified time and date are 13 00 on August 1 Time Displays the Date Time window display time hh mm ss This time is shown in 24 hour format To update the displayed time the window must be refreshed If automatic refresh is set the displayed time is the window refresh time To set a time check the Modify the Time check box With this check box checked the hh mm ss field can be set With the check box unchecked the hh mm ss field in MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description the window is grayed out Time zone Used to select a time zone from the pull down menu NTP Sets whether to enable or disable the NTP function Enable Disable With Enable selected the MMB synchronizes with the time of the NTP server specified below in NTP 1 to NTP3 It is synchronized with immediately after the Enable setting at the time of the server side regardless of the setting of NTP Time Correction Mode The default is Disable NTP Time Sets an NTP time correction mode Correction Mode This item is valid only if NTP is Enable If it is set to Disable the item is grayed out Step If the time difference with the NTP server is less than 128 milliseconds the MMB uses Slew mode 0 0005 sec
134. the following directory structure SEET lt Microsoft gt lt Boot gt Bootx64 efi Operative System Boot Loader 3 Following the directory structure bootx64 efi which is an Operative System boot loader is displayed as shown in FIGURE 3 38 Windows Server 2012 Installed Disk Window FIGURE 3 38 Windows Server 2012 Installed Disk Window File Explorer 4 Press ft key and key and select bootx64 efi which is an operating system loader registered additionally 5 Press Enter key Window showing FIGURE 3 39 Display Example of Boot Option Name Change Window is displayed UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 39 Display Example of Boot Option Name Change Window Modify Boot Option Description Set Boot option name and set options when booting a Boot option name setting Place the cursor on Input the description press Enter key Enter name as Pop up window for input is displayed b Setting options when booting Place the cursor on Input Optional Data press Enter key Enter name as Pop up window for input is displayed For details on the number of characters and types of character that can be entered see liNumber of Characters and Types of Characters that can be entered 6 Exit from this menu by following operations e To exit from this menu after saving the changed setting select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key To exit from this menu without saving the changed setting select
135. therefore only one menu is explained here O SB x Window SB x window displays the status of SB x board and the settings of SB x board can be carried out FIGURE 1 113 SB x Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Ram Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt SB gt SB 0 SB 0 Status Clear Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Clear All Status Clear Specified Status Select the appropriate Status Clear box Clear Status of common parts Not present Not present W MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations gt System gt SB gt SB LR jg a a a a lg Sal HF User Administration FIGURE 1 114 SB x Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 Serial Number AAS Normal A Ki Status Clear FIGURE 1 115 SB x Window 3 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 o Serial Number Status Normal gt System gt SB gt SB 0 olajolololololajololololn oe Network Configuration Maintenance SB 0 Logical Drives Drive Type Slot Sensor Estimated time remaining hhmm ss Chipsets Chipset OK TPM z TPM OK BMC OK FBU FBU OK Clock w MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Network Conhpuratior FIGURE 1 116 SB x Window 4 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number Serial Number MCF
136. two ways Access via the serial port on the MMB Access via the management LAN of the MMB from a remote PC Remarks Similar to the GUI the CLI also enables up to 16 users to log in to the CLI concurrently 2 1 1 Access to the CLI via the serial interface You can access the CLI of the MMB via the serial interface by using the following procedure 1 Connect your terminal eg laptop PC to the MMB with an RS 232C crossover cable 2 Start the terminal software e g Windows HyperTerminal on the terminal Then configure the terminal software as follows TABLE 2 1 Terminal software setting values Parameter Value Bits second 19200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Emulation VT100 3 The login prompt appears Enter your user name and password to log in 2 1 2 Access via the management LAN interface You can access the CLI of the MMB via the management LAN interface by using the following procedure 1 Connect a remote PC to the MMB with a straight LAN cable 2 Start the telnet or SSH client on the remote PC Establish a connection between the remote PC and the MMB by specifying the IP address IPv4 or IPv6 of the MMB and the telnet port number or SSH port number 3 Enter the account and password to log in Remarks The MMB provides connection features that work only with the SSH V2 protocol This means you need to be running SSH V2 compatible terminal software to conn
137. way this item is not displayed also when Authentication Type is set to None this item is not displayed Number of characters that can be entered is in the range of 12 16 Remarks lf number of characters are not enough then pop up window of Please enter enough characters Press ENTER to continue is displayed Types of characters that can be entered are given below 0 9 A Z a 2 amp i lt gt Y Ui Save Changes Saves the changed contents UEFI Menu Operations Back to Previous Page Cancels the changed contents which are set and exits from this menu 1 When Internet Protocol is set to IP6 this item is not displayed 3 Operation help display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 34 Display contents of operation help display UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 34 Display contents of operation help display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving the changes of this menu 3 4 9 3 Delete Attempts Menu In Delete Attempts menu Attempt can be cancelled and also SCSI settings set in that network port can be cancelled Changes in this menu are enabled after the resetting the system FIGURE 3 26 Display example of Delete Attempts menu 1 Page i
138. window display example of Security Configuration menu FIGURE 3 30 Display Example of Security Configuration Menu Bh ee gemengten 1 Page information display Displayed as Security Configuration menu 2 Menu selection Selection menu is shown in the TABLE 3 43 Display Contents of Menu Selection TABLE 3 43 Display Contents of Menu Selection Item Display contents TPM Support Sets whether TPM is supported in BIOS Disabled Enabled Default setting is Disabled TPM State Performs the settings for status of TPM chip Disabled Enabled Default setting is Disabled Remarks Displayed when Enabled is selected in TPM Support Sets the value of TPM Enabled Status and TPM Active Status as per the set value of TPM Status as mentioned below e When Enabled is selected TPM Enabled Status Enabled UEFI Menu Operations TPM Activate Status gt Activated e When Disabled is selected TPM Enabled Status gt Disabled TPM Activate Status gt Deactivated Pending TPM operation Performs settings on other TPM chip None Enable Take Ownership Disable Take Ownership TPM Clear Default setting is None Remarks Pending TPM operation is displayed when Enabled is selected in TPM Support TPM Enabled Status of Current TPM operation is Enabled and selection is possible if TPM Active Status is
139. window to edit a filter Remove Filter Deletes the selected filter Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Access Control 2 Window Operations Adding a new filter 1 Click the Add Filter button The Add Filter window appears MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 2 Configure the filter in the Add Filter window Then click the Apply button This adds the new filter Editing a filter Click the radio button of a filter in the Select column so that you can edit the filter Then click the Edit Filter button The Edit Filter window appears ai 2 Specify the save path Edit the filter in the Edit Filter window Then click the Apply button Deleting a filter 1 Click the radio button of a filter in the Select column so that you can delete the filter Then click the Remove Filter button A deletion confirmation dialog box appears 2 Click the OK button This deletes the filter The browser returns to the Access Control window Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed E 00412 You need an empty entry W_00413 Nothing is selected For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Add Filter Edit Filter window Click the
140. 0 Unit 0x5 blk8 Renov Alias mull PcieRoot 0x0 Pci lt A 0x0 USB 0x0 0x0 ZUSB 0x4 0x0 Un it 0x6 IK Renovable BlockDevice Alias null PcieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1C 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x0 Ctr 1 0x0 Scsi lx Daf Press ESC in 1 seconds to skip startup nsh any other key to continue Shell gt _ 4 1 1 Automatic startup file Immediately after starting the UEFI shell checks for the startup nsh file in the defined execution path If the file exists the shell executes the commands specified in the file Then it waits for command input from theconsole This situation does not always require the startup nsh file Remarks The execution path is the directory path specified in the shell environment path variable You can display and change this directory path by using the set command 4 1 2 4 1 3 UEFI Command Operations UEFI shell command syntax You can view and display the shell environment variables by using the set command To access an environment variable value as an argument for a shell command enclose the variable name in percent signs as shown below Ymyvariable The shell has a special variable called lasterror This variable retains the value returned by the last executed shell command The file name argument in shell commands uses the following characters as wildcards and J TABLE 4 1 Wildcard characters in the UEFI shell Character
141. 0 Access Control window You can control access through network protocols to ensure MMB security in the Access Control window You can configure up to 64 filters These filters are displayed alphabetically by protocol name Remarks You can register multiple access control filters with the same configuration These filters do not affect operation MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 85 Access Control window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00 Active Det Part Number MCXXXXNXX FUjiTSU Serial Namber Ocoee States i S zm Patioan lt Admissi a gt Network Configuration gt Access Coetrol Access Control Click Add Fitter button to add a new fiker Select a fiker from the Est then click Edit Remove Fiker button to edit or remove the Ster Acht Fitter Edit Fiker Remove Fitar Cancel TABLE 1 119 Setting and display items in the Access Control window Items Description Select Used to select the filter for which you want to change the setting Protocol Displays the protocol for IP filtering HTTP HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP IP Address __ Displays the IP address permitted to connect i Subnet Mask For IPv4 the subnet mask of the IP address that has permission to connect is displayed TABLE 1 120 Buttons in the Access Control window Buttons Description Add Filter Displays the Add Filter window to add a new filter Edit Filter Displays the Edit Filter
142. 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Appendix A List of Setting Items A 1 20 Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks 0 FFFF 0 FFFF MMB 1 IP Interface Disable Enable Address Disable Hostname None Sets hostname in FQDN First character must be optional format a z A Z 0 9 alphabetic character Hyphen Dot Hyphen Dot cannot be used as the first character and the last character IP Address None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Prefix Length None 1 128 Gateway None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF address 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF DNS DNS Disable Enable optional Disable DNS Server 1 None Sets the IP address of primary DNS Server DNS Server 2 None Sets the IP address of primary DNS Server DNS Server 3 None Sets the IP address of primary DNS Server Management Dualization Disable Enable LAN e Disable Maintenance Interface Disable Enable IP Address Disable IP Address None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Prefix Length None 1 128 Gateway None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF address 0O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF SMTP address None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Setting Items of Management LAN Port Configuration Window The following table lists the init
143. 00 00 00 00 00 00 Maintenance Port Displays MAC address of the MMB port 00 00 00 00 00 00 Firmware Version Firmware Version Location LED Displays the status of the Location LED The following are the various display status On During power on Off During power off On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking On Off buttons Reset MMB Resets the MMB if this check box is checked Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Low High MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Description Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal TABLE 1 164 MMB x Window button Buttons Description Apply Click the Apply button to set the specified control information Cancel Click the Cancel button to restore the original information and not set the specified information MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations CHAPTER 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations This chapter describes the CLI command line interface provided by the MMB 2 1 Basic Operations with the CLI You can access the CLI in the following
144. 09 Ox Ox 00 PCi 02 00 lt nr Device path of GigaLAN is as follows Pcieroot 0x0 PCI 0x02 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 PCI 0x10 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 PCI 0x09 0x0 PCI 0 Pcieroot 0x0 E Se ER UEFI Command Operations CHAPTER 4 UEFI Command Operations This chapter describes the operations of UEFI commands 4 1 Automatic startup file The UEFI of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series supports the UEFI shell function Users can use the UEFI shell toexecute commands from the UEFI console FIGURE 4 1 Sample screenshot of the UEFI shell immediately after it starts shows a screenshot of when the UEFI shell starts FIGURE 4 1 Sample screenshot of the UEFI shell immediately after it starts blk Removable HardDisk Alias null PcieRoot 0x Pei Ox1C 0x0 Pc i 0x0 0x0 ZC tr 1 0x0 5cs i 0x1 0x0 HD 1 MB Disk Alias null Pci 0 Pci 0x0 0x0 Ctr 1 0x0 Scsi 0x1 0x0 HD 2 MB KR Ox0ECB 44 16000 blk2 Renovable Blot ice Alias ull PcieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1A 0x0 USB 0x0 0x0 USB Ox4 0x0 Un it 0x0 IK Renovable BlockDevice Alias null ot 0x0 Pc i 0x1 0x0 USB 0x0 Daf USB 0x4 0 Unit 0x1 blk4 le B Alias null t jot 0x0 Pci OxiA ISB 0x0 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x2 blk5S Renovable BlockDevice Alias null ieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1A 0x0 USB 0x0 D USB 0x4 0x0 Un it 0x3 blk6 R BlockDevice s null 0x0 Pc 1A 0x USB 0x0 0x0 USB 0x4 De Unit 0x4 blk Re x
145. 22 E178EN The setting will become effective the next time the partition power off on is performed The SB with DIMM that does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode is registered as a Reserved SB If you register this partition as a Mirror Mode Mirror Mode will be disabled when switching to Reserved SB Are you sure to continue Y N The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to register the specified Partition d as Mirror Mode enable because the CPU mismatch between SBs Unable to register the specified Partition d as Mirror Mode enable because the DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode Unable to register the specified Partition d as Mirror Mode enable because the unsupported CPU configuration Unable to register the specified Partition d as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal CPU composition Unable to register the specified Partition d as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal DIMM composition MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal SB composition Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal VRM composition Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute set partition command Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to chang
146. 23 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 Menu Operation System OPL 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Confirmation dialogue box is displayed 2 Click the OK button to clear the error message and click the Cancel when you do not want to clear the error status of OPL 1 2 18 MMB Menu In MMB menu each MMB Unit has menu MMB 0 MMB 1 Since the window and the operation method are the same in all menus units of only one unit is described here CL MMB x Window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations In MMB x Window information related to MMB can be displayed and the Location LEDs can be set FIGURE 1 35 MMB x Window Model PRIMEQUEST28500E Part Nember MCXXXXXXX FU Serial Nember aces at Status Normal gt System gt MMB gt MMB 0 MMB 0 Click the Apply Button to appty al changes CA07603 DosI Al ppi av Cancel TABLE 1 53 Display of MMB x Window setting items Active MMB 20 Items Description Board Information Status pea the status of the MMB OK Not present Warning Degraded Failed Role pple the operation status of the MMB Active Standby Disabled Part Number Displays part number of the MMB Serial Number Displays the serial number of the MMB MAC User port Displays MAC address of the
147. 302A4 of 29 of Not present Not present to install at least ie an ee Size Rani IMM in SB 2 SEN Test E TE Status Clear lt gt 1 2 14 IOU Menu The IOU menu includes the following menus for each IOU IOU 0 lOU 3 The menu is not displayed for the IOU which is not installed Since the window and the operating method are same for each menu only one menu is described here O lOU x Window IOU x window displays the status of the IOU installed in IOU x slot In addition IOU can be set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 26 IOU x Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number aS Status Normal gt System gt IOU gt IOU 1 IOU 1 Click the Status Clear button to clear the status Board Information a a a a a a a a a a a a o d D a D Status Clear PCI_Bix connection is available for PRIMEQUEST 2800E and 2400E MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 27 IOU x Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number aS Status Normal gt System gt IOU gt IOU 1 IOU 1 Click the Status Clear button to clear the status Board Information a a a a a a a a a a a a o d D a D Status Clear The displays other than PCl_Box connection do not depend on the model and are the same MMB Web UI Web User In
148. 3AC111 Status Normal Network Configuration Maint fad okee Je Voltage SE G Warning Low High Critical Low High PSVL 499V 4 63 537V 3 23 6 00 V PLIVL V 1 02 1 19 V 0 71 1 32 V P1 8VL 1 80V 1 67 1 93 V 1 16 2 17 V 1 50 V 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 81 V P1 0VL 0 99V 0 92 1 08V 0 64 1 21V P1 8V_CPU V 1 67 1 93 V 1 16 2 17 V VDDQ_DIMM 1A V 1 25 1 61 V 0 87 1 81 V I P1 0V_JC 0A V 0 92 1 08 V 0 65 1 21 V EI P15V_PCH E7 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 80 V u V 1 02 1 19 V 0 71 1 32 V P0 9V_PCIEX 0 V 0 83 0 97 V 0 58 1 09 V P1 8V_PCIEX20 V 1 67 1 93 V 1 17 2 17V PO 9V_PCIEX 1 e 0 83 0 97 V 0 58 1 09 V IER RV DCTRW21 ak TAT 10R3V UD ki Aha Si gt FIGURE 1 117 SB x Window 5 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 o Serial Number Crees Status Normal M ntenance LJ 5 SB 0 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 1 67 1 93 V 117 217 V S u P12V 0 11 15 12 87 V 79 1445 V o 465 538 V 1602 V a P3 3V 3 06 3 54 V 3 98V D P1 35V_CPU 0 7 1 63V Ke P1 35V_CPU 1 1 25 1 45 V 87 1 63 V Ser n EE z Se z GE GE d SE S P1 5V_JC 0AB 1 39 1 61 V 7 181 V P1 35V_JC 0AB 1 25 1 45 V 7 1 63 V VCC_CPU 1 0 55 145V 163V VSA_CPU 1 0 65 1 29V 145V VTT_CPU 1 0 92 1 08 V 121V 5 VDDQ_DIMM 1B 1 25 1 61 V 771 81 V z P1 0V_JC 1A 0 92 1 08 V 1 21 V P1 0V_JC 1B V 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V v MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations
149. 4 the character string is PRIMEQUEST1020516004 Remarks The setting in FQDN format is not required if you are not operating on the domain Automatic Acquisition Automatically acquires data with a click of the Auto button The global address prefix length and gateway IP address are automatically acquired to overwrite existing data IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address DNS optional DNS Sets whether to use the DNS server To use the DNS select Enable The default is Disable MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description DNS Server 1 Sets the IP address of the Primary DNS server DNS Server 2 Sets the IP address of the Secondary DNS server DNS Server 3 Sets the IP address of the Third DNS server Management LAN Dualization Duplicates the management LAN The default is Disable Maintenance IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the CE REMCS LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length SMTP address Sets the SMTP IP address Internal IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the Internal LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length TABLE 1 94 Buttons in the IPv6 Interface
150. 4 10 3 2 1 10 3 2 1 1 023 ms 0 861 ms 0 837 ms 5 10 3 2 2 10 3 2 2 1 049 ms 0 939 ms 0 887 ms 6 10 2 3 5 10 2 3 5 1 285 ms 1 005 ms 0 997 ms 7 10 2 3 4 10 2 3 4 0 976 ms 0 828 ms 0 891 ms 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid 5 Process Executes traceroute lt ip gt netck arptbl Displays the physical address MAC address of the Ethernet from the specified IP address Privilege All 1 Input format netck arptbl 2 Option None 3 Usage example netck arptbl IP address HW type Flags HW address Mask Device 2 3 34 2 3 35 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 10 1 2 3 0x1 0x2 00 21 A1 1A 32 45 KR bond D 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid 5 Process Displays only bond 0 of cat proc net arp Control LAN netck arping Displays the physical address MAC address of the Ethernet from the specified IP address Remarks Support only IPv4 Privilege All 1 Input format netck arping lt ip gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example netck arping 10 1 2 3 ARPING to 10 1 2 3 from 10 1 2 33 via b
151. 46 Schedule List Window Buttons ENEE TABLE 1 147 Display Items and Set Items of Add Schedule Window nee ee ie TABLE 1 148 Add Schedule Window Buttons ENEE TABLE 1 149 Display Items and Set Items of IPv4 Console redirection Setup Wimcdow ENEE 243 TABLE 1 150 IPv4 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons ENEE 244 TABLE 1 151 Display Items and Set Items of IPv6 Console redirection Setup Wircdow ENEE 245 TABLE 1 152 IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons ENEE 245 TABLE 1 153 Display Items and Set Items of Power Management Setup Window ENEE 246 TABLE 1 154 Power Management Setup Window Duttorg ENEE 247 TABLE 1 155 Display Items and Set Items of ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window EEN 248 TABLE 1 156 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Dugone EEN 249 TABLE 1 157 Display Items of Console Redirection Window ENEE 250 TABLE 1 158 Display Items and Setting Items in Mode Window ENEE 251 TABLE 1 159 Display and Setting items on SB x Window TABLE 1 160 SB x Window Button EEN Si ies a TABLE 1 161 Display Items and Setting Items in IOU X Window sesceseeseseeeseeseseeseeeseeseseeseseeseaeeneaeeneaeeasaeeneaeensatensaeeasateneaeeeees 264 TABLE 12162 Button of OBA Screens EE 265 TABLE 1 163 Display of MMB Window Setting eme EEN 267 TABLE 1 164 MMB x Window button EE TABLE 2 1 Terminal software Setting ValU S scscscesscssseseseseessseeceeseeseseeesecseseenseessseseenseessueseenece
152. 7 Are you sure is displayed Click OK button Progress window appears while the system event log information is collected 4 System Event Log Collect window appears and the link to event data which is collected is displayed with date information When you click the link a dialog box appears By specifying the file name and path name event data can be downloaded to the PC which displays Web UI MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 98 System Event Log Collect Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number oma Status Normal Please download the data collected clicking the following Fri 17 Jan 2014 14 20 05 If you want to update the System Event Log please click on the Collect button Se eee eo oe ee RI a GG gt Narrowing down the events displayed in the window 1 Click the Filter button The System Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering filtering conditions appears 2 Enter the conditions in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window Then click the Apply button The browser returns to the System Event Log window The window displays the events that satisfy the specified conditions O System Event Log Filtering Condition Window Click Filter button on the System Event Log window The System Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering filtering conditions appears The filtering conditions of events which are
153. 7L7001505F G817L7000505F a SS CA07603 E501 G818L6005H05F Read Error Read Error CJ C C C CJ L LI D LI i a E Read Error Read Error LJ A v TABLE 1 38 Display Item on Power Supply Window Items Description System Power Status Displays the power supply status of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system chassis R On Standby Power Supply Displays redundancy status of PSU FANU Redundancy S Redundant In case of the PSU is redundant Non redundant Sufficient Resources When there is a PSU which is required to operate the system even if redundancy of the PSU is lost 2 Non redundant Insufficient Resources When redundancy of the PSU is lost and when there is no PSU which is required for operating the system PSU Status Displays the status of PSU FANU OK E Not present Failed R A C Lost S Configuration error __ When Type is FANU PSU Power Status Displays power supply ON OFF status of PSU FANU MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description On Off __ When Type is FANU Type Displays the types of PSU FANU g PSU_P PSU supporting 80PLUS PLATINUM e PSU_S PSU supporting 80PLUS SILVER i FANU Module of FAN only For Not present Mixing of PSU_P PSU_S in the same component is not possible Part Number Displays the part number of the PSU FANU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the PSU FANU Power Consumption
154. 94 TABLE A 21 Setting Items of Network Protocols Window ENEE 495 TABLE A 22 Setting Items of Refresh Rate Window c secsssesssesssesesesssssescstsscsesseseeneseeaeateaesesseeteaeseeaeateasateasateasateasateaseteaeateaees 495 TABLE A 23 Setting Items of SNMP Community Window Sie D 496 TABLE A 24 Setting Items of SNMP Trap Window NEEN 496 TABLE A 25 Setting Items of SNMP v3 Configuration Wimdow ENEE 497 TABLE A 26 Setting Items of Create CSR Window ENEE 498 TABLE A 27 Setting Items of Create Selfsigned Certificate Window ENEE 498 TABLE A 28 Setting Items of Edit User Wimdow ENEE 499 TABLE A 29 Setting Items of Add Filter Edit Filter Window nee te v1 499 TABLE A 30 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Wimdow ENEE 500 TABLE A 31 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Wimcdow ENEE 500 TABLE A 32 Setting Items of I O Space Assignment Configuration Wimdow ENEE 501 TABLE A 33 Setting Items of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Window ENEE 501 TABLE A 34 Setting Items of CPU Configuration Wirdow ENEE TABLE A 35 Setting Items of PCI Bus Padding Configuration Window a we D TABLE A 36 Setting Items of PCI Subsystem Configuration Window ENEE TABLE A 37 Setting Items of IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Window ENEE 503 TABLE A 38 Setting Items of PCI Box OPROM Scan Configuration Window ENEE 504 TABLE A 39 Setting Items of ISCS Configuration Window EEN 506 Preface TABLE A 40 Setting Items of Attempt Co
155. ABLE 1 142 Power Control Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply When you click the Apply button the information of power control items is set Confirm the setting contents if dialog box prompts for Confirmation Cancel When you click the Cancel button returns to source without setting the information of power control items corresponding to partition Remarks When the operating system supports the ACPI the operating system can be shutdown by the above mentioned Power Off operation and the power can be turned off When the operating system is not supported by the ACPI the power is turned off without shutting down the operating system Moreover when the application which is operating in the operating system is not supported even if the operating system is supported by the ACPI the power cannot be turned off Since this is according to the operating system and application specifications for details see the Operating System and Application Manual 1 Menu Operation System Power Control 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Selects the power control items related to each partition from the pull down list of Power Control Then click the Apply button Dialog box for setting confirmation appears 2 Click OK button to execute the settings Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E 00141 Unable to power on the S
156. AC111 Serial Number Came Status Normal er Administration Network Configuratior gt System gt IOU gt IOU 0 E DE Ze DEER at Sa Ss Standby OK Unknown Unknown TI Standby OK Unknown Unknown Standby Not present Standby Not present PCIeSW 0 PCleSW 1 R S RS SIS RW SIS P3 3V P1 8V_PCIEX 0 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 1 16 2 17V PO 9V_PCIEX 0 0 97 V PO 9V_PCIEX 1 V 0 83 0 97V 0 58 1 09 V EI MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 161 Display Items and Setting Items in IOU x Window Items Description Board Information Type Displays types of IOUs IOU_10GbE X IOU_1GbE Status Displays status of the IOU OK Not present Warning Degraded Failed Power Status Displays the power status of the IOU On Standby Part Number Displays the part number of the IOU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the IOU Location LED Shows the display status of the Location LED Following are the display status On During ON Off During OFF On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking On Off button On board LAN LAN Displays the LAN number MAC Address Displays the MAC Address for GbE that is being installed on the IOU Displays Unknown when MAC Address is not clear DU connection PCIC Displays PCIC for DU connection on the IOU Status Displays the status of connection with the DU OK Not connected Incorrect conne
157. Administrator 1 Input format show access_control 2 Option None 3 Usage example Administrator gt show access_control SSH All Telnet All HTTP HTTPS IP Address 10 66 250 190 Netmask 255 255 255 0 SNMP All 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified command is invalid show active_mmb Displays current Active MMB Privilege All 1 Input format show active_mmb 2 Option None 3 Usage example show active_mmb SSH Al Active MMB 11 4 Message None show date Displays current date and time Privilege All 1 Input format 2 3 4 2 3 5 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations show date 2 Option None 3 Usage example show date 2009 11 30 11 14 21 JST 4 Message None show exit_code Displays the exit code of last execution command Privilege All 1 Input format 2 Option None 3 Usage example power on all show exit_code 0 4 Message None show partition configuration Displays the SB and IOU included in the partition Output Format Information related to one partition is displayed in one line Display contents of each row are as follows 1st row Partition number 2nd row Partition name 3rd row Home SB Display in the format
158. Assignment Configuration Menu I O space assignment of various I O devices in the system can be configured in I O Space Assignment Configuration menu After resetting the system UEFI assigns the I O space to the I O device for which Auto or Force are set in this menu There are 15 devices for which the I O space can be assigned However when PCI card with Bridge function is used assignable PCI slots are less than 15 If there are 16 or more devices for which Auto is set in this menu UO space cannot be assigned for those devices To assign the I O space follow the process given below E In this menu there should be 15 or less devices for which Auto is set UEFI Menu Operations E After resetting the system for which I O space is assigned in this menu open this menu once again and confirm that the I O space is assigned for the relevant system The settings changed in this menu are enabled after the system is reset Following is the display of window immediately after start up of I O Space Assignment Configuration Menu FIGURE 3 9 Display example of I O Space Assignment Configuration Menu 1 i I 0 Space Assignment Configuration I E al aie N Ki EE 3 1 Display of page information I O Space Assignment Configuration is displayed 2 Menu Selection Items shown in TABLE 3 14 Display Contents of Menu Selection are displayed in Menu TABLE 3 14 Display Contents of Menu Selection
159. B x Window 5 FIGURE 1 23 SB x Window 6 FIGURE 1 24 SB x Status Clear Window Message Display ENEE 100 FIGURE 1 25 SB x Window When there is NO CPUDIMM ENEE 101 FIGURE 1 26 IOU x Window 1 FIGURE 1 27 IOU x Window 2 FIGURE 1 28 IOU x Window 3 FIGURE A229 DWHX WIG OW assess 2 eesicas exadesttcatages cazaeehsastezhlacasecs ehre ele eelere tate FIGURE 1 30 PCI_Box Window D FIGURE 1 31 PGI Box WindOW lt enee ee AER ieaaGana ania FIGURE 1 32 PCL Box Window 3 s iicccciadin eee a deed een FIGURE 1 33 PCI Box Window Leed FIGURE 134 OPE WinGOW EE FIGURE 1 35 MMB x Une EE FIGURE 1 36 Disk Enclosure x Window 1 FIGURE 1 37 Disk Enclosure x Window 2 FIGURE 1 38 Power Control Window ue FIGURE 1 39 Power Control Window Grayout Display ENEE 125 FIGURE 1 40 Display of Errors of Power Control Wimdw EEN 127 FIGURE 1 41 Schedule Control Window FIGURE 1 42 Schedule List Window ENEE Preface FIGURE 1 43 Schedule List Vimeo EES ee 134 FIGURE 1 44 IPv4 Console Redirection Gen ue 136 FIGURE 1 45 IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window ENEE 138 FIGURE 1 46 Partition Configuration Wimdow ENEE FIGURE 1 47 Add SB IOU to Partition Windw ENEE FIGURE 1 48 Remove SB IOU from Partition Window FIGURE 1 49 Partition Home WIndOW ssis teesien Eidel Neie FIGURE 1 50 Reserved SB Configuration Wimdow ENEE FIGURE 1 51 Power Management Setup WINdOW ENEE FIGURE
160. BLE 6 15 Displayed contents of menu selection area Item Description Discard all dump device Discards all the dump devices and then exits this and Exit menu Exit Exits this menu without discarding any dump device selected ACPI name of dump Select a dump device device TABLE 6 16 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tL Move Highlight Move the cursor up or down If some dump device is selected discard the lt Enter gt Select Entry selected dump device Otherwise perform the selected entry Note Don t operate F2 key Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it 6 10 Select multiple devices Menu This is displayed when Create mode is set to Single in the Create a dump device menu Select multiple disks for dump devices Select multiple devices Selection devices device oi and nd hen you do not make the dump device FIGURE 6 13 Select discard dump device Menu Select multiple devices Menu Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 17 Displayed contents of menu selection area Item Description Go to create dump device Go to Confirmation menu Exit Exits this menu without actually creating any dump device ACPI name of dump ACPI name of the dump device disk is displayed device Select a dump device by Space key then on the right hand of the entry is changed to X Remarks
161. Backup Restore Configuration men ENEE Maintenance Wizard WINdOW c c cccceecetesteccitecseeeueceteceneesnuectresvesstecetecabeecbeesneevecetieceneesibeseseteesbereteeuneecinesberetecaterenent IDEMS See EE E EE EE EE System Menu for PRIMEQUEST 29008 seen System Status e e UE System Event Log UU ee Operation Log Wind OW EES NEESS HEES NEESS System Information WindOW ra s025 cause and gd candela caniundeaaniaieanacdits Firmware Information WinGow cccseascascessesszcezssscacasecesssaaesneaeesassnseeaeusazsnseeneaeusaesessepauesasnspescaeagsesceanqansaenzatanaeapeteqaunnion System Setup WindOW E Power Contro Window Aeddi get EE Schedule Mentee SE EA ee E Console Redirection Setup Men ENEE Power Management Setup Window ASR Control Window Ada EE Console Redirection Milt ee MOC d ele SB Me EE IOU Menu RR KEE OPU Window 02 deii el 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations EEN 269 Basic Operations withthe GL Liege ie EE tanita ear ee 269 Access to the CLI via the serial interface EEN 269 Preface 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 2 7 2 2 8 2 2 9 2 2 10 2 2 11 2 2 12 2 2 13 2 2 14 2 2 15 2 2 16 2 2 17 2 2 18 2 2 19 2 2 20 2 2 21 2 2 22 2 2 23 2 2 24 2 2 25 2 2 26 2 2 27 2 2 28 2 2 29 2 2 30 2 2 31 2 2 32 2 2 33 2 2 34 2 2 35 2 2 36 2 2 37 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 Access via the management LAN interf
162. Balanced Energy Technology Energy Efficient P State HW ALL HW_ALL Displayed when Custom Coordination SW_ALL is selected on Power SW_ANY Technology CPU C3 Report Disabled Disable Displayed when Custom Enable is selected on Power Technology CPU C6 report Enabled lt Disable Displayed when Custom Enable is selected on Power Technology CPU C7 report Enabled Disable Displayed when Custom Enable is selected on Power Technology Package C No Limit CO Displayed when Custom State limit C2 is selected on Power C6 Technology C7 No Limit QPI Link Auto Auto Frequency 8 0GT s Select 7 2GT s 6 4GT s Frequency Disabled Disable Floor Override Enable Perfmon and Disabled Disable DFX devices Enable Appendix A List of Setting Items A 2 4 Setting Items on PCI Bus Padding Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on PCI Bus Padding Configuration window TABLE A 35 Setting Items of PCI Bus Padding Configuration Window Seiting item Number of bus padded to slot Initial value e RON A Values that can be set Remarks A 2 5 Setting Items on PCI Subsystem Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on PCI Subsystem Configuration wind
163. Box 3 Slot 118 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 5 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 119 OPROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 6 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 120 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 7 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 121 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 8 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 122 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 9 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 123 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 10 of PCl_Box 3 By default it is Disabled UEFI Menu Operations Slot 124 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 11 of PCL _Box 3 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Commit Changes and The contents having changes in the settings are Exit saved and exit fro
164. Configuration Window AEN 504 Setting Items on ISCS Configuration Wimdow AEN 506 Setting Items on Attempt Configuration Wimdow EEN 506 Setting Items on Memory Configuration Wind 507 Setting Items on USB Configuration Wimdow EEN Setting Items on Security Configuration Window Setting Items op Video redirection eer Setting Items on Video Wimdow ENEE Setting Items on Keyboard Wimdow een Setting Items on Mouse Window Setting Items on Options Window Preface Figures FIGURE 1 1 System Status ee 63 FIGURE 1 2 System Event Log windw EEN 65 FIGURE 1 3 System Event Log Collect Wimdow AEN 67 FIGURE 1 4 System Event Log Filtering Condition Wirdow ENEE 68 FIGURE 1 5 Operation Log Wirlow seier 70 FIGURE 1 6 Operating Log Filtering Condition Wimdow EEN FIGURE 1 7 Partition Event Log window EEN FIGURE 1 8 Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Window FIGURE 1 9 System Information Wirdon ENEE FIGURE 1 10 Firmware Information Wimdow EEN FIGURE 1 11 System Setup WindOW ENEE 80 FIGURE 1 12 System Power Control Wimdow ue 83 FIGURE 1 13 LEDs Window FIGURE 1 14 Power Supply Wimdow EEN 86 FIGURE 1 15 Fans WindOW 1 EE 88 FIGURE 1 16 Fans Wl erneiere Eer eal miele pa adele ded ed Ada aed dan donee 88 FIGURE t 17 Temperature WindOW oke 90 FIGURE 1 18 SB x Window 1 FIGURE 1 19 SB x Window 2 FIGURE 1 20 SB x Window 3 FIGURE 1 21 SB x Window 4 FIGURE 1 22 S
165. Disable Video redirection cannot be used Default is Disable Virtual Media Sets whether the virtual media can be used or not Enable Virtual media can be used Disable Virtual media cannot be used Default is Disable Automatic acquisition address and prefix length are automatically acquired and overwritten When IPv6 address is automatically acquired the Auto button is clicked IP TABLE 1 152 IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons Buttons Description Auto When you Click Auto button IP address and prefix length is automatically displayed Apply When you click the Apply button video direction of the ssystem virtual media setting is applied Cancel When you click the Cancel button virtual media setting video redirection is not applied and it returns to the original state 1 Menu Operation System Console Redirection Setup IPv6 Console Redirection Setup MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 2 Window Operations 1 Input the IP address prefix length and sets whether video redirection and virtual media should be used 2 Click the Apply button Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00432 Invalid IP Address specified W_00433 The duplicate IP address was found _ 00417 Are you sure 1 7 10 Power Management Setup Window In the Power Managemen
166. Disable setting in Alarm E Mail or the e mail address of the sender Filter Displays the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window for setting conditions for the events for which alarm e mail is sent Test E Mail Sends a test alarm e mail to the specified destination 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Alarm E Mail 2 Window Operations 1 Specify information such as the sender s e mail address and whether to enable or disable Alarm E Mail To set a filter for an event for which alarm e mail is sent click the Filter button The Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window appears 3 Specify the filter in the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window A To send atest alarm e mail click the Test E Mail button This sends a test alarm e mail to the specified sender 5 Click the Apply button This sets the items specified in the window Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00001 Command Completed _ 00013 Setting completed W_00456 Invalid E Mail address format W_00457 Invalid SMTP server address _ 00458 Please check a Subject W_00459 Alarm E Mail is disabled For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window Clicking the Filter button in the Alarm E Mail window displays the Alarm E Mail Filtering C
167. Disabled Default setting is Enabled WOL disabled 1 Menu Operation System Mode 2 Window Operations 1 Specify respective Mode and click the Apply button Confirmation dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Ok button Message MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E 00089 Mirror Mode setting failed E_00090 Power Control Reset setting failed E_00xxx Unable to register the system as Mode enable because the DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mode W_00xxx Unable to change the mode because the system is powered on E_00xxx Unable to register the system as Mode enable because the CPU mismatch between SBs E_00xxx Unable to register the system as Mode enable because the unsupported CPU configuration E_00xxx Unable to register the system as Mode enable because of abnormal CPU composition E_00xxx Unable to register the system as Mode enable because of abnormal DIMM composition E_00xxx Unable to register the system as Mode enable because of abnormal SB composition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 7 14 SB Menu SB Menu consists of the menus in each SB unit The menu of uninstalled SB is not displayed The format of window and operating method are same for each menu
168. Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 9 of PCI_Box 3 Slot 123 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 10 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 124 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 11 of PCl_Box 3 A 2 8 Setting Items on iSCS Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on iSCS Configuration window TABLE A 39 Setting Items of iSCS Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks iSCSI Initiator iSCSI Initiator Name 4 223 characters can be Name entered A 2 9 Setting Items on Attempt Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on Attempt Configuration window TABLE A 40 Setting Items of Attempt Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks iSCSI Mode Disabled e Enabled for MPIO e Enabled e Disabled Internet Protocol IP4 e IP4 IP6 e Autoconfigure Connection Retry 0 0 16 Count Connection 1000 Unit is millisecond Establishing Timeout ISID Generated from MAC Enter last six digits of ISID address Enable DHCP Wu X Initiator IP 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Displayed only when Address DHCP is Enable Initiator Subnet 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Displayed only when Mask DHCP is Enable Gateway 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255
169. Discard Changes and Exit is and press Enter key 7 Confirm that the boot option is added normally by using the following procedure of FIGURE 3 40 Display Example of Boot Manager Menu a Open the Boot Manager menu from Boot Manager front page Menu shown in is displayed b It is confirmed that the added boot option is displayed at the footer UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 40 Display Example of Boot Manager Menu Boot Manager Number of Characters and Types of Characters that can be entered Number of Characters and Types of Characters that can be entered in Add Boot Option Menu are shown in TABLE 3 52 Number of Characters and Types of Characters that can be entered TABLE 3 52 Number of Characters and Types of Characters that can be entered Item Number of Characters Types of Character Input the description 6 75 0 9 A Z a z amp 4 i3 lt gt _ Input Optional Data 0 120 9 A Z a z amp 4 i3 lt gt _ Remarks Input is not possible if the number of characters exceeds the restricted value Though the key exceeding the restricted value seems to be input temporarily it is ignored and is not reflected on the window e Types of characters other than mentioned above cannot be entered Even if it they are temporarily entered they are ignored and are not reflected on window e When the types of characters in Input the description a
170. Displayed only when DHCP is Enable Get Target info via DHCP xX Displayed only when DHCP is Enable Appendix A List of Setting Items entered The types of characters that can be entered are as follows 0 9 A Z a z amp t i3 lt gt _ Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Target Name 4 223 characters can be Displayed when Get entered The types of Target info via DHCP is characters that can be entered disabled are as follows 0 9 A Z a z amp t i 3 lt gt _ Target IP Address 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Displayed when Get Target info via DHCP is disabled Target Port 0 0 65535 Boot LUN 0 X XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX N Hexadecimal Authentication CHAP None Type CHAP CHAP Type One way One way Mutual CHAP Name 125 characters can be CHAP Secret Reverse CHAP Name 12 16 characters can be entered The types of characters that can be entered are as follows 0 9 A Z a z amp lt gt _ 125 characters can be entered The types of characters that can be entered are as follows 0 9 A Z a z amp lt gt _ Sc Reverse CHAP Secret 12 16 characters can be entered The types of characters that can be entered are as follows 0 9 A Z a z amp
171. Displays the power consumption TABLE 1 39 Button of Power Supply Window Button Description Status Clear Clears the error status of the PSU 1 Menu Operation System Power Supply 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Dialog box for confirmation appears 2 Click the OK button to clear the Status of the PSU and click the Cancel button when you do not want to clear the Status of the PSU Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _00029 Status Clear completed E 00123 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 11 Fans window Fans window displays the Fan status in PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series System and clears the Fan status setting MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 15 Fans Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status N Par Configuration gt System gt Fans Fans Click the Status Clear button to clear the status E ri x ox pum pu kK 1 17446 9138 i CA07603 FANM 1 H402 EE OK i 17446 9138 GE 2 Ter ox fene EECHER ox vimo Ba OK mme Jeer f La cao7603 OK TI nm ou O H2 Io Lo
172. E 3 63 Displayed Contents of Menu Selection are displayed TABLE 3 63 Displayed Contents of Menu Selection Items Description ATAPI CDROM Drive N Moves to order change of DVD CD boot If the item is executed N 0 1 the pop up window is displayed and then the setting can be changed The change method is explained in detailed by subsequent m Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order after this Furthermore Commit Changes and Exit After saving the contents for which the setting is changed exit from the menu Discard Changes and Exit After cancelling the contents for which the setting is changed exit from the menu 3 Operation Help Display Description of Operating Keys is shown in the TABLE 3 64 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 64 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager UEFI Menu Operations The contents displayed when the Pop up Window appears are shown in TABLE 3 65 Display Contents of Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears TABLE 3 65 Display Contents of Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Fron
173. EE 359 FIGURE 3 3 Display example of Boot Manager Menu FIGURE 3 4 Boot Option of eet dE DEE FIGURE 3 5 Execution of Legacy Boot Coon ENEE FIGURE 3 6 Example of displayed Boot Manager men ENEE 366 FIGURE 3 7 Example of displayed Device Manager men ANEN 367 FIGURE 3 8 Example of displaying System Information mem ENEE 368 FIGURE 3 9 Display example of I O Space Assignment Configuration Mem 370 Preface FIGURE 3 10 Display of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Men ENEE 372 FIGURE 3 11 Operation Window of PXE SCSI boot Enable Geng ENEE 373 FIGURE 3 12 Display of Boot Manager Mem ENEE FIGURE 3 13 Display of MAC Selecto ube deeg EENS FIGURE 3 14 Display of Set Legacy Net Drive Order Men ENEE FIGURE 3 15 Display Example of CPU Configuration Menu FIGURE 3 16 Example of Display on PCI Bus Padding Configuration Men ENEE 379 FIGURE 3 17 Display Example on PCI Subsystem Configuration Men 380 FIGURE 3 18 Display Example of IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Mem ENNEN 382 FIGURE 3 19 Example of display of PCI Box ODROM Scan Configuration mem 385 FIGURE 3 20 Example of iSCSI Configuration menu window display FIGURE 3 21 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows ENNEN FIGURE 3 22 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 2 MAC Selection men 394 FIGURE 3 23 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 3 Attempt Corfouratonlmem EEN 395 FIGURE 3 24 Display example of MAC Selection mem 396
174. ENEE 87 TABLE 1 40 Display items of Fans wimndow EEN 89 TABLE 1 41 Fans Window Button 89 TABLE 1 42 Display Items on Temperature Wmd EEN 90 Preface TABLE 1 43 Display and Setting items on SB X WINdOW ENEE 94 TABLE 1 44 SB x Window Bupon EEN 99 TABLE 1 45 Display Items and Setting Items in OU Xx WiINGOW ENEE 104 TABLE 1 46 Button of IOB x Screen TABLE 1 47 Display and Setting items of DU x Window TABLE 1 48 Buttons on DU X de UE TABLE 1 49 Display Items of PCI_Boxd x Window ENEE TABLE 1 50 MMB x KU e e Us Du te WEEN TABLE 1 51 Display items of OPL Wimcdow ENEE TABLE 1 52 Button on OPL window TABLE 1 53 Display of MMB x Window setting items TABLE 1 54 MMB x Window DUtON EE TABLE 1 55 Display and Setting items of Disk Enclosure x WinGOw ENEE 120 TABLE 1 56 Display Items and Set Items of Power Control Window ENEE 125 TABLE 1 57 Power Control Window Buttons EEN 127 TABLE 1 58 Display Items and Setting Items of Schedule Control Window a we 129 TABLE 1 59 Schedule Control Window Buttons ENEE 131 TABLE 1 60 Display Items and Set Items of Schedule List Window ENEE 132 TABLE 1 61 Schedule List Window Buttons ENEE 132 TABLE 1 62 Display Items and Set Items of Add Schedule Window ENEE 134 TABLE 1 63 Add Schedule Window Buttons ENEE 135 TABLE 1 64 Display Items and Set Items of IPv4 Console redirection Setup Window ENEE 136 TABLE 1 65 IPv4 Consol
175. Edit If EDIT button is clicked Edit Schedule window appears and the schedule can be changed Remove If Remove button is clicked the selected schedule can be deleted Cancel If Cancel button is clicked the browser returns to the previous window 1 Menu Operation System Schedule Schedule List 2 Window Operations If the schedule is to be added newly 1 Click Add button Add Edit Schedule window appears 2 Add the schedule to the Add Edit Schedule window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations If the schedule is to be changed Select an existing schedule with Radio button 2 Click Edit button Add Edit Schedule window appears 3 Changes an existing schedule in Add Edit Schedule window 5 f If the schedule is to be deleted 1 Select the schedule with Radio button 2 Click Remove button The confirmation dialog box appears 3 Click OK button Deletes the schedule Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed E 00412 You need an empty entry W_00413 Nothing is selected For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Add Schedule window Edit Schedule window In Add Schedule window the schedule of Power On Off for each partition can be added newly In Edit Schedule window an exis
176. Event Logs would be displayed instead of table Firmware Information Window Latest version number of applied Firmware information of the Firmware version which is operating inside the system and the information of the Firmware version with backup is displayed on the Firmware Information window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 101 Firmware Information Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Geass Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Firmware Information Unified Firmware Version BA14012 Current Firmware Unified Firmware Version BA14012 SB 0 BA14012 BA14012 SB 1 BIOS BA14012 BMC BA14012 SB 2 TABLE 1 138 Display Item of Firmware Information Window Items Description Unified Firmware Latest version number of applied Firmware Version Current Firmware Unit Target unit mounted with Firmware is displayed SB n y MMB Firmware Type and Current version Active of Firmware are displayed BMC s BIOS MMB E Not present It shows that Unit is not mounted Gray color background is displayed active bank Bank bank1 or bank2 of the memory that is operating now is displayed After start restart of the partition latest Firmware information is reflected in this display Version bank1 Firmware Version of bank1 is displayed Version displ
177. FIGURE 3 25 Display example of Attempt Configuration Men ENNEN 397 FIGURE 3 26 Display example of Delete Attempts men ENEE 401 FIGURE 3 27 Display example of Change Attempt Order Mem ANEN 402 FIGURE 3 28 Display Example of Memory Configuration Mem ENEE 404 FIGURE 3 29 Display example of USB Configuration menu FIGURE 3 30 Display Example of Security Configuration Mem ENEE 408 FIGURE 3 31 Boot Maintenance manager Mem ANEN 410 FIGURE 3 32 Example Display of Boot Mode Mem 411 FIGURE 3 33 Boot options Menu ainnise serores eee necen ede ecebenserisbenesdi aetarieciviecersheneecebeneetisieeenteeivtervionreed 412 FIGURE 3 34 Display Example of Boot Manager Mem ANEN 413 FIGURE 3 35 Display Example of Add Boot Option Men ENEE 414 FIGURE 3 36 A list of Devices cette nt dec cee eden 415 FIGURE 3 37 Display example of File Selection Window ENEE 415 FIGURE 3 38 Windows Server 2012 Installed Disk WiINdOW ue 416 FIGURE 3 39 Display Example of Boot Option Name Change Wimdow EEN 417 FIGURE 3 40 Display Example of Boot Manager Mem ANEN 418 FIGURE 3 41 Display example of Delete Boot Option mem ENEE 419 FIGURE 3 42 Delete window 1 Of boot option ENEE FIGURE 3 43 Boot Option Deletion Window 2 FIGURE 3 44 Change Boot Order Mem EEN FIGURE 3 45 Change Window of Priority Order Change Boot Order 1 ENEE 422 FIGURE 3 46 Change Window of Priority Order Change Boot Order 3 ENEE 423 FIGURE 3 47 Windows afte
178. For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 19 Disk Enclosure Menu The Disk Enclosure x Window displays the state of Disk Enclosure and the disk connected with PRIMEQUEST 2000 series When Disk Enclosure is connected with IOU or PCI BOX it is displayed in the menu FIGURE 1 36 Disk Enclosure x Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number Status BW aruing Partition User Administration Network Configuration M gt System gt Disk Enclosure gt Disk Enclosure 0 Disk Enclosure 0 Disk Enclosure E Informa tion 3 PCIC 11 Port 1 Cascade 0 Physical Drives Not present Not present Not present Not present a E MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 37 Disk Enclosure x Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number See Status awa ning Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance tition User Administra work Com ntenance gt System gt Disk Enclosure gt Disk Enclosure 0 Disk Enclosure 0 Refresh Help A Logical Drives Sensor Status RAID Level Physical Drives assignment Missing drives Count RAID Action Progress Drive Type Slot Sensor Action Progress sabi hh mm ss Expander lt a x
179. GOW esscessecesecesecesesesseeessesesseeessesesseeesseeesseeesseeteseeneaeeesaeeneaeeteaseteaeaeeaeeteaeeteaees Setting Items of Management LAN Port Configuration WindOW ENEE 494 Setting Items of Network Protocols Window Setting Items of Refresh Rate Wimdow ue Setting Items of SNMP Community Window ENEE 496 Setting Items of SNMP Trap WindoW ENEE 496 Setting Items of SNMP v3 Configuration Wimdow ENEE 497 Setting Items of Create CSR WindOw c esccessesessesessecesesessesessesesseeeseeesseeeseeeseesseeeseeeeseesseesaeensseeeeaeeteaeeteaeeteaees 498 Setting Items of Create Selfsigned Certificate Wimdow EEN 498 Setting Items of Edit User WindOW escesessesessesessesessesessesesseseeseseeseeesecseseaeeseseseseeseaesseaeeaeaeeseaeeseateaeateaeateneateneateaees 499 Setting Items of Add Filter Edit Filter Window EEN 499 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Window Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Window ENEE 500 Setting liems oni UEFI i sicscc cascade deen ee ae ee eI iced 500 Setting Items on I O Space Assignment Configuration WindOW ENEE 501 Setting Items on LAN Remote Boot Configuration Wimdom EEN 501 Setting Items on CPU Configuration WinGow AEN 501 Setting Items on PCI Bus Padding Configuration Window EEN 503 Setting Items on PCI Subsystem Configuration Wimcdow EEN 503 Setting Items on IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Wimdow EEN 503 Setting Items on IPC Dos OpROM Scan
180. IMM 1D5 Status Displays the status of the DIMM S OK Not present Warning Uncorrectable error s Disabled Configuration error Degraded Configuration Unknown Size Displays the size of the DIMM 8GB 16GB 32GB e 64GB There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Rank Displays number of DIMM Ranks 1 or 2 or 4 There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Data Rate Displays Data Rate of DIMM DDR3 1066 1333 1600 There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Part Number Displays the part number of DIMM There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Serial Number Displays the serial number of DIMM There is no display when the DIMM status is Not present Not supported or Unknown Mezzanine MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Mezzanine 0 Status Displays the status of the Mezzanine board Mezzanine 1 7 OK e Not present 2 Failed RAID Slot Power Status Displays the power status of the RAID slot i On _ Standby Slot Status Displays the status of the RAID slot OK j Warning 7 Not present Failed R Disabled Link Width Displays Link Width of the RAID slot format i x1 x2 7 x4 x8 Seg Bus Dev Displays Segment Bus Device of the RAID devi
181. IPv4 Interface Hot System RO Interface Hot Partition RO IPv6 Interface Warm System RO Cold System RO Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Hot System N A Firmware Hot Partition N A Update Warm System N A Cold System N A Backup Restore MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode Configuration Backup N A Backup Restore MMB MMB is not Configuration affected by maintenance mode Restore MMB can be operated only by maintenance personnel Maintenance Hot System N A Wizard Hot Partition N A Warm System N A Cold System N A 1 1 9 Web Ul menus in maintenance mode Partition Operator This section outlines the Web UI menus that are available with the Partition Operator privileges in maintenance mode The maintenance mode column has the following items For details on the maintenance mode see 1 1 6 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Hot System Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Warm System Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Cold System Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker on and Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker off The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The accou
182. MB 0 Hot System RO Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB 1 Same as for MMB 0 Partition Power Control Hot System RO Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Partition Hot System RO Add is Configuration suppressed since the Free unit may be a replacement unit Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Add SB IOU Same as for to Partition Partition Po Configuration E Remove SB Same as for IOU from Partition Partition Configuration Partition Home Same as for Partition Configuration Reserved SB Hot System RO Configuration Hot Partition RO MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode Warm System RO Cold System RO Console Hot System RO Redirection Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Network Configuration Network IPv4 Interface Hot System RO Interface Hot Partition RO IPv6 Interface Warm System RO Cold System RO Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Hot System RO Firmware Hot Partition RO Update Warm System RO Cold System RO Backup Restore Configuration Backup RW Backup Restore MMB MMB is not Configuration affected by maintenance mode Restore MMB can be operated only by maintenance personnel Maintenance Hot System RO Wizard Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO
183. MENU ratreit E R A E A E EER 128 1 3 3 Console Redirection Setup window ENEE 135 1 3 4 Partition Configuration Menu 1 3 5 Reserved SB Configuration window EEN 146 Preface 1 3 6 1 3 7 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 1 5 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 1 5 8 1 5 9 1 5 10 1 5 11 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 1 6 3 1 6 4 1 7 1 7 1 1 7 2 1 7 3 1 7 4 1 7 5 1 7 6 1 7 7 1 7 8 1 7 9 1 7 10 1 7 11 1 7 12 1 7 13 1 7 14 1 7 15 1 7 16 1 7 17 1 7 18 CHAPTER 2 1 2 1 1 Power Management Setup Window ENEE 148 Se x MENU EE 150 User Administration Menu sv ue eid ane iii pies i ei eti aeieeiaii ia drina inari aii eaaa iE 159 User EIST WINdOW ee evn ea E ETNE E EEEE RE AEE 159 Change ET Rule EE 163 Who window Network Configuration Men 2089 tee ie 167 IRAN Et ee E 167 Network Interface Window cic scasciteceeuseneuieceiecee eects enienieeereniereteceieiaieecineeereetecateeeneedineee seve neneoeiteaneeennesteeeeaneniods 170 Management LAN Port Configuration window EEN 180 Network Protocols window Refresh Rate WindOW i nicanawandnde andar anand Annie aw anevada Awana nian Amani Ae SNMP Gontiguration WINGOW 3 csseidssuscertaadestaunieneieie nas diainas iene scateauniaastened nusaesassiaenaieanasaentonsd 187 ER RUE 193 el EE 199 Remote Server Management window EEN 201 Access Control WINGOW EE 204 Alarm ER 208 Maintenance Men ENEE Firmware Update menu
184. MMB and BMC stored in the current MMB system event log are displayed on the System Event Log window in chronological order Maximum 32000 events can be stored in system event log When the entries in the system event log are full oldest event log is deleted and latest event log is stored in system event log MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 2 System Event Log window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E re Active MMBWO Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number TOTES States Domm Power OF In Progress Detail oni p Pana 1 Sus Shs CO6FO3FF POST Detail Clew Ai Eet Download Finer In the System Event Log Window only the contents and not the title in the table can be scrolled When there are no events to be displayed a message showing There is no Event Logs is displayed instead of the table TABLE 1 17 Items displayed in System Event Log Window Items Description Severity Displays the severity of the event and error Error Severe errors like hardware error Warning Not a severe error but an error is likely in future Info_ Shows the information like Partition power ON Date Time Displays the local time when an event or error occurred Format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Source Displays the name of the sensor where an event or error occurred Unit Displays the unit with the sensor where an event or error occurred For example displays SB 0 if a
185. MMB management port address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Maintenance Displays MAC address of the MMB port Port 00 00 00 00 00 00 Location LED Displays the status of the Location LED The following are the various display status On During power on Off During power off MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking On Off buttons Reset MMB Resets the MMB if this check box is checked When this check box is checked Switch Over to MMB mentioned below cannot be set Switch Over to MMB Switches the Active Standby of the MMB if this check box is checked When this check box is checked Reset MMB mentioned above cannot be set Remarks This check box is displayed only when two MMBs are mounted Enable Disable MMB Controls Enable Disable of the MMB Because this item is a facility used for testing it is not possible to usually set it Voltage Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type P3 3VL P1 5VL P1 5VL_CPLD P1 2VL P1 0VL PO 75VL Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays t
186. Maximum 56 characters can Province Name be entered Locality Name None Maximum 56 characters can be entered Organization None Maximum 56 characters can Name be entered Organization None Maximum 56 characters can Unit Name be entered Common name None Maximum 56 characters can be entered E Mail Address None None E Mail address Maximum 40 characters can be entered A 1 27 Setting Items of Create Selfsigned Certificate Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Create Selfsigned Certificate Window TABLE A 27 Setting Items of Create Selfsigned Certificate Window Setting items Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Key length 1024 1024 2048 Term None 1 4095 Days Country Name None Maximum 56 characters can be entered State or None Maximum 56 characters can Province Name be entered Locality Name None Maximum 56 characters can be entered Organization None Maximum 56 characters can Name be entered Organization None Maximum 56 characters can Unit Name enter Common Name None Maximum 56 characters can be entered E Mail Address None E Mail Address Maximum 40 characters can be entered Appendix A List of Setting Items A 1 28 Setting Items of Edit User Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Edit Us
187. Menu Operation Partition Console Redirection Setup IPv4 Console Redirection Setup 2 Window Operations 1 IP address and the subnet mask are entered and it is set whether video redirection virtual media can be used 2 Apply button is clicked Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00432 Invalid IP Address specified W_00433 The duplicate IP address was found _00539 The settings for the Console Redirection IP are changed All existing network connections about this settings will be lost You will need to login again If you want to continue please click OK button If not click Cancel button Are you sure O IPv6 Console Redirection Setup window The IP address settings for accessing Console Redirection LAN of IPv6 prefix length settings video redirection and enable disable settings of virtual media can be done in the IPv6 Console Redirection Setup window In case of automatic settings when Auto button is clicked IP address prefix length are automatically acquired MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 45 IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FU ITSU Serial Number ministration IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes gt Note For using Video Redirection and Virtual Media in xPAR Partiti
188. Mode current status Capacity Keep Mode Shows maintenance of memory capacity Memory Mirror RAS Sets the Memory Operations for Mirror Mode for system Mode Mirror Keep Mode setting Capacity Keep Mode Enables the settings after rebooting the system As these items are enabled only when the Mirror mode is set when Mirror Mode is not set they are disabled Default setting is Mirror Keep Mode TPM Displays whether TPM function is Enabled or Disabled chip status Enabled TPM is enabled Disabled TPM is disabled Remarks When Home SB is without TPM mode this field is not displayed TPM Displays the TPM status current status Activated Deactivated Remarks When Home SB is without TPM mode this field is not displayed AEN Displays ownership of TPM ownership Yes having Ownership No not having Ownership Remarks When Home SB is without TPM mode this field is not displayed IOU Displays the IOU that belongs to the system On board LAN Mode Displays the On board LAN Mode in IOU Unit current status Enabled WOL enabled Onboard LAN can be used at AC On status Enabled WOL disabled Onboard LAN comprised in the system can be used at Power On status Disabled Onboard LAN cannot be used every time On board LAN Mode Sets On board LAN Device Mode in IOU Unit setting Select the Mode to be set by using the radio button Enabled WOL enabled Enabled WOL disabled
189. N 1 2 17 OPL Window OPL Window has the following windows CT OPL Window The OPL Board status is displayed in the OPL Window FIGURE 1 34 OPL window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EE Status Normal Partition et Admmistrahon Net gt System gt OPL OPL EN Click the Status Clear button to clear the status Board Information OK Status Power Stams Oo tease ET o Status Clear MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Status Clear button and Click the Status Clear button to clear the status Message is not be displayed for a user without the setting privilege TABLE 1 51 Display items of OPL Window Items Description Status Displays the status of the OPL OK Not present Warning Degraded Failed Power Status Displays the Ppower status of the OPL On Standby Location LED Displays the status of the Location LED Following are the various display status On Lighting Off Light out On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking the On Off buttons Part Number Displays the part number of the OPL TABLE 1 52 Button on OPL window Button Description Part Number Clears the error status of the OPL Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message 1_00029 Status Clear completed E 001
190. Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level Same Other partition partition SNMPv3 N A N A Configuration SSL Create CSR N A N A Creates a secret key and CSR Export N A N A Exports a secret Key CSR key and CSR Import Security N A N A Installs a Certificate certificate Create N A N A Creates a Selfsigned selfsigned Certificate certificate SSH SSH Server N A N A Creates a private Key key for the SSH server Remote Server N A N A Management Access Control N A N A Sets the IP filtering that permits connections Alarm E mail N A N A Maintenance Firmware Update Unified N A N A Performs a batch Firmware update Update Backup Restore Backs up and Configuration restores setting information Backup Restore N A N A MMB Configuration Backup EFI N A N A Configuration Restore EFI N A N A Configuration Maintenance N A N A Performs Wizard maintenance through a wizard REMCS REMCS N A N A Detailed Setup N A N A MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 1 4 Web Ul menus User This section lists the Web UI menus that are available with the User privileges The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information and control operation from the menu RO The account user can only refer to information from the menu N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenus TABLE 1 5 Web UI menus User
191. O User L Edit User Help Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Uzar Nama Admiristrator Current Password eebe Admin OOperetor Olar OGE O Partition Operator Erabkd_O Disabled Ful Name O O Detit Airriniksrator ua A 8 optional Oparabile Partition 9 1 2 3 or Partition Operator Apply Cancel TABLE 1 83 Setting and display items in the Add User and Edit User windows Items Description User Name Sets the user name You can enter a total of 8 to 32 characters You can enter the following characters in a user name 0 9 a z A Z hyphen _ underscore However the first character of the user name must be a letter from a to z or A to Z Current Password Used to enter the current password Remark This item is not displied in case of Add User windows Password Sets the password You can enter a total of 8 to 32 characters You can specify the following characters in a password 0 9 a z A Z and special characters amp lt gt _ Confirm Password Used to reenter a password for confirmation Privilege Sets the privileges of the user account Status Sets the current status of this account Enabled Disabled Full Name Used to enter the user s real name or other related information L You can enter a total of up to 32 characters SSS Operable Partition Sets the partitions that the user is permitted t
192. OU Unit comprised in the partition specified by the LAN Device Mode For settings select LAN Device Mode in the IOU Unit with the radio button and click the Apply button TABLE 1 80 Display Items and Setting Items in Mode Window Items Description Memory Operation Mode Displays the currently enabled Memory Operation Mode Current Performance Mode Displays the settings to the Performance Mode Normal Mode Displays the settings to the Normal Mode Partial Mirror Mode Displays the settings to the Partial Mirror Mode Full Mirror Mode Displays the settings to the Full Mirror Mode Spare Mode Displays the settings to the Spare Mode Memory Operation Mode Sets the Memory Operation Mode for partition setting Performance Mode Normal Mode Partial Mirror Mode Full Mirror Mode Spare Mode Enables the settings after rebooting the partition Default setting is Normal Mode MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Memory Mirror RAS Displays the Memory operation of currently enabled Mirror Mode Mode Mirror Keep Mode Shows the maintenance of Mirror Mode Capacity Keep Mode Shows maintenance of memory capacity Memory Mirror RAS Sets the Memory Operations for Mirror Mode for partition current status Mode Mirror Keep Mode setting Capacity Keep Mode Enables the settings after rebooting the partition As these items are enabled only when the Mirror mode is set when Mi
193. Operation Mode of the Partition3 to performance set partition memory_operation_mode 3 performance The setting will become effective the next time the partition power off on is performed here are cases when the partition is configured to 1SB and when Reserved SB is set also when the settings other than the Memory Operation Mode of DIMM configuration satisfying SB requirement is registered as Reserved SB a dialog box for conformation is displayed When the Memory Operation Mode is switched to the Reserved SB a warning message indicating a change in Memory Operation Mode is displayed in the dialog box and whether this setting is to be continued is confirmed in the dialog box If this message is not displayed the Memory Operation Mode is not changed even if it is switched to Reserved SB Example When setting the Mirror Mode of the Partition 1 to enable The SB with DIMM that does not satisfy the Mirror Mode requirements is registered as the Reserved SB in Partition 1 set partition memory_operation_mode 1 pertial_mirror The SB with DIMM that does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode is registered as the Reserved SB If you register this partition as a Mirror Mode Mirror Mode will be disabled when switching to a Reserved SB Are you sure to continue Y N y 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C1
194. P can t be enabled because of no DP license DP feature is disabled Unable to execute DP command due to previous failure Unable to execute DP command while other DP command is running Unable to execute DP command because OS is not ready for DP operation Commands for Display Command for displaying the information is as follows 2 3 1 show access_control 2 3 2 show active_mmb 2 3 3 show date 2 3 4 show exit_code 2 3 5 show partition configuration 2 3 6 show partition dynamic_partitioning 2 3 7 show partition home 2 3 8 show partition lan_device_mode 2 3 9 show partition name 2 3 10 show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode 2 3 11 show partition memory_operation_mode 2 3 12 show partition pci_address_mode 2 3 13 show timezone 2 3 14 show gateway 2 3 15 show gateway_ipv6 2 3 16 show http 2 3 17 show http_port 2 3 18 show https 2 3 19 show https_port 2 3 20 show ip 2 3 21 show ipv6 2 3 22 show hostname 2 3 23 show maintenance_ip 2 3 24 show ssh 2 3 25 show ssh_port 2 3 26 show telnet 2 3 27 show telnet_port 2 3 28 show network 2 3 29 show ntpq 2 3 30 who 2 3 31 help 2 3 32 netck traceroute 2 3 33 netck arptbl 2 3 34 netck arping 2 3 35 netck ifconfig 2 3 36 netck stat 2 3 37 show dynamic_partitioning status show access_control Setting value of current access control is displayed 2 3 2 2 3 3 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Privilege
195. P4 or IP6 and enabled DHCP Disabled X Enabled By default it is disabled Target Name Enters the IQN name of target Number of characters that can be entered are 4 223 characters This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and disabled Get Target info via DHCP Remarks When character string not related to the IQN name is entered pop up window of Invalid iSCSI Name is displayed When number of entered character is not enough pop up window of Please enter enough characters Press ENTER to continue is displayed Types of characters that can be entered are given below 0 9 A Z a 2 amp i lt gt IT UI Target IP Address Sets IP Address of target This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and disabled Get Target info via DHCP By default it is 0 0 0 0 UEFI Menu Operations Remarks If incorrect value is entered in IP address subnet mask then pop up window of Invalid IP Address is displayed Target Port Sets TCP listening port of target Numeric value which can be entered is in the range of 0 65535 decimal This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and disabled Get Target info via DHCP By default it is 0 Boot LUN Sets LUN number of target This item is displayed when Internet Protocol is set to IP4 or IP6 and disabled Get Target info via DHCP Nume
196. Partition Configuration Remove Unit button 2 Window Operations 1 Select the SB or IOU which is to be removed from the partition and click the Apply button Confirmation dialog box is displayed 2 Click OK button SB or IOU is removed 3 Click the Apply or Cancel button MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Back to Partition Configuration window Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E 00022 The partition doesn t have a node W_00505 Unable to set configuration because the power on off is processing For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Partition Home window If you select the partition using the radio button on the Partition Configuration window and click the Home button Partition Home window is displayed FIGURE 1 49 Partition Home window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 ee Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number SWBG09 Normal Help Status lt gt 1 Select the SB which is considered as the Home SB by using the radio button When SB which is set as Home SB is not mounted the background color is displayed in gray You can switch from the selected radio button on a grayed row to a radio button on a row that is not grayed However if the selection on the row displayed in g
197. Permitted Permitted Displays the partition name Time related set date Sets the date and time show date Permitted Permitted Displays the date and time set timezone Sets the time zone show timezone Permitted Permitted Displays the time zone Network related set ip Sets the management LAN address set ipv6 Sets the IPv6 management LAN address show ip Permitted Permitted Displays the management LAN address show ipv6 Permitted Permitted Displays the IPv6 management LAN address set hostname Sets the MMB host name show hostname Permitted Permitted Displays the MMB host name set gateway Sets the gateway address set gateway_ipv6 Sets the IPv6 gateway address show gateway Permitted Permitted Displays the gateway address show network Permitted Permitted Displays the management LAN interface show gateway_ipv6 Permitted Permitted Displays the IPv6 gateway address set http Sets whether to enable http service set https Sets whether to enable https service set ssh Sets whether to enable ssh service set telnet Sets whether to enable telnet service show http Permitted Permitted Displays the http service enabling setting show https Permitted Permitted Displays the https service enabling setting show ssh Permitted Permitted Displays the ssh service enabling setting show telnet Permitted Permitted Displays the telnet service enabling setting set htto_port Sets the http port number set https_port S
198. Power Control Then click the Apply button Dialog box for confirmation appears 2 Click the OK button to execute the process Click the Cancel button to cancel the process When sytem Power is On or when Power is Off and when the specified control is failed Warning dialog box appears MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations When the CPU mounted on the SB of system is not matched at the time of specifying the Power On of syetm Warning dialog box appears Error occurs in the Power On operation TABLE 1 141 Display Items and Set Items of Power Control Window Items Description Status Displays the Status of the System Normal Warning Error Power Status Displays the Power Status of the System On Standby System Progress The status of the partition progress is displayed Power Off The partition power is off Power On In Progress Partition power on is in process Reset The status of the partition from the beginning of reset till the completion of the operating system boot EFI The UEFI menu screen is displayed Boot Operating system is being booted Operating system Running Operating system running state Operating system Shutdown Operating system shutting down Panic Panic Only in RHEL Power Off In Progress Partition power off is in process Fatal Stopped Dumping The dumping is being output Halt Halting Stop Error Stop error Only in Windows Remarks When SVAS Server View Agentl
199. Press the Enter key In FIGURE 3 65 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 2 the boot option of NET Drive 00 is changed from IBA GE Slot 0900 v1372 to IBA GE Slot 0901 v1372 FIGURE 3 66 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 3 is an example of the window when the priority level of network port is changed When the boot option set in NET Drive N is set in another NET Drive M before setting the boot option which had been set in NET Drive N before changes is set in NET Drive M In FIGURE 3 66 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 3 IBA GE Slot 0900 v1372 is set in NET Drive 01 in which IBA GE Slot 0901 v1372 was set FIGURE 3 66 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 3 Set Legacy NET Driv 5 Set Enable Disable of NET Drive N Select Disable to disable e Select boot option to enable FIGURE 3 67 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 4 is an example of window in which the NET Drive 01 is set to Disable The Disabled NET Drive N is displayed as Disable UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 67 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 4 et Legacy NET Drive Orde 6 Select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key to exit from this menu by saving the set changes Select Discard Changes and Exit and press Enter key to exit from this menu without saving the set changes 3 5 3
200. Pv4 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Privilege All 1 Input format ping c lt count gt lt IP address gt lt server name gt 2 Option c lt count gt This option ends the command after sending a certain number lt count gt of packets The default is 1 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid If the parameter specification is incorrect an ICMP ping error message may appear since ping in ICMP is used 2 6 2 6 1 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations PRIMEQUEST2800B model Commands PRIMEQUEST2800B model CLI command list This chapter describes the functions of the PRIMEQUEST2800B model CLI commands Follow Chapter 2 5 from Chapter 2 2 about the part not described in this chapter The following tables list the account privileges required for individual commands Permitted in an account privilege column indicates the command can be used with those account privileges TABLE 2 9 MMB CLI commands Administrator TABLE 2 10 MMB CLI commands Operator TABLE 2 11 MMB CLI commands User TABLE 2 12 MMB CLI commands CE TABLE 2 9 MMB CLI commands Administrator
201. RE 6 9 Dump device select men ENEE FIGURE 6 10 Setting dump device Menu FIGURE 6 11 Select device Mem eet FIGURE 6 12 Select discard dump device Men ENEE FIGURE 6 13 Select discard dump device Menu Select multiple devices Mem ENEE 480 FIGURE 6 14 Confirmation EE 481 Preface Tables TABLE 1 1 User privileges TABLE 1 2 Web Ulimenus Aciministtaltor csescccsesssc svasncscscstseescasanan dts esueadsnvehcadcacshang a aai 31 TABLE 1 3 Web Ulimenus Operator ccd 34 TABLE 1 4 Web UI menus Partition Operator EEN 37 TABLE 1 5 Web Ulimenus USer WEE 41 TABLE 1 6 Web UI menus CE wi casa Ginnie ana a aa a a a a ir Siviaaiaiaghisadviade 44 TABLE 1 7 Types of maintenance rue E 48 TABLE 1 8 Web UI menus in maintenance Mode Administrator EEN 49 TABLE 1 9 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Operator EEN 51 TABLE 1 10 Web Ul menus in maintenance mode Partition Coeratort ENEE 53 TABLE 1 11 Web UI menus in maintenance mode leet EEN 54 TABLE 1 12 Web UI menus in maintenance mode CEA 56 TABLE 1 13 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Maintenance Dereonnel EEN 58 TABLE 1 14 Web Ul menus PRIMEQUEST 2800B model TABLE 1 15 Status of Unit and itS ICONS 3 c acandcauscaditaudne daeauandAnanagaiiuandaeduanduaudagaaedines TABLE 1 16 Items displayed in System Status Window ENEE TABLE 1 17 Items displayed in System Event Log Window EEN 65 TABLE 1 18 Buttons on System Event Log Wimdow ENEE 66 TABLE 1 19 Display a
202. RW Defines a Reserved SB Configuration Power RW Management Setup Partition 0 If no board belongs to the partition this submenu is not displayed Information RO Displays the partition status and partition related information ASR Control RW Sets the conditions for automatically restarting the partition Console RW Displays the console Redirection output of the partition Mode RW Sets the mode for the partition Partition 1 Same as for Partition 0 Partition 2 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks User Administration User List RW Lists edits and deletes registered user accounts Change RW Changes the password Password of the user s own account Who RO Displays all users who are logged in to the MMB Network Configuration Date Time RW Network Interface IPv4 Interface RW Sets the IPv4 IP address etc IPv6 Interface RW Sets the IPv6 IP address etc Management RW Configures the Port LAN LAN Port of the MMB HUB Configuration Network RW Protocols Refresh Rate RW Sets the refresh rate of the Web UI window SNMP RW Configuration Community RW Trap RW SNMPv3 RW Configuration SSL Create CSR RW Creates a secret key and CSR Export RW Exports a secret key Key CSR and CSR Import Security RW Installs a certificate Certificate Create RW Creates a selfsigned Selfsigned ce
203. Redirection is Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Enable on Console Redirection Setup Window A 1 15 Setting Items of Mode Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Mode Window TABLE A 15 Setting Items of Mode Window Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Memory Normal Mode e Performance Mode Operation e Normal Mode Mode e Partial Mirror Mode setting e Full Mirror Mode e Sapre Mode Memory Mirror Keep Mode e Mirror Keep Mode Mirror RAS e Capacity Keep Mode Mode setting PCI Address PCI Segment Mode e PCI Bus Mode Mode e PCI Segment Mode setting Dynamic Disable e Enable Partitioning e Disable setting On board Enabled WOL disabled Enabled WOL enabled LAN Mode Enabled WOL disabled setting Disabled A 1 16 Setting Items of Add User Edit User Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Add User Edit User Window TABLE A 16 Setting Items of Add User Edit User Window Setting items Initial value Value that can be set Remarks User Name None Minimum 8 and Maximum 32 characters can be entered 0 9 a z A Z _ However the first character must be a z A Z Password None More th
204. Restoration Policy Sets the display of the restoration action after power failure 7 Always off Maintains the power off status after the power restoration R Always on Regardless of the condition at the time of power failure the partition is powered on after the power restoration B Restore Restores the status immediately before the power failure If the power was on when the power failure occurred it restores the power on status of the partition If the power was off the partition power stays off Schedule Sync If the partition is in the operating time zone power of partition turns on automatically depending on the schedule operations at the time of restoration of power attention The schedule set with Special is applied only on the specified day Default setting is Restore Partition Power On Delay Sets the standby time utill power on of partition is specified as per the restoration power policy that is set after the AC power is On also includes restoration power MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description This item becomes effective at the time of the Power ON by the schedule Specifies within the range of 0 9999 seconds Default value is 0 seconds attention Other start processing is not executed until the processing of Partition Power On Delay ends However when Power On by the schedule driving is done for the period of Power on delay by the AC power supply turn
205. SB 1 TABLE 1 36 Display Items and Setting Items in LEDs Window Items Description Unit Displays unit name Power LED The power status is displayed Alarm LED Displays whether the unit is normal or abnormal Location LED Displays sets the Location LED status of unit TABLE 1 37 LEDs Window Button Buttons Description On When On button is clicked Location LED is turned on Off When Off button is clicked Location LED is turned off Turn off all When Turn off all Location LEDs button is clicked all Location LED in system are Location LEDs turned off 1 Menu Operation System LEDs 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Turn off all Location LEDs button All Location LED in system are turned off 1 2 10 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Power Supply window Power Supply window displays the PSU status in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Once the error in the status of each PSU is detected the abnormality status is maintained till the PSU is replaced or the abnormality status is cleared by clicking the Status Clear button FIGURE 1 14 Power Supply Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt Power Supply Power Supply Click the Status Clear button to clear the status G81
206. ST 2800B model 1 1 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Web UI menus Administrator This section lists the Web UI menus that are available with the Administrator privileges The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information and control operation from the menu RO The account user can only refer to information from the menu N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenus TABLE 1 2 Web UI menus Administrator Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks System System Status RO Displays the overall system status System Event RW Displays system event Log logs Operation Log RW Displays the operations on the Web UI and CLI Partition Event RW Displays the REMCS Log notification messages of a PRIMEQUEST partition System RW Displays system Information information such as the system name or product name Firmware RO Displays firmware Information version information System Setup RW Sets the system configuration System Power RW Controls the power Control LEDs RW Displays the LED status Power Supply RW Displays the power supply status Fans RW Displays the fan status Temperature RO Displays the temperatures detected by the temperature sensors of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system SB SB 0 RW Displays the SB status SB 1
207. ST2800 Active MIMB40 Part Number MCXXXNXXX FUJITSU Serial Namber deeg Nermal Svite Partibon User Achnamstraton Network g gt Mantenance Foren age Update gt United Firmware Upd _ Unified Firmware Update Help Select a wihed femweee file Update Cancel 1 Menu Operation Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Firmware Update MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Browse button to select a unified firmware update file Click the Update button This displays the window for confirming the versions for the unified firmware update 3 To perform the update click the OK button Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message W_00477 Select the file of update W_00478 Unable to execute the update Standby MMB is fault or disable W_00479 Unable to execute the update TPM is effective For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 6 2 Backup Restore Configuration menu The Backup Restore Configuration menu has the following windows Backup Restore MMB Configuration window Backup BIOS Configuration window for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Restore BIOS Configuration window for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Backup Restore BIOS Configuration window for PRIMQUEST 2800B O Backup Restore MMB Configuration wind
208. Selects the item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Boot Manager front page UEFI Menu Operations 3 4 Device Manager Menu Whether to allocate I O space for each I O device and whether to make PXE boot enable are set in the Device Manager menu The following window is window immediately after the startup of the Device Manager menu FIGURE 3 7 Example of displayed Device Manager menu Remarks Integrated firmware version can be checked in Unified Firmware Version of System Firmware Information window of MMB Web UI For the details on Firmware Information window see 1 Page information display Displayed as Device Manager 2 Menu selection The menu shown in TABLE 3 10 Displayed contents of menu selection is displayed TABLE 3 10 Displayed contents of menu selection Items Description System Information Displays 3 4 1 System Information Menu I O Space Assignment Displays 3 4 2 I O Space Assignment Configuration Menu Configuration LAN Remote Boot Displays 3 4 3 LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu Configuration CPU Configuration Displays 3 4 4 CPU Configuration Menu PCI Bus Padding Displays 3 4 5 PCI Bus Padding Configuration Menu Configuration PCI Subsystem Configuration Displays 3 4 6 PCI Subsystem Configuration Menu iSCSI Configuration Displays 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu Memory Configuratio
209. Set Legacy NET Drive Order M Set Legacy NET Drive Order Menu is displayed 3 Display of operation help Description of operation key shown in TABLE 3 50 Display contents of Display of operation help is displayed TABLE 3 50 Display contents of Display of operation help Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entr Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager E Add Boot Option Menu Add Boot Option is used to add new boot option to Boot Manager If Operating System boot loader is added and registered as boot option as shown in the following figure boot option registered in Boot Manager Menu is displayed Newly added and registered boot option is added at the tag end of Boot Manager Menu Example of addition of Test Boot Option is shown in FIGURE 3 34 Display Example of Boot Manager Menu FIGURE 3 34 Display Example of Boot Manager Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 35 Display Example of Add Boot Option Menu is a window shown immediately after the start up of Add Boot Option As shown in the figure the list of device is shown in device path format Details of device path are mentioned in 3 6 Device Path FIGURE 3 35 Display Example of Add Boot Option Menu H U U U U U BO 1 Display of Page information File Explorer is displayed 2 Menu Selection A list
210. Single e Single Mode e Dual Power Restore e Always off Restoration e Always on Policy e Restore e Schedule Sync Redundancy Power Feed Mode is single e Non redundant Partition 0 Seconds 0 9999 Seconds Power On Delay Altitude Altitude lt 1000 m e Altitude lt 1000 m Setting error for Altitude e 1000 m lt Altitude lt value can be 100 m 1500 m e 1500 m lt Altitude lt 2000 m e 2000 m lt Altitude PSU Non Redundant When e Redundant When Power Feed Mode is Dual fix with Redundant A 1 5 A 1 6 Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting ltems Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Mode Reserved SB Force Power Off Wait 10 Minutes 0 99Minutes System Power Save Control System Power Saving Threshold Disable 8640W e Enable e Disable 300W 8640W Can be set only when PSU_P 200V is used Grayed out when System Power Save Control is Disable Setting items of System Power Control Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for setting items of System Power Control Window TABLE A 5 Setting Items of System Power Control Window Setting Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Items System None e Power On all partition s Power e Power Off all partition s Control all partitions s will be automatically shutdown e Force Power Off Se
211. Specified PSUs Fans o SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 SB 3 e 1OU 0 IOU 1 IOU 2 JO DU 0 DU 1 OPL MMB 3 Source AU O Specified CPU DIMM Chipset Voltage Temperature Other MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 125 Setting and display items in the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window Items Description Severity Sets the severity level to be displayed Multiple options can be selected Error Warning Info Everything is selected by default Partition Sets the partitions to be displayed Multiple options can be selected Everything is selected by default Remark This item is not displied in case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B model Unit Sets the units to be displayed The selected radio button is either All or Specified All Filtering by unit is not applied Specified Filtering by unit can be set Check the check boxes for the units to be displayed The default is All Remark In case of PRIMEQUEST 2400E model the Unit display is as follows SB SB 0 SB 1 In case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B model the Unit display is as follows MMB MMB In case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B model PCI_Box is not displayed Source Used to select the sources to be displayed The selected radio button is either All or Specified All Filtering by Source is not applied Specified Filtering by source can be set Check the check boxes of the sources to display The default is All Remarks Specify both CPU and Chipset when filtering as Source wit
212. Specified Time Specify the time In case of Specified Time enter the Start Date and Time The default setting is First event Specifies either display till last event or specify the time by using the radio button Last event Display till Last event Specified Time Specify the time In case of Specified Time enter the End Date and Time The default setting is Last event Number of events to display Specifies the number of log to be displayed As for the denominator display the total number of events that are logged A maximum of 3000 events can be specified The default setting is 100 events TABLE 1 20 System Events Log Filtering Condition Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply Log which matches with the specified conditions will be listed on System Event Log window by clicking the Apply button Cancel Returns to System Event Log window by clicking the Cancel button Default Setting Selected value returns to the default value Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00413 Nothing is selected W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00426 Invalid Values Specified W_00434 Invalid Time Format W_00441 Range over error 00417 Are you sure 1 00468 Are you sure you want to clear the SEL MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations For details on the messages displayed on the window
213. System Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Warm System Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Cold System Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker on and Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker off The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information in the window RO The account user can only refer to information in the window N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenu 1 The account user can operate partitions not in maintenance mode in this window 2 The account user can operate only partitions in maintenance mode in this window 3 The SB is neither a Home SB nor Reserved SB Alternatively the SB is the Home SB in the Power Off status in a partition in the Standby status 4 The partition is in the Standby status TABLE 1 11 Web UI menus in maintenance mode User Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode System System Power Hot System RO Control Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB MMB 0 Hot System RO Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB 1 Same as for MMB 0 Partition Power Control Hot System RO Hot Partition RO Warm System RO
214. System Setup Window sscessscessscessecesseccssectsnecesnsccsneecsneeceneaseneassueaseneaseneaseaeassueaseneassneassneatsneassaeatsneassaeateneaseaes FIGURE 1 103 Power Control WindOW iisisti re avenia E OEE ONETAN ec eiietel FIGURE 1 104 Schedule Control Window e FIGURE 1 105 Sch hed le List VW lw tere iiasiraiiss Eed FIGURE 1 106 Schedule List WINJOWi siceraria iE EE N EEE EEEE Ean FIGURE 1 107 IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window FIGURE 1 108 IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window FIGURE 1 109 Power management Setup window ENEE FIGURE 1 110 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Wimdow ENEE 248 FIGURE 1 111 Console Redirection Window c cscessssessesessesessesesseseeessseeseesssecssaesseseeseseeueseeseaeeseseeneseeasseensaeensaeeneaeeneseeneateeeatenes 250 FIGURE 1 112 Mode WindOW Seege EES FIGURE 1 113 SBX ee A E FIGURE 1 114 SB x Window 2 nnet Eaka aai eae aea EAE EAE Ea EEE EAE EAER EAEE EEE En FIGURE 1 115 SB x WindOW 3 sa ses cues ceeded pa akehan oaea ebene Awana aid anne aud wanda atta FIGURE 1116 SBA MN ewe FIGURE 4 117 SB x Window i e FIGURE 1 118 SB x Window EE FIGURE 1 119 IOU x Window 1 FIGURE 1 120 IOU x Window 2 FIGURE 1 121 IOU x Window 3 FIGURE 1 122 MMB Xx Window 1 eiert 266 FIGURE 123 MMB X Neien eege AEN 267 FIGURE 3 1 Display Example of Front page of Boot Manager NENNEN 358 FIGURE 3 2 Window area of Boot Manager Front Page EN
215. The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message 00444 _ 00013 Setting completed W_00426 Invalid values specified Previous private key will be overwritten with new private key Are you sure For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 5 8 SSH menu The SSH menu has the Create SSH Server Key window O Create SSH Server Key window You can create a private key for the SSH server in the Create SSH Server Key window Private Key necessary to make the SSH function of MMB effective is made MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 82 Create SSH Server Key window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active MIMIB 0 Part Nusabor MCXNNXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EE Status Normal System Partitice sex Administration Mizent enance Logout Create SSH Server Key Help SSH server key stavas SSH server key is NOT istalled Craate SSH Serer Key TABLE 1 114 Buttons in the Create SSH Server Key window Buttons Description Create SSH Server Key Creates a private key for the SSH server 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SSH Create SSH Server Key 2 Window Operations 1 Before you create a private key confirm that SSH is set to Disable in the Network Protocols window Click the Create SSH Server Key button Thi
216. UEFI Menu Operations Boot From File Menu The Boot From File menu is used to boot immediately by specifying the boot loader file of operating system in the storage device which is recognized by UEFI The following window is window immediately after the activation of the Boot From File menu A list of storage devices recognized by UEFI is displayed FIGURE 3 68 Display Example of Boot From File Menu LU LU 4 LU No 1 Page Information Display File Explorer is displayed 2 Menu Selection Storage device list by which UEFI is recognized is displayed 3 Operation helps Display Description of operation key is shown in TABLE 3 69 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 69 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Items Description 1 Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager UEFI Menu Operations m Specification of Boot File Boot from File 1 Place the cursor to storage device which stores the Operating System Boot Loader File to be booted from the device list window shown in TABLE 3 69 Display Contents of Operation Help Display FIGURE 3 69 Specifications of Boot File 1 2 Press Enter key As shown in FIGURE 3 70 Specifications of Boot File 2 file list of storage device appears Contents enclosed in lt gt is a dir
217. UI menus in maintenance mode User 11 Web UI menus in maintenance mode CE 12 Web UI menus in maintenance mode maintenance personnel Web UI menus in maintenance mode Administrator This section outlines the Web U menus that are available with the Administrator privileges in maintenance mode The maintenance mode column has the following items For details on the maintenance mode see 1 1 6 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Hot System Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Warm System Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Cold System Cold System Maintenance All partitions are powered off and turned on their breakers and Cold System Maintenance All partitions are powered off and turned off their breakers The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information in the window RO The account user can only refer to information in the window N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenu 1 The account user can operate partitions not in maintenance mode in this window 2 The account user can operate only partitions in maintenance mode in this window 3 The SB is neither a Home SB nor Reserved SB Alternatively the SB is the Home SB in the Power Off status in a partition in the Standby status 4 The partition is
218. USB Device 2 Priority is lower than the Legacy Boot Option thus unable to boot automatically 6 Fujitsu Virtual Floppy0 1 00 Boot Failure 7 EFI Internal Shell Starts UEFI Shell UEFI Menu Operations E UEFI aware Operating System Boot and Legacy Operating System Boot fails and if UEFI Start up is successful TABLE 3 8 If UEFI aware operating system Boot and Legacy operating system Boot fails and if UEFI Start up is successful UEFI Boot specifications Flow of start up 1 Windows Boot Manager Tries the boot of Windows Boot Manager Boot Failure 2 EFI USB Device Boot Failure 3 EFI Network Device Boot Failure 4 Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO 1 00 Tries the Legacy operating system Boot from high priority Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Boot Failure 5 EFI USB Device 2 Priority is lower than the Legacy Boot Option thus unable to boot automatically 6 Fujitsu Virtual Floppy0 1 00 Boot Failure 7 EFI Internal Shell Starts UEFI Shell UEFI Shell Start up 3 Definition of Boot failure There are 2 types of failure for Booting process E Failure in which process can be shifted to the next boot option E Failure in which process cannot be shifted to the next boot option Failure in which process can be shifted to the next boot option Failure in which process can be shifted to the next boot option is the state where boot process fails because of the absence of b
219. Unit and its Icons Status Display Color Icon Normal Normal state Green None Warning Degraded Yellow Black mark in yellow triangle Failed Red x in red circle Each unit is linked with the window showing the detailed status However for units which are not mounted there is no window showing the details Therefore these units are not linked TABLE 1 16 Items displayed in System Status Window Items Description Power Supply Shows the status of PSU Fans Shows the status of FAN Temperature Shows the status of temperature sensor SB 0 SB 3 Shows the status of system board In case of PRIMEQUEST 2400E model it is SB 0 SB 1 IOU 0 IOU 3 Shows the status of IOU DU 0 DU 1 Shows the status of DU OPL Shows the status of OPL MMB 0 MMB 1 Shows the status of MMB PCI_Box 0 PCl_Box 3 Shows the status of PDC Box which are connected 1 Menu Operation System System Status 2 Window Operations 1 Click the link corresponding to each unit when the detailed status of unit is to be confirmed The window showing detailed status of each unit appears Remarks The detailed status can also be displayed by selecting the menu of target unit from System sub menu directly For details on the operations see 1 2 9 LEDs window 1 2 16 IPC Bos Menu System Event Log Window Among the events generated in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system events of
220. W RW Backup Restore Configuration Backup MMB is not affected by MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level mode Administr CE ator maintenance mode Restore MMB can be operated only by maintenance E ee Se personnel Maintenance Hot System RW RW Wizard Hot Partition RW RW Warm System RW RW Cold System RW RW MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 1 13 Web UI menus PRIMEQUEST 2800B model This section lists the Web UI menus that are available for the PRIMEQUEST 2800B model The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information and control operation from the menu RO The account user can only refer to information from the menu N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenus TABLE 1 14 Web UI menus PRIMEQUEST 2800B model Navigation 1st level 2nd level Privileges Remarks bar Admin Operator User CE System System Status RO RO RO DO Displays the overall system status System Event RW RO RO RO Displays system event Log logs Operation Log RW RO RO RO Displays the operations on the Web UI and CLI System RW RO RO RO Displays system Information information such as the system name or product name Firmwa
221. Web UI A 1 1 Setting items of System Event Log Filtering Condition Window ENEE 483 A 1 2 Setting Item of Operation Log Filtering Condition Window ENEE 484 A 1 3 Setting Items of System Information Window A 1 4 Setting items of System Setup Wind A 1 5 Setting items of System Power Control Window A 1 6 Setting items of Power Control Wimdow EEN A 1 7 Setting Items of Schedule Control Window EEN A 1 8 Setting Items of Add Schedule Edit User WindOwW EEN 487 A 1 9 Setting Items of Partition Configuration Window EEN 487 A 1 10 Setting Items of IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Wimdow EEN 488 Preface A 1 11 A 1 12 A 1 13 A 1 14 A 1 15 A 1 16 A 1 17 A 1 18 A 1 19 A 1 20 A 1 21 A 1 22 A 1 23 A 1 24 A 1 25 A 1 26 A 1 27 A 1 28 A 1 29 A 1 30 A 1 31 A2 A 2 1 A 2 2 A 2 3 A 2 4 A 2 5 A 2 6 A 2 7 A 2 8 A 2 9 A 2 10 A 2 11 A 2 12 A3 A3 1 A3 2 A3 3 A3 4 Setting Items of IPV6 Console Redirection Setup Wimdow EEN 488 Setting Items of Power Management Setup Wimdon ENEE 488 Setting Items of ASR Control WiNdOW EEN Setting Items of Console Redirection Window EEN Se ttingiltems of de e E le ee Setting Items of Add User Edit User Window Setting Items of Date Time Wimdow EEN Setting Items of IPv4 Interface WiINGOW essecessecessecesecessesessesesseeesseeesseetsseeesseessseeesseeesseseeaeetsaeensaeeteaeeteaeateaeeteaseteaees Setting Items of IPV6 Interface WiIN
222. X FU ITSU Serial Number Status Normal System User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt Partition gt Partition Configuration Partition Configuration Note R represents Reserved SB H represents Home SB represents Installed SB IOU other than the above l Set Partition Name Add Unit Remove Unit Home l Cancel lt gt For the series of SB and IOU which are not installed the background color is displayed in the gray Select the set partition by using the left radio button and select the button corresponding to set process from Add Unit Remove Unit and Home If SB IOU link is clicked SB x window IOU x window are displayed respectively If the maintenance mode Hot Partition Maintenance Warm System Maintenance or Cold system Maintenance is set only the user Maintenance person Administrator privilege who sets the maintenance mode can operate this mode If the partition is selected other than the maintenance target a message is displayed and operation is disabled TABLE 1 68 Display Items and Set Items of Add Schedule Window Items Description It displays the number for identifying the partition Exists up to 0 3 Partition SB IOU which does not belong to the partition is displayed as follows Reserved Reserved SB Free Free SB IOB Partition Name Displays sets the name attached to the partition The name can be entered up to 16 characte
223. able WOL disabled zi N When the Apply button is clicked while the system is powered on a warning dialog box W_00487 Unable to change the mode because this system is powered on is displayed When the system is already powered off the settings are reflected without displaying the dialog box The LAN Device Mode is displayed in IOU Unit comprised in the partition specified by the LAN Device Mode For settings select LAN Device Mode in the IOU Unit with the radio button and click the Apply button TABLE 1 158 Display Items and Setting Items in Mode Window Items Description Memory Operation Mode Displays the currently enabled Memory Operation Mode Current Performance Mode Displays the settings to the Performance Mode Normal Mode Displays the settings to the Normal Mode Partial Mirror Mode Displays the settings to the Partial Mirror Mode Full Mirror Mode Displays the settings to the Full Mirror Mode Spare Mode Displays the settings to the Spare Mode Memory Operation Mode Sets the Memory Operation Mode for system setting Performance Mode Normal Mode Partial Mirror Mode Full Mirror Mode Spare Mode Enables the settings after rebooting the system MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Default setting is Normal Mode Memory Mirror RAS Displays the Memory operation of currently enabled Mirror Mode Mode Mirror Keep Mode Shows the maintenance of Mirror
224. able with the CE privileges in maintenance mode The maintenance mode column has the following items For details on the maintenance mode see 1 1 6 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Hot System Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Warm System Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Cold System Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker on and Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker off The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information in the window RO The account user can only refer to information in the window N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenu 1 The account user can operate partitions not in maintenance mode in this window 2 The account user can operate only partitions in maintenance mode in this window 3 The SB is neither a Home SB nor Reserved SB Alternatively the SB is the Home SB in the Power Off status in a partition in the Standby status 4 The partition is in the Standby status TABLE 1 12 Web UI menus in maintenance mode CE Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode System System Power Hot System RO Control Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB M
225. abled slot 2 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 84 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 3 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 85 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 4 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 86 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 5 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 87 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 6 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 88 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 7 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 89 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 8 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 90 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 9 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 91 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 10 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 92 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 11 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 97 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 98 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 1 of PCl_Box 2 Slot 99 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 2 of PCI _Box 2 Slot 100 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 3 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 101 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 4 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 102 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 5 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 103 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 6
226. ace Operations Items Description Force Power Off Turns off the power forcefully sadump Specifies the SADUMP for the system Not specified There is no instruction for this system Force Power Off Delay Specifies whether to enforce power off when power off is done without proper operation of the shutdown instruction for the operating system by Power Off on the partition In case enforced power off has been specified the specified time 1 9 minutes can be set The system is forcibly powered off when the specified time has lapsed The default setting of check box is Off Boot Selector Specifies the boot device for which the Boot Manager setting of BIOS is Override temporarily Select the device to be boot from pull down menu No Override Boots by the EFI Boot Manager settings Force boot into EFI Boot Manager Waiting for input by the EFI Boot Manager Boot by selecting the boot device from the EFI Boot Manager Force PXE iSCSI Overrides the EFI Boot Manager settings forcibly tries the PXE Force boot from DVD Overrides the EFI Boot Manager settings and forcibly tries the booting from the System DVD Default setting is No Override This setting is applied only for the first system boot setting the value After the system boots this setting automatically returns to No Override Therefore it is necessary to set the boot for system In case of constant setting it is set in the Boot Manager of the UEFI T
227. ace aen 269 CLM COMMING E EE 270 Setting Commands EE 282 add partition 282 CISA ACCESS Tute RE 283 Clear ssh key rirnan nr annainn anaE aaan EEE eaa aE AE NEESS 284 GEINGEN 284 download Ssh EE 285 power off remove PAaNllON weisstawutaniateea ane eae 290 Set active MMB EE 291 set date Set Partition AyMNAMIC_PALTILIONING EE 293 SOU GALWAY cesses ide scecdcecdtes Eeer TA i aradersbans20e ib acseeaasnicesiaaiesie 293 Set galeway EW eege an caenta a ee daiwa iad ainda kan 294 RU IA 295 lu EE 295 Set http E E 296 Set Ier aan enti nian naa meow aun 296 Set https EE 297 Set er de Eet 297 EEN 298 Set Maintenance e D 298 Set parition el 299 set partition lan_device_mode 300 Set partition MEMONY_MIFOr_FAS_MOAE ccseseseseseseseseesesesececeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeacaeseseseseseseseseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeaeasaeieieeeeteeeeeatets 301 Set partition memory_opration MOC cccceseseseseseeeseeeesesesereceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeacaeaesesesessseseseseeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeaeaeieeietseeeeenenens 302 EE ANN EE 304 set partition pci_address MOE EE 305 Ee set ssh_port Set telnet tee deed enh asavasadaeradia DE dee dd d ln GE 307 SettimeZOne ei eke ee a ee ee aa 307 hotadd De le E 308 hotremove Partition EE 310 Commands for Display 311 SNOW ACCESS COMMO EE 311 show CTV ul DEE 312 GU 312 SHOW CXIE COdG i Ate eu Ci eit eege 313 Preface 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 7 2 3 8 2 3 9 2 3 10 2 3 11 2 3 12 2 3 13 2 3 14 2 3 15 2 3 16 2 3 17 2
228. acity_keep Sets the Capacity Keep mode Privilege All 1 Input format show memory_mirror_ras_mode 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When Memory Mirror RAS Mode of system is displayed show memory_mirror_ras_mode current mirror_keep setting capacity_keep 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid 2 6 11 2 6 12 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Failed to execute s command Failed to execute show memory_mirror_ras_mode command System Configuration Failed show lan_device_mode Displays the setting enable disable of LAN Device WOL in IOU unit of the system Privilege All 1 Input format show lan_devoce_mode 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When LAN Device Mode of IOU In example it is OU 2 or IOU 3 from system is displayed show lan_device_mode iou 2 LAN Device enable WOL enable iou 3 LAN Device disable WOL disable 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Failed to execute s command Failed to execute show lan_device_mode command System Configuration Failed
229. adaumiauiodana a nition aihiaaiauies 5 1 2 Device hot add hot remove operation add rm subcommanq 5 1 3 Show slot status Slot SUDCOMMAN i 0 eerste ee EES 5 1 4 Show resources on device SHOW subcommerd EEN 5 1 5 Information gathering dr report subcommanmdh un 5 2 elei ee Ee Ee Be TEE 5 2 1 Description of collaboration function 5 2 2 Collaboration program execution timing 5 2 3 le ge ee E lt e ET E 5 2 4 Directory that stored Collaboration Drooram ENNEN 5 2 5 Naming convention of Collaboration program EEN 5 2 6 Method of describing configuration file of collaboration program 5 2 7 Permission required for Collaboration program EEN 5 2 8 Argument passed to collaboration program un 5 2 9 Exit status of Collaboration program sesessesesesessesesseesesseseaseeseeseseaeenseeseseateneseaeseaneseeneaeatensesaeaeasenseeaeaeatensesseaneteneenseateneeees 5 2 10 Output of collaboration program 5 2 11 Flow of collaboration program e Del CHAPTER6 Setting of sadump environment EEN 6 1 Sadump Configuration Menus isien saaana aar eae reo aae aaaea o N Ee aare Sraa EENS 6 1 1 e 6 2 0 E 6 3 Set up Manager EE 6 4 Dump device Manager TU 6 5 Create a dump device EU 6 6 Selectd vice Metteg 6 7 Setting dump device TEE 6 8 Selectdevice iMenU stn ae ha eine ci eich al Saad ee eeh eg 6 9 Select discard dur device Men EENEG 6 10 Select multiple devices TEE Appendix A List of Setting Wem E AA Setting Items of MMB
230. adump instruction reset Permitted Hard Reset instruction nmi Permitted NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Administrator Outline console Permitted Test Console connection to partition DR related DR related commands MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Displays the active MMB help Permitted Help information System configuration set mmb control reset Permitted Resets the MMB set mmb control switch_over Switch Over the MMB add user Permitted Adds User show user_list Permitted Displays Users TABLE 2 10 MMB CLI commands Operator Command Administrator Outline Power control power off Permitted Turns the power off power on Permitted Turns the power on Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show partition configuration Displays the partition configuration set reserved_sb Sets the Reserved SB show reserved_sb Displays the Reserved SB set partition home Sets the Home SB show partition home Displays the Home SB set partition dynamic_partitioning Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Displays DR state of partition set memory_operation_
231. age Warning Though it is not severe problems may occur in the future for events T Information Event assumed as information when partition power is on Date Time Displays the time when event and errors occurs Format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Partition No Displays the partition number Unit Displays the unit which has the event or error detected sensor Event ID Displays the ID 8 digit hexadecimal which identifies the contents of the event For the details of allocation of Event ID see Chapter 2 MMB Messages in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Message Reference C122 E178 Description Displays the events or details of the error TABLE 1 26 Partition Event Log Window Buttons Buttons Description Filter When Filter button is clicked Partition Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering the filtering conditions is appeared Clear When Clear button is clicked a verification message Do you want to clear all the partition log events displayed 1 Menu Operation System Partition Event Log 2 Window Operations When the events displayed on window repeat 1 Click the Filter button Partition Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering the filter conditions appears 2 Enter the conditions on Partition Event Log Filtering Condition window Then click the Apply button Return to Partition Event Log window Events satisfying the specified conditions appear
232. ailed to show dynamic_partitioning status command Adding SB d to Partition d running xx Adding OU d to Partition d running xx Adding SB d lIOU d to Partition d Failed Removing SB d from Partition d running xx Removing IOU d from Partition d running xx Removing SB d IOU d from Partition d Falied 2 4 2 4 1 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Update Command Update Commands are as follows 2 4 1 Update ALL 2 4 2 show update_status This section describes operation procedure of these commands Update ALL The update ALL command batch downloads firmware from the specified URL and updates the MMB BMC and BIOS with the downloaded firmware Specify the URL as follows http host path file ftp host path file The update sequence is as follows 1 MMB firmware update standby 2 MMB firmware update active 3 BMC firmware update 4 BIOS firmware update You can check the progress by using the show update_status command Note If the MMB or SB is faulty perform maintenance on it before updating the firmware Do not update the firmware in a configuration with a faulty MMB or SB Privilege Administrator or CE 1 Input format update ALL lt url gt force quiet 2 Option force This option forcibly updates the firmware based on the applicable general firmware version quiet This option updates the firmware without user
233. aintained Sort by New event first e New event first Date Time e Old event first Start First event e First event When Specified Time is Date Time e Specified Time selected Start Time can be entered First event and Specified Time can be switched and the time data of Specified Time is maintained End Last event e Last event When Specified Time is Date Time e Specified Time selected End Time can be entered Last event and Specified Time can be switched and the time data of Specified Time is maintained Number of 100 events 0 or more integer less than The denominator of fraction events to or equal to the denominator which is displayed is the display in the fraction displayed total number of registered Maximum 3000 events events A 1 2 Setting Item of Operation Log Filtering Condition Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for setting items of Operation Log Filtering Condition Window TABLE A 2 Setting Items of Operation Log Filtering Condition Window Setting Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Items Operation All e All All and Specified can be e Specified switched and the data selected by the check boxes in Specified is maintained Sort by New event first e New event first Date Time e Old event first Start First event e First event When Specified Time is Date Time e Specified Time selected Start Time can be entered Switch First event and
234. al IOU _10GbE and IOU_1GbE are matched and it is written as IOU Screenshots contained in this manual may differ from the actual product screen displays The IP addresses configuration information and other such information contained in this manual are display examples and differ from that for actual operation Alert messages This manual uses the following alert messages to prevent users and bystanders from being injured and to prevent property damage This indicates a hazardous situation that is likely to result in death or serious personal injury if the user does not perform the AWARNING procedure correctly This indicates a hazardous situation that could result in minor or AACAUTION moderate personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly This also indicates that damage to the product or other property may occur if the user does not perform the procedure correctly This indicates information that could help the user use the product important j p more efficiently Alert messages in the text An alert statement follows an alert symbol An alert statement is indented on both ends to distinguish it from regular text Similarly one space line is inserted before and after the alert statement Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the AWARNING following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must not perform these tasks under any circu
235. alid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute show partition command Partition x is not defined 2 3 11 show partition memory_operation_mode Displays the Memory Operation Mode of the specified partition performance Shows the Performance Mode normal Shows the Normal Mode partial_mirror Shows the Partial Mirror Mode full_mirror Shows the Full Mirror Mode spare Shows Spare Mode Privilege All 1 Input format MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations show partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When Memory Operation Mode of partition 3 is displayed show partition memory_operation_mode3 current normal setting performance 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute show partition command Partition x is not defined 2 3 12 show partition pci_address_mode Displays the PCI Address Mode of the specified partition Privilege All 1 Input format show partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example E
236. am O OK bh E gt FIGURE 1 16 Fans Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal P dministrat t k RET Log gt System gt F a S Fans gt OK ai z o LI mm Ian O e ox Lamm Tan O a ox mm Tam O a OKT 14420 7344 C Not present a Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present FANM 1 Ee e a Not present Airflow Volume d e EI IL S Once an abnormality is detected in the Status of each fan the abnormal status is maintained until the fan is replaced or until the abnormal status is cleared by clicking the Status Clear button MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Remarks If the abnormality in rotational frequency of a fan is detected again after executing Status Clear then the status changes to Failed Status Accordingly even if the status of a fan having abnormal rotational frequency from the beginning is cleared the status remains as Failed TABLE 1 40 Display items of Fans window Items Description Fan Redundancy Fan Redundancy Displays the redundancy status of fan Redundant The Fans are Redundant Non Redundant Sufficient Resource Redundancy of fan is lost however there are sufficient fans to continue the operations of the system j Non Redundant Insufficient Resource The number of fans is less due to redundancy and fans to continue operations of the system are sufficient
237. ame 2 2 18 set http 2 2 19 set http_port 2 2 20 set https 2 2 21 set https port 2 2 22 set ip 2 2 23 set ipv6 2 2 24 set maintenance_ip 2 2 25 set partition home 2 2 26 set partition lan_device_mode 2 2 27 set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode 2 2 28 set partition memory_opration_mode 2 2 29 set partition name 2 2 30 set partition pci_address_mode 2 2 31 set ssh 2 2 32 set ssh_port 2 2 33 set telnet 2 2 34 set telnet_port 2 2 35 set timezone 2 2 36 hotadd partition 2 2 37 hotremove partition This section describes how to use these commands add partition Adds specified SB IOU in specified partition If specified SB IOU are not in free status they cannot be executed Privilege Administrator 1 Input format add partition lt partition gt SB lt SB x gt quiet add partition lt partition gt IOU lt IOU x gt quiet 2 Option quiet Executes the command without interacting with user MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 3 Usage example Example In PRIMEQUEST 2800E when SB 3 is to be added in Partition 2 add partition 2 SB 3 Are you sure to continue adding SB 3 to Partition 2 Y N Y Adding SB 3 to Partition 2 has been completed successfully Example In PRIMEQUEST 2800E when IOU 1 is to be added in Partition 2 add partition 2 IOU 1 Are you sure to continue adding OU 1 to Partition 2 Y N Y Adding IOU 1 to Partition 2 has been completed successfully
238. an 8 characters and less than 32 characters 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp T 2 lt gt _ Privilege In case of Add User Admin In case of Edit User e Admin e Operator e User Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items current privilege e CE e Partition Operator Status In case of Add User e Enabled Enable e Disabled In case of Edit User current status Full Name None Maximum 32 characters can be entered Operable None e On Operational Grayed out if privilege is Partition for e Off Non operational other than partition Partition operator Operator A 1 17 Setting Items of Date Time Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Date Time Window TABLE A 17 Setting Items of Date Time Window Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Date Shows time on the clock of the server YYYY MM DD e YYYY Year MM Month DD Day Time Shows time on the clock of the server Modify the Time is On Time is set Hour Minute Second 24 hours format e Modify the Time is Off Time is not set Time Zone None Select from pull down menu NTP Disable Enable Disable NTP Time Correction Mode NTP Server 1 NTP Server 2 NTP Server 3
239. anagement Setup Partition 0 If no board belongs to the partition this submenu is not fe e playe ds Information RO Displays the partition status and partition related information ASR Control RO Sets the conditions for automatically restarting the partition Console N A Displays the console Redirection output of the partition Mode RO Sets the mode for the partition Partition 1 Same as for Partition 0 Partition 2 Partition 3 User Administration MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks User List N A Lists edits and deletes registered user accounts Change RW Changes the password Password of the user s own account Who RO Displays all users who are logged in to the MMB Network Configuration Date Time RO Network Interface IPv4 Interface RO Sets the IPv4 IP address etc IPv6 Interface RO Sets the IPv6 IP address etc Management N A Configures the Port LAN LAN Port of the MMB HUB Configuration Network RO Protocols Refresh Rate RW Sets the refresh rate of the Web UI window SNMP N A Configuration Community N A Trap N A SNMPv3 N A Configuration SSL Create CSR N A Creates a secret key and CSR Export N A Exports a secret key Key CSR and CSR Import Security N A Installs a certificate Certificate Create N A Creates a selfsigned S
240. ange the system displays an error message and does not process the command Messages The following messages are common to all the commands If the specified CLI parameter character string is an incorrect parameter the following message appears Also the CLI parameters are classified into command groups show set add remove clear power download and update If the specified parameter does not belong to any of these command groups this message appears The specified parameter is invalid The following message appears only if the specified command name is show set add remove clear power download or update Parameter missing If the entered command is not passwd ping who or help and does not belong to any of the show set add remove clear power download and update command groups the following message appears No such file or directory 2 2 2 2 1 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Setting Commands The information setting commands are as follows 2 2 1 add partition 2 2 2 clear access_control 2 2 3 clear ssh_key 2 2 4 console 2 2 5 download ssh_key 2 2 6 power off 2 2 7 power on 2 2 8 sadump 2 2 9 reset 2 2 10 nmi 2 2 11 remove partition 2 2 12 set active_mmb 2 2 13 set date 2 2 14 set partition dynamic_partitioning 2 2 15 set gateway 2 2 16 set gateway_ipv6 2 2 17 set hostn
241. ange the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this partition set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode It sets the Memory Mirror RAS mode of the specified partition Memory Operation Mode can be set only at the time of Mirror Mode settings Default value is set to mirror_keep RAS emphasized mode mirror_keep Mirror mode is maintained capacity_keep Capacity of the memory is maintained For the partition which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command following message is displayed and settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown For the partition which is already powered OFF when the settings are changed by this command power OFF ON is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message Moreover also when values which are the same as the current values are set power ff on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only managed partition 1 Input format 2 2 28 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep
242. ange the status of the FANs and PSUs Change the partition configuration Configure a Reserved SB Partition Operator Partition Operator accounts have the same privileges as Operator accounts except that their privileges are restricted to specific partitions Like Operator accounts they are permitted to check the system status Unlike Operator accounts they are not permitted to perform some operations such as clearing the status of an SB IOU User User accounts are only permitted to check the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server status They are not permitted to set system configuration information or power on or off the partitions CE CE accounts are permitted to check the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server status They are also permitted to manipulate the power supply The following sections outline the Web UI menus that are available for each type of user privilege 1 1 1 Web UI menus Administrator 1 1 2 Web Ul menus 1 1 3 Web UI menus Partition Operator 1 1 4 Web UI menus User 1 1 5 Web UI menus CE 1 1 6 Web UI menus in maintenance mode 1 1 7 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Administrator 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operator 1 8 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Operator 1 9 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Partition Operator 1 10 Web UI menus in maintenance mode User 1 11 Web UI menus in maintenance mode CE 1 12 Web UI menus in maintenance mode maintenance personnel 1 13 Web UI menus PRIMEQUE
243. anges the password of the specified user Users without Administrator privileges can change only their own passwords Users with Administrator privileges can change the password of any user If no user is specified the command changes the password of the currently logged in user For details on characters that can be entered and other conditions see TABLE 1 85 Setting and display items in the Add User and Edit User windows Privilege All 1 Input format passwd USER 2 Option USER This option sets the name of the user whose password is to be changed 3 Usage example passwd Current password New password kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Re enter new password Password changed 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN This command cannot be executed on the standby MMB The specified parameter is invalid Password changed change passwd failed code 0x 04x Could not set attributes invalid passwd password needs 8 characters at least password needs 32 characters or less Failed to the password authentication New password differs from Re enter new password ping The ping command sends an ICMP echo message to the recipient identified by lt IP address gt or lt server name gt Remarks Supported only for I
244. appears 2 Specify the save path This saves the secret key to the specified path Exporting the CSR 1 Click the Export CSR button A dialog box appears 2 Specify the save path This saves the CSR to the specified path Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed _ 00445 Private Key is exported Are you sure MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations _ 00446 CSR is exported Are you sure W_00447 Private Key doesn t exist W_00448 CSR doesn t exist For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Import Certificate window You can import a signed electronic certificate from a certificate authority to the MMB in the Import Certificate window FIGURE 1 80 Import Certificate window Model PRIMEQUEST2300E Active MMEO Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number es e Status Normal System Partition User Administration Mantenan Logout gt Netwoek Configuration gt SSL gt Impoet Cercate Import Certificate Heip To inpor the certificate select a cert fle and click Import baton eer impart 11 Cancel TABLE 1 111 Buttons in the Import Certificate window Buttons Description Browse Displays the window used to select an imported electronic certificate Import Imports the electronic
245. at show ipv6 2 Option None 3 Usage example show ipv6 IP Address Prefix 2000 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 64 4 Message None 2 3 22 show hostname Displays host name of MMB Privilege All 1 Input format show hostname 2 Option None 3 Usage example show hostname hogehoge fujitsu com 4 Message None MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 3 23 show maintenance_ip Displays the IP address of Maintenance port Privilege All 1 Input format show maintenance_ip 2 Option None 3 Usage example show maintenance_ip IP Address 192 168 1 10 NetMask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 SMTP Address 172 128 1 2 4 Message None 2 3 24 show ssh Displays the status enable disable of existing SSH server Privilege All 1 Input format show ssh 2 Option None 3 Usage example show ssh SSH disabled 4 Message None 2 3 25 show ssh_port Displays the port where SSH session is currently connected Privilege All 1 Input format MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations show ssh_port 2 Option None 3 Usage example show ssh_port SSH Port Number 22 4 Message None 2 3 26 show telnet Displays the status enable disable of existing Telnet server Privilege All 1 Input format show telnet 2 Option None
246. ation Help Display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving changes of this menu 3 4 6 PCI Subsystem Configuration Menu Option ROM of PCI card can be configured in PCI Subsystem Configuration menu The example of contents displayed on screen immediately after the activation of PCI Subsystem Configuration Menu is given below FIGURE 3 17 Display Example on PCI Subsystem Configuration Menu H U U U I N 1 Page Information Display PCI Subsystem Configuration is displayed 2 Menu Selection The items shown in TABLE 3 22 Display Contents of Operation Help Display are displayed UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 23 Display Contents of Menu Selection Item PCI ROM Priority Display Contents In case of Option ROM of EFI and Legacy specifies the Option ROM to be start up e Legacy ROM Selects when Legacy operating system is started e EFI Compatible ROM Selects when UEFI aware operating system is selected Default setting is EFl Compatible ROM ASPM Support Uses Active State Power Management ASPM as power management of PCI Express Link However even though ASPM is enabled if PCI express adopter and on board controller dose not supports ASPM link will not be enabled e Disabled e Auto e Limit to LOs Default setting is Disab
247. ation help display Description of help key is shown in the TABLE 3 40 Display Contents of Operation Help Display UEFI Menu Operations UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 40 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item t Move Highlight Description Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving changes of this menu 3 4 11 USB Configuration menu In USB Configuration menu USB related settings are performed Remarks The following figure shows the example of window which is displayed immediately after activation of USB Configuration menu FIGURE 3 29 Display example of USB Configuration menu LE A E rr TS E E NO 1 Page information display Displayed with USB Configuration 2 Menu selection Items shown in TABLE 3 41 Display contents of Menu selection are shown in the Menu UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 41 Display contents of Menu selection Item USB Devices Display contents Displays the number of usable USB drive USB keyboard USB mouse and USB hub n Drive s n Keyboard s n Mouse s n Hub s Legacy USB Support Specifies whether USB Legacy support can be used Disabled Enabled Auto Default setting is Enabled Remarks When operating system needs to be started from USB drive it is necessary to set this function to Enabled
248. ations Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 49 OpROM DU Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI Setting for DU 1 Slot 1 card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 50 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI Setting for PCI Express card which is mounted slot 0 of IOU 3 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 51 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI Setting for PCI Express card which is mounted slot 1 of IOU 3 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 52 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI Setting for PCI Express card which is mounted slot 2 of IOU 3 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 53 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI Setting for PCI Express card which is mounted slot 3 of IOU 3 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Commit Changes and The contents having changes in the settings Exit are saved and exit from this menu Discard Changes and The contents having changes in the settings Exit are cancelled and exit from this menu Remaks Slot counting may differ depending on the type of IOUs in the system IOU_1GbE 4 PCI slots OU_10GbE 3 PCI slots 3 Operation help display The help for the operations mentioned on this page is shown in TABLE 3 26 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 26 Dis
249. ay format Firmware maintains Version information in the following format Major Version 1Byte data Binary format lt Minor Version 1Byte data BCD format This data is displayed as follows X YY X displays Major version in decimal 0 255 Y displays Minor version as it is by double digit in BCD format Binary coded decimal 00 99 Version bank2 Firmware Version of bank2 is displayed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Version display format Same as bank1 Unified Firmware Displays firmware version of target unit version Firmware maintains version information in the following format Model identification XX 1 byte data 01h SA Last two digits of the year YY 1 byte data BCD format 09 99 7 Month MM 1 byte data BCD format 01 12 Serial number N 1 byte data Binary format 1 9 This data is displayed as below XXYYMMN Example BA13012 In case of uncertain version number is displayed After start restart of the system is executed by the system administrator the latest written Firmware is reflected Remarks After executing Firmware update it is recommended to reflect in the Firmware by prompt start restart of the system 1 Menu Operation System System Information 2 Window Operations None 1 7 6 System Setup Window In System Setup window Power supply of PRIMEQUEST 2800B model and restoration action etc can be set
250. bited E Mail Address Sets the e mail address of the owner specified in the created CSR The address must consist of up to 40 specifiable characters TABLE 1 109 Buttons in the Create CSR window Buttons Description Create CSR _ Creates a secret key anda CSR Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SSL Create CSR 2 Window Operations 1 Specify information such as the length of a secret key and the ISO country code of the owner Then click the Create CSR button A dialog box appears with a message stating that the previous secret key will be unusable once a new secret key is created 2 Click the OK button in the dialog box This creates a new secret key and CSR They can take a few minutes to create When creation is completed a confirmation dialog box appears FIGURE 1 78 Confirmation dialog box Microsoft Internet Explorar d 100465 A new Key and a CSR are generated successfully To use the new Key click OK button Cancel 3 Click the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to set the new secret key After the new secret key is set the Export Key CSR window appears Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message W_00426 Invalid values specified _ 00444 Previous private key will be overwrit
251. boot option set in the ATAPI CDROM Drive Order N is set in the other HardDisk Drive Order M before setting boot option set in the ATAPI CDROM Drive Order N before change is set in the ATAPI CDROM Drive Order M In the FIGURE 3 61 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 3 Optiarc DVD RW AD 7543C1 U1is set in the ATAPI CDROM Drive Order 01 wherein Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO01 00 is set UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 61 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 3 Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 5 Set Enable Disable of ATAPI CDROM Drive SN Select Disable if you want to disable the drive Select the boot option if you want to enable the drive when the ATAPI CDROM Drive 00 is set to Disable Disabled ATAPI CDROM Drive N is displayed as Disable 4 is an example of the window FIGURE 3 62 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 4 Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Disabled Fuji Vir Lem compen tacit ty UEFI Menu Operations 6 When you want to exit from the menu by the saving the setting changes select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key When you want to exit from the menu without saving the setting changes select Discard Changes and Exit and press Enter key E Set Legacy NET Drive Order menu Set Legacy Net Drive Order menu sets the priority level of the Boot device when multiple network ports exi
252. cO FUJITSU FUJITSU Server PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177 01EN Preface Preface This manual provides information on operation methods and settings including details on the MMB and EFI functions The manual is intended for system administrators For details on the regulatory compliance statements and safety precautions see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Safety and Regulatory Information C122 E171XA Errata and addenda for the manual The PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Errata and Addenda C122 E182EN provides errata and addenda for the manual Read the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Errata and Addenda C122 E182EN thoroughly in reference to the manual For Safe Operation How to use this manual This manual contains important information about the safe use of this product Read the manual thoroughly to understand the information in it before using this product Be sure to keep this manual in a safe and convenient location for quick reference Fujitsu makes every effort to prevent users and bystanders from being injured and to prevent property damage Be sure to use the product according to the instructions in the manual About this product This product is designed and manufactured for standard applications Such applications include but are not limited to general office work personal and home use and general industrial use The product is not intended for applications that require extremely high levels of safety to be guarante
253. ce RAID Card BBU Status The state of RAID BBU Battery Backup Unit is displayed g Online E On Battery d Charging Discharging S Battery Low y Relearn Required S Failed __Not present Vendor ID Vendor ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Device ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Physical Drives Count The number of physical drives connected with RAID Card is displayed Logical Drives Count The number of logical drives composed under the control of RAID Card is displayed Serial Number The serial number of RAID Card is displayed Firmware Version The firmware version of RAID Card is displayed Physical Drives Slot The slot number equipped with a physical drive is displayed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Status The state of a physical drive is displayed S Operational Available Failed z Hot Spare R Rebuilding S SMART err Not present Vendor The vendor of a physical drive is displayed Model The model name of a physical drive is displayed Capacity The capacity of a physical drive is displayed Logical Drives Sensor The sensor nu
254. ce menu Exit Exit this menu TABLE 6 2 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tL Move Highlight Moves the cursor up or down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects an entry Note Don t operate F2 key Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it 6 3 Set up Manager Menu Select the Set up Manager menu from the main menu and then sadump setup menu is displayed Setting of sadump environment In this menu items for sadump configuration are listed The items are displayed as follows in initial state where sadump is not set up Set up Manager Set up of Sadump Commit the changes and Item FIGURE 6 6 sadump setup menu TABLE 6 3 Displayed contents of the menu selection area Item Description ENABLE Specifies Enable or Disable for sadump function Enable Enable sadump Disable Disable sadump The default is Disable Specifies format when sadump writes to dump COMPRESS device Uncompress Data is not compressed Specifies Enable or Disable for dump device reuse When Enable is specified the oldest dump is overwritten RECYCLE Enable Enable RECYCLE option Disable Disable RECYCLE option The default is Enable Specifies behavior of sadump after dumping 0 Halt BEES 1 3600 Reboots after specified time second The default is 0 Restore to factory settings Sets all items to default Commit Changes and Exit _ Saves the c
255. ce mode in this window 2 The account user can operate only partitions in maintenance mode in this window 3 The SB is neither a Home SB nor Reserved SB Alternatively the SB is the Home SB in the Power Off status in a partition in the Standby status 4 The partition is in the Standby status MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 9 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Operator Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode System System Power Hot System RO Control Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB MMB 0 Hot System RO Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO MMB 1 Same as for MMB 0 Partition Power Control Hot System RW Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Partition Hot System RO Add is Configuration suppressed since the Free unit may be a replacement unit Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Add SB IOU Same as for to Partition Partition Configuration Remove SB Same as for IOU from Partition Partition Configuration Partition Home Same as for Partition Configuration Reserved SB Hot System RO Configuration Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO Console Hot System RW Redirection Hot Partition RW 1 Warm System RW 1 Cold System RO Network Configuration Network
256. celled O Console Redirection Window If the Console Redirection screen is selected when it enabled the Video Redirection screen on the BMC is displayed in another window If the settings in Console Redirection setup Window are Disabled check box cannot be Checked MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 54 Console Redirection Window Model PRIMEQUESTIS00E Active MMB40 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FU Serial Number Jooos Status Network Confeuration Manbonin gt Partiien gt Pertition gt Console Redirection Console Redirection Check the operation and cick the Apply bumon OKVM Redirection Appty Cance TABLE 1 79 Display Items of Console Redirection Window Items Description Video Redirection Displays the Video Redirection on the BMC side On the Console Redirection Setup window selection is possible only when Enabled when Disabled the check box cannot be checked 1 Menu Operation Partition Partition x Console Redirection 2 Window Operations None Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00222 Unable to aa the Partition aa because this Partition is under maintenance 00417 Are you sure W_00413 Nothing is selected W_00472 Unable to get the reserved WEB Session information due to WEB Session Max over W_00473 Unable to check the Video Redirection che
257. certificate Cancel Cancels importing 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SSL Import certificate 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Browse button to select an imported file Then click the Import button This imports the electronic certificate Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message 100013 Setting completed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 00046 Importing has completed E 00047 Importing failed W_00449 A certificate file is not selected yet _00450 aa is imported Are you sure For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Create Selfsigned Certificate window You can create a selfsigned certificate in the Create Selfsigned Certificate window Remarks Before creating a selfsigned certificate confirm that HTTPS is set to Disable in the Network Protocols window If it is set to Enable change it to Disable Then proceed to the operations in this window FIGURE 1 81 Create Selfsigned Certificate window Model PRIMEQUEST2300E Active MIBHO Part Number MCXXXXXXX freu Serial Number SONOS Status Noginal System F gt Network C rit ert Admmstratton Vanina ocfiguration gt SSL gt Create Selfsigned Certiicate Create Selfsigned Certificate Hele Input mformation to the field
258. ch are specified by SVAS are not displayed if SVAS is not installed Core Max Core The CPU core number included in the partition Max Core number is displayed in the PPAR Partition Assigned Core Requested Core Remarks Degenerated CPU is not included in the number Physical Memory Size PPAR Partition displays the physical memory volume that is included in the Assigned Memory partition Size Requested Memory Size Remarks The physical memory volume that has been displayed differs from the memory volume that can be actually used by the operating system Degraded DIMM is not included in the memory 1 Menu Operation Partition Partition x Information 2 Window Operations None O ASR Control Window The conditions for executing automatic restart of the partition on the ASR Automatic Server Restart Control can be set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 53 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Active MIMB 0 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal System User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt Partition gt Partition 0 gt ASR Control a n a ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Number of Restart Tries 15 S Enable Disable Reset K O Enable Disable Action when watchdog exp
259. ck box due to the Video Redirection option is disabled W_00541 Nothing is checked W_00550 Unable to select the option due to this Partition is not connected to VGA USB2 rKVMS For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations L Mode Window Various modes can be set for partition in Mode window In order to reflect the set value turn Off the power of partition and then it is necessary to turn On the Power of partition once again FIGURE 1 55 Mode Window 3 Nodel PRIMEQUEST L800 Acin e MMB Fujirsu erte yao Stat SET Paico Tags Mode Mode hot Stect mode for the panaon en chick the Appty Bunce d s the wirion to Decca diece When the Apply button is clicked while the partition is powered on a warning dialog box W_00487 Unable to change the mode because this partition is powered on is displayed When the partition is already powered off the settings are reflected without displaying the dialog box When SB with DIMM configuration that does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode configures the Mirror Mode for the partition configured in a Reserved SB a confirmation dialogue box is displayed At the time of switching to the Reserved SB a warning message of Mirror Mode cancellation is displayed and to confirm whether to proceed with the setting or not The LAN Device Mode is displayed in I
260. ct Specify an IP address of the same segment as the virtual IP address used to access the MMB Web UI see 1 5 2 Network Interface Menu Note that this IP address must be different from that virtual IP address Default is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Enters the subnet mask of IP address which is allowed for connection Default is 255 255 255 255 Video Redirection Sets whether video redirection can be used Enable Video redirection can be used Disable Video redirection cannot be used MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Default is Disable Virtual Media Sets whether virtual media can be used Enable Virtual media can be used Disable Virtual media cannot be used Default is Disable TABLE 1 150 IPv4 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply When Apply button is clicked video redirection virtual media settings of the system are applied Cancel When Cancel button is clicked video redirection virtual media settings are not applied and it returns to the original state 1 Menu Operation System Console Redirection Setup IPv4 Console Redirection Setup 2 Window Operations 1 IP address and the subnet mask are entered and it is set whether video redirection virtual media can be used 2 Apply button is clicked Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window
261. cter Hyphen Dot cannot be used as first character Default value is PRIMEQUEST Product Serial Number Example When serial number is 1020516004 PRIMEQUEST1020516004 Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set hostname lt hostname gt lt domain name gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example set hostname hogehoge fujitsu com 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified hostname is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB 2 2 18 set http Enable disable of HTTP server is set Default value is disable http is invalid Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set http enable disable 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 2 2 19 2 2 20 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set http_port Sets a port accepting HTTP session 8081 is the default The specifiable port numbers in lt port gt are in the range of 1024 65535 80 is the standard port Privilege Administrator 1 Input format Set http_port lt port gt 2 Option None
262. ction Connector Displays the destination Cconnector number of the DU When not connected background color is displayed in gray PCI Express Slots PCIC Displays the number of the PCl_Express slot Power Status Displays the power status of the IOU On Standby Slot Status Displays the status of the PCI_Express slot OK Not present Failed Disabled Link Width Displays Link Width of PCI_Express slot format xi x2 x4 x8 Seg Bus Dev Displays Segment Bus Device of PCI Device Vendor ID Displays the Vender ID of the PCI Card Remarks ID uniquely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Displays the Device ID of the PCI Card Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN PCleSW PCleSW Displays the number of PCleSW Status Displays the status of PCleSW OK Warning Failed PCleSW 1 Same as PCleSW 0 Voltage Voltage Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type P1 8VL 1 P1 0VL 1 P2 5VL 2 P1 2VL 2 2 PO 8VL 2 P0 67VL 2 P3 3V 3 P1 8V_PCIEX 0 1 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 1 P1 8V 2 P0 9V_PCIEX 0 3 P0 9V_PCIEX 1 3 1 IOUL 2 IOUF 3 IOUL IOUF commonness Voltage Displays th
263. d Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 75 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 10 of PCIl_Box 0 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 76 ODROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express slot 11 of PCl_Box 0 Slot 81 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 0 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 82 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 1 of PCl_Box 1 By default it is Disabled UEFI Menu Operations Slot 83 OpROM Slot 84 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 2 of PCl_Box 1 By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 3 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 85 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 4 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 86 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot
264. d Line Interface Operations remove partition lt partition gt SB lt SB x gt quiet remove partition lt partition gt IOU lt IOU x gt quiet 2 Option quiet Command is executed without interacting with the user 3 Usage example Example When removing SB 3 from Partition 2 in PRIMEQUEST 2800E r remove partition 2 SB 3 Are you sure to continue removing SB 3 from Partition 2 Y N Y Removing SB 3 from Partition 2 has been completed successfully Example When removing IOU 1 from Partition 2 in PRIMEQUEST 2800E remove partition 2 IOU1 Are you sure to continue removing IOU 1 from Partition 2 Y N Y Removing IOU 1 from Partition 2 has been completed successfully 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to remove s from Partition d Y N Removing s from Partition d has been completed successfully The specified partition number is invalid The specified SB IOU number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Parameter missing Partition x does not include the SB x IOU x Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute remove partition command Failed to execute S command The specified command is not supported error s The parameter IOU is not supported Unable to execute this command because t
265. d Memory CPU 5 5 DP operation start 1 3 Assigning OU d to partition d 2 3 Power on lOU d 3 3 Adding SB d lIOU d to partition d has been completed successfully The specified SB d lOU d is not present The specified SB d lIOU d is power on The specified Partition d is no Home Hot add SB d lIOU d failure Unable to hot add SB due to firmware mismatch Unable to hot add SB due to SB revision mismatch Unable to hot add SB due to CPU mismatch Unable to hot add SB due to DIMM mismatch Unable to power on the DP test partition Unable to power off the DP test partition Chekc DP Unit Error Unable to onlining the DP target bmc Unknown Error Code 0xXX Failed to execute hotadd partition command Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Hot add SB d lIOU d failed Failed to execute DP operation Fatal error occurred Unable to power on the IOU Unable to power on the PCIBox Failed to create DP test partition Failed to execute DP operation Partition is stopped DP sequence timeout added SB power on failure DP sequence timeout SB hot add OS failure DP sequence timeout SB hot add request failure DP sequence timeout QPI connection failure BIOS Error Code 0xXX The specified SB d OU d is not free or reserved DP can t be enabled because of no DP license DP feature is disabled Unable to execute DP command while other DP command is running Unable to execute DP command _ due to previous
266. d SB is set to ON 2 Click the Apply button Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E_00098 Failed to get the Replacement Condition E_00100 Failed to set the Replacement Condition E 00113 Unable to register the specified SB aa as a Reserved SB due to CPU mismatch between SBs E 00114 The specified SB aa cannot be registered as a Reserved SB _ 00223 Unable to change the specified SB s because the partition including the specified SB s is under maintenance E 00419 Unable to register the specified SB s as a Reserved SB due to unsupported CPU configuration E 00420 Unable to register the specified SB s as a Reserved SB because the DIMM does MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message Number Message not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode E_00421 No change E 00460 Unable to set the specified SB to the partition due to CPU composition abnormal W_00481 Unable to register the specified SB s as a Reserved SB due to the home SB is TPM enabled W_00492 Unable to register the specified SB d as a Reserved SB due to Partition is Fixed UO Mode W_00493 Unable to register the specified SB d as a Reserved SB due to abnormal DIMM composition _ 00494 The DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode If you register the specified SB s as a Reserved SB Mirror Mode will be disabled w
267. d from the DNS set on the MMB at the login time this field displays the host name Otherwise it displays the IP address If the serial port of the MMB was used for the login the field displays hyphen If the user logged in from the Web UI the field displays only the IP address using the DNS Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message E 00098 Failed to get login user information MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 5 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Network Configuration Menu The Network Configuration menu is available only to users who have Administrator privileges 1 5 1 Date Time window You can set the date and time of the MMB in the Date Time window FIGURE 1 61 Date Time window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00 Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXNXNNXX Fujitsu Serial Nember parens Normal eege O DateTime d eee B Date Time Besch Help E Click the Apply Button to apply all changes S PR Apply Cancel lt 3 TABLE 1 87 Setting and display items in the Date Time window Items Description Date Displays and sets the date If only a date is specified and Modify the Time is unchecked the specified date is set The time is defined as the instant when
268. d parameter is invalid Unable to NMI the system Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to NMI the System because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed set memory_opration_mode It sets the Memory Operation Mode of the system MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations By default normal Mirror Mode invalid is set performance sets the Performance Mode normal sets the Normal Mode partial_mirror sets the Partial Mirror Mode full_mirror sets the Full Mirror Mode spare sets the Spare Mode For the system which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command following message is displayed and settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the system is running Please try to change the mode after the system is shutdown For the system which is already powered OFF when the settings are changed by this command power OFF ON is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message Moreover also when the values which are the same as the current values are set power off on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format set memory_operation_mode performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet
269. ding to partition Remarks When the operating system supports the ACPI the operating system can be shutdown by the above mentioned Power Off operation and the power can be turned off When the operating system is not supported by the ACPI the power is turned off without shutting down the operating system Moreover when the application which is operating in the operating system is not supported even if the operating system is supported by the ACPI the power cannot be turned off Since this is according to the operating system and application specifications for details see the Operating System and Application Manual O Error Display Even if there is no bootable partition configured the window mentioned below appears FIGURE 1 40 Display of Errors of Power Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 Es Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt Partition gt Power Control O Power Control Power Control Help Select a Power Control option for one or more partitions then click the Apply button to take effect Partition Name Power Status System Progress Power Controll Boies Pues HE De There are no partitions configured 1 Menu Operation Partition Power Control MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Selects the power control items relat
270. displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Device ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN The number of physical drives connected with RAID Card is displayed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Logical Drives Count The number of logical drives composed under the control of RAID Card is displayed Serial Number The serial number of RAID Card is displayed Firmware Version The firmware version of RAID Card is displayed Physical Drives Slot The slot number equipped with a physical drive is displayed Status The state of a physical drive is displayed KR Operational S Available S Failed Hot Spare Rebuilding i SMART err Not present Vendor The vendor of a physical drive is displayed Model The model name of a physical drive is displayed Capacity The capacity of a physical drive is displayed Logical Drives Sensor The sensor number of a logical drive is displayed Status The state of a logical drive is displayed RAID Level The RAID level of a logical drive is displayed Physical Drives The slot number of a physical drive that composes a logical drive is displayed assignment Missing d
271. dog S Boot Watchdog O Enable Disable a Timeout time seconds a Action when watchdog expires a LG Software Watchdog 5 Software Watchdog O Enable Disable gt Timeout time seconds Op a B Action when watchdog expires TABLE 1 155 Display Items and Set Items of ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Items Description Number of Restart Tries Set the number of retries for restarting the operating system when there is time out by Boot Watchdog or Software Watchdog of SVAS or the hardware error occurs and OS shuts down The number of times can be set up to 0 10 times When 0 is specified it does not retry Default is five times Action after exceeding Repeat the restart by Watchdog Timeout and sets the action when the above Restart tries mentioned retry number is exceeded The actions are as below Stop rebooting and Power Off Reboot process is stopped power supply of partition is cut off Stop rebooting Reboot process is stopped and the system is stopped Diagnostic Interrupt assert Reboot process is stopped instructs the NMI interruption for system Tries to collect the data for investigation damp for the investigating the cause of stoppage of the system which has stopped Default setting is Stop rebooting and Power Off Retry Counter Displays the number of actual possible retries Cancel Boot Cancels operating system boot monitoring Watchdog The operating system Boo
272. dule gt Schedule List Add Schedule Freen Jan 11 To Jan IT iv Wed OT OFri OSat Fro Jan To Jan C Off Time Hour 9 MG TABLE 1 62 Display Items and Set Items of Add Schedule Window Items Description Displays the number to identify the partition 0 3 However only the partition to which SB IOU is registered is displayed Pattern Select the partition to be added or edited Default setting is the defined partition with the smallest number Type Select the types of schedule to be set in the partition Daily Select when you want to execute every day Weekly Select when you want to execute every week Monthly Select when you want to execute every month Special Select when you want to execute on a particular day every year The useful range of Special becomes only a specified day If the schedule overlaps on the same day it is processed according to the following priority order Special gt Monthly gt Weekly gt Daily By default it is not selected Pattern Specify the schedule pattern corresponding to the types of the schedule Weekly Day in a week Sun Sat Monthly Period in a month Special Specified month Default settings are as follows Day in a week Not selected Period From 1 To 1 Specified date Jan 1 Term Specify the period of the schedule according to the type and pattern of the schedule MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operati
273. e C122 E178EN 1 2 12 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Temperature window Temperature Window displays the temperature of the temperature sensor of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system In case of PRIMEQUEST 2400E model only the following items are displayed SB SB 0 SBH1 FIGURE 1 17 Temperature Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt Temperature CPU 1 Not present DIMM20B0 0B5 Not present DIMM 0C0 0C5 Not present DIMM 0D0 0D5 Not present DIMM 1A0 1A5 Not present DIMM 1B0 1B5 Not present DIMM 1C0 1C5 Not present DIMM 1D0 1D5 Not present RAID Cl Temp RAID BBU Temp o e C a C a L a L a LI LI L EE Gd DI E KE TABLE 1 42 Display Items on Temperature Window Items Description Status Displays the status of each temperature sensor OK Not present Warning Critical Temperature Displays the temperature of each temperature sensor Threshold Displays the threshold which maintained the by each temperature sensor j Warning Low High Critical Low High 1 Menu Operation System Temperature 2 Window Operations None Temperature m MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 2 13 SB Menu SB Menu consists of the menus in eac
274. e changed settings of this menu 3 4 3 LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu Network port implementing PXE iSCSI boot can be selected in LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu In the menu PXE bootable network port is displayed It is possible to boot PXE iSCSI from the targeted device by setting Enable after selecting network port which enables PXE iSCSI boot By default the setting is such that all network ports and PXE iSCSI boot cannot be implemented Disabled The settings changed in this menu are enabled after the system is set For the contents set in this menu see Table 3 16 Reflection of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu TABLE 3 16 Reflection of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu Setting contents Reflected contents UEFI PXE iSCSI 1 Boot options of PXE boot are added in Boot Manager Moreover network ports are added to iSCSI Configuration Menu See 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu of Device Manager menu Legacy PXE 2 Boot options of PXE boot are added to Change Legacy PXE Boot Priority Menu CR Change in order of priority Change Legacy PXE Boot Priority of 3 5 2 Boot Options menu of Boot Maintenance Manager Menu Legacy iSCSI 3 Press lt Ctrl D gt to run setup message is displayed at the time of boot When Cirl D is pressed in accordance with that message setting menu of Legacy iSCSI is displayed Disabled Remote boot is disabled Items added when UEFI PXE iSCSI
275. e ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Physical Drives count The number of physical drives connected with RAID Card is displayed Logical Drives count The number of logical drives composed under the control of RAID Card is displayed Serial Number The serial number of RAID Card is displayed Firmware Version The firmware version of RAID Card is displayed Physical Drives Slot The slot number equipped with a physical drive is displayed Status The state of a physical drive is displayed a Operational F Available z Failed KR Hot Spare Rebuilding SMART err MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description S Not present Vendor The vender of a physical drive is displayed Model The model name of a physical drive is displayed Capacity The capacity of a physical drive is displayed RAID Card The slot number of RAID Card that connects a physical drive is displayed Logical Drives Sensor The sensor number of a logical drive is displayed Status The state of a logical drive is displayed Raid Level The RAID level of a logical drive is displayed Physical Drives The slot number of a physical drive that composes a logical drive is displayed assignment Missing drives count The number of physical drives missed to compos
276. e Interface Operations Command CE Outline netck ifconfig Permitted Displays the network environment setup status netck stat Permitted Displays a list of port numbers being used REMCS related commands set maintenance_ip Sets the REMCS network show maintenance_ip Permitted Displays the REMCS network setting DR related hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove set partition dynamic_partitioning Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Displays DR state of partition Notation of parameters in the command syntax Multiple parameters are enclosed in brackets to indicate that one of them is to be selected For example A B C means that either A B or C is to be selected as specified A parameter is enclosed in braces to indicate that it can be omitted For example quiet means that the quiet parameter can be omitted Parameter specification range The parameters lt partition gt lt SB gt lt IOB gt and lt GSPB gt may appear in the command syntax You can specify values in the following ranges for these parameters TABLE 2 7 Parameter specification range PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST Parameter 2400E 2800B 2800E lt partition gt 0 1 Unsupported 0 11 lt SB gt 0 1 0 3 0 3 lt IOU gt 0 3 0 3 0 3 If the specified value falls outside the valid r
277. e Password wipdow ENEE 164 TABLE 1 86 Display items in the Who lued 165 TABLE 1 87 Setting and display items in the Date Time wmd AEN 167 Preface TABLE 1 88 Buttons in the Date Time WinGOw ENEE 168 TABLE 1 89 Setting and display items in the IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E een 171 TABLE 1 90 Setting and display items in the IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B TABLE 1 91 Buttons in the IPv4 Interface wmd EEN TABLE 1 92 Setting and display items in the IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E TABLE 1 93 Setting and display items in the IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2090O0OD een TABLE 1 94 Buttons in the IPv6 Interface wmd ue TABLE 1 95 Setting and display items in the Management LAN Port Configuration window in case of PRIMEQUEST 2A00E 2800 Bie riaa EEEE REE EEEE cenit EENE EE N neni EEEE EEEE EEEE 182 TABLE 1 96 Setting and display items in the Management LAN Port Configuration window in case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B 183 TABLE 1 97 Buttons in the Management LAN Port Configuration win ENEE TABLE 1 98 Setting and display items in the Network Protocols wd ENEE TABLE 1 99 Buttons in the Network Protocols WiNdOW EEN TABLE 1 100 Setting and display items in the Refresh Rate wincdow ENEE TABLE 1 101 Buttons in the Refresh Rate wndow ENEE TABLE 1 102 Setting and display items in the SNMP Community window zi o TABLE 1 103 Buttons in the SNMP Community WINAOW EEN
278. e Reference C122 E178EN L Remove User button To delete a user account select a user in the User List window and then click the Remove User button A deletion confirmation dialog box appears Click the OK button to delete it Click the Cancel button to cancel processing 1 4 2 Change Password window You can change the password of a logged in user in the Change Password window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 59 Change Password window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number e Status Normal Network Configuration Maintenance Active MMB 0 Change Password BEI Enter the new Password foe Admisistrmor in the New Password and Confem New Password fields Apely If Cancel Remarks The entered password must consist of at least eight characters The message to the effect that should be input by eight characters or more is displayed for eight characters or less The password that can be analogized cannot be set again TABLE 1 85 Buttons in the Change Password window Buttons Description Apply Registers the changed password Cancel Restores the original information and does not change the password Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message E_00012 One or more errors occurred while setting E 00018 Information acquisition failed E_00036 Cha
279. e a logical drive at the RAID level is displayed RAID Action Progress Drive Type The drive type that the RAID action is executed is displayed E Physical Hardware RAID Logical Software RAID Slot Sensor Slot from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Physical and Sensor from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Logical Action The RAID action under execution is displayed Rebuilding It is shown for a physical drive to execute the rebuild of the RAID drive MDC Running It is shown for a logical drive to execute MDC Make Data Consistent Progress The progress rate of the RAID action under execution is displayed by the percentage Estimated time The remainder time that will be expected by the time the RAID action under remaining hh mm ss execution is completed is displayed Voltage Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type 12V_DU_SLOTO 12V_DU_SLOT1 Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places TABLE 1 48 Buttons on DU x Window Button Descrip
280. e current power voltage Threshold Warning Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places TABLE 1 162 Button of IOB x Screen Buttons Description Status Clear Clears the error status of IOU x 1 7 16 DU Menu As for the display the operation is the same as the PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E model Refer to chapter 1 2 15 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 7 17 OPL Window As for the display the operation is the same as the PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E model Refer to chapter 1 2 16 1 7 18 MMB Window In MMB Window information related to MMB can be displayed and the Location LEDs can be set FIGURE 1 122 MMB x Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B D _ Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Stemmen Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance _ gt System gt MMB LI MMB C z Click the Apply Button to apply all changes OK L CA07603 D053 A3 PP13440495 2C D4 44 F0 8F 78 2C D444 F0 16 F2 0 1 21 8 or On C Reset the MMB a All existing network conn
281. e displayed being updated Firmware update in progress firmware being downloaded not executed Firmware update not started Privilege Administrator or CE 1 Input format show update_status MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 Option None 3 Usage example show update_status Unified Firmware Version BA13012 update status updating 35 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unified Firmware Version XX update status completed Unified Firmware Version XX update status not executed Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute show update_status command Unified Firmware Version XX update status being updated Unified Firmware Version XX update status updating YY Unified Firmware Version XX update status failed 2 5 Other Commands 2 5 1 The following commands are not information configuration display or update commands 2 5 1 exit 2 5 2 passwd 2 5 3 ping This section describes how to use these commands exit The exit command logs out the user Privilege All 1 Input format exit 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 2 5 2 2 5 3 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 4 Message None passwd The passwd command ch
282. e order of program file deletion of IOU Set the followig options to collaboration program p IOUx e RM_PRE d 00 01 2 03 04 5 Execute collaboration programs in ascending order of program file names Success Failure Delete PCI devices Set the followig options to Set the followig options to collaboration program collaboration program p IOUx e PM_POST r p IOUx e PM_POST r SUCCESS FAILURE Execute collaboration Execute collaboration programs in ascending programs in descending order of program file order of program file Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation Execute collaboration programs in ascending order of program file names Unexpected collaboration Select a collaboration program is no found program in ascending order of program file Unexpected ZS collaboration program is found Verbose mode is Confirm verbose set mode add v option Verbose mode is not set Timeout period is not 0 5 1024 Confirm timeout period Set default timeout period Timeout period is 0 5 1024 Execute collaboration with the setting options Confirm tiemout of the collaboration nraqaram Timeout is not 0 Tiemout is 0 Wait for the completion of the A collaboration program Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation Complete Confirm whether the collaboration program completes in the timeout period Not complete Send SIGTERM signa
283. e prefix length is displayed Example Permitting access from a specific IP address range e g 192 168 60 60 255 255 255 0 IP Address 192 168 60 60 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 because the IP address is used with a 24 bit subnet mask The above setting will enable access not only from the IP address 192 168 60 60 but also from IP addresses within the subnet 192 168 60 0 24 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Subnet Mask Prefix Length Description For IPv4 the subnet mask of the IP address that has permission to connect is displayed For IPv6 the prefix length is displayed TABLE 1 122 Buttons in the Add Filter window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as protocols and access control 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Access Control Add Filter button Edit Filter button 2 Window Operations 1 Specify Protocol and Access Control If you specify Enable in Access Control enter values for IP Address and Subnet Mask Then click the Apply button If you specify Disable in Access Control simply click the Apply button This adds or edits the filter Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message 100013 Setting completed W_00432 Invalid IP Address s
284. e public key which is used in SSH Public Key Authentication of logged in users from the specified server and then registers the key Input method of URL is as follows http host path file ftp host path file Privilege User 1 Input format download ssh_key lt URL gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example When server is not specified As shown below the message urging for the URL input displays Waiting for URL input Example download ssh_key URL 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Specified host does NOT respond 2 2 6 2 2 7 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations power off Turn off the power of entire system or specified partition When the partition which is specified by parameter is not configured ignore such partition When the specified partition is already in power off state any process will not be executed for that partition Only the partitions which are targeted for management can be operated for Partition Operator Error message displays when the parameter having partitions which are not targeted for management is specified Specified partition cannot be operated Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Partitions targeted for management only 1 Input format
285. e redirection Setup Window Buttons ENEE 137 TABLE 1 66 Display Items and Set Items of IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window ENEE 138 TABLE 1 67 IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons ENEE 139 TABLE 1 68 Display Items and Set Items of Add Schedule Window ENEE 140 TABLE 1 69 Partition Configuration Window Buttons ENEE 141 TABLE 1 70 Display Items and Set Items of Add SB IOU to Partition Wimdow ENEE 142 TABLE 1 71 Display Items and Set Items of Remove SB IOU to partition Window he we 144 TABLE 1 72 Display Items and Set Items of Reserved SB Configuration Window EEN 147 TABLE 1 73 Reserved SB Configuration Window Buttons ENEE 147 TABLE 1 74 Display Items and Set Items of Power Management Setup Window ENEE 149 TABLE 1 75 Power Management Setup Window Dgtomg ENEE 149 TABLE 1 76 Display Items of Information Wircdow ENEE 150 TABLE 1 77 Display Items and Set Items of ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window 48 we 152 TABLE 1 78 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Buttons ENNEN 153 TABLE 1 79 Display Items of Console Redirection Window ENEE 154 TABLE 1 80 Display Items and Setting Items in Mode Wimdom ENEE 155 TABLE 1 81 Display items in the User List vwrcow een 159 TABLE 1 82 Buttons in the User List Window ue 160 TABLE 1 83 Setting and display items in the Add User and Edit User windows 162 TABLE 1 84 Buttons in the Add User and Edit User windows een 163 TABLE 1 85 Buttons in the Chang
286. e related set date Sets the date and time show date Permitted Displays the date and time set timezone Sets the time zone show timezone Permitted Displays the time zone Network related set ip Sets the management LAN address set ipv6 Sets the IPv6 management LAN address show ip Permitted Displays the management LAN address show ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 management LAN address set hostname Sets the MMB host name show hostname Permitted Displays the MMB host name MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command CE Outline set gateway Sets the gateway address set gateway_ipv6 Sets the IPv6 gateway address show gateway Permitted Displays the gateway address show network Permitted Displays the management LAN interface show gateway_ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 gateway address set http Sets whether to enable http service set https Sets whether to enable https service set ssh Sets whether to enable ssh service set telnet Sets whether to enable telnet service show http Permitted Displays the http service enabling setting show https Permitted Displays the https service enabling setting show ssh Permitted Displays the ssh service enabling setting show telnet Permitted Displays the telnet service enabling setting set http_port Sets the http port number set https Got Se
287. e setting of Access Control Privilege Administrator 1 Input format clear access Control 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI 2 2 3 2 2 4 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB The specified parameter is invalid clear ssh_key Clears the public key used for the SSH Public Key Authentication which is registered for the logged in user Privilege User 1 Input format clear ssh_key 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB The specified parameter is invalid console Login to the specified partition by telnet Execute the Text Console connection of BMC The Text Console connection to BMC can be connected only by one command per BMC However the following messages are displayed when the following console command is executed when other users have already executed the console command and the Text Console connection to BMC can be done compulsorily by inputting as Y In that case the compulsion cutti
288. e status E PCI Box Information Stas o Low CA07608EAXXX D gg pg gp pg pg pg gg en ee CA07608 D001 08 Ic CA01022 0720 300 93207707 2193 11 PADIT EECHER 1 OK On CA01022 0720 300 wexs9307003 e MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 31 IRC Bol Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal ion Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt PCI Bex SPCL Box PCI_Box 0 Fan Si Status Fan speed SEN pe be j Zeng es 10_FAN 0 ae emm S ZER 10_FAN 1 rpm 8065 1516 10_PSU 0_FAN OK 1568 rpm 7605 3077 1o Pst FAN oK iesma 7608s SCS Temperature Power Se Gl Hp pp gg gp pg pg pg gg ala Airflow Volume Airflow Volume m3 h Cable Connection e lt gt FIGURE 1 32 IPC Bol Window 3 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration N guration Maintenance Logout gt System gt PCI_Box gt PCI_Box 0 LI a PCI_Box 0 C a Cable Connection F C C C C C C 5 PCI Express Slots o o Te fja omo E130 Ja fog ft 0 110 0 0 101 0 E130 C 107 0 E130 fox for far ones fis E130 116 0 E130 Ge 28 0 E EE GEES Ce x S 16 0 E E130 Standby 0 22 0 8086 1521 0 1910 a Fan zi MMB Web UI Web User Interface
289. e the mode after the partition is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this partition 2 2 29 set partition name It sets the name of the specified partition The name of the partition is up to 16 characters The name that contains the characters exceeding the 16 characters cannot be set If the name contains space it is enclosed within The characters that can be used are as follows a z A Z 0 9 Under bar _ hyphen Sharp Blank No default value is set Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set partition name lt partition gt lt partition name gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When setting the name hogehoge to the Partition3 set partition name 3 hogehoge 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified partition name is invalid Partition x is not defined Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Succeed to set partition name command Failed to execute set partition
290. e you sure to continue adding IOU 3 to Partition 2 Y N Y Adding IOU 3 to Partition 2 has been completed successfully 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure to continue removing SB d IOU d from Partition d Y N DP operation start 1 4 Offlining removed Memory CPU 2 4 Reconfiguring partition d 3 4 Releasing SB d 4 4 DP operation start 1 3 Remove lOU d 2 3 IOU d power off 3 3 Removing SB d lIOU d from partition d has been completed successfully The specified SB d lOU d is not present The specified SB d lIOU d is power off The specified SB d lOU d is not in specified Partition The specified SB d is home SB Unknown Error Code 0xXX Failed to execute hotremove partition command Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Hot remove SB d lOU d failed 2 3 2 3 1 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Failed to execute DP operation Fatal error occurred Failed to execute DP operation Configuration is unrecovered Failed to execute DP operation Partition is stopped The specified OU d has not stopped DP sequence timeout QPI disconnection failure DP sequence timeout SB hot remove OS failure BIOS Error Code 0xXX The specified SB d IOU d is free D
291. ears the error status of IOU x When you click Status Clear the error message of the IOU gets cleared and it is possible to specify the IOU at the time of next reboot If error is detected again at the time of reboot the error status of the IOU gets registered once again 1 Menu Operation System IOU IOU x 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Confirmation dialogue box is displayed 2 Click the Apply button Click the OK button to clear the error status and click the Cancel when you do not want to clear the error status of the IOU Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00029 Status Clear completed E 00123 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 2 15 DU Menu In DU x Window the status of disk unit x mounted in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series can be displayed and status of board can be controlled FIGURE 1 29 DU x Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB30 Part Number MCF3ACHII FU Serial Number z Status ema ei gt Systen gt DU gt DUs0 DUM Riches Help A Click the Stams Clear button to clear the stats Board Information Physical Drives lt gt For a user without setting privileges Status Clear button and C
292. ecehecaenneruheetecerectiveateone FIGURE 1 76 SNMP v3 Configuration window FIGURE 1 77 Create CSR Wind0W cic ccci cee esis ie ieleinceeeeden did eecebiceiesbet ateeaetervecirieteesdonevecehvneevieterenteedscervecnries FIGURE Eet Eu Eeer ele EE REUTHER in e E IER aus side Zuele FIGURE 1 81 Create Selfsigned Certificate window FIGURE 1 82 Create SSH Server Key Window ENEE FIGURE 1 83 Remote Server Management WindOw ENEE 201 FIGURE 1 84 Ect Ser Win ee EE 203 FIGURE 1 85 Access Control ue e EE 205 FIGURE 1 86 Add Filter WindOWs 2 4 sss eure Aenea eateries cena Authur 207 NIESEN 209 Loge ee ee fend ee vd A cl Preface FIGURE 1 88 Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window PRIMEQUEST 24OOEGOOOE ENNEN 211 FIGURE 1 89 Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window PRIMQUEST 2900 ENEE 211 FIGURE 1 90 Unified Firmware Update wrdow ENEE 213 FIGURE 1 91 Backup Restore MMB Configuration wirdow ENEE 215 FIGURE 1 92 Backup BIOS Configuration WINAOW ENEE FIGURE 1 93 Restore BIOS Configuration window 1 FIGURE 1 94 Restore BIOS Configuration window 2 FIGURE 1 95 Backup Restore BIOS Configuration wircow ENEE 219 FIGURE 1 96 System Status Wind OW ee FIGURE 1 97 System Event Log window FIGURE 1 98 System Event Log Collect Window FIGURE 1 99 System Event Log Filtering Condition Window FIGURE 1 100 System Information Wimdow EEN FIGURE 1 101 Firmware Information Wimdow ENEE FIGURE 1 102
293. ect Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving changes of this menu UEFI Menu Operations 3 4 5 PCI Bus Padding Configuration Menu The PCI Bus number allocated to PCI Express Slot can be changed on PCI Bus Padding Configuration Menu The default value allocated to PCI Express slot is 1 Changes done on this menu becomes enable after system is reset The example of contents displayed on screen immediately after the activation of PCI Bus Padding Configuration Menu is given below FIGURE 3 16 Example of Display on PCI Bus Padding Configuration Menu U U D U 1 Page Information Display PCI Bus Padding Configuration is displayed 2 Menu Selection The items shown in TABLE 3 21 Display Contents of Menu Selection are displayed on menu TABLE 3 21 Display Contents of Menu Selection Item Display Contents Allocation of PCI bus Specifies the bus number allocated to PCI Express slot number Default value is 1 Setting range is 1 4 Commit Changes and Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration Exit are saved Discard Changes and Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration Exit are cancelled 3 Operation Help Display Description of Operating Keys is shown in the TABLE 3 22 Display Contents of Operation Help Display UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 22 Display Contents of Oper
294. ect the MMB 2 1 3 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations CLI command list This section describes the functions of the CLI commands Setting commands Display commands Update commands Other commands The following tables list the account privileges required for individual commands Permitted in an account privilege column indicates the command can be used with those account privileges TABLE 2 2 MMB CLI commands Administrator TABLE 2 3 MMB CLI commands Operator TABLE 2 5 MMB CLI commands User TABLE 2 4 MMB CLI commands Partition Operator TABLE 2 6 MMB CLI commands CE TABLE 2 2 MMB CLI commands Administrator Command Administrator Outline Power control power off Permitted Turns the power off power on Permitted Turns the power on Partition control sadump Permitted sadump instruction reset Permitted Hard Reset instruction nmi Permitted NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection console Permitted Test Console connection to partition Partition creation add partition Permitted Adds a partition component remove partition Permitted Removes a partition component show partition configuration Permitted Displays the partition configuration set partition home Permitted Sets the Home SB show partition home Permitted Displays the Home SB set pa
295. ections will be lost CR You will need to login again i o Voltage o Threshold S ee Waming Low High Critical Low High P3 3VL 334V 3 16 3 64 V 2 20 4 10 V P1L5VL 149V 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 81 V P1 5VL_CPLD 1 49 V 1 39 1 61 V 0 98 1 81 V P1 2VL 1 19 V 1 11 1 29 V 0 77 1 45 V MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FUJITSU FIGURE 1 123 MMB x Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 Serial Number TARR Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt MMB MMB PP 13440495 2C D4 44 F0 8F 78 2C D444 F0 16 F2 1 21 oF Reset the MMB All existing network connections will be lost You will need to login again Warning Low High Critical Low High 3 16 3 64 V 2 20 4 10 V Firmware Version Voltage P3 3VL P1 5VL 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 81 V P1 5VL_CPLD 1 39 1 61 V 0 98 1 81 V P1 2VL 1 19V 1 11 1 29V 0 77 1 45 V P1 0VL 0 92 1 08 V 0 64 1 21 V P0 75VL 0 69 0 81 V TABLE 1 163 Display of MMB Window setting items Items Description Board Information Status Part Number Displays the status of the MMB OK Not present Warning Degraded Failed Displays part number of the MMB Serial Number Displays the serial number of the MMB MAC User port address Displays MAC address of the MMB management port
296. ectory Following figure is a display example when the disk installed by Window Server 2012 is selected UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 70 Specifications of Boot File 2 File Explorer 3 Operating System Loader File to be booted appears as shown in 3 by following the directory structure FIGURE 3 71 Specifications of Boot File 3 File Explorer 3 5 4 UEFI Menu Operations 4 Press 1 key or key and select Operating System Loader File to be booted 5 Press Enter key File is loading and Operating System is activated Set Time out Value Menu Set Time out Value Menu sets the standby time from the completion time of UEFI diagnosed process till the Operating System process transfer time in seconds Default setting is 10 Seconds The time set in this menu is the standby time of key input In the standby time of key input as shown in FIGURE 3 72 Logo Window the Logo Window appears Except Enter key if other key is input during the standby time of key input then it transited to Boot Manager Front Page Moreover if Enter key is input it immediately transit to Operating System activation process FIGURE 3 72 Logo Window cO FUJITSU Start boot option Following window is a display example of Set Time out Value Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 73 Display Example of Set Time out Value Menu A N 1 Page Information Display Set Time out Value is displayed
297. ed Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set ip Sets lt IP address gt lt netmask gt for management LAN interface Sets virtual IP address of MMB connected in Serial Sets point of default is 0 0 0 0 Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations The specified IP address is invalid The specified netmask is invalid The specified IP address is duplicated The specified IP address is loopback address Unable to execute this command on standby MMB 2 2 23 Set ipv6 Sets the global address for IPv6 and prefix length for management LAN interface Sets virtual IP address of MMB When automatic setting is done only auto is specified in the option Privilege Administrator 1 Input format In case of manual setting set ipv6 lt ip address prefix gt In case of automatic setting set ipv6 auto 2 Option auto IP address is set automatically 3 Usage example In case of manual setting set ipv6 2001 db8 caaf beef 206 29ff fele 482e 48 In case of automatic setting If GUID Device serial number 123456789abcdef0
298. ed System Event Log Collect window appears Filter When you click Filter button System Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering filter conditions appears Detail When you click Detail button the details of corresponding event are displayed on System Event Log Detail window 1 Menu Operation System System Event Log 2 Window Operations When the event data saved in system event log is downloaded if the system event log collected in advance does not exist 1 When you click Download button a message showing _00417 Are you sure is displayed Click OK button 2 The collection of system event log information is starts automatically Progress window appears 3 System Event Log Collect window appears and the link to event data which is collected is displayed with date information When you click the link dialog box appears By specifying the file name and path name event data can be downloaded to the PC which displays Web UI When the event data saved in system event log is downloaded if the system event log which is collected in advance exists 1 When you click Download button a message showing I _00417 Are you sure is displayed Click OK button 2 System Event Log Collect window appears and the link to system event log information collected in advance is displayed 3 Click Collect button to collect the latest system event log A message showing _0041
299. ed Help information Command termination code display show exit_code Permitted Displays the termination code for the last command executed Firmware revision status version check show update_status Displays the batch firmware update progress Network survey commands netck traceroute Permitted Displays a list of network routes netck arptbl Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck arping Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck ifconfig Permitted Displays the network environment setup status netck stat Permitted Displays a list of port numbers being used REMCS related commands set maintenance_ip Sets the REMCS network show maintenance_ip Permitted Displays the REMCS network setting Thotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove set partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Displays DR state of partition TABLE 2 4 MMB CLI commands Partition Operator Command Power control power off power on Partition control sadump reset nmi Partition connection console Partition creation add partition remove partition show partition configuration set partition home show partition home set partition memory_operation_mode show partition memory_operation_mode set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Partition Operator Same Permitted Permitted
300. ed referred to below as safety critical applications Use of the product for a safety critical application may present a significant risk of personal injury and or death Such applications include but are not limited to nuclear reactor control aircraft flight control air traffic control mass transit control medical life support and missile launch control Customers shall not use the product for a safety critical application without guaranteeing the required level of safety Customers who plan to use the product in a safety critical system are requested to consult the Fujitsu sales representatives in charge Storage of accessories Keep the accessories in a safe place because they are required for server operations Organization and Notation of This Manual This section describes the following topics Organization of this manual Manuals for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Related manuals Abbreviations Trademarks Notation Notation for the CLI command line interface Preface Notes on notations Alert messages Product operating environment Organization of this manual This manual is organized as follows CHAPTER 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Chapter 1 describes the menus used to manage and operate the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server with the MMB Web UI It also describes how to use the MMB Web UI CHAPTER 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Chapter 2 describes the CLI command line i
301. ed to a collaboration program is shown below Arguments Meaning Options hot plugged device Specifies the hot plugged device P SBx x and y are set to either 1 or 0 3 IOUy hot plug eventl timing Specifies the hot plug event timing S ADD_PRE ADD_PRE before dynamic addition ADD_POST ADD_POST after dynamic addition RM_PRE RM_PRE before dynamic deletion RM_POST RM_POST after dynamic deletion result of hot plug Specifies the result of hot plug Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation r SUCCESS FAILURE none v CPU number c amount of memory m NUMA Node number n PCI address d When the hot plug event timing is only ADD_POST or RM_POST this option is specified Specifies the verbose mode Collaboration program can use it for trigger of debug messages Specifies the hot added removed CPU number list from now When hot plugged device is SBx and hot plug event timing is ADD_PRE or RM_PRE this option is specified Example of specified CPU number list is shown below The CPU number list is a list delimited by the comma When this list is delimited by the hyphen it means all ranges of the first and last number are included None means there is no CPU 1 10 2 3 1 10 12 19 None Specifies the hot added removed amount of memory from now When hot plugged device is SBx and hot plug event timing is ADD_PRE or RM_PRE this option is specified Unit of amount of memory is kilo byte Example of
302. ed to each partition from the pull down list of Power Control Then click the Apply button Dialog box for setting confirmation appears 2 Click OK button to execute the settings Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E 00075 Partition aa cannot execute sadump E_00077 Partition aa cannot execute Power On E_00078 Partition aa cannot execute Power Off E_00079 Partition taa command failed E 00080 Partition aa cannot execute Power Cycle E 00081 Partition aa cannot execute Reset E_00082 Partition aa cannot execute NMI E 00084 Partition aa cannot execute Force Power Off E 00091 Force Power Off Delay setting failed E 00101 Unable to power on the partition aa due to CPU mismatch between SBs _00214 Unable to Power On the Partition aa because this Partition is under maintenance _ 00222 Unable to aa the Partition aa because this Partition is under maintenance E_00422 Unable to power on the partition aa due to CPU composition abnormal E 00154 Unable to power on due to mismatch between supply voltage and input voltage E 00482 Unable to power on the partition aa due to DIMM composition abnormal E 00491 Unable to power on the partition aa due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode W_00504 The Power On failed because of switching the Home SB Please execute it after a while again
303. elfsigned certificate Certificate SSH SSH Server N A Creates a private key Key for the SSH server Remote Server N A Management Access Control N A Sets the IP filtering that permits connections Alarm E mail N A Maintenance Firmware Update Unified RW Performs a batch Firmware update Update Backup Restore Backs up and restores Configuration setting information Backup Restore RW MMB Configuration Backup EFI RW Configuration Restore EFI RW Configuration Maintenance RW Performs maintenance MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks Wizard through a wizard REMCS REMCS RW Detailed Setup RW 1 1 6 1 1 7 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Web UI menus in maintenance mode Some parameters have operational restrictions when maintenance mode is set These restrictions apply to the user who is set to maintenance mode and other users The following table lists the Web UI window restrictions that apply to maintenance personnel and non maintenance personnel in maintenance mode The five types of maintenance mode are as follows TABLE 1 7 Types of maintenance mode Maintenance mode Description Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Active system for work For maintenance work on the target unit not included in a partition The w
304. elp information System configuration set mmb control reset Resets the MMB set mmb control switch_over Switch Over the MMB add user Adds User show user _list Displays Users power off Turn off the power of entire system When the entire system is already in power off state any process will not be executed for entire system Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format power off force 2 Option force Shows that the power of the system turns off forcefully without shutting down the operating system of system 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Unable to power off the system Unable to force power off on the system Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to power off the System because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed 2 6 3 2 6 4 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations power on Turn on the power supply of the entire system When the power supply for the entire system is already turned on processing for such system is not done Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format power on 2 Option None 3 Usage
305. em RO MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Remarks bar level mode Cold System RO Backup Restore Configuration Backup RW Backup Restore MMB MMB is not Configuration affected by maintenance mode Restore MMB can be operated only by maintenance personnel Maintenance Hot System RO Wizard Hot Partition RO Warm System RO Cold System RO 1 1 8 Web Ul menus in maintenance mode Operator This section outlines the Web UI menus that are available with the Operator privileges in maintenance mode The maintenance mode column has the following items For details on the maintenance mode see Web menus in maintenance mode Hot System Hot System Maintenance Target unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Warm System Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Cold System Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker on and Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker off The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information in the window RO The account user can only refer to information in the window N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenu 1 The account user can operate partitions not in maintenan
306. em Status Window Items Description Power Supply Shows the status of PSU Fans Shows the status of FAN Temperature Shows the status of temperature sensor SB 0 SB 3 Shows the status of system board IOU 0 IOU 3 Shows the status of IOU DU 0 DU 1 Shows the status of DU OPL Shows the status of OPL MMB Shows the status of MMB 1 Menu Operation System System Status 2 Window Operations 1 Click the link corresponding to each unit when the detailed status of unit is to be confirmed The window showing detailed status of each unit appears 1 7 2 System Event Log Window Among the events generated in the PRIMEQUEST 2800B model events of MMB and BMC stored in the current MMB system event log are displayed on the System Event Log window in chronological order Maximum 32000 events can be stored in system event log When the entries in the system event log are full oldest event log is deleted and latest event log is stored in system event log MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 97 System Event Log window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUSITSU Serial Number Status Normal g System Event Log Help Severity Date Time SS ee ee Detail gt 01 17 5 H Zo a Dinfo A e Ss PSU Redundancy 090B00FF Fully Redundant Detail g Be e System PSU Redundancy 090R03FF Non redundant Sufficient Resource Detai 2 l
307. enance personnel Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level mode Administr CE ator System System Power Hot System RW RO Control Hot Partition RO RO Warm System RO RO Cold System RW RW MMB MMB 0 Hot System RW RW Hot Partition RO RO Warm System RO RO Cold System RW RW MMB 1 Same as for MMB 0 Partition Power Control Hot System RW RO Hot Partition RW 1 RO Warm System RW RW 2 Cold System RW RW Partition Hot System RW RO Add is Configuration suppressed since the Free unit may be a replacement unit Hot Partition RW RO Warm System RW RO Cold System RW RO Add SB IOU Same as for Partition to Partition Configuration Remove SB Same as for Partition IOU from Configuration Partition Partition Home Same as for Partition Configuration Reserved SB Hot System RW RO Configuration Hot Partition RW RO Warm System RW RO Cold System RW RO Console Hot System RW RO Redirection Hot Partition RW 1 RO Warm System RW RW 2 Cold System RW RW Network Configuration Backup Restore MMB Configuration RW RW Network IPv4 Interface Hot System RO RO Interface Hot Partition RO RO IPv6 Interface Warm System RO RO Cold System RO RO Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Hot System RW RW Firmware Hot Partition RO RO Update Warm System RO RO Cold System R
308. ensable If configuration file does not exist hot plug collaboration function executes collaboration programs by using the default value Note Blank line and the line that starts by in the configuration file is ignored You can use Japanese after but in this case character code of Japanese must use UTF 8 form Write one setting item by one line WV WW WV You can insert the blank before or after the setting item blank and the setting value An example of a configuration file is shown below e g When collaboration program named nn FJSVxxxx get info executes in verbose mode and timeout period is 10 minutes FJSVxxx get cpu info verbose true timeout 10 Permission required for collaboration program P command is executed with the root permission And because hot plug collaboration function is executed as one function of the DR command the collaboration programs must be assigned the execution attribute of the root permission Collaboration programs without the execution attribute of the root permission are not executed Argument passed to collaboration program When executing a collaboration program hot plug collaboration function passed hot plug event timing to the collaboration program as option Result of hot plug and hot added removed resources are passed to the collaboration program as option when the collaboration program is executed at the addition deletion of SB IOU failure time The list of the arguments pass
309. ent the device selection is automatically cleared Select device Menu This is displayed when 1 2 or 3 is set in the Setting dump device menu Dump devices on the current system is listed Select a dump device from a list In case of multiple disk configurations select the 1st dump disk Select device Select device FIGURE 6 11 Select device Menu Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 13 Displayed contents of menu selection area Item Description ACPI name of dump ACPI name of disk partition is displayed device Selected dump device is highlighted TABLE 6 14 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tl Move Highlight Move the cursor up or down lt Enter gt Select Entry Select the dump device on the cursor and return back to Setting dump device menu Note Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it 6 9 Select discard dump device Menu This is displayed when the Discard a dump device is selected in the Dump device Manager menu Discard unnecessary dump device To discard dump device select the dump device in the following menu In case of multiple disk configuration select the 1st dump device Then all the remaining dump devices are automatically discarded Select discard dump device Select discard dump devices FIGURE 6 12 Select discard dump device Menu Setting of sadump environment TA
310. eport function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology Package C State limit Sets the function by which the transition of C state of CPU is limited e CO Allows transition till CO state e C2 Allows transition till C2 state e C6 Allows transition till C6 state e C7 Allows transition till C7 state e No Limit There is no limit for the transition of C state Default setting is No Limit QPI Link Frequency Set the QPI Link Frequency Select e Auto e 8 0GT s e 7 2GT s 6 4GT s Default setting is Aluto UEFI Menu Operations Frequency Floor Sets the Frequency Floor Override function to enable or disable Override e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Disabled Perfmon and DFX Sets the Perfmon and DFX devices function to enable or disable devices e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Disabled Commit Changes and Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration Exit are saved Discard Changes and Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration Exit are cancelled 3 Operation Help Display Description of Operating Keys is shown in the TABLE 3 20 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 20 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Sel
311. er Window TABLE A 28 Setting Items of Edit User Window Setting Items Initial value Values that can be set Remarks User Name None 8 characters or more less than or equal to 16 characters 0 9 a z A Z Password None 8 characters or more less than or equal to 16 characters 0 9 a z A Z Privilege In case of Add User Admin Admin Operator In case of Edit User User Present Privilege CE No Access Status Disabled Enabled Disabled A 1 29 Setting Items of Add Filter Edit Filter Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Edit User Add Filter Edit Filter Window TABLE A 29 Setting Items of Add Filter Edit Filter Window Setting item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Protocol SSH HTTP SNMP Access Control Disable Enable e Disable IP Address None In case of IPv4 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 In case of IPv6 O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Subnet None In case of IPv4 Mask Prefix 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Length In case of IPv6 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Appendix A List of Setting Items A 1 30 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Alarm E Mail Wi
312. er Interface Operations FIGURE 1 21 SB x Window 4 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network uration Maintenance gt System gt SB gt SB 0 out SB 0 Logical Drives BMC BMC OK 8 FBU OK aa a x lU gt FIGURE 1 22 SB x Window 5 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt SB gt SB20 a z SB 0 a a Clock 2 a clock OR H B Voltage a a a n 537V a 1 02 1 19 V L L 1 93 V E ewa a ean P1 OV een 0 92 Losv 065 DESEN P1 5V_PCH 7 1 39 1 61 V 0 97 1 80 V ELAV ae 0 7 eeh EE 117 217V J Pi e t Gi f on V DIVEN A 11 14 1787 V TTINA ARV s MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 23 SB x Window 6 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout WOLE SAMENESS SU OER gt System gt SB gt SB 0 a z SB 0 C B P1 8V_PCIEX 1 V 1 67 1 93 V 1 17 2 17 V S C P12V 0 V 11 15 12 87 V 7 79 1445 V C P5V V 4 65 5 38 V 3 25 6 02 V a P3 3V V 3 06 3 54 V 2 14 3 98 V P1 35V_CPU20 V 1 25 1 45
313. er Technology Sets the CPU Power Management function e Disabled e Energy Efficient e Custom Default setting is Energy Efficient UEFI Menu Operations Enhanced Speed Step Sets the Power Saving function of CPU to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology Turbo Mode Sets the Intel R Turbo Boost Technology function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology Energy Performance Selects the Energy Performance mode e Performance e Balanced Performance e Balanced Energy e Energy Efficient Default setting is Performance Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology P State Coordination Sets the coordination method of P State of CPU e HW_ALL e GW ALL e SW_ANY Default setting is HW_ALL Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology CPU C3 Report Sets the CPU C3 Report function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Disabled Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology CPU C6 Report Sets the CPU C6 Report function to enable or disable e Enabled e Disabled Default setting is Enabled Remarks Displays only when Custom is selected in Power Technology CPU C7 report Sets the CPU C7 R
314. er maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to Reset the Partition tn because you have not authority to operate this partition Unable to Reset the partition s because the partition which does not have authority to you is included in the specified parameter nmi Specify NMI interruption to specified partition The default parameter is processed as the specified partition parameter Therefore it is necessary to specify the partition 2 2 11 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations When the specified partition is not in Power On state any kind of processing for such partition is not done Partition Operator can operate only the partition to be managed When the parameter which contains the partitions other than those to be managed is specified then error message is displayed and the specified partition cannot be operated Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only the partition to be managed 1 Input format nmi partition lt partition lt partition gt quiet 2 Option partition This option specifies a NMI of the partition identified by the specified partition number This partition can be omitted partition Partition number Even if the partition parameter is omitted processing assumes that the partition parameter is specified Therefore a partition number must be specified Partition is
315. erations Items Description existing data IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address DNS optional Sets whether to use the DNS server DNS Sets whether to use the DNS server To use the DNS select Enable The default is Disable DNS Server 1 Sets the IP address of the Primary DNS server DNS Server 2 Sets the IP address of the Secondary DNS server DNS Server 3 Sets the IP address of the Third DNS server Management LAN Duplicates the management LAN Dualization Duplicates the management LAN The default is Disable Maintenance IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the CE REMCS LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length gt S Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address SMTP address Sets the SMTP IP address Internal IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the Internal LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Prefix Length Sets the prefix length FIGURE 1 68 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B 1 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number See Status Normal System User Administration Maintenance gt Network Configuration gt Network Interface gt IPv6 Interface Rimes IPv6 Interface D IPV6 Interface _ Click the A
316. erations Items Description Slot Sensor Slot from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Physical and Sensor from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Logical Action The RAID action under execution is displayed R Rebuilding It is shown for a physical drive to execute the rebuild of the RAID drive y MDC Running It is shown for a logical drive to execute MDC Make Data Consistent Progress The progress rate of the RAID action under execution is displayed by the Estimated time remaining hh mm ss ercentage The remainder time that will be expected by the time the RAID action under execution is completed is displayed Expander Expander The number of the expander is displayed Status Displays the status of the Expander lt OK Warning Failed Not Present PSU PSU The number of the exp PSU ander is displayed Status Displays the status of the PSU OK Warning Failed Not Present Fans FAN The number of the Fan is displayed Status Displays the status of the Fan OK Warning Failed Not Present 1 3 1 3 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Partition Menu for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Status display and partition settings of PRIMEQUEST 2400E and PRIMEQUEST 2800E can be done on Partition Menu This menu is not displayed in PRIMEQUEST 2800B Power Control Window Power Control window displa
317. erations 1 Specify the port numbers time out time or other items to set as protocol information Then click the Apply button This sets the specified information such as the port numbers and time out time Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed E 00044 The Port number overlaps W_00435 Invalid Port number W_00436 Invalid Timeout value W_00437 The duplicate Port number was found W_00438 Timeout setting is invalid E_00439 SSL Server Certificate is not found 1_00440 HTTP Connection will be lost You will need to login again Are you sure For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Refresh Rate window You can set automatic refresh for those Web UI windows that display dynamic content from the Refresh Rate window Each user can make and manage this setting FIGURE 1 73 Refresh Rate window Model PRIMEQUEST2 00E Active MBO Part Namber MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number Jeees States Nosinal Admnistratoa Mamtenance Lopout Refresh Rate E Click the Apply Buon to apply all changes Retresh Rate Enable 10 sec O Disable Apply Cancel MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 100 Setting and display items in the Refresh Rate window Items Description Refresh Rate
318. erator privileges The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information and control operation from the menu RO The account user can only refer to information from the menu N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenus TABLE 1 4 Web UI menus Partition Operator Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level Same Other partition partition System System Status RO RO Displays the overall system status System Event RO RO Displays system Log event logs Operation Log RO RO Displays the operations on the Web UI and CLI Partition Event RO RO Displays the Log REMCS notification messages of a PRIMEQUEST partition System RO RO Displays system Information information such as the system name or product name Firmware RO RO Displays firmware Information version information System Setup RO RO Sets the system configuration System Power RO RO Controls the Control power LEDs RW RW Displays the LED status Power Supply RO RO Displays the power supply status Fans RO RO Displays the fan status Temperature RO RO Displays the temperatures detected by the temperature sensors of the MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2
319. es not perform the procedure correctly This also indicates that damage to the product or other property may occur if the user does not perform Reconfirm whether the selection of the disk is correct when you select the dump device Data is destroyed when executing it with the selection makes a mistake the procedure correctly Operation division Content of alert Chapter of description Normal operation data destruction 6 6 Dump device selection menu Warning labels The following warning labels are affixed to this product These labels are intended for the users of this product ACAUTION Never remove the warning labels Preface Revision History Edition Date Revised location type 1 Description 1 2014 2 18 1 Chapter section and item numbers in the Revised location column refer to those in the latest edition of the document However a number marked with an asterisk denotes a chapter section or item in a previous edition of the document Preface Contents NEE i CHAPTER 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations EEN 30 1 1 Web UI Meng 20 cia ai adie aE cilia eo edd AEN 30 1 1 1 Web Ul menus AGMINISTA ION acai d 202 EE A 31 1 1 2 Web Ul_ menus Operator 2 tie an patina ai ha de AA a a eden pees 34 1 1 3 Web UI menus Partition Coerabart ee 37 1 1 4 Web UI menus User 1 1 5 Web UI menus CE 1 1 6 Web Ul menus in maintenance MOdG
320. es the partition 0 3 However only the partition to which SB IOU is registered is displayed Partition Name Displays the partition name Schedule Control Sets whether schedule operation is done for every partition On MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Off Default setting is Off Number of schedules Displays the number of schedules that are set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 59 Schedule Control Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply When the Apply button is clicked the schedule operation information for the specified partition is set Cancel When the Cancel button is clicked the browser returns to the original status without setting the schedule operation information for the partition 1 Menu Operation Partition Schedule Schedule Control 2 Window Operations 1 Specifies whether schedule operation has to be carried out by Radio button for every partition 2 Click the Apply button O Schedule list Window Up to 1000 instances of partition power On Off schedule can be recorded in the Schedule list Window FIGURE 1 42 Schedule List Window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active MMBE0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Namber SOLNM Staras Normal tem ser dminisiration Networ gt Partiica gt Schedule gt Schedule List Schedule List _ Select a schedule then click the Edit Remove button to ed
321. es the piece of software running on the OS in managed nodes to help BMC with management Unless SVAgent it does not Selects power control specified for the partition However for the partition which is already in power on state Power On is not displayed On the contrary for the partition which is already in powered off Power Off Reset NMI Power Cycle Force Power Off and sadump are not displayed Power On Partition is the powered on Power Off Partition is powered off From the view point of Operating system it is same as that the power button of the device is on Therefore when the operating system supports the ACPI power can be turned off after the operating system is shutdown For details see Power Specifications ACPI of the operating system When the operating system does not support the ACPI the power can be turned off without shutting down the operating system Power Cycle Powered on again after the partition is forcibly powered on Reset Resets the partition NMI Produces the NMI interruption for the partition Force Power Off Turns off the power forcefully sadump Specifies the SADUMP for the partition Not specified There is no instruction for this partition Specifies whether to enforce power off when power off is done without proper operation of the shutdown instruction for the operating system by Power Off on the partition In case enforced power off has been specified the specified time 1 9 m
322. es to X 3 To exit from this menu after saving the changed setting select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key To exit from this menu without saving the changed setting select Discard Changes and Exit is and press Enter key 4 Confirm that the boot option is deleted normally by using the following procedure a Open the Boot Manager menu from Boot Manager front page Menu shown in FIGURE 3 43 is displayed b It is confirmed that the deleted boot option does not exist FIGURE 3 43 Boot Option Deletion Window 2 foot Manager UEFI Menu Operations E Change Boot Order Menu Change Boot Order menu is use to change the boot order Following window is displayed immediately after booting Change Boot Order menu FIGURE 3 44 Change Boot Order Menu e eene mg A LEI E EE 1 Page Information Display Change Boot Order is displayed 2 Menu Selection Items shown in TABLE 3 54 Display Contents of Menu Selection are displayed TABLE 3 54 Display Contents of Menu Selection Change the order Displays boot option Pop up window is displayed when this command is executed wherein the settings of boot order can be changed As for the legacy boot option boot option with highest boot priority level of each device is displayed Legacy device consists of the following four devices e Floppy Device e HardDisk Device e DVD CD ROM Device e Network Device Change method is e
323. escription Apply The setting of the Power Management Setup is changed Cancel Returns to the original state without changing the setting of the Power Management Setup 1 Menu Operation Partition Power Management Setup 2 Window Operations 1 Set the items for changing the settings of the Power Management Setup and click the Apply button Set the connection Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message 1 00013 Setting completed W_00426 Invalid values specified MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message Number Message E_00098 Failed to get Partition Power Management E 00098 Failed to get the system configuration W_00559 Unable to set Power Save Control because PSU type is not PSU_P W_00560 Unable to set Partition Power Save Control because System Power Save Control is disabled E_00100 Failed to set Partition Power Management For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 3 7 Partition x Menu The following settings and the displays for the partition can be done in the Partition x menu Status display ASR condition setting Video redirection display Various modes O Information Window Displays the status of the partition and various information on the partition on the information screen FIGURE 1 52 Informa
324. eseeneees TABLE 4 1 Wildcard characters in the UEFI shell Ge aie ihe Se TABLE 4 2 Output E E BREET ENER eu TABLE 6 1 Displayed contents of the menu selection armes TABLE 6 2 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 3 Displayed contents of the menu selection ACA ENEE TABLE 6 4 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 5 Displayed contents of MENU selection are een TABLE 6 6 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 7 Displayed contents Of MENU selection are ENEE TABLE 6 8 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 9 Displayed contents of MENU selection are een TABLE 6 10 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 11 Displayed contents of the menu selection area EEN TABLE 6 12 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 13 Displayed contents Of MENU selection AFCA un TABLE 6 14 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Preface TABLE 6 15 Displayed contents Of MENU selection AFCA un TABLE 6 16 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 17 Displayed contents Of MENU selection AFCA un TABLE 6 18 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE 6 19 Displayed contents Of MENU selection AFCA un TABLE 6 20 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation TABLE A 1 Setting item of System Event Log Fi
325. esponding to the types of the schedule Weekly Day in a week Sun Sat Monthly Period in a month Special Specified month Default settings are as follows Day in a week Not selected Period From 1 To 1 Specified date Jan 1 Term Specify the period of the schedule according to the type and pattern of the schedule Daily Starting month and date and ending month and date Weekly Starting month and ending month Monthly Starting month and ending month Default settings are as follows Daily From Jan 1 To Jan 1 Weekly From Jan To Jan Monthly From Jan To Jan On Time On the specified execution date set whether the power supply is to be turned ON If the power supply is to be ON set the time Time is specified in24 hours Minute specifies the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 Off Time Set whether the power supply is OFF on the specified execution date If the power supply is OFF set the time Time is specified in 24 hours Minute is specified in the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 TABLE 1 148 Add Schedule Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply If the Apply button is clicked the schedule information specified in each item is applied to the partition Cancel If the Cancel button is clicked returns to the original sate without applying the schedule information specified in each item Message This secti
326. ess Service is not installed to system the display is not switched over in Operating system Running even if Operating system is working Moreover for Operating system shutdown Panic commanded by SVAS if SVAS Server View Agentless Service is not installed there is no display SVAS Specifies the piece of software running on the OS in managed nodes to help BMC with management Unless SVAgent it does not provide management interface to the outside Power Control Selects power control specified for the system However for the system which is already in power on state Power On is not displayed On the contrary for the system which is already in powered off Power Off Reset NMI Power Cycle Force Power Off and sadump are not displayed Power On System is the powered on Power Off System is powered off From the view point of Operating system it is same as that the power button of the device is on Therefore when the operating system supports the ACPI power can be turned off after the operating system is shutdown For details see Power Specifications ACPI of the operating system When the operating system does not support the ACPI the power can be turned off without shutting down the operating system Power Cycle Powered on again after the partition is forcibly powered on Reset Resets the partition NMI Produces the NMI interruption for the system MMB Web UI Web User Interf
327. ess is invalid The specified parameter is invalid The specified IP address is duplicated The specified IP address is loopback address Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB 2 2 16 set gateway_ipv6 Default gateway of IPv6 is set If automatic setting is executed only auto is specified in option Privilege Administrator 1 Input format In case of manual setting Set gateway_ipv6 lt ip address gt In case of automatic setting Set gateway_ipv6 auto 2 Option auto IP address is set automatically 3 Usage example In case of manual setting set gateway_ipv6 fe80 1 In case of automatic setting set gateway_ipv6 auto fe80 beef Are you sure to continue Y N 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB The specified gateway address is invalid The specified IP address is duplicated The specified IP address is loopback address MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 2 17 set hostname Specifies the host name of MMB in FQDN format Characters which can be entered are as follows a z A Z 0 9 Hyphen Dot However following conditions must be observed The first character must be alphanumeric chara
328. ets hostname in FQDN The First character Optional format a z A Z 0 9 should be alphabetic Hyphen Dot character Hyphen Dot cannot be used as the first character and the last character IP Address None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Gateway None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 address 255 MMB 1 IP Interface Disable Enable Address Disable Hostname None Sets hostname in FQDN The First character Optional format a z A Z 0 9 should be alphabetic Hyphen Dot character gt Hyphen Dot cannot be used as the first character and the last character IP Address None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Gateway None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 address 255 DNS DNS Disable Enable optional e Disable DNS Server 1 None Sets the IP address of primary DNS Server DNS Server 2 None Sets the IP address of primary DNS Server DNS Server 3 None Sets the IP address of primary DNS Server Management _ Dualization Disable Enable Appendix A List of Setting Items Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks LAN e Disable Maintenance Interface Disable Enable IP Address e Disable IP Address None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Gateway No
329. ets the https port number set ssh_port Sets the ssh port number set telnet_port Sets the telnet port number show hip port Permitted Permitted Displays the http port number MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Partition Partition Outline Operator Operator Same Other partition partition show https_port Permitted Permitted Displays the https port number show ssh_port Permitted Permitted Displays the ssh port number show telnet_port Permitted Permitted Displays the telnet port number clear access_control Clears the access control setting show access_control Displays the access control setting clear ssh_key Clears the SSH public key download ssh_key Downloads the SSH public key ping Permitted Permitted Pings the target show ntpq Permitted Permitted NTP inquiry ntpq p executed Account management passwd Permitted Permitted Changes a password who Permitted Permitted Displays the login user Firmware update update ALL Batch updates the firmware new MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Permitted Permitted Displays the active MMB exit Permitted Permitted Logs out from the MMB help Permitted Permitted Help information Command termination code display show exit_code Permitted Permitted Displays the termination code fo
330. evice and also shows the relation of connection from PCI Route Bridge Parameter of Device Path Each parameter of displayed device path is shown in the TABLE 3 73 Parameter of Device Path TABLE 3 73 Parameter of Device Path Display Description Acpi HID UID ACPI device path HID is an abbreviation of Hardware ID An ID by which ACPI specifications are conformed is given below UID is an abbreviation of Unique ID Can be omitted Pci Device Function PCI Device Device is the device number of PCI device 0 31 is shown with hexadecimal Function is the function number of PCI device It is shows with 0 7 digits Scsi PUN LUN Scsi Controller PUN is an abbreviation of Physical Unit Number It means SCSI ID 0 65535 is shown with hexadecimal LUN is an abbreviation of Logical Unit Number 0 65535 is shown with hexadecimal Fibre WWN LUN Fibre Controller WWYN is an abbreviation of World Wide Name It shows with numeric of 64 bit LUN is an abbreviation of Logical Unit Number It shows with numeric of 64 bit MAC MacAddr IfType Network MacAddr is an abbreviation of Mac Address If Type is an abbreviation of Interface Type 0 255 is shown with hexadecimal HD Partition Type Signature Start Size Hard Drive Partition shows the partition number Type shows Partition Type Can be omitted Type is given below GPT Abbreviation of GUID Partition Table
331. ew mode 1 5 2 Network Interface window The Network Interface menu has the following windows IPv4 Interface window IPv6 Interface window O IPv4 Interface window You can set the IPv4 IP address for MMB access and other related items in the IPv4 Interface window FIGURE 1 62 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active IMB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal System Partition User Administration Maintenance Logout gt Network Configuration gt Network Interface gt IPv4 Interface IPv4 Interface Click the Apply button for all changes to take effect MMB VirtualPhysical IP Address Virtual IP Address DH gg PRIMEQUESTSWBG4 Ire eol To k 255 Kl Serge 0 Ta TJ bh MMB 0 IP Address O Enable Disable Ee D DP P DNS optional DNS OEnable Disable MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 63 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 2 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal System Partition User Administration WET renee gt Network Configuration gt Network Interface gt IPv4 Interface IPv4 Interface L Maintenance IP Address Interface OEnable Disable Internal IP Address TABLE 1 89 Setti
332. example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Unable to power on the partition d due to CPU mismatch between SBs Unable to power on the partition d due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode Unable to power on due to mismatch between supply voltage and input voltage Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal DIMM composition Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal SB composition Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal VRM composition Unable to power on the system Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance The Power On failed because of switching the Home SB Please execute it after a while again Unable to power on the system because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed reset Specify the Hard Reset to the system When the entire system is not in Power On state any kind of processing for such system is not done Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format reset quiet 2 Option quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example Example When reset is directed by the Administrator authority
333. ext in ll Change of the Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order Commit Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after saving the changes Discard Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after cancelling the changes 1 Operation Help Display Displays the explanation of the operation key shown in TABLE 3 61 Display Contents of the Operation Help Display UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 61 Display Contents of the Operation Help Display Item Explanation Il Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager TABLE 3 62 Display Contents of the Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears when pop up window appears shows the display contents of the Operation Help Display when the pop up window is appeared TABLE 3 62 Display Contents of the Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears Item Explanation 11 Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Complete Selects the items Entry Esc Exit Entry Closes the pop up window E Change of the Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order HDD which is targeted for activation is installed in the following sequence 1 In the window shown in FIGURE 3 54 Change of the Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 1 place the cursor on HardDisk Drive N which wants to change the
334. f Floppy Drive 00 is changed from Y E DATAUSB FDU 7 03 to Fujitsu Virtual Floppy 01 00 in FIGURE 3 50 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 2 FIGURE 3 51 Change of priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 3 is a window example when priority level of HDD is changed When the boot option set in Floppy Drive N is set in another Floppy Drive M before setting boot option set in Floppy Drive N is set in Floppy Drive M before changing In FIGURE 3 51 Change of priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 3 Y E DATAUSB FDU 7 03 is set in Floppy Drive 01 in which Fujitsu Virtual Floppy0 1 00 is set FIGURE 3 51 Change of priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 3 Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order UEFI Menu Operations 5 Set Enable Disable of the Floppy Drive N Select Disable to disable Select the boot option to enable FIGURE 3 52 Change of the priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 4 is an example of the window in which Floppy Drive 00 is set to Disable Disabled Floppy Drive N is displayed as Disable FIGURE 3 52 Change of the priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 4 Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 6 To exit from this menu by saving changes in the setting select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key To exit from this menu without saving changes in the setting select Discard Changes and Exit and press Enter key
335. f an IOU simply called after deletion of IOU o At the time that an IOU failed to be turned off simply called at the deletion of IOU failure time At each execution time the hot plug collaboration function sequentially executes the collaboration program stored in the specified directory The collaboration programs that are executed before addition of SB after addition of SB before deletion of SB after deletion of SB before addition of IOU after addition of IOU before deletion of IOU and after deletion of IOU are executed in ascending order of program file names The collaboration program that are executed at the SB addition failure time at the SB deletion failure time at the IOU addition failure time and at the IOU deletion failure time are executed in descending order of program file names 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation For the directory that stored collaboration program see Section 5 2 4 Directory that stored collaboration programPreface For naming rule of collaboration program see Section 5 2 5 Naming convention of collaboration program Timeout of collaboration program Hot plug collaboration function does not know details of collaboration programs Thus hot plug collaboration function sequentially execute collaboration programs for preventing depletion of resources A collaboration program may terminate abnormally by some reasons Thus when collaboration program does not fini
336. failure Unable to execute DP command because OS is not ready for DP operation MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 2 37 hotremove partition The specified SB or IOU is removed dynamically from the specified partition In the case of any of the following the error is displayed and processing is interrupted When the DR function of the specified partition is invalid When the specified partition is operated DR When the specified partition is starting When OS of the specified partition is DR off the subject When the specified SB or IOU is not exist in the specified partition When specified SB is Home SB At the SB specification OOGBOVO Privilege Administrator 1 Input format hotremove partition lt partition gt SB lt SB x gt quiet hotremove partition lt partition gt IOU lt IOU x gt quiet 2 Option quiet The command is executed without interacting with the user 3 Usage example Example When SB 3 is removed from Partition 2 hotremove partition 2 SB 3 Are you sure to continue removing SB 3 from partition 2 Y N Y DP operation start 1 4 Offlining removed Memory CPU 2 4 Reconfiguring partition 2 3 4 Releasing SB 3 4 4 Removing SB 3 from partition 2 has been completed successfully Example When IOU 3 is removed from Partition 2 hotremove partition 2 IOU 3 Ar
337. fference with the NTP server The NTP client on the MMB starts operation when the NTP services on the MMB are enabled i e when Enable in the NTP field is checked and the Apply button is clicked in the Network Configuration Date Time window or when the MMB is reset the MMB redundancy is switched and the AC power is turned from OFF to ON while the NTP services on the MMB are enabled When starting time synchronization The time adjusting method on the NTP varies depending on the NTP operation mode Step mode or Slew mode In Step mode if the time difference between the synchronized NTP servers and the MMB is within a range of 0 128 to 0 128 seconds the NTP executes Slew adjustment which corrects the time at a rate of up to 0 0005 per second without reversal outside a range of 0 128 to 0 128 seconds and within a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds the NTP executes Step adjustment In this case the clock may be reversed outside a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds the NTP function stops In Slew mode if the time difference between the synchronized NTP servers and the MMB is 1 2 3 within a range of 600 to 600 seconds 10 minutes the NTP executes Slew adjustment which corrects the time at a rate of up to 0 0005 per second without reversal outside a range of 600 to 600 seconds 10 minutes and within a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds 16 minutes and 40 seconds the NTP executes Step adjustme
338. fied at a time help Print the synopsis of stat subbcommand 5 1 3 4 Example e g When you hot add PCI card to slot number 20 of PCI slot opt FJSVdp util sbin dp stat pcie pcie20 online pcie21 offline pcie22 empty Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation 5 1 4 Show resources on device show subcommand 5 1 4 1 Synopsis opt FJSVdp util sbin dp show Device possible 5 1 4 2 Description This is the subcommand for displaying resources on the device 5 1 4 3 Options When specified device is IOU All I O resources PCI on IOU are displayed When specified device is pcie the name of PCI Express device is displayed Arguments Meaning Device Target device e g IOUx pciex x represents the slot number Only one target can be specified at a time help Print the synopsis of show subcommand 5 1 4 4 Example e g When you want to display I O resources on IOU1 opt FUSVdp util sbin dp show IOU1 04 00 0 PCI bridge 05 09 0 PCI bridge 06 00 0 PCI bridge 07 01 0 PCI bridge 07 02 0 PCI bridge 07 08 0 PCI bridge 07 09 0 PCI bridge 07 10 0 PCI bridge 07 11 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 Device 8748 Device 8748 Device 8748 Device 8748 Device 8748 Device 8748 rev ba Device 8748 rev ba Device 8748 rev ba
339. free IOU At the IOU specification When specified SB or IOU is not normal When it does not exist or be abnormal QOO QSGOVKO Privilege Administrator 1 Input format hotadd partition lt partition gt SB lt SB x gt quiet hotadd partition lt partition gt IOU lt IOU x gt quiet 2 Option quiet The command is executed without interacting with the user 3 Usage example Example When SB 3 is to be added to Partition 2 hotadd partition 2 SB 3 Are you sure to continue adding SB 3 to partition 2 Y N Y DP operation start 1 5 Assigning SB 3 to partition 2 2 5 Testing SB 3 3 5 Reconfiguring partition 2 4 5 Onlining added Memory CPU 5 5 Adding SB 3 to Partition 2 has been completed successfully MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Example When IOU 3 is to be added to Partition 2 hotadd partition 2 IOU 3 Are you sure to continue adding IOU 3 to Partition 2 Y N Y DP operation start 1 3 Assigning IOU to partition 2 3 Power on OU 3 3 Adding IOU 3 to Partition 2 has been completed successfully 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure to continue adding SB d IOU d to partition d Y N DP operation start 1 5 Assigning SB d to partition d 2 5 Testing SB d 3 5 Reconfiguring partition d 4 5 Onlining adde
340. gateway address show gateway Permitted Displays the gateway address show network Permitted Displays the management LAN interface show gateway_ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 gateway address Sets whether to enable http service MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command User Outline set https Sets whether to enable https service set ssh Sets whether to enable ssh service set telnet Sets whether to enable telnet service show http Permitted Displays the http service enabling setting show https Permitted Displays the https service enabling setting show ssh Permitted Displays the ssh service enabling setting show telnet Permitted Displays the telnet service enabling setting set http_port Sets the http port number set httos_port Sets the https port number set ssh_port Sets the ssh port number set telnet_port Sets the telnet port number show hip port Permitted Displays the http port number show https_port Permitted Displays the https port number show ssh_port Permitted Displays the ssh port number show telnet_port Permitted Displays the telnet port number clear access_control Clears the access control setting show access_control Displays the access control setting clear ssh_key Permitted Clears the SSH public key download ssh_key Permitted Downloads the SSH public key ping Perm
341. gement target Partition 0 Operations can be performed only for a partition which is targeted for management When it is not targeted for management Pull down Menu and the setting items are displayed as gray out MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 39 Power Control Window Grayout Display Model PRIMEQUEST2800 Active MMB40 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FU Serial Namber SERET Status Power Control Rerean Heip Select a Power Conrat option for one or more partidas then ckck the Apply button to take effect Pett pone sum srm promn ponercona fissa Or hayashi Standby Power Off Not specified 1 take Standby Power OF Not specified RE NoOwense 1 Select the process executed for the partition from Pull down menu of Power Control Then click the Apply button Dialog box for confirmation appears 2 Click the OK button to execute the process Click the Cancel button to cancel the process When Partition Power is On or when Power is Off and when the specified control is failed Warning dialog box appears When the CPU mounted on the SB of partition is not matched at the time of specifying the Power On of partition Warning dialog box appears Error occurs in the Power On operation TABLE 1 56 Display Items and Set Items of Power Control Window Items Description Displays the number by which the partition is identified In case of the PRIMEQUEST 2800E model The
342. ges Remarks bar level Same Other partition partition SB RO RO IOU n RO RO PCI_Box n RO RO Reserved SB RO RO Defines a Configuration Reserved SB Power RO RO Management Setup Partition 0 If no board belongs to the partition this submenu is not displayed Information RO N A Displays the partition status and partition related information ASR Control RW N A Sets the conditions for automatically restarting the partition Console RW N A Displays the Redirection console output of the partition Mode RW N A Sets the mode for the partition Partition 1 Same as for Partition 2 Partition 0 Partition 3 User Administration User List N A N A Lists edits and deletes registered user accounts Change RW N A Changes the Password password of the user s own account Who RO RO Displays all users who are logged in to the MMB Network Configuration Date Time RO RO Network Interface IPv4 Interface RO RO Sets the IPv4 IP address etc IPv6 Interface RO RO Sets the IPv6 IP address etc Management N A N A Configures the LAN Port Port LAN of the Configuration MMB HUB Network RO RO Protocols Refresh Rate RW RW Sets the refresh rate of the Web Ul window SNMP N A N A Configuration Community N A N A Trap N A N A MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations
343. gth Used to select the length of the secret key to be created in bits 1024 2048 Country Name Sets the ISO country code for the owner specified in the created CSR The country code must be two alphabetic characters Example Japan JP USA US State or Province Sets the state or province name of the owner specified in the created CSR The Name name must consist of up to 56 specifiable characters Locality Name Sets the locality name of the owner specified in the created CSR The name must consist of up to 56 specifiable characters Organization Name Sets the organization name company name of the owner specified in the created CSR The name must consist of up to 56 specifiable characters Organization Unit Sets the organization unit name of the owner specified in the created CSR The Name name must consist of up to 56 specifiable characters Common Name Sets the FQDN of the server of the owner specified in the created CSR The FQDN must consist of up to 56 specifiable characters e g www mycompany com The browser uses this information to identify the website To establish secure connections some browsers reject an electronic certificate if the Common Name in it does not match the server name Common Name cannot include an http protocol specifier port number or path name Also IP addresses and wildcard characters MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description such as or are prohi
344. h SB unit The menu of uninstalled SB is not displayed The format of window and operating method are same for each menu therefore only one menu is explained here O SB x Window SB x window displays the status of SB x board and the settings of SB x board can be carried out FIGURE 1 18 SB x Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt SB gt SB 0 SB 0 Click the Status Clear button to clear the status IS Board Information 7 Part Number CA07603 D003 A0 Seri Number SCH CPUs ei Xeon E7 e EE EECHER Not present DIMMs I lt Status Clear MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 19 SB x Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX ITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal EN Not present iil A2 Not present EE SE uns Not present es Not present OBO Not present OCH Not present 0B2 Not present 0B3 Not present t Not present Not ot present G CES gt FIGURE 1 20 SB x Window 3 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number 0000000001 Status E ion Network lt mation Maintenance out gt System gt SB gt SB 0 SB 0 Mezzanine bi Bao gf il gt MMB Web UI Web Us
345. h is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 9 of PCl_Box 2 Slot 107 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 10 of PCI_Box 2 Slot 108 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 11 of PCl_Box 2 By default it is Disabled UEFI Menu Operations Slot 113 OpROM Slot 114 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 0 of PCl_Box 3 By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 1 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 115 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 2 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 116 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 3 of PCl_Box 3 Slot 117 OpROM Enables disables Legacy OpROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Setting for PCI Express slot 4 of PCl_
346. h the unit of CPU TABLE 1 126 Buttons in the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window Buttons Description Apply Sets the filtering conditions Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as Severity Partition and Unit 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Alarm E Mail Filter button 2 Window Operations 1 Specify the items such as Severity Partition and Unit Then click the Apply button This sets the specified filtering conditions MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 6 Maintenance Menu You can perform maintenance on the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server from the Maintenance menu 1 6 1 Firmware Update menu The Firmware Update menu has the following window Unified Firmware Update window O Unified Firmware Update window You can unify a firmware update in the Unified Firmware Update window The firmware complete set is up loaded to MMB and the firmware in the new publication is maintained Confirm the version of each firmware Update the firmware only if those versions are not the same The online firmware update does not update the same version number situation Note If the MMB or SB has failed perform maintenance on it before updating the firmware Do not update the firmware in a configuration that has a faulty MMB or SB FIGURE 1 90 Unified Firmware Update window Model PRIMEQUE
347. hanges and exits this menu Discard Changes and Exit Cancels the changes and exits this menu Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 4 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tl Move Highlight Moves the cursor up or down Selects an entry In the case of ENABLE COMPRESS RECYCLE lt Enter gt Select Entry selection item is shown as pop up window In the case of REBOOT you can input a value Specify a value and commit it by Enter key Note Don t operate F2 key Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it 6 4 Dump device Manager Menu This is displayed when the Dump device Manager menu is selected in the main menu In this menu you can create setup discard dump device Dump device Manager FIGURE 6 7 Dump device maintenance menu TABLE 6 5 Displayed contents of menu selection area Item Description Display area Displays the number of dump devices which are already created and displays the number of dump devices which are already set up Create a dump device Go to dump device create menu Select a dump device Go to dump device setup menu Discard a dump device Go to dump device discard menu Exit Exits this menu Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 6 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tl Move Highlight Moves the cursor up or d
348. have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed 2 6 7 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations set memory_mirror_ras_mode It sets the Memory Mirror RAS mode of the system Memory Operation Mode can be set only at the time of Mirror Mode settings Default value is set to mirror_keep RAS emphasized mode mirror_keep Mirror mode is maintained capacity_keep Capacity of the memory is maintained For the syetm which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command following message is displayed and settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the system is running Please try to change the mode after the system is shutdown For the system which is already powered OFF when the settings are changed by this command power OFF ON is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message Moreover also when values which are the same as the current values are set power ff on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format set memory_mirror_ras_mode mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting Memory Mirror RAS Mode of the system to Mirror Keep Mode set memory_mirror_ras_mode mirror keen The setti
349. he Internal LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 64 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 28008 1 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number ee Status Normal Sy Us on d gt Network Configuration gt Network Interface gt IPv4 Interface IPv4 Interface Click the Apply button for all changes to take effect MMB IP Address egener SA 130 265 0 Jk O Enable Disable O Enable Disable Maintenance IP Address IS FIGURE 1 65 IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 28008 2 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B 2 _ Part Number MCF3AC111 o FUJITSU Serial Number RVR Status Normal Maintenance i om fe oe Management LAN O Enable Disable Maintenance IP Address OEnable Disable Internal IP Address Interfa O Enable Disable ia ER P D Cancel E Ri MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 90 Setting and display items in the IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B Items Description MMB IP Address IP Address Hostname Sets the host name in FQDN format You can enter the following characters a z A Z 0 9 hyphen period Only the above characters
350. he MMB To confirm restoration the MMB Configuration File Information dialog box appears 4 Click the OK button in the MMB Configuration File Information dialog box This restores the MMB configuration information 5 The MMB is rebooted to enable the restored data e Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00054 Restore completed Now rebooting 00486 Select a file E 00055 Failed to restore the MMB Configuration E_00056 Failed to backup the MMB Configuration E 00057 Specified file can not restore MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message Number Message 1 00054 Restore completed Now rebooting 00486 Select a file E 00058 File format error E 00060 Specified file is the one of another machine E 00061 Failed to get serial number E 00062 Can t restore the MMB Configuration Please power off the chassis E_00063 Failed to reset the MMB Please turn off the breaker to enable the settings For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Backup BIOS Configuration window for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E This window is displayed only in PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E You can back up BIOS configuration information to the PC running the browser from the Backup BIOS Configuration window FIGURE 1 92 Backup BIOS Configuration w
351. he power voltage in the last two decimal places TABLE 1 54 MMB x Window button Buttons Description On Turns on the Location LED when the On button is clicked Off Turns off the Location LED when the Off button is clicked Apply Click the Apply button to set the specified control information Cancel Click the Cancel button to restore the original information and not set the specified information 1 Menu Operation System MMB MMB x 2 Window Operations Confirmation dialogue box is displayed Specify the information which shows the change in MMB status click the Apply button Sets the information which shows the change in MMB status Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed _ 00052 MMB switch processing has started _ 00095 The standby MMB is rebooting now Please wait several minutes E_00100 Failed to set the LED E_00125 Failed to switch over to another MMB E 00125 Failed to change Enable Disable status of the MMB E 00125 Failed to reset the MMB _ 00213 aa cannot be executed because the system is under maintenance _ 00467 The reboot is done Login after a while W_00413 Nothing is selected MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message Number Message 1 00013 Setting completed _00052 MMB switch processing has started
352. he system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to set configuration because the power on off is processing Please execute it after a while again 2 2 12 set active _ mmb By resetting Active MMB switch over to Active MMB When this command is issued for MMB which is already in Active MMB nothing is executed When this command is issued without parameter the command assumes that the MMB connected to the CLI is specified as the active MMB Remarks This command can be executed by connecting to Standby MMB It is different from Switch Over function of MMB Web UI Privilege Administrator CE 1 Input format MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations set active_mmb 0 1 quiet 2 Option 0 MMB O0 is specified 1 MMB 41 is specified quiet Command is executed without interacting with the user 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified MMB x is NOT present The specified MMB x is disabled The specified parameter is invalid Are you sure to continue set active mmb y n set active_mmb failed 2 2 13 set date Set the date and time The set format is as following MM Month 01 12 DD Date 1 28 29 30 31
353. he time recorded in SEL compared to the time reserved for scheduled operations After checking the configuration and after performing the start up preparation process it takes some time until the power is ON In this case the SEL display is delayed about from six seconds up to 8 seconds than the time reserved for the scheduled operations The shutdown instructions from MMB to OPERATING SYSTEM take certain time from the set time However the following interval times may be changed under the various conditions like setting and the configuration Interval time until shutdown instructions reaches OS from MMB Interval time until MMB notifies SEL begin shutdown after OS begins shutdown Even if the Power on Delay is 0 seconds it takes about 30 seconds 70 seconds from starting the power on up to the reset O Schedule Control window In the Schedule Control window the setting related to the schedule can be set for system MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 104 Schedule Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3AC111 B FUJITSU Serial Number EH Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Schedule gt Schedule Control Schedule Control Help Select Schedule Control then click the Apply button to take effect Schedule Control OOn OF Number of schedules 0 lt gt If the maintenance work Either Hot System Mai
354. hen switching to specified SB Are you sure to continue W_00520 Unable to register the specified SB d as a Reserved SB due to abnormal SB composition W_00525 Unable to register the specified SB d as a Reserved SB due to abnormal VRM composition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN When multiple errors are detected multiple errors are displayed in the dialogue box 1 3 6 Power Management Setup Window In the Power Management Setup window Power Saving can be set in the partition unit Power Saving can be set only when the Power save Control as system is Enable When the System Power Save setting is Disable then the display of this screen is shown as gray and cannot be set FIGURE 1 51 Power Management Setup window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB20 Part Number MCF3AC111 FU ITSU Serial Number Status Normal Power Management Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Power Save Power Save Action reaching Control Grace Period Power Save ne Disable Normal MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 74 Display Items and Set Items of Power Management Setup Window Items Description Displays number 0 3 to identify the partition However displays only the partitions registered by SB IOU Partition Name Displays the name given to the Partition Power Co
355. his window is designed for maintenance personnel 1 Menu Operation Maintenance Maintenance Wizard REMCS menu You can operate and configure REMCS from the REMCS menu For details on REMCS see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series REMCS Installation Manual C122 E180EN MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 7 System Menu for PRIMEQUEST 2800B In System menu it is possible to display and set the status of all the hardware components in the PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST 2800B system A display and a set item of System menu are different in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and PRIMEQUEST 2800E Refer to Chapter 1 3 for details Remarks If Read Error is displayed for Part Number and Serial Number on MMB Web UI contents area and information area confirm the problem by referring to 11 2 Troubleshooting of PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN If the error could not be resolved contact your sales representative or repairs assistance service Confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed on the main unit and report it 1 7 1 System Status window System Status window shows the status of entire PRIMEQUEST 2800 model The contents displayed may differ depending on the configuration of the unit You can also display details of each unit by clicking the link displayed in the frame FIGURE 1 96 System Status window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Ser
356. hotadd partition Permitted Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Permitted Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove set partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Displays DR state of partition TABLE 2 3 MMB CLI commands Operator Command Operator Outline Power control power off Permitted Turns the power off power on Permitted Turns the power on Partition control sadump Permitted sadump instruction reset Permitted Hard Reset instruction nmi Permitted NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection console Permitted Test Console connection to partition Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show partition configuration Permitted Displays the partition configuration set partition home Sets the Home SB show partition home Permitted Displays the Home SB set partition memory_operation_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation mode show partition memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set partition pci_address_mode Permitted Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show partition pci_address_mode Permitted Displays PCI bus number
357. http Displays the status enable disable of current HTTP Privilege All 1 Input format show http 2 Option None 3 Usage example show http HTTP disabled 4 Message None 2 3 17 show http_port Displays the port to which HTTP session is currently connected Privilege All 1 Input format show http_port 2 Option None 3 Usage example show http_port HTTP Port Number 8081 4 Message None MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 3 18 show https Displays the status enable disable of current HTTPS server Privilege All 1 Input format show https 2 Option None 3 Usage example show https HTTPS disabled 4 Message None 2 3 19 show https port Displays the port to which HTTPS is currently connected Privilege All 1 Input format show https_port 2 Option None 3 Usage example show https_port HTTPS Port Number 432 4 Message None 2 3 20 show ip Displays the IP address the net mask set in the management LAN interface Privilege All 1 Input format show ip 2 Option MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations None 3 Usage example show ip IP Address 10 1 2 124 Netmask 255 255 255 0 4 Message None 2 3 21 show ipv6 Displays the global address the prefix length for IPv6 set in the management LAN interface Privilege All 1 Input form
358. i Gul 0x0 Device Path is as follows PcieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1C 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x0 Ctrl 0x0 Scsi 0x0 0x0 HD 1 GPT 83B59636 996C 4550 A27A EBEAA43820D0 0x800 0x32000 SAS Disk built in DU Specific method of SAS disk built in DU 0 is described as an example UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 75 Specification of SAS Disk built in DU 0 Trc H 0x02 Guil SAS controller DU 40 9 0x0 0x0 i P DEES Ges HD SAS Disc 1 GPT 83859936 996C 4550 A274 EBEAA438 7000 0x800 0x 32000 Pcieroot Ox Device path of SAS device is as follows Pcieroot 0x0 PCI 0x02 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 PCI 0x10 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 PCI 0x09 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 PCI 0x0 1 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 Ctrl 0x0 0x0 Scsi 0x3 0x0 PCI 0x0 0x0 HD 1 GPT 83B59636 996C 4550 A27A EBEAA43820D0 0x800 0x32000 Disk Specification from Fibre Card Disk specific method from Fibre connection when Fibre Card is inserted to PCle of IOU is described as an example FIGURE 3 76 Specification of Disk from Fibre Card PCle SW Fibre Card Pcieroot 0x0 x02 0x0 FibreiSAS Disc _ 0x240000E000A80481 1 0x02 if pci pE H ox2oo0000000000 1 0x10 0x0 i UEFI Menu Operations GigaLAN Specific method of GigaLAN built in IOU is described as an example FIGURE 3 77 Specification of GigaLAN PCle SW OnBoardLAN PCI PCI II 0 02 00 OO D i i PEI H o0 00 PCI PCI i H 0x10 00 Ox 00 PCI PCI 0
359. ial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt System Status O System Status System Status Click a link below to view detailed information about each unit ooeg ee aia OK OK OK OK DU 1 Not present gt The contents which are displayed as the status of unit are as follows OK It is shown for the unit which operates normally without any trouble Not present It is shown for the unit which is not mounted It is shown in gray colored background Warning Though it is not serious it shows the unit where a problem may occur It is shown by icon Failed It shows the unit where failure has occurred and it must be disconnected It is shown by icon Degraded It shows that a failure has occurred in the component of a certain unit and the unit is operated without disconnecting the failed component It is shown by icon MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 130 Status of Unit and its Icons Status Display Color Icon Normal Normal state Green None Warning Degraded Yellow Black mark in yellow triangle K Failed Red We X in red circle Each unit is linked with the window showing the detailed status However for units which are not mounted there is no window showing the details Therefore these units are not linked TABLE 1 131 Items displayed in Syst
360. ial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Management LAN Port Configuration Window TABLE A 20 Setting Items of Management LAN Port Configuration Window Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Speed Duplex User port Auto Auto 1G Full can be set only to for MMB 0 Maintenance e 1G Full User port Appendix A List of Setting Items Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks port 100M Full REMCS port 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half Speed Duplex User port Auto Auto 1G Full can be set only to for MMB 1 Maintenance 1G Full User port port 100M Full REMCS port e 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half A 1 21 Setting Items of Network Protocols Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Network Protocols Window TABLE A 21 Setting Items of Network Protocols Window Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Web HTTP Disable Enable HTTP HTTP e Disable S HTTP Port 8081 80 1024 65535 HTTPS Disable Enable e Disable HTTPS Port 432 432 1024 65535 HTTP HTTPS 600 seconds 60 9999 seconds Timeout sec 0 No timeout Telnet Telnet Disable Enable Disable Telnet Port 23 23 1024 65535 Telnet Timeout 600 second 60 9999 seconds 0 No timeout SSH SSH D
361. ich Fujitsu HandyDrive100 is set FIGURE 3 56 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 3 UEFI Menu Operations 5 Enable Disable of HardDisk Drive N is set e Select Disable to make Disable e Select boot option to make Enable FIGURE 3 57 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 4 is an example of window on which the HardDisk Drive 00 is set to Disable The Disabled HardDisk Drive N is displayed as Disable FIGURE 3 57 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 4 6 Select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key to exit from the menu by saving the set changes Select Discard Changes and Exit and press Enter key to exit from the menu without saving the set changes E Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Menu When DVD CD drives exist in multiple numbers the Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order menu sets the priority level of the startup device The window at the time of starting menu Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order is indicated below The information on the DVD CD drive is displayed on the window Moreover if Disable is displayed in ATAPI CDROM Drive N the boot function of ATAP CDROM Drive N is Disable UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 58 Example of Displayed Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Menu 1 1 Page Information Display Displayed as Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 Menu Selection The items indicated in TABL
362. ime the system power off on is performed The specified parameter is invalid Failed to execute S command Failed to execute set lan_device_mode command Unable to change the mode while the system is running Please try to change the mode after the system is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed 2 6 9 show memory_operation_mode Displays the Memory Operation Mode of the system performance Shows the Performance Mode normal Shows the Normal Mode partial_mirror Shows the Partial Mirror Mode full_mirror Shows the Full Mirror Mode MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations spare Shows Spare Mode Privilege All 1 Input format show memory_operation_mode 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When Memory Operation Mode of system is displayed show memory_operation_mode current normal setting performance 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Failed to execute S command Failed to execute show memory_operation_mode command System Configuration Failed 2 6 10 show memory_mirror_ras_mode Displays Memory Mirror RAS Mode of the system mirror_keep Sets the Mirror Keep Mode cap
363. indow Model PRIMEQUESTS00 Active DMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Nember EE States Normal System Partition User Adminstration Network Configuration Backup BIOS Configuration Help Select a partidoa then click the Backup button Backup Cancel TABLE 1 127 Buttons in the Backup BIOS Configuration window Buttons Description Backup Backs up the BIOS configuration information Cancel Cancels backup of the BIOS configuration information 1 Menu Operation Maintenance Backup Restore Configuration Backup BIOS Configuration 2 Window Operations 1 Select the radio button of the partition to which to back up BIOS configuration information Then click the Backup button MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations A save destination dialog box appears 2 Select the save destination path in the save destination dialog box Then click the OK button This downloads the BIOS configuration information file The default name of the backup file of the BIOS configuration information is as follows partition number _ backup date _ BIOS version dat Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _00066 Failed to backup the BIOS Configuration 1 00427 Select a partition E_00006 Authorization required E 00040 Partition not defined E 00098 Failed to get the partition status E
364. ined Warning Low High e Critical Low High Power Consumption Power Consumption Displays the power consumption Airflow Volume Airflow Volume Displays the airflow volume Cable Connection LNKC Displays the Link Card number Status Displays the connection status of the cable OK Not connected ncorrect connection Connect to IOU Displays the connection destination IOU When not connected the display is grayed out PCIC Displays the PCI Slot of the connection destination IOU When not connected the display is grayed out PCI Express Slots PCIC Displays the PCI Express slot number MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Power Status Displays the power status of the GPCI Express slot On Standby Slot Status Displays the status of PCI Express slot OK Not present Failed Disabled Link Width Displays the Link Width of the PCI Express slot format x1 x2 x4 x8 Seg Bus Dev Displays the Segment Bus and Device of the PCI Express slot Vendor ID Displays the Vender ID of the PCI Card Remarks ID uniquely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Displays the Device ID of the PCI Card Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administrat
365. ing of PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN If the error could not be solved contact your sales representative or sales representative Confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed on the main unit and report it Moreover do not Reset or Force Power Off the partition till the error is solved When Power off Reset Force Power Off and shut down of partition is done by operating system and if the state of each component on the MMB Web UI screen is displayed in the state in which processing does not end even for a long time Part Number and Serial Number are displayed as Read Error MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 12 System Power Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active MMB10 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number a e States Normal gt System gt System Power Control System Power Control Select a power control action then cick the Apply button Power On all parttion s Power OF al pastition s all partitions wil be automatically sinndown Force Power OF a a a a a LJ Lt oD a d es L a a D a h yb Stub TABLE 1 34 Display Items and Setting Items in System Power Control Window Items Description Power on all partition s Turns on the power of all the partition s If the status in which only the power of the chassis is ON is selected the power of all partitions is turned on Power off all partiti
366. ing on includes restoration powe Power On delay by the AC power supply turning on includes restoration powe is given to priority and Power on delay by Power On by the schedule driving is disregarded Altitude Sets the altitude where PRIMEQEST 2000 series system is installed or placed Altitude lt 1000 m S 1000 m lt Altitude lt 1500 m x 1500 m lt Altitude lt 2000 m 7 2000 m lt Altitude Default value is Altitude lt 1000 m Setting error of altitude condition is possible up to 100m PSU Redundant Mode Sets whether PSU is redundantly operated y Redundant Non redundant When Power Feed Mode is Single it is by default Non Redundant When Power Feed Mode is Dual it is always Redundant Reserved SB Force While switching to Reserved SB sets the maximum standby time till the start of Power Off Wait force power off of partition which includes the concerned SB Specifies within the range of 0 99 minutes Default is 10 minutes System Power Save Sets enable disable for Power Saving function for entire system Control d Enable Disable Power Saving function supports only PSU_P 200V Default is Disable System Power Saving Sets the power consumption threshold Limit value of entire system Threshold Minimum value is 300W Maximum value is as shown below e PRIMEQUEST 2400E 8640W s PRIMEQUEST 2800E B 8640W Setting is possible only when System Power Save Control is Enable gray o
367. intenance_ip ntpq sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb exit_code show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt show xpar partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt nmi partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 4 None console lt partition gt lt timeout gt quiet reset partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 4 For User privilege help clear ssh_key download ssh_key lt url gt show active_mmb date timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq syscont power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf a
368. interaction 3 Usage example update ALL http host path allfirm001 Downloading an unified firmware file Extracting an unified firmware file Current Unified Firmware Version xxxxx New Unified Firmware Version yyyyy Are you sure to continue Firmware Update Y N Y 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure to continue Firmware Update Y N 2 4 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to get the firmware version The checksum of the firmware file is invalid The size of the firmware file is invalid The CRC of the firmware file is invalid Specified file is NOT a Firmware file Specified host does NOT respond Unable to execute the update under maintenance Current firmware is newer version Unable to execute the online update Please try the update after the system power off Unable to execute the update TPM is effective Unable to execute the update Standby MMB is fault or disable Unable to execute Firmware Update due to resource lock Please retry after waiting a while The firmware is being updated now The chassis information could not be retrieved The chassis information is invalid
369. inutes can be set The partition is forcibly powered off when the specified time has lapsed The default setting of check box is Off Boot Selector Specifies the boot device for which the Boot Manager setting of BIOS is Override temporarily Select the device to be boot from pull down menu No Override Boots by the EFI Boot Manager settings Force boot into EFI Boot Manager Waiting for input by the EFI Boot Manager Boot by selecting the boot device from the EFI Boot Manager Force PXE iSCSI Overrides the EFI Boot Manager settings forcibly tries the PXE Force boot from DVD Overrides the EFI Boot Manager settings and forcibly tries the booting from the System DVD MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Default setting is No Override This setting is applied only for the first partition boot setting the value After the partition boots this setting automatically returns to No Override Therefore it is necessary to set the boot for each partition In case of constant setting it is set in the Boot Manager of the UEFI TABLE 1 57 Power Control Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply When you click the Apply button the information of power control items is set Confirm the setting contents if dialog box prompts for Confirmation Cancel When you click the Cancel button returns to source without setting the information of power control items correspon
370. ion gt quiet sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 4 For User privilege help clear ssh_key download ssh_key lt url gt show active_mmb date timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb show exit_code show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 5 For Partition Operator privilege help power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force power on partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt disable enable quiet set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal
371. ion home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt console lt partition gt lt timeout gt quiet update ALL lt url gt force quiet nmi partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet reset partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 2 For CE privilege help factory_default f set active_mmb 0 1 quiet set maintenance_ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt lt gateway address gt lt smtp address gt set sysconf power_feed_mode single dual quiet set sysconf power_restoration_policy on off restore sync quiet set sysconf power_on_delay lt time gt quiet set sysconf altitude lt altitude gt set sysconf psu_redundant_mode redundant non_redundant quiet show active_mmb date timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq update_status firmware_version exit_code sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_polic
372. ion Manual C122 E175EN Chipset Displays the Chipset number Chip Displays the Chip name PCleSW Status Displays the status OK Warning Failed Voltage Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type P3 3V 0 P1 8V_PCIEX 0 PO 9V_PCIEX 0 PO 9VA_PCIEX 0 P3 3V 1 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 PO 9V_PCIEX 1 PO 9VA_PCIEX 1 Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Low High Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Low High Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 50 MMB x Window button Buttons Description The Location LED lights up when the On button is clicked The Location LED li The error status of PC Box is cleared Status Clear 1 Menu Operation System PCI_Box PCl_Box x 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button Clear the error status of the PCI_ Box Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00029 Status Clear completed E 00123 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178E
373. ion dialog box appears A warning message stating that Mirror Mode is cancelled while shifting to Reserved SB is displayed in the dialog box for confirmation and whether to continue with the Reserved SB settings is confirmed When several Reserved SBs are registered in one Partition they operate as Reserved SBs in ascending order of SB number TABLE 1 72 Display Items and Set Items of Reserved SB Configuration Window Items Description Displays number that identifies the Partition Reserved Reserved SB Free Free SB Partition Name Displays name given to Partition Power Status Displays the power status of the partition On Standby Mirror Mode setting Displays the setting value of Mirror Mode corresponding to the Partition Enable Mirror Mode is set Disable Mirror Mode is not set SB Displays the Partition to which the SB belongs The check box to register the SB as a Reserved SB in the Partition of the corresponding line is displayed in the cell which corresponds to Reserved SB or Free SB TABLE 1 73 Reserved SB Configuration Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply If Apply button is clicked it is defined as Reserved SB Cancel If Cancel button is clicked it returns to the original state without being defined as a Reserved SB 1 Menu Operation Partition Reserved SB Configuration 2 Window Operations 1 The check box of Partition intended for Reserve
374. ion unit can be set Select the partition to be displayed In case of Partition Operator All is grayed out and selection is not possible Further for filtering of partition only the partition to be managed can be selected Default Partition Operator privilege Specified and Partition to be managed is turned on Other than the above All Remarks Specify both CPU and Chipset when filtering as Source with the unit of Monitor check box is displayed only when login is done with CE privilege MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description CPU Source Select target source to be displayed Select All or Specified by Radio button All Filtering is not done by Source Specified Filtering of Source unit can be set Select the Source to be displayed Default setting is All Unit Select the target unit to be displayed Select All or Specified by Radio button All Filtering is not done by Unit Specified Filtering of Unit can be set Select the Source to be displayed Default setting is All Sort by Date Time Specifies either display by new order or display by old order by using the radio button New event first Old event first The default setting is New event first Start Date Time End Date Time Specifies either display from recent event or specify the time by using the radio button First event Display by recent event
375. ions Management Manager ServerView Suite Describes RAID management using ServerView None ServerView RAID RAID Manager Management User Manual ServerView Suite Basic Describes basic concepts about ServerView None Concepts Suite ServerView Operations Describes installation and update installation of None Manager Installation ServerView Linux Agent ServerView Agents for Linux ServerView Operations Describes installation and update installation of None Manager Installation ServerView Windows Agent ServerView Agents for Windows ServerView RAID Describes the installation and settings required to None Manager VMware use ServerView RAID Manager on the VMware vSphere ESXi 5 vSphere ESXi 5 server Installation Guide MegaRAID SAS User Provides technical information on using array B7FY 2751 Guide controller RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 5 6 512MB D2616 RAID Ctrl SAS 6G 0 1 D2607 MegaRAID SAS 9280 8e Abbreviations This manual uses the following product name abbreviations Formal product name Abbreviation Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter Windows Windows Server 2012 Windows Windows Server 2008 R2 Red Hat R Enterprise Linu
376. ires TABLE 1 77 Display Items and Set Items of ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Items Description ASR Number of Restart Tries Set the number of retries for restarting the operating system when there is time out by Boot Watchdog or Software Watchdog of SVAS or the hardware error occurs and OS shuts down The number of times can be set up to 0 10 times When 0 is specified it does not retry Default is five times Action after exceeding Restart tries Repeat the restart by Watchdog Timeout and sets the action when the above mentioned retry number is exceeded The actions are as below Stop rebooting and Power Off Reboot process is stopped power supply of partition is cut off Stop rebooting Reboot process is stopped and the partition is stopped Diagnostic Interrupt assert Reboot process is stopped instructs the NMI interruption for partition Tries to collect the data for investigation damp for the investigating the cause of stoppage of the partition which has stopped Default setting is Stop rebooting and Power Off Retry Counter Displays the number of actual possible retries Boot Watchdog Boot Watchdog Enable disable of the Boot Watchdog function of ServerView is set The start of OS is observed when setting it to Enable After OS starts Boot Watchdog is stopped by ServerView Default is Disable Timeout time Seconds Time until Boot Watchdog does ti
377. is collected is displayed with date information When you click the link a dialog box appears By specifying the file name and path name event data can be downloaded to the PC which displays Web UI MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 3 System Event Log Collect Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB20 Part Nember FUJITSU Serial Nember Status NV Achrmmestrahon Network leg air MVientcnan TEEI gt System gt System Evert Log _ System Event Log Collect Hei Please download the data collected clicking the fobowing Fri 12 Ape 2013 18 0019 If you want to update the System Event Log please click on the Collect button oO s a a a a a a a a a a a a a Cancal lt gt Narrowing down the events displayed in the window 1 Click the Filter button The System Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering filtering conditions appears 2 Enter the conditions in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window Then click the Apply button The browser returns to the System Event Log window The window displays the events that satisfy the specified conditions O System Event Log Filtering Condition Window Click Filter button on the System Event Log window The System Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering filtering conditions appears The filtering conditions of events which are displayed in System Event Log window can be set in the System Event
378. isable Enable Disable SSH Port 22 22 1024 65535 SSH Timeout 600 seconds 60 9999 seconds 0 No timeout SNMP SNMP Agent Disable Enable e Disable Agent Port 161 161 1024 65535 SNMP Trap Disable Enable e Disable Trap Port 162 161 1024 65535 A 1 22 Setting Items of Refresh Rate Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Refresh Rate Window TABLE A 22 Setting Items of Refresh Rate Window Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Refresh Disable Enable Rate Seconds 5 999 seconds e Disable A 1 23 Setting Items of SNMP Community Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of SNMP Community Window TABLE A 23 Setting Items of SNMP Community Window A 1 24 Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks System System None 0 9 a z A Z and half width space Information Location Special characters cannot be used as the first amp character 2 lt gt _ Halt width space cannot be used as the last character System None 0 9 a z A Z and half width space contact Special characters cannot be used as the first
379. isplayed eWhen the number of characters which are entered are not enough Pop Up window of Please enter enough characters Press ENTER to continue is displayed eTypes of characters which can be entered here are as follows 0 9 A Z a z amp lt gt _ 2 Attempt is created Place the cursor on Add an Attempt of ISCSI Configuration menu and then press Enter key 3 Displayed as per FIGURE 3 22 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 2 MAC Selection menu For details of MAC Selection menu see 3 4 9 1 MAC Selection Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 22 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 2 MAC Selection menu Place the cursor on network port in which iSCSI booting is done and then press Enter key 4 Displayed as per FIGURE 3 23 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 3 Attempt ConfigurationJmenu For details of Attempt Configuration menu see 3 4 9 2 Attempt Configuration Menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 23 iSCSI Environment Setting Operation Windows 3 Attempt Configuration Jmenu Place the cursor position on the item which is to be set and then set each 5 To exit from this menu after saving the changes select Save Changes and then press Enter key 6 To exit from this menu without saving the changes select Back to Previous Page and then press Enter key 3 4 9 1 MAC Selection Menu Network
380. isplays the I O_PSU Fan Speed Mode Low Normal High e Full Displays the redundancy status of the fan Redundant MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Non redundant Sufficient Resources Part Number Displays the part number of the DC Box PEXU Part Number Displays the part number of the PEXU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the PEXU Location LED Displays the status of the Location LED He following are the various display statuses On Turn On Off Turn Off On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking the On Off buttons Power Supply IO_PSU IO_PSU Displays the IO_PSU number Status Displays the display status of the IO_PSU OK Not present Failed A C Lost Configuration error Power Status Displays the power status of the IO_PSU On Standby Part Number Displays the part number of the O_PSU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the IO_PSU Fan Fan Displays the fan number Status Displays the status of the fan OK Not present Mie I IUO EE E Fan speed Displays the rpm ofthe fan Threshold Displays the threshold of the fan Temperature Sensor Displays the ID of the temperature sensor Status Displays the status of temperature sensor Temperature Displays the current temperature Threshold Displays the threshold at which each temperature sensor is mainta
381. it or remove the schedule Click Add button to add a new schedule ass Ede Ramove Cancel Schedule will appear in the order of the partition number Partition will appear in chronological order of the start date of the period If the partition and the start date are the same the schedule appears in the sequence in which it is listed Remarks If the Type is Weekly the start date is considered to be Oneday Only the partition to be managed can be operated for Partition Operator MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 60 Display Items and Set Items of Schedule List Window Items Description Displays the number to identify the partition 0 3 However only the partition to which SB IOU is registered is displayed Partition Name Displays the partition name Type Displays the type of schedule set in the partition e Daily Select when you want to execute every day Weekly Select when you want to execute every week Monthly Select when you want to execute every month Special Select when you want to execute on a particular day every year If the schedule overlaps on the same day it is processed according to the following priority order Special gt Monthly gt Weekly gt Daily Pattern Displays the schedule pattern corresponding to the type of the schedule Days of week in Weekly Sun Sat The period in Monthly The specific month and day in Special Term Displays the period of the schedule acco
382. itted Pings the target show ntpq Permitted NTP inquiry ntpq p executed Account management passwd Permitted Changes a password who Permitted Displays the login user Firmware update update ALL Batch updates the firmware new MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Permitted Displays the active MMB exit Permitted Logs out from the MMB help Permitted Help information Command termination code display show exit_code Permitted Displays the termination code for the last command executed Firmware revision status version check show update_status Displays the batch firmware update progress Network survey commands netck traceroute Permitted Displays a list of network routes netck arptbl Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck arping Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck ifconfig Permitted Displays the network environment setup status netck stat Permitted Displays a list of port numbers being used REMCS related commands set maintenance_ip Sets the REMCS network show maintenance_ip Permitted Displays the REMCS network setting DR related MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command User Outline hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove set partition dynamic_partitioning Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Displays
383. jor Version 1Byte data Binary format Minor Version 1 Byte data BCD format This data is displayed as follows X YY X displays Major version in decimal 0 255 Y displays Minor version as it is by double digit in BCD format Binary coded decimal 00 99 1 2 7 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Version bank2 Firmware Version of bank is displayed Version display format Same as bank1 Unified Firmware Displays firmware version of target unit version Firmware maintains version information in the following format S Model identification XX 1 byte data 01h SA Last two digits of the year YY 1 byte data BCD format 09 99 R Month MM 1 byte data BCD format 01 12 Serial number N 1 byte data Binary format 1 9 This data is displayed as below XXYYMMN Example BA13012 In case of uncertain version number is displayed After start restart of the partition is executed by the system administrator or the partition administrator the latest written Firmware is reflected Remarks After executing Firmware update it is recommended to reflect in the Firmware by prompt start restart of the partition 1 Menu Operation System System Information 2 Window Operations None System Setup Window In System Setup window Power supply of PRIMEQUEST 2000 system and restoration action etc can be set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operation
384. k Configuration Date Time RO Network Interface IPv4 Interface RO Sets the IPv4 IP address etc IPv6 Interface RO Sets the IPv6 IP address etc Management N A Configures the Port LAN LAN Port of the MMB HUB Configuration Network RO Protocols Refresh Rate RW Sets the refresh rate of the Web UI window SNMP N A Configuration Community N A Trap N A SNMPv3 N A Configuration SSL Create CSR N A Creates a secret key and CSR Export N A Exports a secret key Key CSR and CSR Import Security N A Installs a certificate Certificate Create N A Creates a selfsigned Selfsigned certificate Certificate SSH SSH Server N A Creates a private key Key for the SSH server Remote Server N A Management Access Control N A Sets the IP filtering that permits connections Alarm E mail N A Maintenance Firmware Update Unified N A Performs a batch Firmware update Update Backup Restore Backs up and restores Configuration setting information Backup Restore N A MMB Configuration Backup EFI N A MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks Configuration Restore EFI N A Configuration Maintenance N A Performs maintenance Wizard through a wizard REMCS REMCS N A Detailed Setup N A 1 1 3 Web Ul menus Partition Operator This section lists the Web UI menus that are available with the Partition Op
385. l to the collaboration program Not complete Confirm whether the collaboration program completes in 1 minute Complete Send SIGKILL signal to the collaboration Return value oroaram is 0 Check the return value of the collaboration program Return value is not 0 Abnormal end Setting of sadump environment CHAPTER 6 Setting of sadump environment 6 1 In this chapter how to configure sadump is explained A configuration of sadump is saved to UEFI configuration information Back up it to restore the configuration About backing up and restoring UEFI configuration information refer 8 1 1 Backing up and restoring UEFI configuration information in PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual Sadump Configuration Menu To configure sadump select main menu to set up sadump from the Device Manager menu Configure sadump by inputting values in the main menu and submenu which is shown below The structure of menu is as follows When the PCI ROM Priority setting of the PCI Subsystem Configuration menu is EFI Compatible ROM the Sadump setting menu is displayed Setting of sadump environment From Device Manager Menu Main menu Set up Manager Menu Dump device Manager Menu FIGURE 6 1 Structure of menu for sadump configuration 1 Setting of sadump environment From Dump device Manager 4 Create a dump device Menu Select device Menu Select multiple devices Menu
386. lay of Operation help is displayed TABLE 3 18 Display contents of Display of Operation help Item Description t I Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving the changed settings of this menu UEFI Menu Operations E Change in Enable Disable settings of PXE iSCSI boot The change in PXE iSCSI boot settings of each network port is implemented by the following procedure 1 Press Enter key placing the cursor on network port for which settings are to be changed Pop up window shown in FIGURE 3 11 Operation Window of PXE iSCSI boot Enable Setting is displayed FIGURE 3 11 Operation Window of PXE iSCSI boot Enable Setting LAN Remote B 2 Set PXE iSCSI boot Enable Disable e When PXE boot of UEFI Aware Operating System is set to Enable UEFI PXE iSCSI is selected e When PXE boot of Legacy Operation System is set to Enable Legacy PXE is selected e When iSCSI boot of Legacy Operation System is set to Enable Legacy iSCSI is selected e When PXE iSCSI boot is set to Disable Disabled is selected By default all are Disabled 3 Press Enter key 4 To exit from this menu after saving the changes in the settings select Commit Changes and Exit and press Enter key 5 To exit from this menu without saving the changes in the settings select Discard Changes and Exit
387. lays this item only if MMB 1 is mounted REMCS port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB 1 Maintenance port Auto 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Remarks The window displays this item only if MMB 1 is mounted Item for PRIMEQUEST 2800B Speed Duplex for Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB port MMB Auto 1G Full 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Remarks REMCS port is not displayed Only the USER port can have the setting of 1G Full TABLE 1 96 Setting and display items in the Management LAN Port Configuration window in case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B Items Description Speed Duplex for MMB User port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB User port Auto 1G Full 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Maintenance port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB Maintenance port Auto 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto TABLE 1 97 Buttons in the Management LAN Port Configuration window Buttons Description Apply Sets the entered information MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information for the Speed Duplex setting 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Management LAN Port Configuration 2 Window Operations 1 Specify Speed Duplex Then click the Apply button This sets Speed Duplex 1 5 4 Netw
388. lect when you want to execute on a particular day every year If the schedule overlaps on the same day it is processed according to the following priority order Special gt Monthly gt Weekly gt Daily Pattern Displays the schedule pattern corresponding to the type of the schedule Days of week in Weekly Sun Sat The period in Monthly The specific month and day in Special Term Displays the period of the schedule according to the type and the pattern of the schedule Daily Starting month and date and ending month and date Weekly Starting month and ending month Monthly Starting month and ending month Default setting is as follows Daily From Jan 1 To Jan 1 Note It is executed only on January 1 Weekly From Jan To Jan Note It is executed only in January Monthly From Jan To Jan Note It is executed only in January On Time Displays the time when the process of Power On is executed on the specified execution day Time specifies 24 hours Minute indicates the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 Off Time Displays the time when the process of Power Off is executed on the specified execution day Time indicates 24 hours Minute indicates the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 TABLE 1 146 Schedule List Window Buttons Buttons Description Add If Add button is clicked Add Schedule window appears and the schedule can be added
389. led Number of bus Padded Changes the number of Bus allocated in PCI Express Slot Configuration to slot MN e 3 e 3 Default setting is 1 OpROM Scan Opens OpROM Scan Configuration Menu Configuration UO Space Assignment Opens I O Space Assignment Configuration Menu Commit Changes and Exit Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration are saved Discard Changed and Exit Exit from main menu after the changed contents of configuration are cancelled 3 Operation Help Display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 24 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 24 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Esc Exit Selects item Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving changes of this menu 3 4 7 UEFI Menu Operations IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Menu The Option ROM of PCI card mounted on each IOU is configured on IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Menu Window display example of IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Menu shows in the following figure FIGURE 3 18 Display Example of IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Menu ee ee ee pm rm rm rr pm rm rm rm pr pm mm anaana pr zm rm rm mr mr e rm rr pm e pm rr E zm No anan an ca an co ao ao DE ao ao e ao co en LUU U
390. lick the Status Clear button to clear the status Message will not be displayed TABLE 1 47 Display and Setting items of DU x Window Items Description Board Information Status Displays the status of the disk unit OK Not present Warning Degraded Failed Power Status Displays the power status of the disk unit On Standby DU Part Number Displays the part number of the disk unit is displayed whenever it Power OFFs it DU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the disk unit is displayed whenever it Power OFFs it RAID Slot MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description RAID Slot Power Status Displays power status of the RAID slot On Standby Slot Status Displays the status of the RAID Slot OK Not present Failed Degraded Link Width Displays the Link Width of the DU RAID slot format x1 x2 x4 x8 Seg Bus Dev Displays Segment Bus Device of the DU RAID Device RAID Slot 1 Same as RAID Slot 0 RAID Card Slot The slot number equipped with the RA identification card is displayed BBU Status The state of RAID BBU is displayed R Online On Battery Charging Discharging Battery Low Relearn Required Failed Not present Vendor ID Vender ID of RAID Card is displayed Remarks ID uniquely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Devic
391. ll be updated as needed PRIMEQUEST 2000 Describes the functions and features of the C122 B025EN Series General PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Description SPARC M10 Provides the necessary information and C120 HO07EN Preface Title Description Manual code Systems SPARC concepts you should understand for installation Enterprise PRIMEQUEST and facility planning for SPARC M10 Systems Common Installation SPARC Enterprise and PRIMEQUEST Planning Manual installations PRIMEQUEST 2000 Includes the specifications of and the installation C122 HOO7EN Series Hardware location requirements for the PRIMEQUEST Installation Manual 2000 series PRIMEQUEST 2000 Describes how to set up the PRIMEQUEST C122 E174EN Series Installation Manual 2000 series server including the steps for installation preparation initialization and software installation PRIMEQUEST 2000 Describes how to use the Web UI and UEFI to C122 E176EN Series User Interface assure proper operation of the PRIMEQUEST Operating Instructions 2000 series server PRIMEQUEST 2000 Describes how to use tools and software for C122 E175EN Series Administration system administration and how to maintain the Manual system component replacement and error notification PRIMEQUEST 2000 Provides information on operation methods and C122 E177EN Series Tool Reference settings including details on the MMB and UEFI functions PRIMEQUEST 2000 Lists the me
392. lled collaboration program of external programs are registered in specific directories the desired programs are automatically executed in hot plug collaboration function at SB IOU hot plug Collaboration program execution timing Hot plug collaboration function executes collaboration programs by the following hot plug events e SB hot add o Before enabling CPU and memory resources on a hot added SB simply called before addition of SB o After enabling CPU and memory resources on a hot added SB simply called after addition of SB o Atthe time that CPU and memory resources on a added SB fails to be enabled simply called at the addition of SB failure time e B hot remove o Before disabling CPU and memory resources on a hot removed SB simply called before deletion of SB o After deleting a SB from a partition simply called after deletion of SB o At the time that a SB failed to be deleted from a partition simply called at the deletion of SB failure time e IOU hot add o Before enabling PCI devices on a hot added IOU simply called before addition of IOU o After enabling PCI devices on a hot added IOU simply called after addition of IOU o At the time that PCI devices on a hot added IOU fails to enable simply called at the addition of IOU failure time e IOU hot remove o Before disabling PCI devices on a hot removed IOU simply called before deletion of IOU o After turning of
393. llowed Naming convention of collaboration program Naming convention of collaboration program is shown below nn XXXXX gt nn nn must be a two digital number one byte characters ranging from 10 to 90 Hot plug collaboration function executes the collaboration programs in ascending order of their collaboration program name To execute a collaboration program earlier than the other collaboration Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation programs by installed other packages assign the collaboration programs with lower numbers than those assigned to the collaboration programs installed by the other packages To execute a collaboration program later than the other collaboration programs by installed other packages assign the collaboration programs with higher numbers than those assigned to the collaboration programs installed by the other packages gt XXXXX XXXXX represents a collaboration program identifier which constructed by alpha numeral and hyphen one byte characters The recommended identifier for a collaboration program is a name from which the contents of the program can easily be inferred To avoid duplicative collaboration program name head of identifier should have the package name Note between mn and XXXX must not be omitted Naming convention of configuration file of collaboration program is shown below XXXXX conf gt XXXXX XXXXX is character string which specified as collaboration prog
394. lnet SSH 10 24 6 94 takahashi 2012 11 08 10 38 02 Telnet SSH 2001 2345 3dfb dc43 4d75 5a71 tanaka 2012 11 08 10 34 26 WebUI 10 24 6 191 2 3 31 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Failed to get login information help Displays the help of enabled command Privilege All 1 Input format help 2 Option None 3 Usage example When the PRIMEQUEST 2800B model Example 1 For the Administrator privilege help factory_default f add partition lt partition gt SB lt SB gt IOU lt IOU gt quiet clear access_control power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force power on partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt remove partition lt partition gt SB lt SB gt IOU lt IOU gt quiet set active_mmb 0 1 quiet set date MMDDhhmm CC YY ss set timezone lt timezone gt set gateway lt ip address gt set gateway_ipv6 auto lt ip address gt set http https ssh telnet enable disable set http_port https_port ssh_port telnet_port lt port gt set partition home lt partition gt SB lt SB gt set partition name lt partition gt lt partition name gt set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt di
395. lnet service show http Permitted Displays the http service enabling setting show https Permitted Displays the https service enabling setting show ssh Permitted Displays the ssh service enabling setting show telnet Permitted Displays the telnet service enabling setting set http_port Sets the http port number set httos_port Sets the https port number set ssh_port Sets the ssh port number set telnet_port Sets the telnet port number show http_port Permitted Displays the http port number show https_port Permitted Displays the https port number show ssh_port Permitted Displays the ssh port number show telnet_port Permitted Displays the telnet port number clear access_control Clears the access control setting show access_control Displays the access control setting clear ssh_key Clears the SSH public key download ssh_key Downloads the SSH public key ping Permitted Pings the target show ntpq Permitted NTP inquiry ntpq p executed Account management passwd Permitted Changes a password who Permitted Displays the login user Firmware update update ALL Batch updates the firmware new MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Operator Outline MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Permitted Displays the active MMB exit Permitted Logs out from the MMB help Permitt
396. lowing message is displayed and settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown When the partition is configured of or above 2SB and when Reserved SB is set also when the settings other than the Memory Operation Mode satisfying the DIMM configuration requirement of SB is set as Reserved SB following message is displayed and setting cannot be possible The SB with DIMM that does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode is registered as a Reserved SB If you register this partition as a Mirror Mode Mirror Mode will be disabled when switching to Reserved SB Are you sure to continue Y N For the partition which is already powered OFF when the settings are changed by this command power OFF ON is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Moreover also when the values which are the same as the current values are set power off on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only managed partition 1 Input format set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting Memory
397. lp Dipen 392 TABLE 3 31 Display contents Of MENU selection EEN 396 TABLE 3 32 Display contents of operation help denn EEN 396 TABLE 3 33 Display contents Of MENU selection EEN 397 TABLE 3 34 Display contents of operation help denn EEN 401 TABLE 3 35 Display contents of Menu selection we vii A3 401 TABLE 3 36 Display Contents of Operation Help Display ENEE 402 TABLE 3 37 Display contents Of Menu selection EEN 403 TABLE 3 38 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 403 TABLE 3 39 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 404 TABLE 3 40 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 406 TABLE 3 41 Display contents of Menu selection ute is ee 407 TABLE 3 42 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 407 TABLE 3 43 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 408 TABLE 3 44 Display contents of operation help denn EEN 409 TABLE 3 45 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 410 Preface TABLE 3 46 Display Contents of Operation Help Display ENEE 411 TABLE 3 47 Display Contents of Menu Selection Section ENEE 411 TABLE 3 48 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 49 Display contents of Menu selection e TABLE 3 50 Display contents of Display of operation belp EEN 413 TABLE 3 51 Display contents of Display of Operation bel ENEE 414 TABLE 3 52 Number of Characters and Types of Characters that can be entere ENEE 418 TABLE 3 53 Display contents of operation help denn EEN 419 TABLE 3
398. ltering Condition Window ENEE 483 TABLE A 2 Setting Items of Operation Log Filtering Condition Wirdow ENEE 484 TABLE A 3 Setting Items of System Information Window TABLE AA Setting items of System Setup Window TABLE A 5 Setting Items of System Power Control Windw en 486 TABLE AG Setting Items of Power Control Wind ENEE 486 TABLE A 7 Setting Items of Schedule Control WinGOw c sesscsssecesesessecesseceeseeesseeeseesseeseseeseseeaeaeeaeseeneaeeasaeeasaeeasaeeesaeensateneaeeeeas 487 TABLE AG Setting Items of Add Schedule Edit User Window ENEE 487 TABLE AO Setting Items of Partition Configuration WinGOw scssssesssssecessesesseceeseeesseessseeseseeessesnsseeseaeensaeensseeasateesaeensatensateneas TABLE A 10 Setting Items of IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window y ie a TABLE A 11 Setting Items of IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Wimdow ENEE 488 TABLE A 12 Setting Items of Power Management Setup Wind ENEE 488 TABLE A 13 Setting Items of ASR Control Window ENEE 489 TABLE A 14 Setting Items of Console Redirection Wimdow ENEE 489 TABLE A 15 Setting Items of Mode Wind een 490 TABLE A 16 Setting Items of Add Leer Edit User Wind ENEE 490 TABLE A 17 Setting Items of Date Time Window ENEE 491 TABLE A 18 Setting Items of IPv4 Interface Wind ENEE 492 TABLE A 19 Setting Items of IPV6 Interface Wind EEN 493 TABLE A 20 Setting Items of Management LAN Port Configuration Window ENEE 4
399. ltitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb show exit_code show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 5 For Partition Operator privilege help power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force power on partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt disable enable quiet set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet set partition pci_express_mode lt partition gt flexible fixed set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq sysconf powe
400. lways on Regardless of the condition at the time of power failure the partition is powered on after the power restoration Restore Restores the status immediately before the power failure If the power was on when the power failure occurred it restores the power on status of the partition If the power was off the partition power stays off Schedule Sync If the partition is in the operating time zone power of partition turns on automatically depending on the schedule operations at the time of restoration of power attention The schedule set with Special is applied only on the specified day Default setting is Restore System Power On Sets the standby time utill power on of system is specified as per the restoration Delay power policy that is set after the AC power is On also includes restoration power Specifies within the range of 0 9999 seconds MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Default value is 0 seconds attention Other start processing is not executed until the processing of system Power On Delay ends Altitude Sets the altitude where PRIMEQEST 2800B model is installed or placed Altitude lt 1000 m 1000 m lt Altitude lt 1500 m R 1500 m lt Altitude lt 2000 m 2000 m lt Altitude Default value is Altitude lt 1000 m Setting error of altitude condition is possible up to 100m PSU Redundant Mode Sets whether PSU is redundantl
401. m again if correct disk is selected when selecting dump device If wrong disk is selected the data the disk has is corrupted Select device Select device FIGURE 6 9 Dump device select menu Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 9 Displayed contents of menu selection area Exit ACPI name of disk disk partition Item Description Exits this menu Select disk or disk partition to create dump device Remarks Regarding to ACPI name which is used for disk or disk partition refer 5 7 Device Path To use devices of ETERNUS as dump device setting up UEFI deriver is needed beforehand Refer PRIMEQUEST 1000 2000 Series SAN Boot Environment Configuration Manual C122 E155EN for details TABLE 6 10 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tl Move Highlight Moves the cursor up or down lt Enter gt Select Entry Create dump device with selected disk or disk partition and go to dump device create menu If Exit is selected go to dump device create menu without creating dump device Note Esc key is displayed on the screen but dont operate it A dump device is initialized when it is created It takes a time to initialize depends on the size of selected disk or disk partition In some cases it takes more than several minutes until going to the next screen Setting of sadump environment 6 7 Setting dump device Menu This
402. m this menu Discard Changes and The contents having changes in the settings are Exit cancelled and exit from this menu 3 Operation help display The help for the operations mentioned on this page is shown in TABLE 3 28 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 28 Display contents of operation help display Items Description 1 Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving the setting changes of this menu 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu In iSCSI Configuration menu as for the IOU network port and expansion card network port which were set in UEFI PXE iSCSI of LAN Remote Boot Configuration menu the environment of iSCSI boot of UEFI Aware Operating System can be set The iSCSI boot capable network port is displayed in the menu The network port which boots the iSCSI is selected and with various settings iSCSI can be booted from the intended device The settings which are changed in the menu will become valid after system reset The display example of iSCSI Configuration menu is as follows UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 20 Example of iSCSI Configuration menu window display A oe Le N E gt EEA UEFI Menu Operations 1 Page information display Displayed as iSCSI Configuration 2 Menu selection The items shown in TABLE 3 29 Display contents of
403. mber MCXXNNNXX FU Serial Nember EES States Normal artin T Adimanestr atin gt Network Configuration gt Remote Server Management Remote Server Management Select a user from the list then click the Edt button to edit the user Disabled No Access it Disabled No Access Disabled essfelccocssace Disabled it Disabled Disabled Userld No Access No Access Disabled No Access i Disabled O Userl3 No Access Disabled No Access No Access Disabled No Access Disabled No Access No Access TABLE 1 115 Display and setting items in the Remote Server Management window Items Description User Name Displays a user name The name can have a total of 8 to 16 characters Privilege Displays the privileges of the user account Admin Operator User CE No Access Users for which No Access is selected will no longer have the capability of remote access Status Displays the current status of the account Enabled MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Disabled TABLE 1 116 Buttons in the Remote Server Management window Buttons Description Edit Displays the Edit User window Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the management information for the selected user 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Remote Server Management 2 Window Operations 1 Click the radio button
404. mber of a logical drive is displayed Status The state of a logical drive is displayed RAID Level The RAID level of a logical drive is displayed Physical Drives The slot number of a physical drive that composes a logical drive is displayed assignment Missing drives The number of physical drives missed to compose a logical drive at the RAID level is Count displayed RAID Action Progress Drive Type The drive type that the RAID action is executed is displayed Physical Hardware RAID Logical Software RAID Slot Sensor Slot from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Physical and Sensor from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Logical Action The RAID action under execution is displayed Rebuilding It is shown for a physical drive to execute the rebuild of the RAID drive MDC Running It is shown for a logical drive to execute MDC Make Data Consistent Progress The progress rate of the RAID action under execution is displayed by the percentage Estimated time The remaining time that will be expected by the time the RAID action under execution is remaining completed is displayed hh mm ss n SE Chipset Chipset P OK S Warning x Failed TPM TPM Displays the status of the TPM OK A Warning Failed Notes When the SB is without TPM mode this field is not displayed Remark The TPM is not displayed in the SB for China
405. memory_mirror_ras_mode show lan device mode EE Set Mmbcontrol resetea a pada da dn a a id a peng add E Ge console 3 UEFI Menu Operations Front page of Boot Ee GT WINDOW al EE Continue Mentee ege AE eeh Boot Manager TEE BoOOtOplOn EE Boot specitication Ot QED EN About boot specification of legacy DICH EEN 362 Boot processing Device Manager Men EEeiedeeH 367 System Information Mem ee 368 VO Space Assignment Configuration Mem ENEE 369 LAN Remote Boot Configuration Men ENEE 371 IGPU Configuration Met ica tued 375 PCI Bus Padding Configuration Mem ENEE 379 PCI Subsystem Configuration Mem AEN 380 IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Mem ENEE 382 IPC Dos OPROM Scan Configuration mem ENEE 385 isCSkConfighration Men EE 390 Memory Configuration men EENEG 403 USB Gonfiguration menu ain DEENEN al Security Configuration menu Boot maintenance Manager Menu Boot Mode Memes EE EE EA Getreide EE EE ENEE Ee Boot From ET Set Time out Value Mem s tiaie cia Goa ae e Device Path Parameter of Device Heft eeh e Eeer AE Identification of Device Path E G See ee wus Le e E tte Ee e AU Automatic startup AU WEFI Shell Cormac syntax E Preface 4 1 3 Output redirection ege EEN EE 4 1 4 WEFI shell Corrimal E CHAPTERS Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation EEN 5 1 DR Command E 5 1 1 drcommand COMMON Palt aicass acai aianiasindatiiasaciatinn
406. meout is set Logout MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description The range of 1 6000 can be set Default is 6000 seconds 100 minutes Action when watchdog Action when Boot Watchdog does timeout is set expires In Action there is the following Continue Reset s Power Cycle Software Watchdog Software Watchdog Enable disable of the Software Watchdog function of ServerView is set After OS starts the operation of OS is observed by ServerView when setting it to Enable Default is Disable Timeout time seconds Time until Software Watchdog does timeout is set The range of 1 6000 can be set Default is 300 seconds 5 minutes Action when watchdog Action when Software Watchdog does timeout is set expires In Action there is the following Continue Reset S Power Cycle NMI TABLE 1 78 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Buttons Apply Sets the information if Number of Restart Tries Action after exceeding Restart tries are specified If Cancel Boot Watchdog is selected as On Boot Watchdog is cancelled Cancel Does not set the information and returns to the original state 1 Menu Operation Partition Partition x ASR Control 2 Window Operations 1 Every item is set 2 Apply button is clicked Specified information is set Also if the Cancel Boot Watchdog check box is selected as On Boot Watchdog is can
407. mode Permitted Sets Memory operation mode show memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set pci_address_mode Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show pci_address_mode Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set lan_device_mode Permitted Sets LAN device mode show lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode set pci_express_mode Sets PCl express mode show pci_express_mode Displays PCl express mode set partition name Sets the partition name show partition name Displays the partition name hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove Partition control sadump sadump instruction reset Permitted Hard Reset instruction nmi Permitted NMI interrupt instruction MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Administrator Outline Partition connection console Permitted Test Console connection to partition DR related gt DR related commands MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Displays the active MMB help Permitted Help information System configuration set mmb control reset Resets the MMB set mmb control switch_over Switch Over the MMB add user Adds User
408. moved Are you sure W_00404 Password differs from the re password For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Add User window Clicking the Add User button in the User List window displays the Add User window You can register new users in the Add User window It is possible to register up to 16 users or less MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 57 Add List Window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active MMB Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number Z ss Status Nannal tk Coalipaston Mian Add User Hap Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Enabled Disabled a ar EC ET EE Ee For details on the setting and display items in the Add User window see TABLE 1 83 Setting and display items in the Add User and Edit User windows windows O Edit User window Selecting a user and clicking the Edit User button in the User List window displays the Edit User window You can change management information on user accounts in the Edit User window Changes in the administrative information of User other than User Name can be done MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 58 Edit List Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number GEES Status Notieal Network Configuration Mamtenanc gt User Admmistration gt User Lis gt Edit User
409. mstances Otherwise electric shock injury or fire may result Newly installing or moving equipment Removing the front rear and side covers Installing and removing built in options Connecting and disconnecting external interface cables Maintenance repair and periodic diagnosis and maintenance The List of important alert items table lists important alert items Product operating environment This product is a computer intended for use in a computer room environment For details on the product operating environment see the following manual Preface PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 H007EN Note If you have a comment or request regarding this manual or if you find any part of this manual unclear please take a moment to share it with us by filling in the form at the following webpage stating your points specifically and sending the form to us httos www s fujitsu com global contact computing PRMQST_feedback html The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice The PDF file of this manual is intended for display using Adobe Reader in single page viewing mode at 100 zoom The PSU_P supports only 200 V power supply Preface Safety Precautions List of important alert items The important warning matter that has been described in this manual is as follows This indicates a hazardous situation that could result in minor or moderate personal injury if the user do
410. n 2 System information display The contents shown in TABLE 3 12 Display Contents of the System Information Display are displayed 3 4 2 UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 12 Display Contents of the System Information Display Items Display Contents BIOS Revision Displays BIOS revision Display example 00 44 LAN N MAC Address Displays the MAC address of Network Controller N 1 2 Display example 0 19 99 81 F9 31 Processor Type Displays processor type Display example Genuine Intel R CPU 2 70GHz CPU Patch ID Displays CPUID Patch ID Display example 206D6 00000610 Processor Speed Displays processor speed Display example 2700 MHz Cache Counts amp Sizes 1 Displays cache size Display example 8x8 KB 8x32 KB 1x 20 MB Active Package Core amp Displays the number of CPU packages numbers of cores and Thread Count maximum numbers of threads Display example 2 2 Package s 8 16 Core s 16 32 Thread s Memory Size Frequency Displays memory size and frequency Display example 32768 MB 1333 MHz 3 Help Operation Display Explanation of the operation key shown in the TABLE 3 13 Display Contents of Help Operation Display is displayed TABLE 3 13 Display Contents of Help Operation Display Items Description N Move Highlight Move the cursor up and down Esc Exit Return to the 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager I O Space
411. n You can specify 0 or a value in a range of 60 to 9999 0 means there is no time out The default is 600 seconds SSH SSH Sets Enable or Disable for SSH The default is Disable SSH Port Sets the port number used for SSH The default is 22 Timeout Sets the length of time before the SSH connection is timed out You can specify 0 or a value in a range of 60 to 9999 0 means there is no time out The default is 600 seconds SNMP SNMP Agent Sets Enable or Disable for SNMP Agent The default is Disable Agent Port Sets the port number used for SNMP Agent The specifiable port numbers are 161 and integers from 1024 to 65535 The default is 161 SNMP Trap Sets Enable or Disable for SNMP Trap The default is Disable Trap Port Sets the port number used for SNMP Trap The specifiable port numbers are 162 and integers from 1024 to 65535 The default is 162 Remarks To set HTTPS to Enable a valid SSL certificate must be registered If you set HTTPS to Enable when no valid SSL certificate has been registered an error message appears TABLE 1 99 Buttons in the Network Protocols window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as port numbers and the time out time 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Network Protocols 2 Window Operations 1 5 5 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Op
412. n gt Management LAN Port Configuration Management LAN Port Configuration Click the Apply button for all changes to take effect Speed Duplex for MMB Cancel MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 95 Setting and display items in the Management LAN Port Configuration window in case of PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Items Description Speed Duplex for MMB 0 User port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB 0 User port Auto 1G Full 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Remarks The window displays this item only if MMB 0 is mounted Maintenance port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB 0 Maintenance port Auto 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Remarks The window displays this item only if MMB 0 is mounted REMCS port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB 0 REMCS port Auto 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Remarks The window displays this item only if MMB 0 is mounted Speed Duplex for MMB 1 User port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB 1 User port Auto 1G Full 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The default is Auto Remarks The window displays this item only if MMB 1 is mounted Maintenance port Sets Speed Duplex for the MMB 1 Maintenance port Auto 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description The default is Auto Remarks The window disp
413. n 10 18 107 164 Admixistrator SILKE en ee ae G as S K eege beer e x Fiter Clear G In the Operation Log window only the table contents can be scrolled without scrolling the title of the table When there is no event to be displayed a message There is no Event Logs would be displayed instead of table TABLE 1 21 Display items of Operation Log window Items Description Date Time Displays the local time of occurrence of the event or error Format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Operation Displays the source Web UI or CLI and contents of the operation IP Address Displays the source IP address IPv4 or IPv6 address of the operation This column displays Console for a CLI operation performed on a console with serial connection If the host name can be identified from the DNS set on the MMB at the login time this field displays the host name Otherwise it displays the IP address If the user is logged in from the Web UI the field displays only the IP address using the DNS If the logged in user is using the IPv6 address connection the field displays only the IP address using the DNS User Name Displays the operator s name and session ID for Web UI operations Session ID The session ID for CLI operations is displayed as MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 22 Operation Log Window Buttons Buttons Description Filter When Filter butto
414. n Displays 3 4 10 Memory Configuration menu USB Configuration Displays 3 4 11 USB Configuration menu Security Configuration Displays 3 4 12 Security Configuration menu 3 4 1 UEFI Menu Operations Remarks The sequence of the menu may be changed according to the device configuration Besides the above mentioned menu the displayed items may be increased by the sadump menu and the installed I O device For the details on the method of operating the sadump menu CHAPTER 6 Setting of sadump environment Moreover for the method of operating I O device menu see the manual which is provided by the vender of I O device 3 Operation help display The description on operation key which is shown in the TABLE 3 11 Displayed contents of operation help display is displayed TABLE 3 11 Displayed contents of operation help display Items Description t Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager System Information Menu The information on the system is displayed in the System Information menu There is no item which needs to be set in this menu The example of displayed window of System Information menu is shown below FIGURE 3 8 Example of displaying System Information menu as N er Seng aww 3 1 Page information display Displayed as System Informatio
415. n based on the UEFI specification On the contrary for the boot device specification of legacy operating system the device can be specified up to the unit Method of specifying boot priority Change of boot priority is possible by rearranging the boot option It can be changed by Change Boot Order window of Boot options See Mi Change Boot Order menu Startup priority of Default The following table shows the boot order of initial state UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 3 Initial state of Default Priority Boot option 1 UEFI Device name 2 UEFI Device name n n 0 1 2 However boot option for device which has been added is added at the end 3 Legacy Boot 4 UEFI Shell 5 UEFI PXE Boot MAC MAC Addr However boot option for device which has been added is added at the end 3 3 2 Boot specification of UEFI In boot manager menu boot option is displayed according to the boot priority The boot option displayed at the top has highest priority option and the boot is tested first Windows Boot Manager displayed in example shown in FIGURE 3 4 Boot Option of Boot Manager is created when Windows server of Windows Server 2008 or later which is UEFI Aware operating system is installed In this example boot for Windows server 2008 or later of UEFI Aware operating system is tested initially FIGURE 3 4 Boot Option of Boot Manager If booting is successful the operating system is booted If the
416. n error occurs in CPU 0 of SB 0 This unit retrieves FRU with this sensor from Entity ID of the sensor and also retrieves Parent Entity from Entity Association Record It displays Board Unit name described in FRU Record of parent entry It is linked to the window Window on which part number and serial number of each unit can be referenced showing detailed status of each unit Part Number Displays the part number stored in system event log If part number is not stored His displayed Event ID Displays the ID 8 digits in hexadecimal system for identifying contents of Event For details on the allocation of the Event ID see Chapter 2 MMB Message of PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Description Displays the contents of Events and Errors Remarks For the event of insertion removal of the board part number and serial number of board are displayed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 18 Buttons on System Event Log Window Buttons Description Clear All Events When you click Clear All Events button all the events saved in system event log are cleared This is used only if Field engineer instructs to do so Download After the confirmation message is displayed System Event Log Collect window appears Filter When you click Filter button System Event Log Filtering Condition window for entering filter conditions appears Detail When you click Detail bu
417. n is clicked Operation Log Filtering Condition window for entering the filtering conditions appears Clear When Click button is clicked all the operating logs are cleared 1 Menu Operation System Operation Log 2 Window Operations When the entire operation log is to be cleared 1 Click Clear button A dialog box is displayed for confirmation 2 Click OK button to clear operation log Click Cancel button when you do not want to clear operation log Narrowing down the operation log displayed in the window 1 Click the Filter button The Operation Log Filtering Condition window for entering filtering conditions appears 2 Enter the conditions in the Operation Log Filtering Condition window Then click the Apply button The browser returns to the Operation Log window The window displays the log that satisfies the specified conditions O Operation Log Filtering Condition Window When Filter button on the Operation Log window is clicked the Operation Log Filtering Condition window for entering filtering conditions appeared Filtering conditions of event which appears on Operation Log window can be set on Operating Log Filtering Condition Window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 6 Operating Log Filtering Condition Window Model PRIMEQUESTIS00E Active MMB 0 Part Namber MCXXXXXXX FUjiTsU Serial Namber Seem Status Normal Operation Log Filtering Co
418. n the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 5 System Information Window System Information window displays the information such as name of the systems and name of the products etc related to the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series System Moreover names and Asset Tag Property management number corresponding to the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series System Chassis can be set FIGURE 1 9 System Information Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCNXNNXXX FUJITSU Serial Number SEEING Status Normal d d y rr System Information Fep Click the Apply Button to soply al changes et Cores TABLE 1 29 Display and Set Items of System Information window Items Description System Name System name of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed User with Administrator privilege can change system name Maximum 64 characters can be entered Remarks Characters which can be entered Alphanumeric characters half width space The following characters can also be entered I R amp H i5 4 2 lt gt _ However there is a limitation MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations ltems Description and half width space cannot be used as first character Half width space cannot be used as last character Default is lt PRIMEQUEST Product serial number gt When system Name is blank it becomes system name of default Product Name Product name
419. n with double quotation mark number sign single quotation mark or back quotation mark MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description IP Address MASK To specify an IP address Enter the IP address R To specify a subnet Enter the subnet and mask SNMP Version Sets the SNMP version 1 2 3 Access Sets whether to permit only reading or both reading and writing Read Only Read Write Auth Sets the security level You can specify this only if 3 is selected for SNMP Version noauth Do not use the authentication function auth Use the authentication function priv Use the authentication function and privacy function data encryption With 1 or 2 selected for SNMP Version this item is grayed out and disabled In this case the only available security level is noauth TABLE 1 103 Buttons in the SNMP Community window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as the community or the IP address permitted access 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SNMP Configuration Community 2 Window Operations Configuring information such as the community 1 Enter information such as the community the IP address permitted access the SNMP version the access permission and the authentication Then click the Apply button This
420. nager Displays 3 5 Boot maintenance Manager Menu BIOS Boot Diagnotstic Test Executes BIOS Boot Diagnotstic Test After execution the power supply to the partition must be turned Off 3 Operation help display part The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 2 Display Items on Operation Help Display TABLE 3 2 Display Items on Operation Help Display Item Description T1 Move Highlight Moves the cursor in up and down directions lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the item UEFI Menu Operations 3 2 Continue Menu In Continue Menu the process is transited to automatic boot of operating system and the system is booted in the existing boot order 3 3 Boot Manager Menu In Boot Manager Menu device for boot can be specified The Boot Manager menu lists boot devices as shown in FIGURE 3 3 Display example of Boot Manager Menu Individual Boot device which is displayed in menu is called as Boot option FIGURE 3 3 Display example of Boot Manager Menu Boot Manager 3 3 1 Boot Option In boot option there are two types such as boot type for UEFI Aware operating system and boot type for legacy operating system The difference in these two types is given below Method of specifying the boot device As for the boot device specification of UEFI Aware Operating System the executable file can be specified up to the unit by the device path expressio
421. name command Failed to execute s command The specified command is not supported error s MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 2 30 set partition pci_address_mode It sets the PCI Address Mode of the specified partition PCI Segment Mode is set as default bus sets PCI Bus Mode segment sets PCI Segment Mode For the partition which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command following message is displayed and settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown For the partition which is already powered off when the settings are changed by this command power off on is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message Moreover also when the values which are the same as the current values are set power off on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed a Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only managed partition 1 Input format set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting PCI Address Mode of the Partition3 to Segment Mode set partition pc_address_mode 3 segment 4 Message The following table lists the message
422. nance Backup Restore Configuration Backup Restore BIOS Configuration 2 Window Operations Backing up BIOS configuration information 1 Click the Backup button The save destination dialog box of the browser appears 2 Select the save destination path in the save destination dialog box Then click the OK button This downloads the BIOS configuration file The default name of the backup file of the BIOS configuration information is as follows BIOS_ backup date BIOS version dat Restoring BIOS configuration information 1 Confirm that the system has completely stopped 1 6 3 1 6 4 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 2 Click the Browse button to select the backup file of the BIOS configuration 3 Click the Restore button This sends the file to the MMB To confirm restoration the BIOS Configuration File Information dialog box appears 4 Click the OK button in the BIOS Configuration File Information dialog box This restores the BIOS configuration information 5 The BIOS is rebooted to enable the restored data Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message E_00057 Specified file can not restore For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Maintenance Wizard window The Maintenance Wizard window has a wizard to support maintenance of units T
423. nce C122 E178EN 1 3 3 Console Redirection Setup window There are following windows in the Console Redirection Setup menu _ IPv4 Console Redirection Setup window L IPv6 Console Redirection Setup window O IPv4 Console Redirection Setup window The IP address settings for accessing Console Redirection Setup of IPv4 subnet mask video redirection and enable disable settings of virtual media can be done in the IPv4 Console Redirection Setup window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 44 IPv4 Console Redirection Setup GC L ES v System User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number HOS Status Warning gt Partition gt Console Redirection Setup gt IPv4 Console Redirection Setup IPv4 Console Redirection Setup IS mS Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Note For using Video Redirection and Virtual Media in xPAR Partition VGA USB2 rK VMS must be connected to the partition Enable Enable O Disable Disable Enable O Disable e Enable elek OSI Enable Enable O Disable Disable 4 spares o J a 76 on 255 zl 255 fo Enable Om spares lslxlxlsl sl ass ass Reams ORs Enable Enable a Joss oss jn HHH Taille 265 255 255 _ o 11 xPAR
424. nd Setting Items on System Event Log Filtering Condition Wind en 68 TABLE 1 20 System Events Log Filtering Condition Window Buttons TABLE 1 21 Display items of Operation Log WINGOW EEN TABLE 1 22 Operation Log Window Dugtone ENEE 71 TABLE 1 23 Display and Set Items of Operating Log Filtering Condition Wimdow EEN 72 TABLE 1 24 Buttons on Operation Log Filtering Condition wipdow ENEE 73 TABLE 1 25 Display items of Partition Event Log window TABLE 1 26 Partition Event Log Window Buttons TABLE 1 27 Display and Set Items of Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Windw EEN 75 TABLE 1 28 Buttons on the Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Window ENEE 75 TABLE 1 29 Display and Set Items of System Information window ENEE 76 TABLE 1 30 Buttons on the System Information Window ENEE 77 TABLE 1 31 Display Item of Firmware Information Wimdow ENEE TABLE 1 32 Display Items and Setting Items in System Setup Window TABLE 1 33 System Setup window DUION ceessesessesessesesseseesecesseseeseeeeseseseceseseesesseseseeseaeseseeseaeeseseeseaeeseseesesteseseeaeseeneateasseeneaeenees TABLE 1 34 Display Items and Setting Items in System Power Control Wimdow ENEE 83 TABLE 1 35 System Power Control Window Button ENEE 83 TABLE 1 36 Display Items and Setting Items in LEDs Wimdow ANEN 85 TABLE t37 LEDs Window e EE 85 TABLE 1 38 Display Item on Power Supply Window EEN 86 TABLE 1 39 Button of Power Supply Window
425. nd level 3rd Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level Same Other partition partition PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system SB SB 0 RO RO Displays the SB SB 1 RO RO status SB 2 RO RO The menu is not SB 3 RO RO displayed for an unmounted SB IOU IOU 0 RO RO Displays the IOU IOU 1 RO RO status IOU 2 RO RO The menu is not IOU 3 RO RO displayed for an unmounted IOU DU DU 0 RO RO Displays the DU DU 1 RO RO status The menu is not displayed for an unmounted DU PCI_Box If no PCI_Box is connected this menu is not displayed PCI_Box 0 RO RO Displays the PCI_Box 1 RO RO PCI_Box status PCI_Box 2 RO RO The menu is not PCI_Box 3 RO RO displayed for an unmounted PCI_Box OPL RO RO MMB MMB 0 RO RO Displays the MMB MMB 1 RO RO status and information Disk Enclosure Disk RO RO Enclosure x Partition Power Control RW RO Controls the partition power Schedule Schedule RW RO Sets scheduled Control operations Schedule List RW RO Sets the power on off schedule Console RO RO Sets Video Redirection Redirection Setup Remote Storage and Text Console Redirection IPv4 Console RO RO Setting for IPv4 Redirection Console Setup Redirection IPv6 Console RO RO Setting for IPv6 Redirection Console Setup Redirection Partition RO RO Changes the Configuration partition configuration MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Privileges Privile
426. ndition e Select the fitering conditions and click the Apply button to take effect Note The folonings are AND conditions Operation AE O Specied Web UI CL 2 Sort by DateTime New event first Old evert first 3 Start DateTime First event O SpecifiedTime ES bh Lee TS 4 End DateTime Last eves OSpecifiedTime EXTER DEE DS CE 5 Number of events to display Max 1000 100 1000 Aosly _Concat J TABLE 1 23 Display and Set Items of Operating Log Filtering Condition Window Items Description Operation Selects the operation to be displayed Select All or Specified by the radio button All Do not do filtering by Operation Specified Filtering of Operation can be set Select the operation to be displayed The default setting is All Sort by Date Time Specified by using radio buttons whether to display by new order or to display by old order New event first Old event first The default setting is New event first Start Date Time Specified by using radio button either display from recent event or time specified event First event Set to first event Specified Time Set to specified time If Specified Time is selected enter the date and time of start time By default it is First event End Date Time Specified by using radio button either display from the last event or time specified event Last event Set to last event Specified Time Set to specified time If
427. ndow TABLE A 30 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Window Setting Item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Alarm E Mail Disable Enable Disable From None E Mail Address When Use envelope from address check box is checked the address of From is set as the source E Mail address and the mail are sent By default the checkbox is off To None E Mail Address When multiple addresses are specified they are separated by using Comma SMTP Server None IP address or FQDN1 of SMTP server Subject None 0 9 a z A Z Special characters amp E space A 1 31 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Window TABLE A 31 Setting Items of Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Window Setting item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Severity All ON Error Warning Info Multiple selection is possible Partition All ON Select the partition Multiple selection is possible Unit All All When specified is selected Specified the unit to be displayed is set ON Source All All When specified is selected Specified the source to be displayed is set ON A 2 Setting Items on UEFI This list shows the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on UEFI Setting Items
428. ne 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 address 255 SMTP address None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Internal IP Interface Disable Enable Address e Disable IP Address None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask None 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 A 1 19 Setting Items of IPv6 Interface Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of IPv6 Interface Window TABLE A 19 Setting Items of IPv6 Interface Window Main Item Setting Item Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Virtual IP Hostname PRIMEQUEST Sets hostname in FQDN The first character must Address Product Serial format a z A Z 0 9 be alphabetic character Number Hyphen Dot Hyphen Dot cannot be used as the first character and the last character IP Address None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Prefix Length None 1 128 Gateway None O FFFF 0 FFFF address O FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF MMB 0 IP Interface Disable Enable Address Disable Hostname None Sets hostname in FQDN First character must be optional format a z A Z 0 9 alphabetic character Hyphen Dot gt Hyphen Dot cannot be used as the first character and the last character IP Address None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Prefix Length None 1 128 Gateway None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF address
429. ne in the following conditions When it is on at Flexible I O mode When the TXT TPM function is disabled Default setting is Disable TPM Displays whether TPM function is Enabled or Disabled chip status Enabled TPM is enabled Disabled TPM is disabled Remarks When Home SB of partition is without TPM mode this field is not displayed TPM Displays the TPM status current status MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Activated Deactivated Remarks When Home SB of partition is without TPM mode this field is not displayed TPM Displays ownership of TPM ownership Yes having Ownership No not having Ownership Remarks When Home SB of partition is without TPM mode this field is not displayed On board LAN Mode IOU Displays the IOU that belongs to the partition On board LAN Mode Displays the On board LAN Mode in IOU Unit current status Enabled WOL enabled Onboard LAN can be used at AC On status Enabled WOL disabled Onboard LAN comprised in the partition can be used at Power On status Disabled Onboard LAN cannot be used every time On board LAN Mode Sets On board LAN Device Mode in IOU Unit setting Select the Mode to be set by using the radio button Enabled WOL enabled Enabled WOL disabled Disabled Default setting is Enabled WOL disabled On board LAN Mode is displayed only at the PPAR Partition Partition 0 3 Plea
430. nfiguration WindOW en 506 TABLE A 41 Setting Items of Memory Configuration Window ENEE 507 TABLE A 42 Setting Items of USB Configuration WindOW ENEE 508 TABLE A 43 Setting Items of Security Configuration Wind un 508 TABLE A 44 Setting Items of Video WinGOw ssscessecessesesseceeseseesecsseesesessesecucsecesseeueseeusseesesesueseeasaeeasaeeneaeeasaeeasateasaeeasaeeesateeeaeeeeas TABLE A 45 Setting Items of Keyboard Window TABLE A 46 Setting Items of Mouse Window ENEE TABLE A 47 Setting Items of Options Window 1 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations CHAPTER 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations This chapter describes the menus used to manage and operate the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server with the MMB Web UI It also describes how to use the MMB Web UI Web UI Menus The available MMB Web UI menus differ depending on the user privileges TABLE 1 1 User privileges lists the user privileges needed to check and operate the MMB Web UI menus TABLE 1 1 User privileges Privilege level Description Administrator Administrator accounts are permitted to perform all operations and checks Operator Operator accounts are permitted to check the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server status and configure the system They are not permitted to manage users or change the network configuration With Operator privileges you cannot Manipulate the power supply from the System Power Control window Ch
431. nformation display Displayed with Delete Attempts 2 Menu selection Selection menu shown in TABLE 3 35 Display contents of Menu selection is displayed TABLE 3 35 Display contents of Menu selection Item Display contents Attempt xxxx xxxx displays the name set in iSCSI Attempt Name of 3 4 9 2 Attempt Configuration Menu X appears when space key is pressed If Commit Changes and Exit is selected in this state iSCSI settings get cancelled I X If Commit Changes and Exit is selected at this state iSCSI settings get cancelled UEFI Menu Operations Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Saves the changed contents and exits from this menu Cancels the changed contents and exits from this menu 3 Operation help display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 36 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 36 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description lt Enter gt Select Entry tL Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu 3 4 9 4 Change Attempt Order menu In Change Attempt Order menu priority of boot of network which is booted with iSCSI can be set Changes in this menu are enabled after resetting the system FIGURE 3 27 Display example of Change Attempt Order Men
432. ng and display items in the IPv4 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Items Description MMB Virtual Physical IP Address Virtual IP Address Sets the virtual IPv4 IP address for Web UI access If the MMB has a redundant configuration the switched MMB will take over this virtual IP address Hostname Sets the host name in FQDN format You can enter the following characters a z A Z 0 9 hyphen period Only the above characters can be specified Also the following restrictions apply The character string must begin with an alphabetic character The character string cannot begin or end with the following character specified hyphen or period The default is PRIMEQUEST Product Serial Number For example if the serial number is 1020516004 the character string is PRIMEQUEST1020516004 Remarks The setting in FQDN format is not required if you are not operating on the domain IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address MMB 0 IP Address Sets the physical IP address assigned to the MMB O0 interface MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description This item is available only if the system has MMB 0 You cannot access the Web UI from this interface Unless MMB 0 is mounted the window does not display the MMB 0 IP Address table Interface Enable Disable Hostname
433. ng is 100 events TABLE 1 135 System Events Log Filtering Condition Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply Log which matches with the specified conditions will be listed on System Event Log window by clicking the Apply button Cancel Returns to System Event Log window by clicking the Cancel button Default Setting Selected value returns to the default value Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00413 Nothing is selected W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00426 Invalid Values Specified W_00434 Invalid Time Format W_00441 Range over error 00417 Are you sure 1 00468 Are you sure you want to clear the SEL For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Operation Log Window As for the display the operation is the same as the PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E model Refer to chapter 1 2 3 System Information Window System Information window displays the information such as name of the systems and name of the products etc related to the PRIMEQUEST 2800B model Moreover names and Asset Tag Property management number corresponding to the PRIMEQUEST 2800B model Chassis can be set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 100 System Information Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111
434. ng is done as for the console command under the connection Console redirection already in use If needed the current user can be disconnected Do you really want to force disconnect current user Y N Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format console lt partition gt timeout xxxx quite 2 Option timeout Sets timeout value Set by 0 or within the range of 60 9999 seconds MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 0 consists of the special meaning it indicates no Timeout Default setting is 600 Seconds Perform the operation by default value when this option is not specified quiet Executes the command without interactive operation with User 3 Usage example Example In case of Login to BMC of Partition 0 console 0 Example When logged in to BMC of Partition 1 by timeout value of 1200 seconds console 1 timeout 1200 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because you have not privileges to operate this partition 2 2 5 download ssh_key Downloads th
435. ng items of SNMP v3 Configuration Window A 1 26 Setting items of Crate CSR Window A 1 27 Setting items of Create Selfsigned Certificate Window A 1 28 Setting items of Edit User Window A 1 29 Setting items of Add Filter Edit Filter Window A 1 30 Setting items of Alarm E Mail Window A 1 31 Setting items of Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Window A 1 1 Setting items of System Event Log Filtering Condition Window The following table lists the initial value and value that can be set for setting items of Operation Log Filtering Condition Window TABLE A 1 Setting item of System Event Log Filtering Condition Window Setting Initial Value Value that can be set Remarks Items Severity All ON e Error Monitor is displayed only e Warning when logged in by CE e Info privilege e Monitor Multiple selection is Appendix A List of Setting Items possible Partition e Except Partition Operator e All All and Specified can be All e Specified switched and the data e In case of Partition selected by the check Operator Specified Select boxes in Specified is partition targeted for maintained management Unit All e All All and Specified can be e Specified switched and the data selected by the check boxes in Specified is maintained Source All e All All and Specified can be e Specified switched and the data selected by the check boxes in Specified is m
436. ng will become effective the next time the system power off on is performed 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The setting will become effective the next time the system power off on is performed The specified parameter is invalid Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because the CPU mismatch between SBs Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because the DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because the unsupported CPU configuration Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal CPU composition Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal DIMM composition Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal SB composition Unable to register the System as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal VRM composition Failed to execute s command Failed to execute set memory_mirror_ras_mode command Unable to change the mode while the system is running Please try to change the mode after the system is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 6 8 set lan_device_m
437. nging Password failed _00037 Changing Password completed W_00404 Password differs from the re password W_00402 Password is too short W_00403 Invalid character is included in Password 1 00417 Are you sure W_00462 The specified password is invalid For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 4 3 Who window The Who window lists the users who connect to the MMB through the serial port Telnet SSH or the Web Ul FIGURE 1 60 Change Password window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number FTI Status Not teal Who The following users are connected to the MMB now Teter SSH WE SSH root Administrator Achrenistrator WebUl WebUl Web Administrator Administrator TABLE 1 86 Display items in the Who window Items Description User Name Displays the name of the user logged in to the MMB through the serial port Telnet SSH or the Web UI Login Time Displays the user s login time By Displays whether the Web UI or Telnet SSH was used for the login If the serial port was used for the login this field displays hyphen From Displays the host name or the IP address IPv4 or IPv6 address of a remote host if the user logged in remotely If the host name can be identifie
438. ns FIGURE 1 41 Schedule Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00 Active AIMBSO Part Number MCXXNXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number TORE States Nermal tom 7 Network Configuration Maintenance gt Partiioa gt Schedule gt Schedule Control Schedule Control Select Schedale Consol for each petition then click the Apply button to take effect Apply Cance If the maintenance work Either Hot Partition Maintenance Warm System Maintenance or Cold System Maintenance of the targeted partition is executed in the schedule execution time the scheduled operation does not execute the power operation of the partition If the schedule overlaps on the same day it is processed according to the following priority levels Special gt Monthly gt Weekly gt Daily Daily Schedule executed every day Weekly Schedule executed every week Monthly Schedule executed every month Special Schedule executed on specific day every year Moreover if the Power On and Power Off is specified at the same time the priority is given to Power Off In case of Partition Operator only the management target partition can be operated Because Partition does not do Power On in Power On Delay Schedule Power Off is disregarded Moreover when OS does not accept the Shutdown demand Power Off is not done TABLE 1 58 Display Items and Setting Items of Schedule Control Window Items Description Displays the number that identifi
439. nt In this case the clock may be reversed outside a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds 16 minutes and 40 seconds the NTP function stops Time synchronization interval The NTP client synchronizes at an interval of 64 to 1024 seconds The initial synchronization interval is 64 seconds As the synchronization accuracy becomes stable this interval gradually doubles from 64 seconds to 128 seconds then to 256 seconds then to 512 seconds and finally to 1024 seconds MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations This increment algorithm for the synchronization interval conforms to RFC 1305 For details see Sections 3 4 2 to 3 4 9 in RFC 1305 Stratum of the NTP servers on the MMB The stratum of the NTP servers on the MMB is the value of stratum 1 of the synchronized external NTP servers Unless the NTP servers synchronize with external NTP servers the stratum is 5 Support for leap seconds The NTP on the MMB has no function for inserting leap seconds Therefore if you want to associate the MMB time with leap seconds you need to synchronize it with an external NTP server that supports leap seconds If the NTP client on the MMB is set to Step mode and the external NTP server slowly changes the time for the leap second adjustment the MMB time may be adjusted with the Step adjustment when a time difference outside a range of 0 128 to 0 128 second occurs To prevent the leap second adjustment from using Step adjustment use Sl
440. nt user can refer to and set information in the window RO The account user can only refer to information in the window N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenu 1 The account user can operate partitions not in maintenance mode in this window 2 The account user can operate only partitions in maintenance mode in this window 3 The SB is neither a Home SB nor Reserved SB Alternatively the SB is the Home SB in the Power Off status in a partition in the Standby status 4 The partition is in the Standby status MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 10 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Partition Operator Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level mode Same Other partition partition System System Power Hot System RO RO Control Hot Partition RO RO Warm System RO RO Cold System RO RO MMB MMB 0 Hot System RO RO Hot Partition RO RO Warm System RO RO Cold System RO RO MMB 1 Same as for MMB 0 Partition Power Control Hot System RW RO Hot Partition RW 1 RO Warm System RW 1 RO Cold System RO RO Partition Hot System RO RO Add is Configuration suppressed since the Free unit may be a replacement unit Hot Partition RO RO Warm System RO RO Cold System RO RO Add SB IOU Same as for Partition to Partiti
441. ntenance Warm System Maintenance or Cold System Maintenance of the system executed in the schedule execution time the scheduled operation does not execute the power operation of the system If the schedule overlaps on the same day it is processed according to the following priority levels Special gt Monthly gt Weekly gt Daily Daily Schedule executed every day Weekly Schedule executed every week Monthly Schedule executed every month Special Schedule executed on specific day every year Moreover if the Power On and Power Off is specified at the same time the priority is given to Power Off Because System does not do Power On in Power On Delay Schedule Power Off is disregarded Moreover when OS does not accept the Shutdown demand Power Off is not done TABLE 1 143 Display Items and Setting Items of Schedule Control Window Items Description Schedule Control Sets whether schedule operation is done for system On Off Default setting is Off Number of schedules Displays the number of schedules that are set MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 144 Schedule Control Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply When the Apply button is clicked the schedule operation information for the system is set Cancel When the Cancel button is clicked the browser returns to the original status without setting the schedule operation information for the system
442. nterface provided by the MMB CHAPTER 3 UEFI Menu Operations Chapter 3 describes the menu operations of the UEFI CHAPTER 4 UEFI Command Operations Chapter 4 describes the command operations of the UEFI CHAPTER 5 Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation Chapter 5 describes the Dynamic Reconfiguration operation CHAPTER 6 Setting of sadump enviroment Chapter 6 describes the setting of sadump enviroment Appendix A List of Setting Items Appendix A lists the setting items for each window Manuals for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series The following manuals have been prepared to provide you with the information necessary to use the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series You can access HTML versions of these manuals at the following sites Japanese language site http p fujitsu com platform server primequest manual 2000 Global site http Awww fujitsu com global services computing server primequest Title Description Manual code PRIMEQUEST 2000 Describes what manuals you should read and C122 E170EN Series Getting Started how to access important information after Guide unpacking the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server This manual comes with the product PRIMEQUEST 2000 Contains important information required for using C122 E171EN Series Safety and the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series safely Regulatory Information PRIMEQUEST 2000 Provides errata and addenda for the C122 E182EN Series Errata and PRIMEQUEST 2000 series manuals This Addenda manual wi
443. ntrol Status Displays the operating state of power control status of each partition Normal Normal operating state Shows that the operating rate suppression function for limitation of the electric power consumption is not working Power Saving Shows that the operating rate is being suppressed Power Save Control Valid invalid Power Saving function setting is executed in the partition unit Enable Disable The setting can be done only when System Power Save Control is Enable and gray color is shown when System Power Saving Control is Disable Default is Enable Power save Grace Period Sets shutdown waiting time in Power Save Grace Period Partition unit when the Limit threshold is exceeded Specified in the range of 0 99 minutes Shows a valid item when Power Save Control of partition is Enable and shows gray color when Disable Default is 5 minutes Action reaching Power Executes the operation setting in the partition unit after the Limit threshold Save excess stand by time Continue Continues operation for the partition under operation Partition Power Off Power Off is done for the partition under operation Partition Force Power Off Force Power Off is done for the partition under operation Displays a valid item when Power Save Control of partition is Enable and displays gray color in case of Disable Default is Partition Power Off TABLE 1 75 Power Management Setup Window Buttons Buttons D
444. number specified as follows Partition numbers are separated by comma Specifies with the range of partition number quiet The command is executed without interactive operation with the user 3 Usage example Example When NMI is specified in Partition 1 by Administrator privilege Administrator gt nmi partition 1 Are you sure you want to NMI to Partition 1 Y N Y Administrator gt 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Are you sure you want to NMI to Partition d Y N The specified parameter is invalid The specified partition number is invalid Unable to NMI the partition d Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Unable to NMI the Partition tn because you have not authority to operate this partition Unable to NMI the partition s because the partition which does not have authority to you is included in the specified parameter remove partition Remove the specified SB IOU from the specified partition When the specified SB IOU is not included in specified partition then execution cannot be done Privilege Administrator 1 Input format MMB CLI Comman
445. o operate oa You can specify this only if Partition Operator is selected for Privilege If the user privilege selected in Privilege is other than Partition Operator the window grays out the check boxes MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Description Remark This item is not displied in case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B model TABLE 1 84 Buttons in the Add User and Edit User windows Buttons Description Apply Adds or updates the user account and returns to the User List window Cancel Returns to the User List window without adding or updating the user account Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00410 aa will be added Are you sure E 00032 No more User addition E_00409 Unable to change the privilege because the specified user is last Administrator 1 00410 aa will be changed Are you sure W_00401 Username is too short W_00402 Password is too short W_00406 Invalid character is included in User Name W_00403 Invalid character is included in Password W_00462 The specified password is invalid W_00405 Invalid character is included in Full Name W_00407 Input characters are too long W_00408 Partitions are not selected Please select at least one partition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Messag
446. occurred in a component on the SB However the SB can be operated by disconnecting the faulty components R Failed A fault has occurred in the SB and the SB must be disconnected or the SB has been disconnected Unsupported In case there is an SB which is not supported by the MMB Power Status Displays the power status of the SB On On status Standby Standby status Part Number Displays the part number of the SB Location LED Indicates the display status of the Location LED The display status consists of the following conditions On The light is on S Off The light is off On Off and blinking of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking the respective On Off Blink buttons Serial Number Displays the serial number of the SB MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations CPUs CPU 0 CPU 1 Status Core Max Core Displays the status of the CPU OK Not present S Disabled Warning s Failed Configuration error Unknown Displays Normal number of cores number maximum number of cores number Indicates the degeneracy status of the core Maximum number of cores also includes the number of Disable cores Model Displays the product name of the CPU Stepping Displays the version number of the CPU Part Number Displays the part number of the CPU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the CPU DIMMs DIMM 0A0 D
447. ode LAN Device Mode is set by the IOU unit in the system Default value set is wol_ disable wol_ enable Onboard LAN enabled with AC On wol_ disable Onboard LAN enabled with Partition On device_disable Onboard LAN device disabled always For the system which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command following message is displayed and settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the system is running Please try to change the mode after the system is shutdown For the system which is already powered OFF when the settings are changed by this command power OFF ON is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message Moreover also when values which are the same as the current values are set power off on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed m Privilege Administrator Operator 1 Input format set lan_device_mode lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting OU 2 to Enable WOL enabled in the system set lan_device_mode 2 wol_enable 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The setting will become effective the next t
448. of Boot Manager When pop up window appears display contents are shown in TABLE 3 59 Display Contents of operation help display when pop up window appears TABLE 3 59 Display Contents of operation help display when pop up window appears Items Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor in up and down direction lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Entry Closes the pop up window Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order Change in boot order is executed according to the following procedure 1 In window shown in FIGURE 3 49 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 1 place the cursor on Floppy Drive N in which device is to be changed Select Floppy Drive 00 in FIGURE 3 49 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 1 FIGURE 3 49 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 1 Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 2 Press Enter key Pop up window appears is shown in FIGURE 3 50 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 2 UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 50 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 2 set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 3 Place the cursor on the boot option that is to be set in Floppy Drive N Boot option for Floppy Drive 00 is set in FIGURE 3 50 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 2 4 Press Enter key Boot option o
449. of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed Part Number Model name of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed Serial Number Serial number of PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is displayed Asset Tag Property administration information Asset Tag is displayed User with the administrator privilege can change Asset Tag information Maximum 32 characters can be entered No default value TABLE 1 30 Buttons on the System Information Window Buttons Description Apply When the characters are entered in the System Name or Asset Tag fields and click the Apply button is clicked the entered information is set Cancel When the Cancel button is clicked the system is restored to the original condition without setting the information entered in the System Name or Asset Tag 1 Menu Operation System System Information 2 Window Operations 1 Change the items of System Name or Asset Tag and click the Apply button Information in each field is set Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message 100013 Setting completed W_00431 Invalid character included W_00407 Input characters are too long For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 6 Firmware Information Window Latest version number of applied Firmware information of the Firmware version
450. of SB x The above mentioned rows are displayed in the ascending order of numbers in the SB IOU The Reserved SB is displayed as RSB x with R in front of SB x Privilege All 2 3 6 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 1 Input format show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt Indicates that there is no line feed 2 Option all Displays SB IOU which does not belong to all partitions and to any partition free Displays SB IOU which does not belong to any partition lt partition gt Displays the specified partition The specification method when multiple partitions are specified is as follows The partition number is delimited by a comma and is specified Partition number is specified within the range Remarks Specifications of comma delimited and number range of can be mixed 3 Usage example Example When configuration information of partition of partition number 0 2 with PRIMEQUEST 2800E is displayed show partition configuration 0 2 0 hogehoge SB 0 SB 0 RSB 3 IOU 0 1 testserver SB 1 SB 1 lIOU 0 2 SB 2 SBH2 IlOU 1 Example When all the specifications for the configuration which are the same as the above mentioned are used show partition configuration all 0 hogehoge SB 0 SB 0 RSB 3 IOU 0 1 testserver SB 1 SB 1 IOU 1 2 SB 2 SB 2 lOU 2 3 lt Since nothing is registered it is displayed as blank gt free IOU 3 4
451. of the user you want to specify Then click the Edit button you want to specify Then click the Edit button 2 Specify the user management information in the Edit User window Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message E_00053 Failed to get user status Retry 60 seconds later W_00413 Nothing is selected For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Edit User window You can change the management information on a user in the Edit User window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 84 Edit User window Model PRIMEQUEST2 00E Activo MMB 0 Part Numbor MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number Gees Status Normal System Partie User Administration gt Netwoek Coefiguration gt Remote Server Management Edit User Click the Apply Buttos to apply all changes User Name ADMINISTRATOR TABLE 1 117 Display and setting items in the Edit User window Items Description User Name Specifies a user name The name can have a total of 8 to 16 characters The user name can contain the following characters 0 to 9 a to z and A to Z alphanumeric characters only Password Specifies a password The name can have a total of 8 to 16 characters The password can contain the following characters 0 to 9 a to z and A to Z alphanumeric characters only
452. on VGA USB2 tK VMS must be connected to the partition GP CJ M Ki OEnable Enable Disable Disable O Enable O Enable Disable Disable D D Fals D O Enable O Enable Disable Disable 11 xPAR 11 O Enable o Ifo TABLE 1 66 Display Items and Set Items of IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window Items Description Displays the number for identifying the Partition 0 11 Partitions exist Partition Name Displays the name given to the Partition IP Address Enters the global address for IPv6 which can be connected In case of automatic acquisition the acquired IP Address is displayed Prefix Length Enters the prefix length for IPv6 In case of automatic acquisition the acquired prefix length is displayed Video Redirection Sets whether video redirection can be used Enable Video redirection can be used Disable Video redirection cannot be used Default is Disable Virtual Media Sets whether the virtual media can be used or not Enable Virtual media can be used Disable Virtual media cannot be used Default is Disable Automatic acquisition When IPv6 address is automatically acquired the Auto button is clicked IP address and prefix length are automatically acquired and overwritten 1 3 4 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 67 IPv6 Console redirection Setup Window Buttons
453. on A 2 1 I O Space Assignment Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 2 LAN Remote Boot Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 3 CPU Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 4 PCI Bus Padding Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 5 PCI Subsystem Configuration window Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Items on A 2 6 IOU OpROM Scan Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 7 PCl_Box OpROM Scan Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 8 iSCSI Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 9 Attempt Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 10 Memory Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 11 USB Configuration window Setting Items on A 2 12 Security Configuration window A 2 1 Setting Items on I O Space Assignment Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on I O Space Assignment Configuration window TABLE A 32 Setting Items of I O Space Assignment Configuration Window Setting item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Slot Auto Auto Disable A 2 2 Setting Items on LAN Remote Boot Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on LAN Remote Boot Configuration window TABLE A 33 Setting Items of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Window Setting item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Network P
454. on Configuration Remove SB Same as for Partition IOU from Configuration Partition Partition Home Same as for Partition Configuration Reserved SB Hot System RO RO Configuration Hot Partition RO RO Warm System RO RO Cold System RO RO Console Hot System RW N A Redirection Hot Partition RW 1 N A Warm System RW 1 N A Cold System RO N A Network Configuration Network IPv4 Interface Hot System RO RO Interface Hot Partition RO RO IPv6 Interface Warm System RO RO Cold System RO RO Maintenance Firmware Update Unified Hot System N A N A Firmware Hot Partition N A N A Update Warm System N A N A Cold System N A N A Backup Restore Configuration Backup N A N A Backup MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level 3rd Maintenance Privileges Privileges Remarks bar level mode Same Other partition partition Restore MMB MMB is not Configuration affected by maintenance mode Restore MMB can be operated only by maintenance personnel Maintenance Hot System N A N A Wizard Hot Partition N A N A Warm System N A N A Cold System N A N A 1 1 10 Web Ul menus in maintenance mode User This section outlines the Web UI menus that are available with the User privileges in maintenance mode The maintenance mode column has the following items For details on the maintenance mode see 1 1 6 Web UI menus in maintenance mode _Web Ul_ menus _ in Hot
455. on Event RO Displays the REMCS Log notification messages of a PRIMEQUEST partition System RO Displays system Information information such as the system name or product name Firmware RO Displays firmware Information version information System Setup RO Sets the system configuration System Power RO Controls the power Control LEDs RW Displays the LED status Power Supply RO Displays the power supply status Fans RO Displays the fan status Temperature RO Displays the temperatures detected by the temperature sensors of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system SB SB 0 RW Displays the SB status SB 1 RW The menu is not SB 2 RW displayed for an SB 3 RW unmounted SB IOU IOU 0 RW Displays the IOU status IOU 1 RW The menu is not IOU 2 RW displayed for an IOU 3 RW unmounted IOU MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks DU DU 0 RW Displays the DU status DU 1 RW The menu is not displayed for an unmounted DU PCI_Box If no PCI_Box is connected this menu is not displayed PCl_Box 0 RW Displays the PCI_Box PCI_Box 1 RW status PCI Box RW The menu is not PCI_Box 3 RW displayed for an unmounted PCI_Box OPL RW MMB MMB 0 RW Displays the MMB MMB 1 RW status and information Disk Enclosure Disk RW Enclosure x
456. on Max over W_00473 Unable to check the Video Redirection check box due to the Video Redirection option is disabled 100151 Unable to control system power because maintenance is in progress Release maintenance mode first 1 00417 Are you sure W_00541 Nothing is checked For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 7 13 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Mode Window Various modes can be set for system in Mode window In order to reflect the set value turn Off the power of system and then it is necessary to turn On the Power of system once again FIGURE 1 112 Mode Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number EH Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Mode LJ a Mode Select mode for the system then click the Apply Button a z Note The system power off op is required for the selections to become effective L Memory Operation Mode current status Normal Mode Performance Mode Normal Mode 5 O Partial Mirror Mode Full Mirror Mode O Spare Mode z Memory Mirror RAS Mode Mirror Keep Mode a Mirror Keep Mode Capacity Keep Mode Cp TPM Disabled Deactivated a No a o On board LAN Mode o 1OU 0 Enable WOL disabled oO Enable WOL enabled a Enable WOL disabled B O Disable 1OU 1 current status En
457. on describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00415 The duplicate On Off Time is found W_00416 Both On Off Time are disabled MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 7 9 Console Redirection Setup Menu There are following windows in the Console Redirection Setup menu L IPv4 Console Redirection Setup window L IPv6 Console Redirection Setup window O IPv4 Console Redirection Setup window The IP address settings for accessing Console Redirection Setup of IPv4 subnet mask video redirection and enable disable settings of virtual media can be done in the IPv4 Console Redirection Setup window FIGURE 1 107 IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Console Redirection Setup gt IPv4 Console Redirection Setup IPv4 Console Redirection Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes o_ fo_ o_ fo_ OEnable Disable O Enable Disable TABLE 1 149 Display Items and Set Items of IPv4 Console redirection Setup Window Items Description IP Address Enters the IP address of the system permitted to conne
458. on function priv Use the authentication function and privacy function data encryption With 1 or 2 selected for SNMP Version this item is grayed out and disabled In this case the available security level will be only noauth Auth Type Sets the hash function to encrypt passwords MD5 SHA This item takes effect only if 3 is selected for SNMP Version With 1 or 2 selected for SNMP Version this item is grayed out and disabled Auth passphrase Sets a passphrase for authentication This item takes effect only if 3 is selected for SNMP Version and auth or priv is selected for Auth Priv passphrase Sets a passphrase for encryption This item takes effect only if 3 is selected for SNMP Version and priv is selected MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description for Auth TABLE 1 105 Buttons in the SNMP Trap window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as the community or user name and the IP address of a trap destination Test Trap Sends a test trap to the specified trap destination 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SNMP Configuration SNMP Trap 2 Window Operations Configuring SNMP trap information 1 Enter the community or user name the IP address of a trap destination the SNMP version and the a
459. on s all Shuts down all the partitions and turns off the power of the chassis partition s will be automatically shutdown Force Power Off Turns off the power supply without shutting down the running operating system on the partition TABLE 1 35 System Power Control Window Button Buttons Description Apply When the Apply button is clicked after selecting the control item by the radio button the power supply is controlled according to the selected information Cancel When the Cancel button is clicked the power supply returns to the original state without being controlled 1 Menu Operation System System Power Control 2 Window Operations 1 Select the power control item by radio button and then click the Apply button Dialogue box is displayed for confirmation 2 Click the OK button The power supply is controlled according to the selected information Message MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message 1 00013 Setting completed E 00069 Cant control system power under maintenance Release maintenance mode E 00077 Partition xx cannot execute Power On E 00078 Partition xx cannot execute Power Off E 00100 Failed to set the System Power Control E 00101 Unable to power on the partition aa due to CPU mismatch between SB
460. ondO Unicast reply from 10 1 2 3 0 21 a1 1a 32 45 1 253ms Sent 1 probes 1 broadcast s Received 1 reply 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid 5 Process Executes arping bondO c 1 lt ip gt netck ifconfig Displays the setting status of IPv4 or IPv6 network environment Privilege All 1 Input format 2 3 36 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations netck ifconfig 2 Option None 3 Usage example netck ifconfig bond Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 17 42 9B D9 78 inet addr 10 24 77 80 Bcast 10 24 77 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 inet6 addr 2001 2345 10 64 Scope Global inet6 addr fe80 217 42ff fe9b d978 64 Scope Link UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 4765 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 3488 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RX bytes 637685 622 7 KiB TX bytes 1318710 1 2 MiB 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid 5 Process Executes ifconfig bond netck stat Displays the list of the port number which is used by the process during ope
461. ondition window The display item is different depending on the model You can set the filtering conditions for the events for which alarm e mail is sent in the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window Each item is evaluated with the AND condition MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 88 Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal ystem Partition User Administration Maintenance gt Network Configuration gt Alarm E Mail L S Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition LJ a Select the filtering conditions and click the Apply Button 1 Severity Error V Warning M Info 2 Partition All G O Specified 0 M1 M2 M3 3 Unit All OSs O Specified PSUs Fans P SB 0 SB 1 SB 2 SB 3 IO 10U 1 10U22 10U23 Dan DU 1 OPL MMB 0 MMB 1 PCI_Box 0 PCI_Box 1 BDCT Boss PCI_Boxs3 4 Source All O Specified CPU DIMM Chipset Voltage Temperature Other FIGURE 1 89 Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window PRIMQUEST 2800B Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number EE Status Normal if ser Administration m gt Network Configuration gt Alarm E Mail SEE B g Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition Help z Select the filtering conditions and click the Apply Button o 1 Severity M Error El Warning M Info g 2Unit GA S O
462. onds per second to correct the time The MMB corrects the time as soon as the difference reaches 128 milliseconds If the time difference is outside a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds 16 minutes and 40 seconds the NTP function stops Slew The following action is taken depending on the time difference with the NTP server If the difference is within a range of 600 to 600 seconds 10 minutes the NTP executes Slew adjustment which corrects the time at a rate of up to 0 0005 seconds per second without reversal If the difference is outside a range of 600 to 600 seconds 10 minutes and within a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds 16 minutes and 40 seconds the NTP executes Step adjustment In this case the clock may be reversed If the difference is outside a range of 1000 to 1000 seconds 16 minutes and 40 seconds the NTP function stops The default is Step NTP 1 Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of the Primary NTP server This item is valid only if NTP is Enable If it is set to Disable the item is grayed out NTP 2 Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of the Secondary NTP server This item is valid only if NTP is Enable If it is set to Disable the item is grayed out NTP 3 Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of the Third NTP server This item is valid only if NTP is Enable If it is set to Disable the item is grayed out Current Sync Status Displays the synchronous status with the current NTP server When
463. ons Items Description Daily Starting month and date and ending month and date Weekly Starting month and ending month Monthly Starting month and ending month Default settings are as follows Daily From Jan 1 To Jan 1 Weekly From Jan To Jan R Monthly From Jan To Jan On Time On the specified execution date set whether the power supply is to be turned ON If the power supply is to be ON set the time Time is specified in24 hours Minute specifies the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 Off Time Set whether the power supply is OFF on the specified execution date If the power supply is OFF set the time Time is specified in 24 hours Minute is specified in the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 TABLE 1 63 Add Schedule Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply If the Apply button is clicked the schedule information specified in each item is applied to the partition Cancel If the Cancel button is clicked returns to the original sate without applying the schedule information specified in each item Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _00013 Setting completed W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00415 The duplicate On Off Time is found W_00416 Both On Off Time are disabled For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Refere
464. ontrol of the Partition Power Save e Partition Force Power Off is Disable Power Save 5 Minutes 0 99 Minutes Grayed out when Power Grace Save Control of the Partition Period is Disable A 1 13 Setting Items of ASR Control Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of ASR Control Window TABLE A 13 Setting Items of ASR Control Window Setting items Initial value Value that can be set Remarks ASR Number of 5 Times 1 10 Times Restart Tries 0 No retry Action after Stop rebooting and Power e Stop rebooting and Power exceeding Off Off Restart tries e Stop rebooting e Diagnostic Interrupt assert Boot Watchdog Boot Disable e Enable Watchdog e Disable Timeout 6000s 1s 6000s time seconds Action when Continue Continue watchdog Reset expires Power Cycle NMI Software Watchdog Software Disable e Enable Watchdog e Disable Timeout 300s 1s 6000s time seconds Action when Continue Continue watchdog Reset SES Power Cycle NMI A 1 14 Setting Items of Console Redirection Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Console Redirection Window TABLE A 14 Setting Items of Console Redirection Window Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Operation None e Video Redirection Can be selected only when Video
465. oot target Specifically following failure patterns exist In boot process of UEFI Aware operating system such as Windows Boot Manager the targeted device cannot be connected In boot process of UEFI Aware operating system Such as Windows Boot Manager the targeted device cannot be recognized In boot process of UEFI Aware operating system Such as Windows Boot Manager UEFI partition was not exist in targeted device In boot of UEFI Embedded DVD CD UEFI DVD CD n media was not found in the corresponding DVD CD device In boot of UEFI Embedded DVD CD UEFI DVD CD n media which is mounted on the corresponding DVD CD device was not a media which can perform booting In HDD boot of Legacy Boot HDD cannot be connected In HDD boot of Legacy Boot HDD cannot be recognized In HDD boot of Legacy Boot nothing can be written in HDD In DVD CD boot of Legacy Boot DVD CD device cannot be recognized In DVD CD boot of Legacy Boot media was not found in the corresponding DVD CD device In DVD CD boot of Legacy Boot media which is mounted in the corresponding DVD CD device was a media which can perform booting In PXE boot of Legacy Boot LAN cable cannot be connected In PXE boot of Legacy Boot setting of server side could not be done In boot of UEFI PXE Boot MAC MAC addr LAN cable cannot be connected In boot of UEFI PXE Boot MAC MAC addr the server side could not be set UEFI Menu Operations
466. optional Sets the host name in FQDN format IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address MMB 1 IP Address Sets the physical IP address assigned to the MMB 1 interface This item is available only if the system has MMB 1 You cannot access the Web UI from this interface Unless MMB 0 is mounted the window does not display the MMB 1 IP Address table Interface Enable Disable Hostname optional Sets the host name in FQDN format IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address DNS optional Sets whether to use the DNS server DNS Sets whether to use the DNS server To use the DNS select Enable The default is Disable DNS Server 1 Sets the IP address of the Primary DNS server DNS Server 2 Sets the IP address of the Secondary DNS server DNS Server 3 Sets the IP address of the Third DNS server Management LAN Duplicates the management LAN Dualization Duplicates the management LAN The default is Disable Maintenance IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable the CE REMCS LAN interface The default is Disable IP Address Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask Gateway address Sets the gateway IP address SMTP address Sets the SMTP IP address Internal IP Address Interface Sets whether to enable or disable t
467. ork Protocols window You can configure the network protocols of the MMB in the Network Protocols window FIGURE 1 72 Network Protocols window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MAMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXNNNX FU Serial Number J Status Normal gt Netwock Configuration gt Netwoek Protocols Network Protocols Help SGeeceaos eigieca Cick the Apply Button to apply all changes Web HTTP HTTPS 1 Enable Disable Cancel TABLE 1 98 Setting and display items in the Network Protocols window Items Description Web HTTP HTTPS HTTP Sets Enable or Disable for HTTP The default is Disable HTTP Port Sets the port number used for HTTP The default is 8081 HTTPS Sets Enable or Disable for HTTPS The default is Disable MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description HTTPS Port Sets the port number used for HTTPS The default is 432 Timeout Sets the length of time before a time out due to no input causes the termination of an HTTP or HTTPS connection You can specify 0 or a value in a range of 60 to 9999 0 means there is no time out The default is 600 seconds Telnet Telnet Sets Enable or Disable for Telnet The default is Disable Telnet Port Sets the port number used for Telnet The default is 23 Timeout Sets the length of time before a time out due to no input causes the termination of a Telnet connectio
468. ork can be performed without stopping application software Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a activated partition Active partition for work For maintenance work on a partition that is still operating while under maintenance This work can be performed without stopping application software Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partition Partition stopped for work For maintenance work on the partition under maintenance or the partition containing the target maintenance unit The partition must be stopped during maintenance The partitions not under maintenance need not be stopped Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker on Stopped standby for work For maintenance work that requires the system to be stopped All applications are forcibly stopped during maintenance operation Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breaker off Stopped AC off for work For maintenance work that requires the system to be stopped and the AC power to be turned off MMB power off All applications are forcibly stopped during maintenance operation The following sections outline the Web UI menus that are available in maintenance mode for each type of user privilege 1 1 Li Zi La a Wi 7 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Administrator 8 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Operator 9 Web UI menus in maintenance mode Partition Operator 10 Web
469. ormat YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Source Displays the name of the sensor where an event or error occurred Unit Displays the unit with the sensor where an event or error occurred For example displays SB 0 if an error occurs in CPU 0 of SB 0 This unit retrieves FRU with this sensor from Entity ID of the sensor and also retrieves Parent Entity from Entity Association Record It displays Board Unit name described in FRU Record of parent entry It is linked to the window Window on which part number and serial number of each unit can be referenced showing detailed status of each unit Part Number Displays the part number stored in system event log If part number is not stored His displayed Event ID Displays the ID 8 digits in hexadecimal system for identifying contents of Event For details on the allocation of the Event ID see Chapter 2 MMB Message of PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Description Displays the contents of Events and Errors Remarks For the event of insertion removal of the board part number and serial number of board are displayed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 133 Buttons on System Event Log Window Buttons Description Clear All Events When you click Clear All Events button all the events saved in system event log are cleared This is used only if Field engineer instructs to do so Download After the confirmation message is display
470. ort Disabled UEFI PXE iSCSI information Legacy PXE Legacy ISCSI Disabled A 2 3 Setting Items on CPU Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on CPU Configuration window TABLE A 34 Setting Items of CPU Configuration Window Setting item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks Hyper threading Enabled Disable Enable Active All All Processor Cores OONDOARWN Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting item Initial value Values that can be set Remarks 10 11 WE 13 W I Hardware Enabled Disable Prefetcher Enable Adjacent Cache Enabled Disable Line Prefetch Enable DCU Streamer Enabled Disable Prefetcher Enable DCU Ip Enabled Disable Prefetcher Enable Execute Disable Enabled Disable Bit Enable Intel Enabled Disable Virtualization Enable Technology Intel R VT d Disabled Disable Enable Power Energy Efficient Disabled Technology Energy Efficient Custom Enhanced Enabled Disable Displayed when Custom SpeedStep Enable is selected on Power Technology Turbo Mode Enabled Disable Displayed when Custom Enable is selected on Power Technology Energy Performance Performance Displayed when Custom Performance Balanced Performance is selected on Power
471. ot Manager Tries the boot of Windows Boot Manager Boot success Windows Boot 2 EFI USB Device 3 EFI Network Device 4 FujitsuVirtualCDROMO01 00 5 EFl USBDevice2 6 Fujitsu Virtual Floppy0 1 00 7 UEFI Internal Shell Starts UEFI Shell UEFI Menu Operations E f boot of Windows Server 2008 on UEFI Aware operating system fails or if UEFI is booted from USB Device TABLE 3 6 Boot failure of Windows Server 2008 UEFI Boot success of EFI USB Device UEFI Boot specifications Flow of start up 1 Windows Boot Manager Tries the boot of Windows Boot Manager Boot Failure 2 EFI USB Device Boot Start up 3 UEFI Network Device 4 Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO 1 00 5 EFI USB Device 2 7 EFI Internal Shell Starts UEFI Shell 6 Fujitsu Virtual FloppyO 1 00 E f boot of Windows Boot Manager EFI Network Device and EFI USB Device fails or if booted from Legacy Floppy TABLE 3 7 If boot of Windows Boot Manager EFI Network Device and EFI USB Device fails or if booted from Legacy Floppy UEFI Boot specifications Flow of start up 1 Windows Boot Manager Tries the boot of Windows Boot Manager Boot Failure 2 EFI USB Device Boot Failure 3 EFI Network Device Boot Failure 4 Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO 1 00 Tries the Legacy operating system Boot from high priority Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Boot Failure 5 EFI
472. ow TABLE A 36 Setting Items of PCI Subsystem Configuration Window Setting item Initial value Setting value Remarks PCI ROM EFI Compatible ROM Legacy ROM Priority EFI Compatible ROM ASPM Support Disabled Disabled Auto Limit to LOs Number of bus 1 il Padded to slot 2 We A 36 Setting Items on IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Window Following table lists the initial value and the values that can be set for Setting Items on IOU OpROM Scan Configuration window TABLE A 37 Setting Items of IOU OpROM Scan Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Slot 1 OPROM Disabled Enabled Settings for DU 0Slot 0 DU Disabled Slot 2 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0 of IOU 0 Slot 30pROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 10f IOU 0 Slot 40pROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 2o0f IOU 0 Slot 50pROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 30f IOU 0 Slot 17 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for DU 0 Slot 1 DU Disabled Slot 18 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0of IOU 1 Slot 19 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express e Disabled slot 10f IOU 1 A 2 7 Appendix A List of Setting Items Window Following table lists the initial value and the val
473. ow You can back up and restore the MMB configuration information from the Backup Restore MMB Configuration window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 91 Backup Restore MMB Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCNXXNXXX Fujitsu Serial Namber es eg States Nevin al System Partition User Adminstration Network Configuration gt Mantenance gt Backup Restore Contigmration gt Backup Restoce MMB Configuration Backup MMB Configuration Help To backup the MMB Cocfiguration click Backup button Backup Restore MMB Configuration To restore the MMB Configuration select a file and click Restore button ca Restore 1 Menu Operation Maintenance Backup Restore Configuration Backup Restore MMB Configuration 2 Window Operations Backing up MMB configuration information 1 Click the Backup button The save destination dialog box of the browser appears Select the save destination path in the save destination dialog box Then click the OK button This downloads the MMB configuration file The default name of the backup file of the MMB configuration information is as follows MMB_ backup date _ MMB version dat N Restoring MMB configuration information Confirm that the system has completely stopped 2 Click the Browse button to select the backup file of the MMB configuration 3 Click the Restore button This sends the file to t
474. owing messages are displayed when the following console command is executed when other users have already executed the console command and the Text Console connection to BMC can be done compulsorily by inputting as Y In that case the compulsion cutting is done as for the console command under the connection Console redirection already in use If needed the current user can be disconnected Do you really want to force disconnect current user Y N Privilege Administrator Operator CE 1 Input format console lt timeout gt quite 2 Option timeout Sets timeout value Set by 0 or within the range of 1 120 minutes 0 consists of the special meaning it indicates no Timeout Default setting is 10 minutes Perform the operation by default value when this option is not specified quiet Executes the command without interactive operation with User 3 Usage example Example In case of Login to BMC console MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Example When logged in to BMC by timeout value of 20 minutes console 20 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid Failed to execute console command Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this system System Configuration Failed
475. own lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects an entry Note Don t operate F2 key Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it 6 5 Create a dump device Menu This is displayed when the Create a dump device menu is selected in the main menu Specify operation creating dump device or selecting created dump device Create a dump device Create a dump device p se select the dump FIGURE 6 8 Dump device create menu TABLE 6 7 Displayed contents of menu selection area Item Description Create mode Select create mode of dump device Single Create with single disk or single partition To set up for redundancy select Single and then configure multiple sadump devices Multiple Create with multiple disks Use this when system memory is large and one disk is insufficient The default is Single Disk selection Go to dump device select menu Exit Exits this menu Setting of sadump environment TABLE 6 8 Displayed contents of the help display area for operation Item Description tl Move Highlight Moves the cursor up or down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects an entry Note Don t operate F2 key Esc key is displayed on the screen but don t operate it 6 6 Select device Menu This is displayed when the Create mode menu is set to Single in the Create a dump device menu Select disk or disk partition and create dump device Data corruption ACAUTION Confir
476. pRUM Sca 1 Page Information Display IOU OpROM Scan Configuration is displayed 2 Menu Selection Menu is shown in the TABLE 3 25 Display Contents of Menu Selection Item Display Contents TABLE 3 25 Display Contents of Menu Selection Remarks Slot 1 OpROM DU Sets enable disable of Legacy OpROM of mounted PCI cards Enabled Disabled Default setting is Disabled Settings for DU 0Slot 0 Slot 2 OpROM Sets enable disable of Legacy OpROM of Settings for PCI Express mounted PCI cards slot 0 of IOU O Enabled Disabled Default setting is Disabled Slot 3 OpPROM Sets enable disable of Legacy OpROM of Settings for PCI Express mounted PCI cards slot 1 of IOU O Enabled Disabled Default setting is Disabled Slot 4 OpROM Sets enable disable of Legacy OpROM of Settings for PCI Express mounted PCI cards slot 2 of IOU 0 UEFI Menu Operations Slot 5 OpROM Enabled Disabled Sets enable disable of Legacy OpROM of mounted PCI cards Enabled Disabled Default setting is Disabled Default setting is Disabled Settings for PCI Express slot 3 of IOU O Slot 17 OpROM DU Sets enable disable of Legacy OpROM of mounted PCI cards Enabled Disabled Default setting is Disabled Settings for DU 0Slot 1 Slot 18 OpDROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card which is mounted Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled
477. partial_mirror spare quiet set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet set partition pci_express_mode lt partition gt flexible fixed set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb exit_code show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt console lt partition gt lt timeout gt quiet nmi partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet reset partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt
478. partition home lt partition gt SB lt SB gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When setting SB 2 as Home in Partition3 set partition home 3 SB 2 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified SB number is invalid The specified SB x is Not present Unable to change the home SB while the partition is running Please try to change the home SB after the partition is shutdown Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance Succeed to set partition home command Failed to execute set partition home command Failed to execute S command The specified command is not supported error s set partition lan_device_mode LAN Device Mode is set by the IOU unit in the specified partition Default value set is wol_ disable wol_ enable Onboard LAN enabled with AC On wol_ disable Onboard LAN enabled with Partition On device_disable Onboard LAN device disabled always For the partition which is already powered ON when the settings are performed by this command following message is displayed and
479. pecified For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 5 11 Alarm E Mail window You can set e mail notification for when an event occurs in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server in the Alarm E Mail window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 87 Alarm E Mail window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active IMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Namber CERT Status Notmal gt Network Configuration gt Alerm E Mai Alarm E Mail Chick the Apply Banon to apply gl changes Enable O Disable CR SC SLSSGR e SS egk Cancel Fiter Test E Mad TABLE 1 123 Setting and display items in the Alarm E Mail window Items Description Alarm E Mail Sets whether to send Alarm E Mail notification for an event that has occurred Enable Disable From Sets the e mail address of the sender If the Use envelope from address check box is checked the From address is set as the sender s e mail address used when sending an e mail The default is unchecked Upon receiving an alarm e mail the mail server sets the set From address for Return Path in the e mail header Also if a mailing list is used the Return Path setting is the administrator s address on the mailing list instead of the set From address However the Return Path setting depends on the mail server settings Therefore Return
480. play contents of operation help display Items Description 1 Move Highlight Moves the cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the items Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving the setting changes of this menu 3 4 8 UEFI Menu Operations PCl_Box OpROM Scan Configuration menu The settings of Option ROM of the PCI card which is mounted on each PCI_Box can be done in the PCI_Box OpROM Scan Configuration menu The example of window displayed immediately after starting the PCl_Box OpROM Scan Configuration menu is shown below FIGURE 3 19 Example of display of IPC Box OpROM Scan Configuration menu o Cem No E N 3 n PCI Box OpROM Scan Configuration 1 Page information display It is displayed as PCl_Box OpROM Scan Configuration 2 Menu selection The menu shown in TABLE 3 27 Display contents of menu selection is displayed TABLE 3 27 Display contents of menu selection Items Display contents Remarks Slot 65 OpROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 0 of PCl_Box 0 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 66 ODROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting for PCI Express which is mounted slot 1 of PCl_Box 0 Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Slot 67 ODROM Enables disables Legacy ODROM of the PCI card Setting
481. plays the partition name hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove Partition control sadump sadump instruction MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Administrator Outline reset Hard Reset instruction nmi NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection console Text Console connection to partition DR related DR related commands MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Displays the active MMB help Permitted Help information System configuration set mmb control reset Resets the MMB set mmb control switch_over Switch Over the MMB add user Adds User show user _list Displays Users TABLE 2 12 MMB CLI commands CE Command Administrator Outline Power control power off Turns the power off power on Turns the power on Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show partition configuration Displays the partition configuration set reserved_sb show reserved_sb Sets the Reserved SB Displays the Reserved SB set partition home show partition home Sets the Home SB Displays the Home SB set partition dynamic_partitioning Set
482. ply and above mentioned message is not displayed Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only the Partition to be managed 1 Input format set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt disable enable quiet 2 Option quiet Does not display message 3 Usage example Example When Dynamic Reconfiguration of partition 3 is enabled set partition dynamic_partitioning 3 enable 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute set partition dynamic_partitioning command Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown DP can t be enabled because of no DP license set gateway Default gateway is set Set value is 0 0 0 0 by default Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set gateway lt ip address gt MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified gateway addr
483. port in which iSCSI booting is executed can be selected in MAC selection menu Example of window display immediately after the start up of MAC Selection menu is as follows UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 24 Display example of MAC Selection menu EEN em DEE em FA dE 1 Page information display It is displayed as MAC Selection 2 Menu selection Selection menu shown in TABLE 3 31 Display contents of menu selection is displayed TABLE 3 31 Display contents of menu selection Item Display content MAC xXX XX XX XX XX XX Displays menu Remarks XX XX XX XX XX XX is MAC address iSCSI configurable device is displayed in MAC address format Commit Changes and Exit Saves the content having the setting changes and exit from this menu Discard Changes and Exit Cancels the content having the setting changes and exit from this menu 3 Operation help display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 32 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 32 Display contents of operation help display Item Description N Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects the item Esc Exit Returns to 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu 3 4 9 2 UEFI Menu Operations Attempt Configuration Menu As for the Attempt xxxx which is selected from 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu or the netwo
484. pply button for all changes to take effect MMB IP Address IP Address Dees PRIMEQUEST1541346003_ IP Address Eoo S Gateway address DNS optional DNS O Enable Disable DNS Ser DNS Server 2 KH DNS Server 3 ES Management LAN Dualization Enable Disable v MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 69 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B 2 FUJITSU System User Administration Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 Serial Number ima Status ormal nae IPv6 Interface 3 O Enable Disable Maintenance IP Address Tn gt OE nable Disable O Enable Disable TABLE 1 93 Setting and display items in the IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2800B EA Items Description MMB IP Address IP Address Sets the virtual IPv6 IP address for Web UI access Hostname Sets the host name in FQDN format You can enter the following characters a z A Z 0 9 hyphen period Only the above characters can be specified Also the following restrictions apply The character string must begin with an alphabetic character The character string cannot begin or end with the following character specified hyphen or period The default is PRIMEQUEST Product Serial Number For example if the serial number is 102051600
485. r 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks connected this menu is not displayed PCI_Box 0 RO Displays the PCI_Box PCI_Box 1 RO status PCI_Box 2 RO The menu is not PCI_Box 3 RO displayed for an unmounted PCI_Box OPL RO MMB MMB 0 RO Displays the MMB MMB 1 RO status and information Disk Enclosure Disk RO Enclosure x Partition Power Control RO Controls the partition power Schedule Schedule RO Sets scheduled Control operations Schedule List RO Sets the power on off schedule Console RO Sets Video Redirection Redirection Setup Remote Storage and Text Console Redirection IPv4 Console RO Setting for IPv4 Console Redirection Redirection Setup IPv6 Console RO Setting for IPv6 Console Redirection Redirection Setup Partition RO Changes the partition Configuration configuration SB RO IOU n RO PCI_Box n RO Reserved SB RO Defines a Reserved SB Configuration Power RO Management Setup Partition 0 If no board belongs to the partition this submenu is not displayed Information RO Displays the partition status and partition related information ASR Control RO Sets the conditions for automatically restarting the partition Console N A Displays the console Redirection output of the partition Mode RO Sets the mode for the partition Partition 1 Same as for Partition 0 Partition 2 Partition 3 User Administration User List N A Lists edits and deletes registered user MMB
486. r setting of priority level is changed Change Boot Order 1 423 FIGURE 3 48 Display example of Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order menu FIGURE 3 49 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 1 FIGURE 3 50 Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 1 ENEE 426 FIGURE 3 51 Change of priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order DI ENEE 426 FIGURE 3 52 Change of the priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order i NENNEN 427 FIGURE 3 53 Display Example of Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order Mem 428 FIGURE 3 54 Change of the Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 1 429 Preface FIGURE 3 55 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order OG EEN 430 FIGURE 3 56 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 1 ENEE 430 FIGURE 3 57 Change in Priority Level Set Legacy HardDisk Drive Order 2 431 FIGURE 3 58 Example of Displayed Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order Men ENEE 432 FIGURE 3 59 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 1 FIGURE 3 60 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 FIGURE 3 61 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order ONE 435 FIGURE 3 62 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order GO ENEE 435 FIGURE 3 63 Display example of the Set Legacy NET Drive Order men AEN FIGURE 3 64 Change Set Legacy NET Drive Order 1 of priority level ENEE FIGURE 3 65 Change of Priority
487. r the last command executed Firmware revision status version check show update_status Displays the batch firmware update progress Network survey commands netck traceroute Permitted Permitted Displays a list of network routes netck arptbl Permitted Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck arping Permitted Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck ifconfig Permitted Permitted Displays the network environment setup status netck stat Permitted Permitted Displays a list of port numbers being used REMCS related commands set maintenance_ip Sets the REMCS network show maintenance_ip Permitted Permitted Displays the REMCS network setting DR related hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove set partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Sets DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Permitted Displays DR state of partition MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations TABLE 2 5 MMB CLI commands User set http Command User Outline Power control power off Turns the power off power on Turns the power on Partition control sadump sadump instruction reset Hard Reset instruction nmi NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection console Text Console connection to partition Partition creation add partition Adds a partition component remove partition Removes a partition component show
488. r_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb exit_code show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt console lt partition gt lt timeout gt quiet nmi partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet reset partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet sadump partition lt partition gt lt partition gt quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Message 2 3 32 2 3 33 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations netck traceroute The network route from the specified IP address to the target host is displayed in the list Remarks Support only IPv4 Privilege All 1 Input format netck traceroute lt ip gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example netck traceroute 10 2 3 4 traceroute to 10 2 3 4 10 2 3 4 30 hops max 40 byte packets 1 10 2 4 1 10 2 4 1 0 822 ms 5 142 ms 0 59 ms 2 10 2 5 1 10 2 5 1 0 923 ms 0 747 ms 0 679 ms 3 10 2 6 1 10 2 6 1 0 955 ms 0 736 ms 0 71 ms
489. ram identifier nn of collaboration program name must be omitted An example of a collaboration program name is shown below e g Package name is FJSVxxx and collaboration program are get cpu info and get node info collaboratino program name 10 FJSVxxx get cpu info 20 FJUSVxxx get node info configuration file of collaboration program FJSVxxx get cpu info conf FJSVxxx get node info conf 5 2 6 Method of describing configuration file of collaboration program How to write a configuration file of a collaboration program is as follows lt Setting itme gt lt Setting value gt Setting Setting value item verbose set of verbose mode true or false When true is set to verbose item collaboration program is executed called with v argument which indicates verbose mode Default value is false timeout timeout period of collaboration program For assignable value please refer to 5 2 3 Timeout of collaboration program 5 2 7 5 2 8 Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation If a collaboration program is executed in verbose mode standard output and standard error output of the collaboration program is output to a special log file Other outputs of collaboration program which executed in non verbose mode are output to system log as well as log of DR command For the log of collaborate program refer to the following 5 2 10 Output of collaboration program Configuration file of collaboration program is not indisp
490. ram terminates abnormally and DR function cannot be continued the collaboration program must return non 0 Hot plug collaboration function checks the return value of the collaboration program If return value is not 0 hot plug collaboration function stops at the time Output of collaboration program Standard output stdout and standard error output stderr from collaboration program output to system log But when collaboration program executes in verbose mode stdout and stderr output to a file in the following directory In this case file name becomes collaboration program name log And the output does not output to system log opt FJSVdp util var log Form of the outputs is as follows lt time gt dp util lt collaboration program name gt lt INFO ERR gt lt output of collaboration program gt Example of output is shown below e g When standard error output and standard output of 10 FJSVxxx get cup info output to system log Jul 12 22 05 00 dp util 10 FJSVxxx get cpu info ERR Invalid Option Jul 12 22 06 00 dp util 15 FJSVxxx get mem info INFO Good news memory will be added 1 YB Flow of collaboration program execution Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation Dynamic addition of SB Set the followig options to collaboration program p SBx e ADD_PRE c x y m xxx kB n x y Execute collaboration programs in ascending order of program file names Success Failure Add CPU and memory de
491. rating system Boot and Legacy operating system Boot fails and if UEFI Start up is successful 365 366 TABLE 3 9 Displayed contents of operation help display TABLE 3 10 Displayed contents of menu selection uae ide es 1 367 TABLE 3 11 Displayed contents of operation help display 368 TABLE 3 12 Display Contents of the System Information Dip ENEE 369 TABLE 3 13 Display Contents of Help Operation Display ENEE 369 TABLE 3 14 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 370 TABLE 3 15 Display contents of Display of Operation bel ENEE 371 TABLE 3 16 Reflection of LAN Remote Boot Configuration Menu a a 1 O71 TABLE 3 17 Display contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 372 TABLE 3 18 Display contents of Display of Operation bel ENEE 372 TABLE 3 19 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 376 TABLE 3 20 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 378 TABLE 3 21 Display Contents of Menu Selection ENEE 379 TABLE 3 22 Display Contents of Operation Help Display ENEE 380 TABLE 3 23 Display Contents Of Menu Gelechon ENEE 381 TABLE 3 24 Display Contents of Operation Help Display EEN 381 TABLE 3 25 Display Contents of Menu Gelechon ENEE 382 TABLE 3 26 Display contents of operation help denn EEN 384 TABLE 3 27 Display contents Of MENU selection EEN 385 TABLE 3 28 Display contents of operation help denen EEN 390 TABLE 3 29 Display contents of Menu Selection i ei ie ws 392 TABLE 3 30 Display contents of Operation He
492. ration Privilege All 1 Input format netck stat 2 Option None 3 Usage example netck stat Active Internet connections w o servers Proto Recv Q Send Q Local Address Foreign Address State tcp 0 0 PRIME123063 telnet 10 1 2 3 4015 TIME_WAIT 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid 5 Process Clears the internal information like Private LAN etc from netstat tuwn MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 3 37 show dynamic_partitioning status Displays the progress of Dynamic Reconfiguration Privilege All 1 Input format show dynamic_partitioning status 2 Option None 3 Usage example Example When SB 3 is to be added to Partition 2 show dynamic_partitioning status Adding SB 3 to Partition 2 running 35 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Adding SB d to Partition d completed Adding OU d to Partition d completed Removing SB d from Partition d completed Removing IOU d from Partition d completed not executed The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB F
493. ration window Items Description Engine ID Sets the Engine ID You can use alphanumeric characters spaces and the following characters I 8 amp 2 lt gt _ However the following restrictions apply The character string cannot begin with a space or The character string cannot end with a space For an explanation of the setting and display items other than Engine ID see TABLE 1 104 Setting and display items in the SNMP Trap window window TABLE 1 107 Buttons in the SNMP v3 Configuration window Buttons Description Apply Sets the specified information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SNMP Configuration SNMPv3 Configuration 2 Window Operations Correcting the information on the selected user 1 Check the check box of the user Then enter any necessary information Finally click the Apply button MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations This enables the information on the selected user Meanwhile the SNMP Service stops once and then restarts Disabling the selected user 1 Check the check box of the user to set to disable Leave the User Name blank Then click the Apply button This disables the selected user Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _00013
494. ration window 2 Items Description Select All defined Restores the BIOS configuration information in all the partitions if this check box is partitions s checked Displays a partition identification number 0 to 3 You can select a partition for restoration by checking a check box on the left Partition Name Displays the name assigned to the partition BIOS Version Displays the current BIOS version installed on the partition TABLE 1 129 Buttons in the Restore BIOS Configuration window 2 Buttons Description Restore Restores the BIOS configuration information file Cancel Cancels restoration of the BIOS configuration file 1 Menu Operation Maintenance Backup Restore Configuration Restore BIOS Configuration 2 Window Operations 1 Click the Browse button in the Restore BIOS Configuration window 1 Select the BIOS configuration backup file stored on a remote PC 2 Click the Upload button This sends the BIOS configuration file to the MMB and displays the Restore BIOS Configuration window 2 3 Select the partition for restoration in the Restore BIOS Configuration window 2 Then click the Restore button This restores the BIOS configuration information file Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00064 Restore completed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations
495. ray is removed once it is not possible to select the original radio button again When the Home SB is not set the SB which is initially installed in the partition by default is considered as the Home SB However when the Home SB is removed and degenerated SB with smallest number is the Home SB 2 Click the Apply button Confirmation dialogue box is displayed 3 Click the OK button when you want to continue the processing Click the Cancel button when you want to cancel the processing 4 Click the Apply or the Cancel button Return to Partition Configuration window When the Apply button is clicked and the power supply of the target partition is ON change of Home is not possible A warning dialogue box is displayed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E 00022 The partition doesn t have a node W_00423 The partition home cannot be changed while the partition is running Please try to change the partition home after the partition is shutdown For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 3 5 Reserved SB Configuration window In the Reserved SB Configuration window the Partition which is to be considered as a Reserved SB for an Free SB defined as Free or Reserved SB of the Partition can be defined Reserved SB i
496. rding to the type and the pattern of the schedule Daily Starting month and date and ending month and date Weekly Starting month and ending month Monthly Starting month and ending month Default setting is as follows Daily From Jan 1 To Jan 1 Note It is executed only on January 1 Weekly From Jan To Jan Note It is executed only in January Monthly From Jan To Jan Note It is executed only in January On Time Displays the time when the process of Power On is executed on the specified execution day Time specifies 24 hours Minute indicates the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 Off Time Displays the time when the process of Power Off is executed on the specified execution day Time indicates 24 hours Minute indicates the interval of 10 minutes as 00 10 20 30 40 and 50 TABLE 1 61 Schedule List Window Buttons Buttons Description Add If Add button is clicked Add Schedule window appears and the schedule can be added Edit If EDIT button is clicked Edit Schedule window appears and the schedule can be changed Remove If Remove button is clicked the selected schedule can be deleted Cancel If Cancel button is clicked the browser returns to the previous window 1 Menu Operation Partition Schedule Schedule List 2 Window Operations If the schedule is to be added newly 1 Click Add button Add Edit Schedule window
497. re RO RO RO RO Displays firmware Information version information System Setup RW RO RO RW Sets the system configuration Power Control RW RW RO RO Controls the power Schedule Schedule RW RW RO RO Sets scheduled Control operations Schedule RW RW RO RO Sets the power on off List schedule Console RW RO RO RO Sets Video Redirection Redirection Remote Storage and Setup Text Console Redirection IPv4 RW RO RO RO Setting for IPv4 Console Console Redirection Redirection Setup IPv6 RW RO RO RO Setting for IPv6 Console Console Redirection Redirection Setup Power RW RO RO RO Management Setup ASR Control RW RO RO RO Sets the conditions for automatically restarting the partition Console RW RW N A RO Displays the console Redirection output of the partition Mode RW RW RO RO Sets the mode for the partition LEDs RW RW RW RW Displays the LED status Power Supply RW RO RO RW Displays the power supply status Fans RW RO RO RW_ Displays the fan status Temperature RO RO RO RO Displays the MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation 1st level 2nd level Privileges Remarks bar Admin Operator User CE temperatures detected by the temperature sensors of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system SB SB 0 RW RW RO RW_ Displays the SB status SB 1 RW RW RO RW The menu is not SB 2
498. re are 0 3 Partitions However only the partitions with SB and IOU registration are displayed P Displays only In case of the PRIMEQUEST 2800E model Partition Name Displays the name of the Partition Power Status Displays the Power Status of the Partition On Standby System Progress The status of the partition progress is displayed Power Off The partition power is off Power On In Progress Partition power on is in process Reset The status of the partition from the beginning of reset till the completion of the operating system boot MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Power Control Force Power Off Delay Items Description provide management interface to the outside EFI The UEFI menu screen is displayed Boot Operating system is being booted Operating system Running Operating system running state Operating system Shutdown Operating system shutting down Panic Panic Only in RHEL Power Off In Progress Partition power off is in process Fatal Stopped Dumping The dumping is being output Halt Halting Stop Error Stop error Only in Windows Remarks i When SVAS Server View Agentless Service is not installed to partition the display is not switched over in Operating system Running even if Operating system is working Moreover for Operating system shutdown Panic commanded by SVAS if SVAS is not installed there is no display SVAS Specifi
499. re between 0 5 pop up window appears containing a message as Please enter enough characters Press Enter to continue Delete Boot option menu Delete Boot option menu deletes the specified boot option from boot order The following window shows the window display example of Delete Boot option menu UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 41 Display example of Delete Boot option menu Delete Boot Option 1 Page information display It is displayed as Delete Boot Option 2 Menu selection The boot option with a high priority level of automatic boot is displayed in order from top 3 Operation help menu Description of operation key is shown in TABLE 3 53 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 53 Display contents of operation help display Items Description tl Move Highlight Moves cursor in up and down direction lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager E Boot option removal Removal of boot option is executed according to the following procedure 1 Place the cursor on the boot option which is to be removed 2 Press Space key As shown in Deletion screen 1 of FIGURE 3 42 boot option is changed to X UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 42 Delete window 1 of boot option Delete Boot Option Remarks Press Space key again when delete is cancelled When Space key is pressed again chang
500. rev ba rev ba rev ba rev ba rev ba rev ba ee ei pee ee rms ae A Rea ween een S NE AE en EO 09 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 09 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0c 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0c 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0f 00 0 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 0f 00 1 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 5 1 5 5 1 5 1 Synopsis opt FJSVdp util sbin dp help report 5 1 5 2 Description Information gathering dr report subcommand This is the subcommand for gathering information for investigation 5 1 5 3 Options Argument Meaning Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation help Print the synopsis of report subcommand 5 1 5 4 Example 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 e g opt FJSVdp util sbin dp report Create report file at tmp dpreport localhost 20130101 123456 tar bz2 Hot plug collaboration function Description of collaboration function The resources CPU and memory and IO resource of SB or IOU increases or decreased by the DR operation If external software depends on quantities or location of these resources they are affected by DR operation For this case if the desired programs ca
501. ric value is entered in the following format X XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX hexadecimal By default itis 0 Authentication Type Sets the Authentication Type None CHAP By default it is CHAP CHAP Type Sets the CHAP Type When Authentication Type is set to None this item is not displayed One way Mutual By default it is One way CHAP Name Enters CHAP user name When Authentication Type is set to None this item is not displayed Number of characters that can be entered is 125 Remarks Types of characters that can be entered are given below 0 9 A Z a Z amp 4 3 lt gt Y l CHAP Secret Enters CHAP password When Authentication Type is set to None this item is not displayed Number of characters that can be entered is in the range of 12 16 Remarks lf number of characters are not enough then pop up window of Please enter enough characters Press ENTER to continue is displayed Types of characters that can be entered are given below 0 9 A Z a 2 amp i lt gt IT Ui Revers CHAP Name Enters CHAP user name When CHAP Type is set to One way this item is not displayed also when Authentication Type is set to None this item is not displayed Number of characters that can be entered is 125 Remarks Types of characters that can be entered are given below 0 9 A Z a Z amp 4 3 lt gt MT Uh Revers CHAP Secret Enters CHAP password When CHAP Type is set to One
502. rive is displayed on the window Or when Disable is displayed in Floppy Drive N the boot function of Floppy Drive N is Disable is shown FIGURE 3 48 Display example of Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order menu 1 Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 1 U U i U Mo x e mmn me e oa ae e pm e E e E E wm 3 1 Page information display It is displayed as Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order 2 Menu Selection Selection menu shown in TABLE 3 57 Display contents of menu selection is displayed TABLE 3 57 Display contents of menu selection Items Description Floppy Drive N Switchover to change the order of Floppy boot When this item is N 0 1 executed pop up window is displayed and the settings can be changed After this changing method is described in detail in I Change in priority level Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order Commit Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after saving the set contents Discard Changes and Exit Exit from this menu after cancelling the set contents UEFI Menu Operations 3 Operation help display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 58 Display contents of operation help display TABLE 3 58 Display contents of operation help display Items Description tl Move Highlight Moves cursor in up and down direction lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page
503. rives Count The number of physical drives missed to compose a logical drive at the RAID level is displayed RAID Action Progress Estimated time Drive Type The drive type that the RAID action is executed is displayed S Physical Hardware RAID Logical _ Software RAID Slot Sensor Slot from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Physical and Sensor from which the RAID action is executed is shown when Drive Type is Logical Action The RAID action under execution is displayed s Rebuilding It is shown for a physical drive to execute the rebuild of the RAID drive g MDC Running It is shown for a logical drive to execute MDC Make Data Consistent Progress The progress rate of the RAID action under execution is displayed by the percentage The remaining time that will be expected by the time the RAID action under execution is TPM remaining completed is displayed hh mm ss Chipset Chipset ipse R OK A Warning S Failed MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TPM Displays the status of the TPM 7 OK Warning Z Failed Notes When the SB is without TPM mode this field is not displayed Remark The TPM is not displayed in the SB for China BMC BMC Displays the status of the BMC OK Warning id Failed FBU FBU Displays the status of the FBU Flash Backup Unit 2 OK 7 Failed Clock Clock Displays the
504. rk port MAC XX XX XX XX XX XX Which is selected from 3 4 9 1 MAC Selection Menu various settings related to iSCSI Boot can be done in Attempt Configuration menu The settings which were changed in this menu are enabled after system reset The example of window displayed immediately after starting the Attempt Configuration menu is shown below FIGURE 3 25 Display example of Attempt Configuration Menu EEN em Rh ss 1 Page information display It is displayed as Attempt Configuration 2 Menu selection Menu shown in TABLE 3 33 Display contents of menu selection is displayed TABLE 3 33 Display contents of menu selection Item Display contents iSCSI Attempt Name Sets the name of iSCSI setting Types of characters that can be entered are given below 0 9 A Z a Z amp 3 lt gt _ I iSCSI Mode Enables disables the iSCSI boot setting Enabled for MPIO Enabled Disabled By default it is Disabled Internet Protocol Selects Internet Protocol IP4 IP6 Autoconfigure By default it is IP4 Remarks When itis set to Autoconfigure iSCSI boots with IPv4 and when it is failed it is attempted to boot iSCSI with IPv6 UEFI Menu Operations Connection Retry Count Connection Establishing Timeout Sets number of retries 0 16 By default it is 0 Sets time out value Unit is millisecond By default it is 1000
505. rror Mode is not set they are disabled Default setting is Mirror Keep Mode PCI Address Mode Shows the currently set PCI Bus number allocation Mode current status f PCI Bus Mode PCI Segment Mode The setting of PCI Address Mode is decided depending on the following conditions When the Dynamic Reconfiguration function is made effective it is necessary to set it to Segment Mode When OS does not correspond to Segment Mode it is necessary to set PCI Address Mode to Bus Mode When the TXT function is used it is necessary to set PCI Address Mode it to Bus Mode It is recommended to set PCI Address Mode to Segment Mode though it is possible to set in both Bus Mode and Segment Mode when OS corresponds to Segment Mode Please refer to Appendix of General Description C122 B025 01EN for whether OS corresponds to Segment Mode PCI Address Mode Sets the PCI Bus number allocation Mode for partition setting PCI Bus Mode PCI Segment Mode Enables the settings after rebooting the partition Default setting is PCI Segment Mode Dynamic Partitioning Displays whether Dynamic Reconfiguration Function is enabled or disabled current status Enable Disable Dynamic Partitioning Sets whether the Dynamic Reconfiguration Function is enabled or not setting Enable Enables the Dynamic Reconfiguration Function Disable Disables the Dynamic Reconfiguration Function Enables the settings after rebooting the partition Settings can be do
506. rs It is possible to use alphanumeric characters single bytes spaces Sharp Underline Hyphen in the Partition Name By default there are no settings Power Status Displays the Power status of the partition On Standby SB Displays the partition to which the SB belongs MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations IOU Items Description Displays the partition to which the IOU belongs TABLE 1 69 Partition Configuration Window Buttons Buttons Description Set Partition Name Sets the name in the partition Add Unit Displays the Add Unit window for incorporating the unit Remove unit Displays the Remove Unit window for deleting the unit Home Displays the Partition Home window for setting the Home of Partition Cancel Returns to original status without setting the information View Configuration Displays the View Partition Configuration where the configuration information of partition is displayed Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00217 Unable to set Partition Name of Partition aa because this partition is under maintenance _ 00220 Unable to set Home on Partition aa because this partition is under maintenance _ 00427 Select a partition W_00428 Only the alphanumeric character can be input to Partition Name area _ 00429 The parti
507. rtificate Certificate SSH SSH Server RW Creates a private key Key for the SSH server Remote Server RW Management Access Control RW Sets the IP filtering that permits connections Alarm E mail RW Maintenance Firmware Update Unified RW Performs a batch Firmware update Update Backup Restore Backs up and restores Configuration setting information Backup Restore RW MMB Configuration Backup EFI RW Configuration Restore EFI RW Configuration MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks Maintenance RW Performs maintenance Wizard through a wizard REMCS REMCS RW Detailed Setup RW 1 1 2 Web Ul menus Operator This section lists the Web UI menus that are available with the Operator privileges The meanings of abbreviations in the table are as follows RW The account user can refer to and set information and control operation from the menu RO The account user can only refer to information from the menu N A The account user cannot view the menu and submenus TABLE 1 3 Web UI menus Operator Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks System System Status RO Displays the overall system status System Event RO Displays system event Log logs Operation Log RO Displays the operations on the Web UI and CLI Partiti
508. rtition memory_operation_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation mode show partition memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show partition memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set partition pci_address_mode Permitted Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show partition pci_address_mode Permitted Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set partition lan_device_mode Permitted Sets LAN device mode show partition lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode show partition mirror_mode Permitted Displays the Mirror mode setting set partition name Permitted Sets the partition name show partition name Permitted _ Displays the partition name Time related set date Permitted Sets the date and time show date Permitted Displays the date and time set timezone Permitted Sets the time zone show timezone Permitted Displays the time zone MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Administrator Outline Network related set ip Permitted Sets the management LAN address set ipv6 Permitted Sets the IPv6 management LAN address show ip Permitted Displays the management LAN address show ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 management LAN address se
509. rtition unit can be set Select the partition to be displayed In case of Partition Operator All option is grayed out selection is not possible Further for filtering of the partition only the partition to be managed can be selected Default Partition Operator privilege Specified and Partition to be managed is turned on S Other than the above All Number of Specifies the number of logs to be displayed events to display The denominator represents the total number of logged events Maximum 1000 events can be displayed The default setting is100 TABLE 1 28 Buttons on the Partition Event Log Filtering Condition Window Buttons Description Apply When Apply button is clicked the log corresponding to the conditions specified is displayed on the Partition Event Log screen Cancel Returns to Partition Event Log window when Cancel button is clicked Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message W_00413 Nothing is selected W_00414 Invalid Date Format W_00426 Invalid Values Specified MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message Number Message W_00434 Invalid Time Format W_00441 Range over error 00417 Are you sure _00531 Are you sure you want to clear the Partition Event Log E 00100 Failed to set the Partition Event Log Clear For details on the messages displayed o
510. s FIGURE 1 11 System Setup Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB20 Ei Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System gt System Setup 8 a a C C C o C C C C C C System Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes 100V Power Feed Mode Single Dual Always ON chassis always powers up after AC is restored Always OFF chassis remains powered off after AC is restored x a Restore power is returned to the state that was in effect before AC was Power Restoration Policy removed or lost Schedule Sync Synchronize with the schedule Restore si Partition Power on Delay 0 sec Altitude lt 1000m w PSU Redundant Mode O Redundant Non Redundant Reserved SB Force Power OF E e Wait 2 mn System Power Save Control O Enable Disable System Power Saving Threshold W OW OW TABLE 1 32 Display Items and Setting Items in System Setup Window Items Input Voltage Power Feed Mode When information cannot be acquired it is displayed as 200V Description Displays input voltage e 100V 200V Whether power supply of PRIMEQUEST 2000 system is configured in primary power feed mode or dual power feed mode is set Single primary power feed mode R Dual dual power feed mode Default setting is Single Power
511. s E 00107 Unable to power on the chassis E 00108 Unable to power off the chassis E_00109 Unable to force power off 100212 System Power Control cannot be executed because the system is under maintenance E 00422 Unable to power on the partition aa due to CPU composition abnormal E 00482 Unable to power on the partition aa due to DIMM composition abnormal E 00491 Unable to power on the partition aa due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode E 00517 Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal SB composition E 00522 Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal VRM composition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN In case of multiple errors multiple errors message appears in the warning dialogue box 1 2 9 LEDs window LEDs window displays the status of the LED in the system MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 13 LEDs Window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number eer States Au Le e l gt System gt LEDs Refresh Help ic at ee L S a E SC Boxs0 ON PC Mass EH PC Bass EH PCL Boss Peed FrEE Displays Not present for the units which are not installed background color of those rows is displayed in gray color Following is displayed only in case of PRIMEQUEST 2400E model SB SB 0
512. s DR state of partition show partition dynamic_partitioning Displays DR state of partition set memory_operation_mode Sets Memory operation mode show memory_operation_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation mode set memory_mirror_ras_mode Sets Memory operation at mirror mode show memory_mirror_ras_mode Permitted Displays Memory operation at mirror mode set pci_address_mode Sets PCI bus number allocation mod show pci_address_mode Displays PCI bus number allocation mod set lan_device_mode Sets LAN device mode show lan_device_mode Permitted Displays LAN device mode set pci_express_mode Sets PCl express mode show pci_express_mode Displays PCl express mode set partition name Sets the partition name show partition name Displays the partition name hotadd partition Dynamic Partiiton HotAdd hotremove partition Dynamic Reconfiguration HotRemove Partition control 2 6 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Administrator Outline sadump gt sadump instruction reset Hard Reset instruction nmi NMI interrupt instruction Partition connection console Text Console connection to partition DR related DR related commands MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Displays the active MMB help Permitted H
513. s an SB which is incorporated newly in the Partition in place of a disconnected SB when the SB which was incorporated in the Partition was disconnected due to hardware problems The background color of the un mounted SB is displayed in gray FIGURE 1 50 Reserved SB Configuration Window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active MMBS0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX freu Serial Number SEMEN Status Novsnal Reserved SB Configuration Check the check boxes of the partitions to register the Reserved SB then click the Appr button Apply Cancel In case of an eight Socket Model check the number of CPUs of the SB which is incorporated in the specified Partition while setting it in the Reserved SB and check with the following mounting conditions Mounting of one CPU for a SB is possible only when the Partition is configured with one SB Mounting of two 2CPUs for a SB is mandatory when the Partition is configured with several SB MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations The Reserved SB cannot be set when TPM function is used for the Home SB The Reserved SB cannot be set though Fixed I O Mode is specified in the Partition When mounting conditions are not fulfilled a message is displayed and Reserved SB cannot be set For a partition that is set to Mirror mode if you attempt to set an SB with a DIMM configuration that does not satisfy the Mirror mode requirements as a Reserved SB for a partition that is set to Mirror mode a confirmat
514. s being installed on the IOU Displays Unknown when MAC Address is not clear PCl_Box connection PCI_Box connection is not displayed in the case of PRIMEQUEST 2800B PCIC Displays PCIC for PCI_Box connection on the IOU Status Displays the status of connection with the PDC Box OK Not connected Incorrect connection Connected to PCI_Box Displays the destination PCI_Box When not connected background color is displayed in Displays the destination Connector number of PEXU When not connected background color is displayed in Connector Displays the destination Connector number of the PEXU When not connected background color is displayed in gray Connector DU connection PCIC Displays PCIC for DU connection on the IOU Status Displays the status of connection with the DU OK Not connected Incorrect connection Connector Displays the destination Cconnector number of the DU When not connected background color is displayed in gray PCI Express Slots PCIC Displays the number of the PC Express slot Power Status Displays the power status of the IOU On Standby Slot Status Displays the status of the PCI_Express slot OK Not present Failed Disabled Link Width Displays Link Width of PCI_Express slot format x1 x2 x4 x8 Seg Bus Dev Displays Segment Bus Device of PCI Device Vendor ID Displays the Vender ID of the PCI Card Remarks ID uniq
515. s creates the private key It can take a few minutes to create When creation is completed a confirmation dialog box appears 3 To register the newly created private key click the OK button This registers the new private key To cancel registration of the new private key click the Cancel button This discards the new private key Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message 100013 Setting completed _ 00453 SSH Server Key is generated successfully To install this new SSH Server Key click OK button For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 5 9 Remote Server Management window You can specify the users who need to remotely manage the MMB via RMCP in the Remote Server Management window Up to 24 users can be registered The default settings for all users are Disabled status and No Access Also a default user name from User1 to User24 is assigned to each user For remote management of the MMB via RMCP you need to specify User Name Password and Privilege to place the users of the managed MMB in the Enabled status Remote access authentication uses the user name and password of a user in the Enabled status FIGURE 1 83 Remote Server Management window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Active MMB 0 Part Nu
516. s the subnet mask TABLE 1 91 Buttons in the IPv4 Interface window Buttons Description Apply Sets the entered information Cancel Restores the original information and does not set the specified information such as the IP address MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration Network Interface IPv4 Interface 2 Window Operations 1 Select or enter the IP address or other items of network interface information Then click the Apply button This sets the specified information such as the IP address O IPv6 Interface window You can set the IP address for MMB access and other related items in the IPv6 Interface window FIGURE 1 66 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX kica Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal m Partition User Admi nistration Click the Apply button for all changes to take effect MMB Virtual Physical IP Address Virtual IP Address PRIMEQUESTSWBG4 O LT DNS optional IPv6 Interface gt MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 67 IPv6 Interface window PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 2 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal tem Partition User inistratior gt Network Configuration gt Network
517. s then cick the Create Selfsigned Certiicate button to create a new seEsigned certificate SSL certificate status No certificate is installed 1024 2048 Country Name ISO ex JP US Create Setsigned Certificate Cancel TABLE 1 112 Display items in the Create Selfsigned Certificate window Items Description Term Sets the valid term of a selfsigned certificate as a number of days For details on other items see Create CSR window TABLE 1 113 Buttons in the Create Selfsigned Certificate window Buttons Description Create Selfsigned Certificate Creates a selfsigned certificate Cancel Cancels the creation of the certificate 1 Menu Operation MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Network Configuration SSL Create Selfsigned Certificate 2 Window Operations 1 Before creating a selfsigned certificate confirm that HTTPS is set to Disable in the Network Protocols window 2 Specify information such as the length of the secret key and the ISO country code of the owner Then click the Create Selfsigned Certificate button A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Click the OK button in the dialog box This creates the selfsigned certificate It takes a few minutes to create When creation is completed the window is updated This updated window displays the message SSL certificate status A signed certificate is installed Message
518. s which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The setting will become effective the next time the partition power off on is performed The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute set partition command Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown Unable to execute this command because you have not authority to operate this partition 2 2 01 set ssh Sets enable disable of SSH Default setting is disable SSH Disable 2 2 32 2 2 33 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set ssh enable disable 2 Option None 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB set ssh_port Set the port which receives the SSH session Default setting is 22 The port number which indicates the lt port gt are 22 1024 65535 Privilege Administrator 1 Input format set ssh_port lt port gt 2 Option None 3 Usage example None
519. sable enable quiet set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet set partition pci_express_mode lt partition gt flexible fixed set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet set ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt set ipv6 auto lt ip address gt lt prefix gt set hostname lt hostname gt lt domain name gt set maintenance_ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt lt gateway address gt lt smtp address gt set sysconf power_feed_mode single dual quiet set sysconf power_restoration_policy on off restore sync quiet set sysconf power_on_delay lt time gt quiet set sysconf altitude lt altitude gt set sysconf psu_redundant_mode redundant non_redundant quiet set mmbcontrol reset 0 1 quiet set mmbcontrol switch_over quiet set reserved_sb lt SB gt lt partition gt quiet MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations set snmp sys_location lt location gt quiet set snmp sys_contact lt concat gt quiet set snmp community lt community gt lt ip or mask gt 1 2 ro rw quiet set snmp trap lt community gt lt ip gt 1 2 quiet set snmp test_trap quiet show access_control active_mmb
520. same network segment as the MMB virtual management IP address Subnet 255 255 255 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Mask Video Disable e Enable Redirection e Disable Virtual Disable e Enable Media e Disable A 1 11 Setting Items of IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window TABLE A 11 Setting Items of IPv6 Console Redirection Setup Window Setting Initial value Setting value Remarks items IP Address None 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF 0 FFFF Prefix None 1 128 Length ee KVM Disable Enable Redirection e Disable Virtual Media Disable e Enable e Disable A 1 12 Setting Items of Power Management Setup Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Power Management Setup Window TABLE A 12 Setting Items of Power Management Setup Window Setting Initial value Setting value Remarks items Power Save Disable e Enable Grayed out when System Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Initial value Setting value Remarks items Control e Disable Power Save Control of the System Setup Window is Disable Action Partition Power Off e Continue Grayed out when Power reaching e Partition Power Off Save C
521. se start Partition once and reflect the setting of WOL when you assume the Enabled WOL enabled On board LAN Mode again after the setting is changed to Disable or Enabled WOL disabled 1 Menu Operation Partition Partition x Mode 2 Window Operations 1 Specify respective Mode and click the Apply button Confirmation dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Ok button Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E 00089 Mirror Mode setting failed E 00090 Power Control Reset setting failed E 00461 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because the DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode W_00487 Unable to change the mode because this partition is powered on E 00497 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because the CPU mismatch between SBs E 00498 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because the unsupported CPU configuration E 00499 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal CPU composition E 00500 Unable to register the specified Partition s as Mirror Mode enable because of abnormal DIMM composition MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 00501 The SB with DIMM that does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode is registered as a
522. see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 3 Operation Log Window Operation Log Window displays the log related to the settings or the operations of Web UI and CLI Each Operation Log consists of the login information Web UI CLI IP address Account of operating source FIGURE 1 5 Operation Log Window Model PRIMEQUEST2900 Active IMB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX ITSU Serial Number AEp ee States Nermal gt System gt Opera on Log Operation Log Help DateTime Operon CP Address User Name SessionlD 13 04 12 2013 04 12 110110 Partition 2 Force Power Off 10 18 107 164 Admieistraton 95 1449 34 2013 04 12 Iu 5 Se tt Web Ut 1_10101 GUI Login 101810771 e Stee Web UT 1_10110 Baegtee Power On 10 18 107 164 Admiistraton 95 i Web UI 1 10110 Partition Force Power Off 10 18 107 164 Admristrator 9 2013 04 12 14 27 05 2013 04 12 1426 11 2013 04 12 14 22 32 2013 04 12 1_10110 Partiticn 2 Power On 10 18 107 164 L a CH a a a a a a a a a D D L D 110110 Pertition 0 Force Power Off 10 18 107 90 Adiministranoa 3 mm i mmm 1_10101 GUI Login 10 18 107 164 Admiistraton 95 SCENE 2013 04 12 Lea tt 1 10107 GUT Session Timeout 10 18 107 164 Admiiswraton 2 2013 04 12 E ag 12 wWeb Ut 1_10101 GUT Login 10 18 107 184 S ch en 1 10138 CLI Logout 10 18 107 163 Admisistraton CU SEET Sa 1 10137 CLI Logi
523. ser Interface Operations FIGURE 1 48 Remove SB IOU from Partition Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Namber FST Status Nes imal Remove SB IOU from Partition Select an SB ce JOU to remove from the peetition SD hen cick the Apply Binon Appty Cance When maintenance mode Hot Partition Maintenance Warm System Maintenance or Cold System Maintenance is set only the user Maintenance person Administrator privilege who sets the maintenance mode can operate this mode If the partition is selected other than the maintenance target message is displayed and operation is not possible TABLE 1 71 Display Items and Set Items of Remove SB IOU to partition Window Items Description SB Displays SB which belongs to partition Status Displays the status of SB Number of CPUs Displays the number of CPUs mounted on the SB Memory Displays the amount of memory mounted on the SB IOU Displays the IOU which belongs to the partition Status Displays the status of the IOU Number of PCI Express slots Displays the number of PCI Express of the IOU DR When Remove is instructed for a Partition where the operating system is already running and if operating system supports Hot remove the SB IOU is removed from the concerned partition though the operation system is running state Then SB IOU is in Free status 1 Menu Operation Partition
524. server name gt who help When the PRIMEQUEST 2800E model Example 1 For the Administrator privilege help factory_default f add partition lt partition gt SB lt SB gt IOU lt IOU gt quiet clear access_control power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force power on partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt remove partition lt partition gt SB lt SB gt IOU lt IOU gt quiet set active_mmb 0 1 quiet set date MMDDhhmm CC YY ss set timezone lt timezone gt set gateway lt ip address gt set gateway_ipv6 auto lt ip address gt set http https ssh telnet enable disable set http_port https_port ssh_port telnet_port lt port gt set partition home lt partition gt SB lt SB gt set partition name lt partition gt lt partition name gt set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt disable enable quiet set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet set partition pci_express_mode lt partition gt flexible fixed set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet set ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt set ip
525. sets the entered information Deleting information such as the community 1 Delete the community and the IP address permitted access Then click the Apply button This clears the specified information Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message 100013 Setting completed For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN CJ SNMP Trap window You can set SNMP trap destinations in the SNMP Trap window You can set up to 16 trap destinations MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 75 SNMP Trap window Model PRIMEQUEST2800 Active AND Part Number MCXXNXNXX FU Serial Number FRAMED Status EAL g niestr abon gt Network Configuration gt SNMP Coetigueation gt Trap SNMP Trap Click the Apply Buron to apply all changes Trap Destination TABLE 1 104 Setting and display items in the SNMP Trap window Items Description Community User Sets the SNMP community string for SNMP v1 and v2 Alternatively it sets the user name for SNMP v3 IP Address Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of the trap destination SNMP Version Sets the SNMP version 1 2 3 Auth Sets the security level You can specify this only if 3 is selected in SNMP Version noauth Do not use the authentication function auth Use the authenticati
526. settings cannot be performed Unable to change the mode while the partition is running Please try to change the mode after the partition is shutdown For the partition which is already powered OFF when the settings are changed by this command power OFF ON is not required The value which is set is reflected instantly instead of displaying the above mentioned message Moreover also when values which are the same as the current values are set power off on is not required and the above mentioned message is not displayed 2 2 27 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only managed partition 1 Input format set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable 2 Option quiet Message is not displayed 3 Usage example Example When setting IOU 2 to Enable WOL enabled in the Partition3 set partition lan_device_mode 3 2 enable_wol_enable 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The setting will become effective the next time the partition power off on is performed The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute set partition command Unable to ch
527. sh in constant waiting time hot plug collaboration function handles it as follows 1 Send SIGTERM signal to collaboration program 2 Send SIGKILL signal to collaboration program when a collaboration program does not finish even if waiting for one minute after SIGTERM is sent This waiting time can be modified by configuration file The assignable value is shown below The default value is five minutes Set value Action 5 1024 Wait for the completion of a collaboration program at specified time The unit of value is the minute 0 Wait for the completion of a collaboration program unlimitedly 1 or less The value is out of assignable value Wait for the completion of a collaboration program at 5 minutes as default 1 4 The value is out of assignable value Wait for the completion of a collaboration program at 5 minutes as default 1025 or more The value is out of assignable value Wait for the completion of a collaboration program at 5 minutes as default Specify 0 to waiting time when collaboration program must be completed to continue DR But DR function stops until the collaboration program is completed Directory that stored collaboration program The collaboration program must be stored in the following directory opt FJSVdp util user_command The configuration file of the collaboration program must be stored in the following directory opt FJSVdp util etc Note that creating new directory under the above directories is not a
528. specification of UEFI and boot specification of legacy BIOS TABLE 3 4 Flow of startup by boot specification of UEFI and boot specification of legacy BIOS UEFI boot specification Flow of startup lt Boot priority level of UEFI Aware operating system gt Tries boot of UEFI Aware in the sequence of Boot Order 1 Windows Boot Manager Tries boot of Windows Boot Manager 2 EFI USB Device Tries boot of UEFI Aware operating system from USB Device 3 EFI Network Device Tries boot of UEFI Aware operating system from network port The legacy boot option from each legacy device described as follows is an example The UEFI boot option whose priority level is lower than the legacy boot option is not booted automatically 4 Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO 1 00 Tries legacy operating system boot from CD ROM of legacy 5 EFI USB Device 2 Priority is lower than the Legacy Boot Option thus unable to boot automatically 6 Fujitsu Virtual Floppy0 1 00 Tries legacy operating system boot from Floppy drive of the legacy 7 EFI Internal Shell Starts UEFI Shell 2 Flow of processing when boot processing success fails The flow of processing when success fails in the boot processing of the each operating system is shown as follows If booting of Windows Server 2008 which has UEFI Aware operating system is successful TABLE 3 5 Boot success of Windows Server 2008 UEFI Boot specifications Flow of start up 1 Windows Bo
529. ssages that may be displayed when C122 E178EN Series Message a problem occurs during operation and describes Reference how to respond to them PRIMEQUEST 2000 Describes REMCS service installation and C122 E180EN Series REMCS operation Installation Manual PRIMEQUEST 2000 Defines the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series related C122 E179EN Series Glossary terms and abbreviations Related manuals The following manuals relate to the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series You can access these manuals at the following site htto Awww fujitsu com global services computing server primequest Contact your sales representative for inquiries about the ServerView manuals Title Description Manual code ServerView Suite Describes how to install and start ServerView None ServerView Operations Operations Manager in a Windows environment Manager Quick Installation Windows ServerView Suite Describes how to install and start ServerView None ServerView Operations Operations Manager in a Linux environment Manager Quick Preface Title Description Manual code Installation Linux ServerView Suite Describes the installation procedure using None ServerView Installation ServerView Installation Manager Manager ServerView Suite Provides an overview of server monitoring using None ServerView Operations ServerView Operations Manager and describes Manager Server the user interface of ServerView Operat
530. st Window at the time of booting the Set Legacy NET Drive Order menu is shown below Information of network port is displayed on the window Moreover when Disable is displayed for the NET Drive N it indicates that booting function of NET Drive N is disable FIGURE 3 63 Display example of the Set Legacy NET Drive Order menu if 1 set Legacy NET Drive Order ho Ki 1 Page information display Displayed as Set Legacy NET Drive Order 2 Menu selection Items shown in TABLE 3 66 Display contents of menu selection are displayed UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 66 Display contents of menu selection Items Description NET Drive N Transited to order change of the NET boot When this item is N O 1 executed pop up window is displayed Change method is explained in detail in the ll Change in priority order Set Legacy NET Drive Order which is described afterwards Commit Changes and Exit Comes out from the menu after saving the setting changed contents Discard Changes and Exit Comes out from the menu after cancelling the setting changed contents 3 Operation help display Explanation of the operation key s shown in TABLE 3 67 Display content of Operation Help Display is displayed TABLE 3 67 Display content of Operation Help Display Item Explanation t Move Highlight Moves the cursor in up and down directions lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects
531. st level 2nd level Privileges Remarks bar Admin Operator User CE Security Certificate Create RW N A N A N A Creates a selfsigned Selfsigned certificate Certificate SSH SSH Server RW N A N A N A Creates a private key Key for the SSH server Remote RW N A N A N A Server Management Access RW N A N A N A Sets the IP filtering that Control permits connections Alarm E mail RW N A N A N A Maintenance Firmware Update Unified RW N A N A RW Performs a batch Firmware update Update Backup Restor Backs up and restores e setting information Configuration Backup Rest RW N A N A RW ore MMB Configuratio n Backup Rest RW N A N A RW ore BIOS Configuratio n Maintenance RW N A N A RW Performs maintenance Wizard through a wizard REMCS REMCS RW N A N A RW Detailed RW N A N A RW Setup MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 2 System Menu for PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E In System menu it is possible to display and set the status of all the hardware components in the PRIMEQUEST 2400E and PRIMEQUEST 2800E system A display and a set item of System menu are different in PRIMEQUEST 2800B Refer to Chapter 1 7 for details Remarks If Read Error is displayed for Part Number and Serial Number on MMB Web UI contents area and information area confirm the problem by referring to 11 2 Troubleshooting of PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN If the error could
532. status of the SB On On status Standby Standby status Home Displays whether SB is at Home status or not Yes Home status No Not a Home status Part Number Displays the part number of the SB Serial Number Displays the serial number of the SB MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Location LED Indicates the display status of the Location LED The display status consists of the following conditions On The light is on Off The light is off On Off and blinking of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking the respective On Off Blink buttons CPUs CPU 0 Status Displays the status of the CPU CPU 1 gt OK Not present KR Disabled Warning Failed Configuration error Unknown Core Max Core Displays Normal number of cores number maximum number of cores number Indicates the degeneracy status of the core Maximum number of cores also includes the number of Disable cores Model Displays the product name of the CPU Stepping Displays the version number of the CPU Part Number Displays the part number of the CPU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the CPU DIMMs DIMM 0A0 Status Displays the status of the DIMM DIMM 1D5 OK s Not present r Warning Uncorrectable error S Disabled Configuration error Degraded Configuration KR Unknown Size Displays the size of the DIMM 8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB
533. t 66 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 1 of PCl_Box 0 Slot 67 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 2 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 68 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 3 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 69 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 4 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 70 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 5 of PCI _Box 0 Slot 71 OpDROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 6 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 72 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 7 of PCI _Box 0 Slot 73 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 8 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 74 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 9 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 75 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Appendix A List of Setting Items Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Disabled slot 10 of PCl_Box 0 Slot 76 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 11 of PCI_Box 0 Slot 81 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0 of PCI_Box 1 Slot 82 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 1 of PCl_Box 1 Slot 83 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Dis
534. t Setup window Power Saving can be set in the system Power Saving can be set only when the Power save Control as system is Enable When the System Power Save setting is Disable then the display of this screen is shown as gray and cannot be set FIGURE 1 109 Power management Setup window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMIB 0 Part Number MCF3AC111 FU ITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Power Management Setup Click the Apply Button to apply all changes o Normal Fe ERE sin TABLE 1 153 Display Items and Set Items of Power Management Setup Window Items Description Power Control Status Displays the operating state of power control status of systemn Normal Normal operating state Shows that the operating rate suppression function for limitation of the electric power consumption is not working Power Saving Shows that the operating rate is being suppressed Power save Grace Period Sets shutdown waiting time in Power Save Grace Period System when the Limit threshold is exceeded Specified in the range of 0 99 minutes MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Shows a valid item when Power Save Control of system is Enable and shows gray color when Disable Default is 5 minutes Action reaching Power Executes the operation setting in the system after the Limit threshold excess
535. t hostname Permitted Sets the MMB host name show hostname Permitted Displays the MMB host name set gateway Permitted Sets the gateway address set gateway_ipv6 Permitted Sets the IPv6 gateway address show gateway Permitted Displays the gateway address show network Permitted Displays the management LAN interface show gateway_ipv6 Permitted Displays the IPv6 gateway address set http Permitted Sets whether to enable http service set https Permitted Sets whether to enable https service set ssh Permitted Sets whether to enable ssh service set telnet Permitted Sets whether to enable telnet service show http Permitted Displays the http service enabling setting show https Permitted Displays the https service enabling setting show ssh Permitted Displays the ssh service enabling setting show telnet Permitted Displays the telnet service enabling setting set http_port Permitted Sets the http port number set httos_port Permitted Sets the https port number set ssh_port Permitted Sets the ssh port number set telnet_port Permitted Sets the telnet port number show hip port Permitted Displays the http port number show https_port Permitted Displays the https port number show ssh_port Permitted Displays the ssh port number show telnet_port Permitted Displays the telnet port number clear access_control Permitted Clears the access control setting show access_control Permitted Displays the access control se
536. t monitoring is a function of ServerView and the Boot Watchdog Timeout time is set and the monitoring is started on the screen of ServerView However if the timeout time of Boot Watchdog is mistaken and short time is set on the ServerView window there is timeout before the start of the ServerView that stops the timer There is a possibility that the problem such as repeating the reboot might occur If this problem occurs since the ServerView does not start Boot Watchdog cannot MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description be cancelled without displaying the ServerView window that provides the Boot Watchdog function When such problem occurs if this check box is selected Boot Watchdog can be cancelled without ServerView Remarks After setting the Cancel Boot Watchdog it is necessary to reset the Boot Watchdog in Server View Default setting is OFF Without retaining the status if the setting is On and the Apply button is clicked Boot Watchdog is cancelled TABLE 1 156 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Window Buttons Buttons Description Apply Sets the information if Number of Restart Tries Action after exceeding Restart tries are specified If Cancel Boot Watchdog is selected as On Boot Watchdog is cancelled Cancel Does not set the information and returns to the original state 1 Menu Operation System ASR Control 2 Window Operations 1
537. t name LOCAL indicates MMB referred as NTP Server Server providing internal clock to other computers trough ntp protocol refid st Indicates from where remote synchronizes the time When it is not clear 0 0 0 0 A number showing the level of server Generally as this number gets larger the reliability of time gets declined t Type of remote server 1 Local server Acquisition of internal clock of MMB This type is considered only when remote is LOCAL u Unicast server Executes time request for the remote from MMB and acquires the transmitted time when Elapsed time from the time when packet is received for the last time from remote Unit seconds poll Interval to acquire time from remote Unit seconds reach Flag of failure and success of time acquisition of past 8 times Octal numeral expression 2 3 30 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations The result of failure and success of time acquisition of past eight times is expressed in 8 bits 0 Failure 1 Success and it is octal numeral expression Whenever time is acquired bits are shifted to the left the right most bit is the latest result of acquisition For example when this value is 356 8 11 101 110 2 the latest acquisition among past eight acquisition results and fourth acquisition failed If the next time acquisition succeeds the value becomes 335 8 11 011 101 2 delay
538. t page of Boot Manager a Change in Priority Level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order The changes of boot order are executed according to the following procedure 1 On the window as shown in FIGURE 3 59 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 1 place the cursor on ATAPI CDROM Drive N for which device can be changed Select ATAPI CDROM Drive 00 on FIGURE 3 59 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 1 FIGURE 3 59 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 1 Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 Press Enter key Pop window showed in FIGURE 3 60 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 is displayed UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 60 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 3 Place the curser on the boot option which is to be set in the ATAPI CDROM Drive N In the FIGURE 3 60 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 boot option with respect to ATAPI CDROM 00 is set 4 Press Enter key and in the FIGURE 3 60 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 2 change the boot option of ATAPI CDROM Drive 00 from Optiarc DVD RW AD 7543C1 U1 to Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO01 00 FIGURE 3 61 Change in priority level Set Legacy CD ROM Drive Order 3 is an example of the window when the priority level of the DVD CD is interchanged When the
539. ten with new private key Are you sure _ 00465 A new Key and a CSR are generated successfully To use the new Key click OK button E_00012 One or more errors occurred while setting E_00018 Information acquisition failed For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN O Export Key CSR window You can export a secret key or CSR certificate signing request stored on the MMB from the Export Key CSR window Remarks For security reasons be careful with the storage of a secret key MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Also you need this secret key to use the electronic certificate for the key We recommend you create a backup of the secret key FIGURE 1 79 Export Key CSR window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB40 Part Number MCXXXXXXX fra Serial Number E Status Zeg d System Partire A chrenest anon Manira Gm gt Netwock Coafigration gt SSL gt Export Key CSR Export Key CSR Help To export the private key cick the Expect Key Button To export the CSR cEck the Export CSR Button IT Spe Key Export CSR TABLE 1 110 Buttons in the Export Key CSR window Buttons Description Export Key Exports the secret key Export CSR Exports the CSR 1 Menu Operation Network Configuration SSL Export Key CSR 2 Window Operations Exporting the secret key 1 Click the Export Key button A dialog box
540. terface Operations FIGURE 1 28 IOU x Window 3 Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMBr1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number aaa aain a Sate meee Status Normal Partition User Administration Network nfipuration Maimtenar g gt System gt IOU gt IOU 1 IOU 1 PCI Express Slots i us vi Slot 0 Standby Not present 1 Standby Not present 2 Standby Jo Unknown Unknown 3 Standby Io Unknown Unknown PCTeSW ecSW St Le Wan PCIeSW I Les 1 94 i i 3 04 3 56 V E E P a P P D D D P D E D z d D P0 9V_PCIEX 0 0 82 0 98 V 1 66 1 94 V P0 9V_PCIEX 1 0 82 0 98 V Status Clear TABLE 1 45 Display Items and Setting Items in IOU x Window Items Description Board Information Type Displays types of IOUs s IOU_10GbE IOU_1GbE Status Displays status of the IOU OK Not present i Warning Degraded Failed Power Status Displays the power status of the IOU N On Standby Part Number Displays the part number of the IOU Serial Number Displays the serial number of the IOU Location LED Shows the display status of the Location LED Following are the display status On During ON MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description Off During OFF On Off of the Location LED can be controlled by clicking On Off button On board LAN LAN Displays the LAN number MAC Address Displays the MAC Address for GbE that i
541. the item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager TABLE 3 68 Display Content of Operation Help Display When Pop up Window Appears shows the display contents when the pop up window appears TABLE 3 68 Display Content of Operation Help Display When Pop up Window Appears Item Explanation t Move Highlight Moves the cursor in up and down directions lt Enter gt Complete Entry Selects the item Esc Exit Entry Close the pop up window E Change of priority level Set Legacy NET Drive Order Boot order is changed in the following sequence 1 Place the cursor on NET Drive N which wants to change the device on the screen shown in FIGURE 3 64 Change Set Legacy NET Drive Order 1 of priority level In FIGURE 3 64 Change Set Legacy NET Drive Order 1 of priority level NET Drive 00 has been selected UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 64 Change Set Legacy NET Drive Order 1 of priority level et Legacy NET Drive Order 2 Press the Enter key A pop up window shown in FIGURE 3 65 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 2 appears FIGURE 3 65 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 2 et Legacy NET Dri UEFI Menu Operations 3 Place the cursor on the boot option which is to be set in NET Drive N In FIGURE 3 65 Change of Priority Level Set Legacy NET Drive Order 2 the boot option is set in NET Drive 00 4
542. the operating conditions of ntp Remarks Support of IPv4 IPv6 Privilege All 1 Input format show ntpq 2 Option None 3 Usage example show ntpq remote refid st t when poll reach delay offset jitter 10 23 4 3 10 0 50 32 4 u 882 1024 377 0 941 0 154 0 284 10 49 51 3 INIT 16u 1024 0 0 000 0 000 0 000 LOCAL 0 LOCL 5 23h 64 0 0 000 0 000 0 000 TABLE 2 8 Output Items of show ntpq Item Description seconds Symbols on the top of remote Meanings of the symbols displayed on the top of a remote are listed below Blank reject It is not referred when request is not attained or the distance is far the period for to fro communication to server is more than 16 x falsetick The time acquired from all other remote servers registered in MMB deviates The value of jitter is deviated more than the allowance range of deviation as compared to the time acquired from more than two remotes Therefore it was excluded from the reference list Falsetick cannot be detected when all the clocks are off outlyer It is not referred because jitter value of this remote is greater than offset of remote during the current synchronization candidate Can be synchronized any time selected It is possible to synchronize but as the distance is far the to fro communication period of the server is more than 1 second it is departed from candidate sys peer Synchronizing remote Hos
543. ting schedule can be changed The window items of Add Schedule window and Edit Schedule window are common In this section an explanation is given by using the Add Schedule window FIGURE 1 106 Schedule List Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt Schedule gt Schedule List Add Schedule Input a schedule then click the Apply button to take effect O Weekly O Sun Wed O Sat SC To Jen Monthly From Jan To Jan sl On Time Hour 0 l n e Of Time Hour 0 Min D el MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations TABLE 1 147 Display Items and Set Items of Add Schedule Window Items Description Type Select the types of schedule to be set in the syetm Daily Select when you want to execute every day Weekly Select when you want to execute every week Monthly Select when you want to execute every month Special Select when you want to execute on a particular day every year The useful range of Special becomes only a specified day If the schedule overlaps on the same day it is processed according to the following priority order Special gt Monthly gt Weekly gt Daily By default it is not selected Pattern Specify the schedule pattern corr
544. tion Status Clear Clears the error message of the disk unit When the Status Clear button is clicked the error status of the disk unit will be cleared and it can be specified so that the disk unit can be used again at the time of the next reboot When an error is detected again at the time of re boot the error status of the disk unit would be recorded again 1 Menu Operation System DU DU x 2 Window Operations MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 Click the Status Clear button A confirmation dialogue box is displayed 2 Click the OK button to clear the error message and click the Cancel when you do not want to clear the error status of the disk unit Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message 1 00029 Status Clear completed E 00123 Failed to clear the status For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 16 PCl_Box Menu The PCI_Box x window displays the status of the PCI_Box connected with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series FIGURE 1 30 IPC Bol Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 0000000001 Status Normal Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt PCI_Box gt PCI_Box 0 PCI_Box 0 A Click the Status Clear button to clear th
545. tion Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MIMIB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FU ITSU Serial Number Status Normal User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout Partition gt Partition 0 gt Information a a Information a d z PQ2800 09 P0 a Standby Power OF 30 30 64GB TABLE 1 76 Display Items of Information Window Items Description Partition Name Displays the name given to the partition _ __ _ _ _ Power Status Displays the power status of the partition On Standby MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description System Progress Dispiays the progress status of partition Power Off The power supply for partition has been cut Power On In Progress The partition power on is in progress Reset The partition is being reset EFI The UEFI menu screen is displayed Boot Operating system is being booted OS Running operating system is operating OS Shutdown operating system is shutting down Panic Panic Only RHEL Power Off In Progress The partition power off is in progress Fatal Is stopping Dumping It is a dumping output Halt It is halting Stop Error It is a stop error Remarks If the SVAS is not installed the display does not change to Operating System Running even if the operating system is actually operating Also operating system Shutdown Panic Stop Error whi
546. tion displayed as Change the order FIGURE 3 45 Change Window of Priority Order Change Boot Order 1 Change Boot Order 2 Press Enter key Pop up window shown in FIGURE 3 46 Change Window of Priority Order Change Boot Order 2 appears UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 46 Change Window of Priority Order Change Boot Order 2 Change Boot Order Windows Boot Manager 7 LEE 3 Place the cursor to boot option for which order is changed 4 Change the priority order e Press key to raise the priority order e Press key to lowered the priority order 5 Exit from Pop up window after changes is done e Press Enter key when you want to exit by saving the changes of configuration e Press Esc key when you want to exit by discarding the changes of configuration FIGURE 3 47 Windows after setting of priority level is changed Change Boot Order 3 Change Boot 0 UEFI Menu Operations 6 To exit from the menu after saving the changes select Commit Changes and Exit and then press Enter key To exit from this menu without saving the changes select Discard Changes and Exit and then press Enter key Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order Menu When multiple DVD CD drive exists the Set Legacy DVD CD ROM Drive Order menu sets the priority level of the startup device Window at the time of startup of Set Legacy Floppy Drive Order menu is as follows The information on floppy d
547. tion is not defined For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The operation method in the Partition Configuration window is described as follows O Set Partition Name Button The partition name is entered in each cell of Partition Name and when Set Partition Name button is clicked the name for each partition is set O Add SB IOU to Partition Window When the partition is selected by using radio button of Partition Configuration window and when Add Unit button is clicked Add SB IOU to Partition window appears MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 47 Add SB IOU to Partition Window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number u i Status v arning Add SB IOU xPAR to Partition Select an SB or IOU or xPAR to add to the partition 3 then click the Apply Button Free SBIOUxPAR Status Note OxPAR 9 OK OxPAR 10 OK Go i i bt D Remarks Radio button is attached for the display of each Free SB and IOU and it is not possible to select more than one at the same time In case of eight Socket Model check whether SB in which one CPU can be mounted is not mounted in the partitions of two or more SBs Only when one partition is configured by one SB one CPU can be mounted for one SB When one partition is configured by multiple SBs
548. tion of Change Attempt Order menu 3 4 10 Memory Configuration menu In Memory Configuration menu memory related settings are done Changes in this menu are enabled after the system is reset UEFI Menu Operations FIGURE 3 28 Display Example of Memory Configuration Menu WD kee am Ro poo eee e The following section shows the window display example of Memory Configuration menu 1 Page information display Displayed as Memory Configuration 2 Menu selection Items are shown in the TABLE 3 39 Display Contents of Menu Selection are shown in the menu TABLE 3 39 Display Contents of Menu Selection Item Description DIMM Speed 1 Sets the operating speed of memory module e Performance Mode Sets maximum possible operating frequency for this mode Normal Mode Sets the maximum possible operating frequency that can be operated by 1 35V voltage for this mode Default setting is Normal mode Patrol Scrub 1 Scans memory module at regular interval If CE is detected the function which writes back the corrected data is enabled disabled Disabled Enabled Default setting is Enabled Refresh Rate Sets the refresh rate of the memory Auto WEI Default setting is Auto Commit Changes and Exit Saves the changed contents and exits from this menu Discard Changes and Exit Cancels the changed contents and exits from this menu 3 Oper
549. titions specified Specifies Partition numbers by delimiting with comma Specifies with the range of partition number 3 Usage example None 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified parameter is invalid The specified partition number is invalid Unable to power on the partition d due to CPU mismatch between SBs Unable to power on the partition d due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode Unable to power on due to mismatch between supply voltage and input voltage Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal DIMM composition Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal SB composition Unable to power on the partition d due to abnormal VRM composition Unable to power on the partition d Command Failed Code 0x 04X 0x 02X Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Unable to execute this command because the system is under maintenance Unable to execute this command because the Partition x is under maintenance The Power On failed because of switching the Home SB Please execute it after a while again Unable to power on the Partition fn because you have not authority to operate this partition Unable to power on the partition s because the partition which does not have authority to you is included in the specified parameter
550. to be displayed Select All or Specified by Radio button All Filtering is not done by Source Specified Filtering of Source unit can be set Select the Source to be displayed Default setting is All Select the target unit to be displayed Select All or Specified by Radio button All Filtering is not done by Unit Specified Filtering of Unit can be set Select the Source to be displayed Default setting is All Specifies either display by new order or display by old order by using the radio button New event first 1 7 3 1 7 4 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description i Old event first The default setting is New event first Start Date Time Specifies either display from recent event or specify the time by using the radio button First event Display by recent event Specified Time Specify the time In case of Specified Time enter the Start Date and Time The default setting is First event End Date Time Specifies either display till last event or specify the time by using the radio button Last event Display till Last event Specified Time Specify the time In case of Specified Time enter the End Date and Time The default setting is Last event Number of events to display Specifies the number of log to be displayed As for the denominator display the total number of events that are logged A maximum of 3000 events can be specified The default setti
551. ts the https port number set ssh_port Sets the ssh port number set telnet_port Sets the telnet port number show http_port Permitted Displays the http port number show https_port Permitted Displays the https port number show ssh_port Permitted Displays the ssh port number show telnet_port Permitted Displays the telnet port number clear access_control Clears the access control setting show access_control Displays the access control setting clear ssh_key Permitted Clears the SSH public key download ssh_key Permitted Downloads the SSH public key ping Permitted Pings the target show ntpq Permitted NTP inquiry ntpq p executed Account management passwd Permitted Changes a password who Permitted Displays the login user Firmware update update ALL Batch updates the firmware new MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Permitted Displays the active MMB exit Permitted Logs out from the MMB help Permitted Help information Command termination code display show exit_code Permitted Displays the termination code for the last command executed Firmware revision status version check show update_status Displays the batch firmware update progress Network survey commands netck traceroute Permitted Displays a list of network routes netck arptbl Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck arping Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address MMB CLI Command Lin
552. tting clear ssh_key Clears the SSH public key download ssh_key Downloads the SSH public key ping Permitted Pings the target show ntpq Permitted NTP inquiry ntpq p executed Account management passwd Permitted Changes a password who Permitted Displays the login user Firmware update update ALL Permitted Batch updates the firmware new MMB configuration and other set active_mmb Permitted Sets the active MMB show active_mmb Permitted Displays the active MMB exit Permitted Logs out from the MMB help Permitted Help information Command termination code display MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations Command Administrator Outline show exit_code Permitted Displays the termination code for the last command executed Firmware revision status version check show update_status Permitted Displays the batch firmware update progress Network survey commands netck traceroute Permitted Displays a list of network routes netck arptbl Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck arping Permitted Displays the physical Ethernet address netck ifconfig Permitted Displays the network environment setup status netck stat Permitted Displays a list of port numbers being used REMCS related commands set maintenance_ip Permitted Sets the REMCS network show maintenance_ip Permitted Displays the REMCS network setting DR related
553. tting items of Power Control Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Power Control Window TABLE A 6 Setting Items of Power Control Window Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Power None e Power On Control e Power Off e Power Cycle e Reset e NMI e Force Power Off sadump e Not Specified Force Power Off Time 1 9Minutes can be Off Delay specified in case of ON Boot No Override e No Override Selector e Force boot into EFI Boot Manager e Force PXE iSCSI e Force boot from DVD Appendix A List of Setting Items A 1 7 Setting Items of Schedule Control Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Schedule Control Window TABLE A 7 Setting Items of Schedule Control Window Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Schedule Off e On Control e Off A 1 8 Setting Items of Add Schedule Edit User Window The following table lists the initial value and the value that can be set for the setting items of Add Schedule Edit User Window TABLE A 8 Setting Items of Add Schedule Edit User Window Setting Initial value Value that can be set Remarks items Partition The partition defined with smallest number Type Not selected e Daily e Weekly e Monthly e Special Pattern Weekly
554. tton A confirmation dialog box appears 2 Click OK button The SB or IOU will be incorporated 3 Click the Apply or Cancel button Return to Partition Configuration window Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message E_00045 Free node doesn t exist E 00112 Unable to add the specified SB aa to the partition due to CPU mismatch between SBs E 00424 Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to CPU composition abnormal E 00425 Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to DIMM composition abnormal E 00490 Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode W_00505 Unable to set configuration because the power on off is processing Please execute it after a while again E 00519 Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to SB composition abnormal E_00524 Unable to add the specified SB to the partition due to VRM composition abnormal For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN When multiple errors are detected multiple errors are displayed in the dialog box O Remove SB IOU from Partition Window Select the partition by using radio button of Partition Configuration window and when Remove button is clicked Remove SB IOU from Partition window appears MMB Web UI Web U
555. tton the details of corresponding event are displayed on System Event Log Detail window 1 Menu Operation System System Event Log 2 Window Operations When the event data saved in system event log is downloaded if the system event log collected in advance does not exist 1 When you click Download button a message showing _00417 Are you sure is displayed Click OK button 2 The collection of system event log information is starts automatically Progress window appears 3 System Event Log Collect window appears and the link to event data which is collected is displayed with date information When you click the link dialog box appears By specifying the file name and path name event data can be downloaded to the PC which displays Web UI When the event data saved in system event log is downloaded if the system event log which is collected in advance exists 1 When you click Download button a message showing I_00417 Are you sure is displayed Click OK button 2 System Event Log Collect window appears and the link to system event log information collected in advance is displayed 3 Click Collect button to collect the latest system event log A message showing _00417 Are you sure is displayed Click OK button Progress window appears while the system event log information is collected 4 System Event Log Collect window appears and the link to event data which
556. tus Clear Clears the status of the SB MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 1 7 15 IOU Menu The IOU menu includes the following menus for each IOU IOU 0 IOU 3 The menu is not displayed for the IOU which is not installed Since the window and the operating method are same for each menu only one menu is described here O lOU x Window IOU x window displays the status of the IOU installed in IOU x slot In addition IOU can be set FIGURE 1 119 IOU x Window 1 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FU Serial Number Sua Status Normal IOU 0 Click the Status Clear button to clear the status Board Information IOU_1GbE OK Standby CA07603 D013 A3 PP135200MH on Or On board LAN LAN MAC Address 0 Unknown 1 Unknown DU connection peice EISEN bo o NS PCI Express Slots a s MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 120 IOU x Window 2 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3AC111 whe FUJITSU Serial Number E Status Normal vk Configuration Maintenance Lj z 10U 0 L a PCI Express Slots e a SHE Slot Ste Link Va a 8 Standby OK a Standby OK D Standby Not present a Standby Not present a a a a LJ L a Voltage g a 3 C P3 3V P1 8V_PCIEX J P1 8V_PCIE San sal KH gt FIGURE 1 121 IOU x Window 3 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B _ Part Number MCF3
557. u JEN IN e e e Se 1 Page information display Change Attempt Order Displayed with Change Attempt Order 2 Menu selection Selection menu is shown in TABLE 3 37 Display contents of Menu selection UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 37 Display contents of Menu selection ltem Change Attempt Order Display contents Priority level can be raised with Key after selecting Attempt xxxx xxxx displays the name set in iSCSI Attempt Name of 3 4 9 2 Attempt Configuration Menu Commit Changes and Exit Saves the changed contents and exits from this menu Discard Changes and Exit Cancels the changed contents and exits from this menu 3 Operation help display The help for operations mentioned on this page is shown in the TABLE 3 38 Display Contents of Operation Help Display TABLE 3 38 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 4 9 iSCSI Configuration menu Remarks Table 3 39 Display Contents of Operation Help Display and the contents displayed differ as FIGURE 3 27 Display example of Change Attempt Order Menu is the display example window after selecting Attempt Contents displayed in TABLE 3 38 Display Contents of Operation Help Display are displayed immediately after the activa
558. uely allocated in manufacturer of card For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN Device ID Displays the Device ID of the PCI Card Remarks ID uniquely allocated in device of manufacturer For details of the ID see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175EN PCleSW PCleSW Displays the number of PCleSW Status Displays the status of PCleSW MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Items Description OK Warning Failed EE EE Sensor Displays the Voltage sensor type P1 8VL 1 P1 0VL 1 P2 5VL 2 P1 2VL 2 2 PO 8VL 2 P0 67VL 2 P3 3V 3 P1 8V_PCIEX 0 1 P1 8V_PCIEX 1 1 P1 8V 2 P0 9V_PCIEX 0 3 PO 9V_PCIEX 1 3 1 IOUL 2 IOUF 3 IOUL IOUF commonness Voltage Displays the current power voltage Threshold Warning Lower and upper limits of the warning level voltage Low High l Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places Critical Lower and upper limits of the critical level voltage Low High Displays when the threshold is not set Displays the power voltage in the last two decimal places TABLE 1 46 Button of IOB x Screen Buttons Description On Turns on the Location LED by clicking On button Off Turns off the Location LED by clicking Off button Status Clear Cl
559. ues that can be set for Setting Items on PCl_Box OpROM Scan Configuration window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Slot 20 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 2of IOU 1 Slot 21 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 30f IOU 1 Slot 33 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for DU 1 Slot 0 DU Disabled Slot 34 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0 of IOU 2 Slot 35 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 10f IOU 2 Slot 36 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 2of IOU 2 Slot 37 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 30f IOU 2 Slot 49 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for DU 1 Slot 1 DU Disabled Slot 50 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0of IOU 3 Slot 51 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 10f IOU 3 Slot 52 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 20f IOU 3 Slot 53 ODROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 30f IOU 3 Setting Items on PCl_Box OpROM Scan Configuration TABLE A 38 Setting Items of PClL_Box OpROM Scan Configuration Window Setting Item Initial Value Setting Value Remarks Slot 65 OpROM Disabled Enabled Settings for PCI Express Disabled slot 0 of PCI_Box 0 Slo
560. ult f set active_mmb 0 1 quiet set maintenance_ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt lt gateway address gt lt smtp address gt set sysconf power_feed_mode single dual quiet set sysconf power_restoration_policy on off restore sync quiet set sysconf power_on_delay lt time gt quiet set sysconf altitude lt altitude gt set sysconf psu_redundant_mode redundant non_redundant quiet show active_mmb date timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq update_status firmware_version exit_code sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt update ALL lt url gt force quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 3 For Operator privilege help power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force power on partition all lt partition gt
561. usaeseenecessaeseensesssaesnensesesneseetsesseas TABLE 2 2 MMB CLI commands Administrator A vi D geg TABLE 2 3 MMB CLI commands Operator EE TABLE 2 4 MMB CLI commands Partition COpoerator ENEE 274 TABLE 2 5 MMB CLI commands User iseenest an aeee eE a anaE ee rea ana ear eE aens 277 TABLE Z6 Re Reuler GE 279 TABLE 2 7 Parameter Specification rane ssesecessssesecesessssesesesesesseaesesesssseaeeeseeesseateesseasasasensesesacatensesaeseasensesasatatenseseeaeateneeseeatanenees 281 TABLE 2 8 Output Items of show ntpq ues Zog we ws 326 TABLE 2 9 MMB CLI commands Administrator ENEE 343 TABLE 2 10 MMB CLI commands Operator ENEE 344 TABLE2 1 1 MMB GUicommands leet 207 geenesgeeie eet ere iere eet es 345 TABLE 212 MMB CLI commands GE cise ceeded ee 346 Preface TABLE 3 1 Display item of menu SCICCHON ececeeseeececseeeseseceseeeseeeeeceesesnecsesseseeeeceusseseeeseessseseeeeeensueseeeeseesneseenseseeneseenseseneesnenseneees TABLE 3 2 Display Items on Operation Help Diet ENEE TABLE 3 3 Initial state of Defaull e ee EE EENEG SEENEN NEEN EEN TABLE 3 4 Flow of startup by boot specification of UEFI and boot specification of legacy BIOS TABLE 3 5 Boot success of Windows Server 2008 EE TABLE 3 6 Boot failure of Windows Server 2008 UEFI Boot success of EFI USB Devcel ENEE TABLE 3 7 If boot of Windows Boot Manager EFI Network Device and EFI USB Device fails or if booted from Legacy Floppy 364 TABLE 3 8 If UEFI aware ope
562. ut at the time of disable Default value is the maximum value of each model TABLE 1 33 System Setup window button Buttons Description Apply When items such as Power Feed Mode and Power Restore Policy are specified and Apply button is clicked the information is set Cancel When Cancel button is clicked returns to the original status without setting the changed or input items 1 Menu Operation MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations System System Setup 2 Window Operations Specify the items such as Power Feed Mode and Power Restoration Policy and click on the Apply button Respective information is set Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed E 00100 Failed to set the System Setup W_00426 Invalid values specified For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 1 2 8 System Power Control window In System Power Control window power of the entire PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system can be controlled Remarks Please shutdown the OS for the partition in which Windows is installed In case of emergency such as no response from the system cut the power supply using Power Off Force Power Off of MMB In case of following condition confirm the contents by referring to 11 2 Troubleshoot
563. uthentication level Then click the Apply button This sets the entered information Sending a test trap 1 Click the Test Trap button This sends a test trap Message The following table lists the messages displayed in this window Message Number Message _ 00013 Setting completed For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN LJ SNMP v3 Configuration window You can set a unique Engine ID and users for SNMP v3 in the SNMP v3 Configuration window You can register a maximum of 16 users for SNMP v3 The window displays the user names of registered users Remarks If you change the Engine ID or IP address you need to reconfigure all the settings for the users set for SNMP v3 access The changes for the specified users take effect only after the SNMP Service is stopped and restarted For this reason clicking the Apply button temporarily stops SNMP Service and then automatically restarts it MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 76 SNMP v3 Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Activo MMBE0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUjiTSU Sorial Namber A k J Nermal Mantenan gt Network Configuration gt SNMP Coefiguration gt SNMPv3 Configuration SNMP v3 Configuration Click the Apply Button to apply all changes Apply Cancel TABLE 1 106 Setting and display items in the SNMP v3 Configu
564. v6 auto lt ip address gt lt prefix gt set hostname lt hostname gt lt domain name gt set maintenance_ip lt ip address gt lt netmask gt lt gateway address gt lt smtp address gt set sysconf power_feed_mode single dual quiet set sysconf power_restoration_policy on off restore sync quiet set sysconf power_on_delay lt time gt quiet set sysconf altitude lt altitude gt set sysconf psu_redundant_mode redundant non_redundant quiet set mmbcontrol reset 0 1 quiet set mmbcontrol switch_over quiet set reserved_sb lt SB gt lt partition gt quiet set snmp sys_location lt location gt quiet set snmp sys_contact lt concat gt quiet set snmp community lt community gt lt ip or mask gt 1 2 ro rw quiet set snmp trap lt community gt lt ip gt 1 2 quiet set snmp test_trap quiet show access_control active_mmb date timezone gateway gateway ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network maintenance_ip ntpq sysconf power_feed_mode sysconf power_restoration_policy sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage reserved_sb user_list update_status firmware_version exit_code snmp sys_location snmp sys_contact snmp community snmp trap show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partit
565. ve authority to you is included in the specified parameter The specified parameter is invalid Specified host does NOT respond power on Turn on the power supply of the entire system or the specified partition MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations When the partition specified by the parameter is not configured the partition which is not configured is ignored When the power supply for the specified partition is already turned on processing for such partitions is not done Partition Operator can operate only the partition to be managed When the parameter which contains the partitions other than those to be managed is specified an error message is displayed and the specified partition cannot be operated Privilege Administrator Operator Partition Operator Only the partition to be managed 1 Input format power on partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt 2 Option Partition Turn on the power of the partition which specifies the partition number When there is no power supply to the chassis before turning on the power of the partition turn on the power supply of the chassis and then turn on the power supply of the specified partition This parameter is optional The default parameter is processed as the specified partition parameter Therefore it is necessary to specify the partition Partitions are specified as follows all All defined par
566. vice Set the followig options to Set the followig options to collaboration program collaboration program p SBx e ADD_POST r p SBx e ADD_POST r SUCCESS FAILURE Execute collaboration Execute collaboration programs in ascending programs in descending order of program file order of program file Dynamic deletion of SB Set the followig options to collaboration program p SBx e RM_PRE c x y m xxx kB n x y Execute collaboration programs in ascending order of program file names Success Fail Delete CPU SE and memory device Set the followig options to collaboration program Set the followig options to collaboration program p SBx e PM_POST r SUCCESS p SBx e PM_POST r FAILURE Execute collaboration programs in ascending Execute collaboration programs in descending order of program file order of program file Dynamic Reconfiguration Operation Dynamic addition of IOU Set the followig options to collaboration program p IOUx e ADD_PRE Execute collaboration programs in ascending order of program file names Success Failure Add PCI devices Set the followig options to Set the followig options to collaboration program collaboration program p IOUx e ADD_POST r p IOUx e ADD_POST r SUCCESS FAILURE Execute collaboration Execute collaboration programs in ascending programs in descending order of program fil
567. w ENEE 212 TABLE 1 126 Buttons in the Alarm E Mail Filtering Condition window TABLE 1 127 Buttons in the Backup BIOS Configuration wirdow we ee TABLE 1 128 Setting and display items in the Restore BIOS Configuration WINDOW D ENEE 218 TABLE 1 129 Buttons in the Restore BIOS Configuration Window 7 ENEE 218 TABLE 1 130 Status et Unit andis ICONS 3 0 wwe sear eatieanneseacniedinan dorama inane idrannawAiiannneaniad 222 TABLE 1 131 Items displayed in System Status Window EEN 222 Preface TABLE 1 132 Items displayed in System Event Log Wimdom ENEE 223 TABLE 1 133 Buttons on System Event Log Window ENEE 224 TABLE 1 134 Display and Setting Items on System Event Log Filtering Condition Wimdow ENEE 226 TABLE 1 135 System Events Log Filtering Condition Window Buttons TABLE 1 136 Display and Set Items of System Information window ENEE TABLE 1 137 Buttons on the System Information Window ENEE TABLE 1 138 Display Item of Firmware Information WiINdOW EEN TABLE 1 139 Display Items and Setting Items in System Setup Wimdw EEN 232 TABLE 1 140 System Setup window button ENEE TABLE 1 141 Display Items and Set Items of Power Control Window TABLE 1 142 Power Control Window BUttOIS ENEE TABLE 1 143 Display Items and Setting Items of Schedule Control Wind ENEE 238 TABLE 1 144 Schedule Control Window Buttons ENEE TABLE 1 145 Display Items and Set Items of Schedule List Window ENEE TABLE 1 1
568. which is operating inside the system and the information of the Firmware version with backup is displayed on the Firmware Information window MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations B ia G C 8 m 8 C 8 a 8 a d d A FIGURE 1 10 Firmware Information Window gt System gt Firmware Information Firmware Information BA13112 Current Firmware Version bank1 BA13112 BA13112 BA13112 BA13112 lv TABLE 1 31 Display Item of Firmware Information Window Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MIMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number 0000000001 Status N l Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout 5 Items Description Unified Firmware Version Latest version number of applied Firmware Current Firmware Unit Target unit mounted with Firmware is displayed SB n MMB 0 MMB 1 Firmware Type and Current version Active of Firmware are displayed BMC BIOS MMB Not present It shows that Unit is not mounted Gray color background is active bank Bank bone a bank2 of the memory that is operating now is displayed After start restart of the partition latest Firmware information is reflected in this display Version bank1 Firmware Version of bank1 is displayed Version display format Firmware maintains Version information in the following format s Ma
569. x Status Clear button 2 Window Operations 1 Specify as given below to clear the component Select Clear All Status to clear all the components Select Clear Specified Status to individually clear the error status of the components and check the Status Clear checkbox of the status of the components to be cleared Check the Clear Status of common parts check box to clear the common parts MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations 2 Click the Apply button The specified components are set to clear O Display when there is no CPU DIMM installed When there is no CPU or DIMM mounted the SB is not degraded from the partition and stops the Partition start At that time the following messages are displayed on the table of the composition display of CPU or DIMM respectively to make CPU or any DIMM easy to recognize not installed as follows by the deficit and the boldface character It is necessary to install at least one CPU in SB x In case of CPU It is necessary to install at least one DIMM set per one DIMM in SB x In case of DIMM FIGURE 1 25 SB x Window When there is no CPU DIMM Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 ei Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number Status Error Partition User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance gt System gt SB gt SB 2 SB 2 Click the Status Clear button to clear the status ard Information ___ CA07603 D001 AS PP131
570. x R 6 for Intel64 Linux RHEL6 Preface Formal product name Abbreviation Oracle Linux 6 x86_64 Oracle Linux Oracle Linux 6 VMware vSphere R 5 VMware vSphere 5 x VMware 5 VMware 5 x VMware R ESXi R 5 ESX ESX 5 ESX 5 x Novell R SUSE R LINUX Enterprise Server 11 Service Pack3 SLES11 SP3 Trademarks Notation Microsoft Windows and Windows Server are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Red Hat the Shadowman logo and JBoss are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the U S and other countries Celeron Celeron Inside Centrino Centrino Inside Core Inside Intel the Intel logo Intel Atom Intel Atom Inside Intel Core Intel Inside the Intel Inside logo Intel vPro Itanium Itanium Inside Pentium Pentium Inside the Rapid Start Technology logo vPro Inside Ultrabook Xeon and Xeon Inside are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd in Japan and is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp in the United States and other countries VMware is a trademark or registered trademark of VMware Inc in the United States and other countries Novell and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are trademarks of Novell Inc Xen is a trademark or registered trademark of Citrix S
571. xample When PCI Address Mode of partition 3 is displayed show partition pci_address_mode 3 current bus setting segment 4 Message The following table lists the messages which are displayed in this CLI For details of the messages see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The specified partition number is invalid The specified parameter is invalid Unable to execute this command on a standby MMB Failed to execute s command Failed to execute show partition command Partition x is not defined MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations 2 3 13 show timezone Displays timezone Privilege All 1 Input format show timezone 2 Option None 3 Usage example show timezone Timezone is set to Asia Tokyo 4 Message None 2 3 14 show gateway Displays the IP address of default gateway set to the Management LAN Interface Privilege All 1 Input format show gateway 2 Option None 3 Usage example show gateway Gateway Address 10 1 2 1 4 Message None 2 3 15 show gateway_ipv6 Displays the IP address of default gateway of IPv6 set to the Management LAN Interface Privilege All 1 Input format show gateway_ipv6 2 Option MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations None 3 Usage example show gateway_ipv6 Gateway Address fe80 1234 f3ff fe03 5666 4 Message None 2 3 16 show
572. xplained in following W Change in Priority Level Change Boot Order Commit Changes and Exit Exit from main menu after the changed contents of settings are saved Discard Changes and Exit Exit from main menu after the changed contents of settings are cancelled 3 Operation Help Display Description of operation key is shown in the TABLE 3 55 Display Contents of Operation Help Display UEFI Menu Operations TABLE 3 55 Display Contents of Operation Help Display Item Description t Move Highlight Moves cursor up and down lt Enter gt Select Entry Selects item Esc Exit Returns to 3 1 Front page of Boot Manager without saving changes of this menu The contents displayed when the Pop up Window appears are shown in TABLE 3 56 Display Contents of Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears TABLE 3 56 Display Contents of Operation Help Display when Pop up Window appears Item Description Move Selection Up Raise the boot priority level of boot option by 1 Move Selection Down Lower the boot priority level of boot option by 1 lt Enter gt Complete Entry Selects item Esc Exit Exit from Pop up Window E Change in Priority Level Change Boot Order The changes of boot order are executed according to the following procedure 1 As shown in FIGURE 3 45 Change Window of Priority Order Change Boot Order 1 place the cursor to boot op
573. y sysconf power_on_delay sysconf altitude sysconf psu_redundant_mode sysconf input_voltage show partition configuration all free lt partition gt lt partition gt show partition home name dynamic_partitioning memory_operation_mode memory_mirror_ras_mode pci_address_mode pci_express_mode lan_device_mode lt partition gt netck arptbl ifconfig stat traceroute lt ip gt arping lt ip gt update ALL lt url gt force quiet exit passwd USER ping c lt count gt lt ip address gt lt server name gt who help Example 3 For Operator privilege help power off partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt force power on partition all lt partition gt lt partition gt set partition dynamic_partitioning lt partition gt disable enable quiet set partition memory_operation_mode lt partition gt performance normal partial_mirror spare quiet set partition memory_mirror_ras_mode lt partition gt mirror_keep capacity_keep quiet set partition pci_address_mode lt partition gt bus segment quiet set partition pci_express_mode lt partition gt flexible fixed set partition lan_device_mode lt partition gt lt IOU gt wol_enable wol_disable device_disable quiet timezone gateway gateway_ipv6 http http_port https https_port ssh ssh_port telnet telnet_port ip ipv6 hostname network ma
574. y operated Redundant Non redundant When Power Feed Mode is Single it is by default Non Redundant When Power Feed Mode is Dual it is always Redundant System Power Save Control Sets enable disable for Power Saving function for entire system e Enable Disable Power Saving function supports only PSU_P 200V Default is Disable System Power Saving Threshold Sets the power consumption threshold Limit value of entire system Minimum value is 300W Maximum value is as shown below KR PRIMEQUEST 2400E 8640W S PRIMEQUEST 2800E B 8640W Setting is possible only when System Power Save Control is Enable gray out at the time of disable Default value is the maximum value of each model TABLE 1 140 System Setup window button Buttons Description Apply When items such as Power Feed Mode and Power Restore Policy are specified and Apply button is clicked the information is set Cancel When Cancel button is clicked returns to the original status without setting the changed or input items 1 Menu Operation System System Setup 2 Window Operations Specify the items such as Power Feed Mode and Power Restoration Policy and click on the Apply button Respective information is set Message This section describes the messages to be displayed on this window Message Number Message 1 7 7 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations
575. y the temperature sensors of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system SB SB 0 RW Displays the SB status SB 1 RW The menu is not SB 2 RW displayed for an SB 3 RW unmounted SB IOU IOU 0 RW Displays the IOU status IOU 1 RW The menu is not IOU 2 RW displayed for an IOU 3 RW unmounted IOU DU DU 0 RW Displays the DU status DU 1 RW The menu is not displayed for an MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Navigation bar 1st level 2nd level 3rd level Privileges Remarks unmounted DU PCI_Box If no PCI_Box is connected this menu is not displayed PCI_Box 0 RW Displays the PCI_Box PCI_Box 1 RW status PCI_Box 2 RW The menu is not PCI_Box 3 RW displayed for an unmounted PCI_Box OPL RW MMB MMB 0 RW Displays the MMB MMB 1 RW status and information Disk Enclosure Disk RW Enclosure x Partition Power Control RO Controls the partition power Schedule Schedule RO Sets scheduled Control operations Schedule List RO Sets the power on off schedule Console RO Sets Video Redirection Redirection Setup Remote Storage and Text Console Redirection IPv4 Console RO Setting for IPv4 Console Redirection Redirection Setup IPv6 Console RO Setting for IPv6 Console Redirection Redirection Setup Partition RO Changes the partition Configuration configuration SB RO IOU n RO PCI_Box n RO Reserved SB RO Defines a Reserved SB Configuration Power RO M
576. ys the power control of the partition Only the partition having the SB and IOU is displayed in this window The display window and display conditions are different depending on the model of PRIMEQUEST 2400E or PRIMEQUEST 2800E The partition that satisfies the following conditions is displayed in the correction 1 Partition with at least one SB and 2 Partition with at least one IOU and Remarks When the operating system supports ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface the power can be turned Off after the operating system is Shutdown by Power Off operation If ACPI is not supported power can be Off without the Shutdown of the operating system Moreover even if the operating system supports ACPI and applications running on the operating system are not supported sometimes power Off is not possible Since these depend on the specifications of the operating system and applications for details refer to the operating system and application specifications MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations FIGURE 1 38 Power Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active IMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX fra Serial Number SAY Status Normal gt Pretition gt Power Control Power Control Select n Power Control option for one ce more parions hen cick the Apply bumon to take effect o ee Ree No Ovemide si Oremde min Power OF Mot spactied LU a No Qvenide In case of Partition Operator privilege In case of mana
577. ystem 1 7 8 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations Message Number Message E 00142 Unable to power off the System E 00002 Command Failed E 00144 Unable to power off on the System E 00145 Unable to reset the System E 00146 Unable to generate an NMI interrupt in the System E_00143 Unable to forcibly power off the System E 00091 Force Power Off Delay setting failed E_00xxx Unable to power on the system due to CPU mismatch between SBs E 00154 Unable to power on due to mismatch between supply voltage and input voltage 100151 Unable to control system power because maintenance is in progress Release maintenance mode first E_00xxx Unable to power on the system due to CPU composition abnormal E_00xxx Unable to power on the system due to DIMM composition abnormal E_00xxx Unable to power on the system due to DIMM does not satisfy requirements of Mirror Mode W_00504 The Power On failed because of switching the Home SB Please execute it after a while again E_00xxx Unable to power on the system due to abnormal SB composition For details on the messages displayed on the window see PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Schedule Menu The Schedule menu has the Schedule Control and Schedule List windows This section describes the windows and the operation Note As mentioned below there may be a delay in t
578. ystems Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Other company names and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Trademark indications are omitted for some system and product names in this manual This manual uses the following fonts and symbols to express specific types of information Font or Meaning Example symbol italics Title of a manual that you should refer to See the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Installation Manual C122 E174EN Window names as well as the names of Click the OK button buttons tabs and drop down menus in windows are enclosed in brackets Notation for the CLI command line interface The following notation is used for commands Command syntax Command syntax is represented as follows Variables requiring the entry of a value are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt Optional elements are enclosed in brackets Options for optional keywords are grouped in stroke separated lists enclosed in brackets Options for required keywords are grouped in stroke separated lists enclosed in braces Command syntax is written in a box Preface Remarks The command output shown in the PDF manuals may include line feeds at places where there is no line feed symbol at the end of the line Notes on notations In this manual the Management Board and MMB firmware are abbreviated as MMB In this manu

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  MANUEL D`UTILISATION  Ferrari by Logic3 Scuderia R100  EA987FN－8（トレーラーカプラー）取扱説明書  Guide des associations2011/2013  User`s Manual - Community RTI Connext Users  Texas Instruments TMS320C642X User's Manual  Massive Floor lamp 36278/17/10  User Manual - Stoltronic  Télécharger ce fichier  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file